SYRIAC GRAMMAR, A COURSE OF EXERCISES, A CHRESTOMATHY, km A BRIEF LEXICOX, UHLEMANN'S SYßlAC GBAMMAU, TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN BY ENOOKl HUTCHINSON. WITH A COURSE OF EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR, CHRESTOMATHY AND BRIEF LEXICON PREPARED BY THE TRAl^SLATOR. NEW YORK: D. APPLETOX & CO., 346 & 348 BROADWAY. EDINBURGH: T. & J. CLARK, 38 GEORGE STREET. ^^ OP THE ÜKIVERSIT Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1855, By e. Hutchinson, in the Clerk's Office of the District Court for the Southern District of New York. AM/N TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE. The following translation was undertaken in accordance with the suggestion of several literary friends, and in view of an increasing desire among American students to become acquainted with a language in which the earliest and best version of the New Testament is generally admitted to have been made, and which is essentially the language spoken by our Saviour. Uhlemann's Grammar is acknowledged by all to be a manual of rare excellence ; and it is hoped that, in an English dress, it will be found to be well adapted to promote the progress of ori- ental philology in this country. Some of our helps of this kind, in the study of the Syriac, are too brief, and others are too volu- minous. Uhlemann has aimed lo present, within moderate lim- its, a work sufficiently extensive for ordinary purposes of instruc- tion. The translator has endeavored to give as literal a transla- tion as is compatible with perspicuity. He has added, where it seemed to be necessary, occasional explanatory notes. After having prepared an abridgment of the paradigms of verbs and nouns, following Winer's arrangement in his Chaldee Grammar, he, on the whole, concluded to insert the full paradigms as they stand in the original work, and not to make the attempt to im- prove a grammar so nearly faultless. yi TP.ANSLATOR'S PREFACE. The translation is followed by a course of Exercises in Syriac grammar, which, if carefully studied, will, it is believed, mate- rially facilitate the progress of the learner in an accurate know- ledge of the elements of the language. After having read, with care, the introduction, and cursorily examined other parts of the grammar, the pupil may, at once, commence upon the Exercises, and merely consult the grammar (as directed in the introductory remarks to the Exercises) as a book of reference, in order to enable him to solve the difficulties with which he may meet in analyzing the first page of the Chrestomathy. The translator trusts that he shall not be considered as obtrusive in calling special attention to a method of analysis which he has found to be of great advantage in teaching classes in Hebrew. Some in- structors have probably adopted a similar one^ and others may have devised still better methods. This is submitted to the con- sideration of those teachers who have not already adopted a satisfactory one. A brief Chrestomathy and Lexicon, prepared by the transla- tor, follow the Exercises. The former is composed of selections from that beautiful edition of the Peshito Bible published by the British and Foreign Bible Society in London, in 1816, and reprinted in smaller type in 1826. It was executed for the use of the Syrian Christians in India. It was corrected for the press, as far as the Acts of the Apostles, by Dr. Buchanan, and com- pleted by Rev. S. Lee, Professor of Arabic in the University of Cambridge. Several manuscripts were consulted, and the text is considered as very correct, though we have discovered in it some typographical errors. In the Exercises, an extended analysis will be found of the first TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE. ^ page of the Chrestomathy, and merely brief explanatory remarks on the remaining pages. The basis of the Lexicon is that inserted by Uhlemann in his grammar, to which the translator has made many additions, having consulted the Syriac Lexicons of M. Trost, E. Castell, iEgidius Gutbier, and ^milius Rödiger. The Lexicon is intended merely to include those words which occur in the Chrestomathy. Some errors, in the author's numerous references to the Old and New Testaments, have been discovered and corrected. There are, probably, others which were not observed. The translator trusts that this efibrt will be received with indulgence by the literary public. Errors will doubtless be found by teachers who may use the Manual, and he will be very thankful to receive suggestions from any quarter, by which a future edition, should it ever be called for, may be improved. The publication of the work has been unexpectedly delayed, most of the stereotype plates, when nearly completed, having been destroyed by a disastrous fire. The translator avails himself of this opportunity to express his obligations to Mr. W. W. Turner, late of the Union Thelogical Seminary of this city, T. J. Conant, D. D., of Rochester Univer- sity, and J. G. Palfrey, D. D., formerly of the Theological School connected with Harvard University, for valuable suggestions ; also to Mr. A. H. Guernsey, of this city, for important aid in the examination of the manuscript before going to press. New York, Jan. 1855. EXTEACTS FEOM THE AUTllOE'S PEEFACE. The earlier sheets of this Text book, designed, principally, for academical instruction, had been printed, and that part of the Manuscript which contains the elementary principles and paradigms had been for a considerable time out of my hands, when the more comprehensive work of Professor Hoffmann made its appearance. In the preparation of this work my plan had especially led me to present, with as much brevity as was consistent with clearness, what is most essential for understanding the language in its grammatical forms. 1 was of the opinion that the more extended treatment of separate phenomena of the language might be dispensed with, since the greater portion of the Syriac forms may be explained from those of the Hebrew language ; and in fact, a knowledge of the Hebrew implies an acquaintance with the principles of the Syriac. Upon a close examination of the above-mentioned work, I was convinced, that I had proceeded upon almost the same principles, had made a similar use of the older grammarians, such as Amira, Ludov. de Dieu, Buxtorf, Michaelis, and others, and had deviated only in the collocation of separate rules. Although I might have approxi- mated more nearly to the work of "Hoffmann, by isolated alterations, yet I deemed it advisable, where deviations existed, to follow my own views ; as for example, in the ta- bular arrangement of derivative nouns. Following the older grammarians, I have introduced a separate paradigm of the nouns placed under Declension HI.,* instead of classing them with the Segholate forms ; this was done because the vowel entering into the inflection of these nouns is not an original one, as in the case of the Segholate forms, but is introduced on account of the difficulty of pronunciation. Eeal Segholate » § 48, DecL IIL forms, monosyllabic nouns, namely, those derived from verbs 3 rad. Olaph quiescent, belong rather, according to their principal inflection, to the substantive-stems of Declension Y., and, in only a few instances, coincide with the Segholate forms. In preparing the Syntax, I have, like Professor Hoff- mann, followed the Lehrgebäude of Gesenius ; and like him, also, I have made use only of those passages of the Old Tes- tament collected by Gesenius, in which the translator, unfet- tered by the Hebrew text, seems to have wrought more in accordance with the genius of his own language. In addition to this, I have frequently consulted the translation of the New Testament, as the oldest Syriac writing known to us ;* Ephraemi Opera Syr., Romse, 1743, tom. HI., fob; Barhebrsei Chronicon Syr., ed. Kirsch. Lips. 1789; and Assemani Bib- liotheca Orient. Clementino-Yaticana, Eomse, 1719, tom. HI., fob; so that a close and impartial examination will easily determine what has been added from my own not inconsider- able collections. f -^^ * * * * * Berlin, March, 1829. * In point of time the Fesbito version of the Old Testament is the most ancient document extant in the Syriac language, though the New Testament was trans- lated into Syriac from the original Greek about the same time. Michaelis sup- poses, that the Syriac vei'sion of both Testaments was made near the close of tho first, or in the early part of the second century. — Tr. t The remainder of the Author's Preface relates mainly to his Reading Lessons, which we have not inserted, they being, in our opinion, too difficult for beg'nners — Ta. 11 CONTENTS PAGB Introduction. — ^Brief Historical Yiew of the Syriac Language and Literature 17 PART FIRST. EIiE]»IE]VTS OF THE liANGUAGE. CHAPTER L WRITTEN CHARACTERS AND THEIR USE. § 1. Consonants 28 § 2. Yowels in general (Vowel Letters and Yowel Signs) . . 30 § 3. Yowel Signs , 30 § 4. Diacritical Points which supply the place of Yowels . , 31 I 5. Kushoi and Rukok 32 § 6. Ribui 33 § 7. Mehagyono and Marhetono 34 ^ 8. Linea Occultans . 35 I 9. Tone 35 1 10. Marks of Punctuation 35 CHAPTER n. PECULIARITIES AND CHANGES OF LETTERS. 1 11. General Yiew 36 § 12. Changes of the Consonants 36 XII CONTENTS. PAGB 1 13. Quiescent Letters 39 ^ 14. Yowel Letters which are not sounded (Otiant) ... 40 § 15. Changes in the Yowels 41 PAKT SECOND. ETYMOIiOGY, OR PARTS OF SPEECH. CHAPTER L PRONOUNS. 1 16. Personal and Possessive Pronouns 44 Table of Pronouns and Suffixes 45 g 17. Other Pronouns ......... 48 CHAPTER XL THE VERB. §18. General Yiew . 49 I. Regular Verbs. § 19. The Inflection of Regular Yerbs in General ... 50 I. Table of Personal Inflection 52 II. Table of the Temporal Inflection of Regular Yerbs . . 53 A. Personal Inflections 54 B. Inflection of the Tenses and Moods 55 § 20. A. The Ground-form Peal — its formation and signification . 56 B. Derivative Conjugations. 1 21. Ethpeel 58 I 22. Pael and Ethpaal 59 § 23. Aphel and Ethtaphal 60 I 24. Shaphel and Eshtaphal 61 I 25. Conjugations occasionally used and Quadriliteral Yerbs ~ 62 § 26. Yerbs with Gutturals 63 II. Irregular Verbs. I 27. General Yiew 63 Table of Irregular Yerbs ... ... 65 CONTENTS. XIII PAQB A. Quiescent Verbs. I 28. Yerbs 1 Rad. Olaph Quiescent 67 I 29. Yerbs 1 Rad. Yud Quiescent 68 ^ 30. Yerbs Med. Olaph Quiescent . .... 70 § 31. Yerbs Med. Rad. Yau and Yud Quiescent .... 70 5 32. Yerbs 3 Rad. Olaph Quiescent 72 B. Defective Verbs. I 33. Yerbs 1 Rad. Nun 75 I 34 Yerbs Med. Rad. doubled 75 § 35. Doubly Irregular and Defective Yerbs .... 76 Paradigms of the Regular and Irregular Yerbs ... 80 I 36. Regular Yerb with Suffixes 97 Table of the Same 102 I 37. Suffixes to Yerbs 3 Rad. Olaph Quiescent . . . .103 Table of the Same . ; 108 I 38. Auxiliary or Substantive Yerbs 110 CHAPTER in. THE NOUN. I 39. Derivation of Nouns . . Ill § 40. Nouns derived from Yerbs 112 Tabular Yiew of Nouns derived from Regular and Irregular Yerbs 113 I 41. Denominative Nouns 122 I 42. Composite and Exotic Nouns 123 § 43. Gender of Nouns 124 I 44. Number of Nouns 126 I 45. Diflferent Relations (states) of the Noun .... 129 Table of the Same 132 I 46. Nouns with Suffixes 136 1 47. Declension of Nouns in general .... . 139 XIV CONTENTS. TäOB l 48. Exhibition of Nouns according to Declension . . . 139 I 49. Anomalous Nouns 145 Paradigms of Nouns with Suffixes 148 I 50. Adjectives and Numerals 150 CHAPTER IV. PAKTICLES. § 51. Adverbs 152 I 52. Prepositions 153 Table of Prepositions with Suffixes 155 I 53. Conjunctions and Interjections 156 PART THIRD, SYNTAX. CHAPTER I. THE PHONOUN. 54. Use of Separable Personal Pronouns and Suffixes A. Separable Personal Pronouns B. Suffixes .... 55. Pleonastic use of Pronouns A. Separable Personal Pronouns B. Suffixes .... General Remarks on Personal Pronouns 56. Use of the Relative Pronoun 57. Use of Demonstrative and Interrogative Pronouns 58. Pronouns for which the Syrians have no special forms A. Reflexive Pronouns B. Other Pronouns . 157 157 159 160 ICO 161 163 164 166 166 166 167 CONTENTS. XV FAGS CHAPTER IL THE VEEB. § 59. General View 172 g 60. Use of the Preterit 172 g 61. Use of the Future 175 ^ 62. Use of the Imperative. . 178 § 63. Use of the Infinitive 179 A. Infinitive Absolute 179 B. Infinitive with ^ or the Construct form . . .180 § 64. Use of the Participle 182 I 65. General Yiew of the Manner of Designating all the difierent Moods and Tenses, and particularly the Imperfect, Pluper- fect, and Optative 188- § 66. The Persons of the Verb 190 g 67. Construction of Verbs with the different Cases and with Prepositions 193 I. Verbs with the Accusative 193 II. Verbs with Prepositions 196 III. Passive Verbs and their Construction .... 201 Mode 6f expressing Greek Composites . . . .203 § 68. The Substantive Verb and some other peculiarities chiefly relating to the Construction of Verbs in General . 204 f I 7 A. Useof]oai A^landA^lk 204 B. Indirect Discourse 205 C Ellipsis — Zeugma — Paronomasia and Puns , . . 206 CHAPTER III. THE NOUN. § 69. Use of the Noun in General 207 § 70. Gender of Nouns 210? § 71. Number of the Noun 212: :vi CONTENTS, 72. Apposition and Duplication of Nouns 73. The Empliatic State 74. The Construct State and the Genitive 75. Designation and Use of the other Cases 76. The Case Absolute . 77. Comparison of Adjectives A. The Comparative . B. The Superlative . 78. Construction of Numerals A. Cardinal Numbers B. Ordinal Numbers . C. Other Eelations of Numbers 79. Union of the Noun with Adjectives 80. Union of the Noun with the Yerb A. In Respect to Number . B. In respect to Gender C. In respect to both Gender and Number D. Construction of Sentences in which there or more than one Subject . 81. Peculiarities relating to Nouns . A. Ellipsis of the Noun B. Zeugma and Hendiadys The rendering of Composite Greek Nouns Compound PAGB 212 214 215 218 220 222 222 223 221 224 224 226 227 229 229 232 234 234 237 237 238 238 CHAPTER lY. PARTICLES. I 82. Construction and Union of Adverbs 240 ^ 83. Use of the Particles of interrogation, affirmation and negation 242 § 84. Prepositions 244 I 85. Conjunctions 246 I 86. Interjections 249 Peculiarities in respect to the Position of Words . . . 250 y' OF TEE N^ i]SlTßODUCTION, BRIEF HISTORICAL VIEW SYlilAC LA]S"GUAGE A^D LITERATÜEE. 1. The Sjriac language (sometimes called the Western Aramaean, to distinguish it from the Chaldsean or Eastern Aramaean, with which it constitutes the Aramaean dialect of the Semitic family of languages), formerly extended over the whole 'nortliern part of Aram, from the borders of Palestine to I^atolia, and from the Mediterranean to and beyond the Euphrates.* It degenerated at an early period, and, during the continual changes of government, particularly by the re- ception of Persian and Greek words, lost much of its original purity. Of its pure state, no written monuments have come down to our times. But at the beginning of the fourth cen- tury after Christ, the language enjoyed a flourishing period, and kept its place for a long time at Edessa as a written lan- guage. As from the earliest period the Palmyrene dialect was recognized as the principal one, so this period has been designated by the name of the Edessene Period. Moreover, at various times, mention is made of the Damascene, the Chalnic or Ctesiphontic, the Acharic or IS'esibene, and the Maronite dialects. The essential difference between thes^con- sisted very likely in the pronunciation ; this may be asserted with still more confidence in respect to the Nabataean dialect. The ancient written language of Antioch or Com- magene is still used by various Christian sects, in particular * E. Rödiger says of the Ararnjean language: "It was called Syriac in the form in which it appeared in the Christian Aramaean literature, and Chaldee when it appeared in the Jewish Aramaean writings." See Gesenius' Heb. Gramm., 15th edit, by Rödiger, Leipz. 1848 ; Einleitung, §1.2. b.— Tr. 18 INTRODUCTION. by the Maronites, IN'estorians, and Thomas-Christians of India, as their ecclesiastical language. So also the Zabians, or so- called St. John's Disciples, are said to make use of it, in their religious ceremonies. But as the language, as early as the eighth and ninth centuries, was greatly corrupted by the frequent use of the Arabic, and was driven by the Arabs from the cities in the tenth and eleventh, and from the villages in the twelfth and thirteenth centuries, it may be safely assumed that it is no longer in use as a vernacular Ian guage. Although several modern travelers of note, as Niebuhr and Brown, maintain that it is still spoken in some parts of Mesopotamia, about Raka, Edessa, and Damascus, as well as upon Lebanon, they are opposed by Ferrieres Sauvebo&uf and Yolney, while Chateaubriand, Seetzen, Clarke, Joliffe, and Buckingham pass the matter over in silence; and Burckhardt only remarks, that the Maronites in the convent of Kashia use the Syriac, at the present day, as we do the Latin.*-* Rem. — The LXX, even, use Syria, (2u^ta, 2v^oi, 2uPio'Ti) in Uie wider sense, for the Old Testament 0^5* (^'1 comp, the "Api/xoi in Horn. II. ii. 783 ; Hesiod Theog. 304 ; Strabo Geog. i. 2. xi. 14 ; Stephanus Byzant. under "Apjfxa, and Bochart Geogr. S. ii. 5, 6 ); and the Greek and Roman Authors often confound Syria with Assyria (comp. Diod. Sic. ii. 13; Herodot. vii. 63; Strabo xvi. 2 ; Xenoph. Cyrop. vii. 5, 31 ; Lucian de Dea Syr. § 1 ; Oppian, KvMriy III. 402 ; Horat. Od. II. 11, 16; III. 4, 32. Justin, i. 2; Ammian Marcell. xxiii. 6. The Arabs call it ^Uislt, as it lay at the left, when their faces were turned towards the east (comp. Abulfeda Tab. Syr. p. 5; Assemani Bibl. Orient. T. III. P. ii. p. 782.) In the earliest times this country was divided into several small nations, ruled by kings (comp. Jahn Bibl. Archäol. Thl. i. Bd. i. p. 51 seq.; Mannert Geogr. Bd. vi. p. 1 seq.; Vater Commentar über den Pentat. Bd. I. p. 152 ; Winer Bibl. Real- wörterbuch, Bd. i. p. 51 seq.) ; of these, subsequently to the time of David, Zobah and Damascus are mentioned in the Scriptures, as the most powerful ; David conquered them both (2 Sam. viii. 3 sq.; x. 6 ; 1 Chron. xix [xviii ] 3, 4. sq ), and Solomon kept possession of them * Since Uhlemann prepared his grammar, it has been ascertained that the Nes- torians use the Syriac language at the present day. Mr. Layard, in liis admirable work on the ruins of Nineveh, says of the Nestorians (or Chaldteans as he incor- rectly denominates them) : " Most of their church books are written in Syriac, which, like the Latin in tlie West, became the sacred language in the greater part of the East." See Layard's Nineveh, chap, viii. Missionaries who are laboring among the Nestorians, bear testimony to the same fact. — Tr. INTRODUCTION. jg until Reson Ben-Eliada, who had been general of the king of Zoba (1 Kings xi. 23 sq.), re-established at Damascus a government inde- pendent of that of the Hebrews. Subsequently the Syrians were incor- porated with the monarchies of tlie Assyrians (738 b. c), the Persians (539 B. c), and the Macedonians (331 b. c). Though after the death of Alexander the Great, they arose again for a time under the Seleucidae (301 B. c), yet they again lost their independence by means of Pom- pey (64 b.c.), and their kings reigned only at Edessa, till the third century after Christ, when this kingdom came also under the Roman sway. At th« division of the Empire, under Theodosius (395 ), Syria fell to the Byzantine Empire, after Jo vianiis had (a. d. 363) already surren- dered Nesi])is* to Sapores II, king of Persia. Afterwards it was taken possession of by the Arabs (636), and was subjected (660) to the Ommiades and several other Arabic royal families, whose dynasties were, in 1086, brought to a close by the Seljooks.f At the time of the Crusades, the Christians could maintain themselves there against the Seljooks but a short time (1097 and subsequently) ; and in 1171, Sala- din wrested the country from them. In 1369, Syria became a prey to the marauding inroads of the Mongols under Timur ; and it has now, for three centuries, sighed under the Turkish yoke(cf. Gatterer, Hand- buch der Universalhist, Bd. I. p. 248 sq. ; Beck, Weltgeschichte, Bd. I. p. 213 sq. ; Heeren, Ideen über die Politik, u. s. w. Thl. I. p. 213 sq. ; Rühs, Handbuch der Geschichte des Mittelalters, p, 152, sq.). The transition into broadness of pronunciation ("TrXaTutfTo/xov) seems not to have extended much beyond the time of the Babylonish captivity ; and the Palmyrene Dialect, which is known to us by some inscriptions found among the ruins of Palmyra or Tadmor, and decipher- ed by Barthelcmy and Swinton, may have grown up soon after Solo- mon, the founder of that city. In the Edessene Period, during which flourished Ephraem (died 378), Jacob Yon Sarug, Isaac the Syrian, and Xenaias of Mabug, all of whom Jacob of Edessa, at the middle of the seventli century, recognizes as classical writers, theological learning was zealously cultivated (cf. Assem. T. III. P. II. p. 994). The Maronites on the Orontes and upon Lebanon, originally disciples and followerp of St. Maro (cf. Assem. I. 496 sq. ; Pfeiffer, in his Auszuge, p. 166 sq. ; Gieseler, Lehrbuch der Kirchengeschichte, Bd. I. p. 675 ; Rühs, Hand- buch der Geschichte des Mittelalters, p. 37) approximate to the an- cient Syriac dialect ; still more closely do the Nestorians (cf. Assem. T. III. P. II. p. 379), and the Thomas-Christians of India, who differ from the Nestorians only in name and place of residence (cf. Assem, a. a. 0. pp. 413, 435. sq. ; Pfeiffer, pp. 285, 484 ; Gieseler, Bd. I. pp. 417, 638), all of whom make use of it only as an ecclesiastical language ; the two former speaking Arabic in common life, and the latter, the language * A. celebrated city and military post in Mesopotamia, generallj written Nisibis.—TR. t Called, also, Seljuks, Seljouks, or Seljoukian Turks.— Tk. 20 INTRODUCTION. of Malabar. Different from this is the dialect of the so-called Johannes- Christians, Mandasans, or Zabians (who are not to be confounded with a Mohammedan sect of the same name, in Maraccii Goran. Sur. II. p. 33 sq. ; Assem. T. III. P. II. pp. 509-515 ; Pfeiffer, p.510 sq.; cf. Gieseler, Bd. I. p. 66 ; Meander, Allgemeine Geschichte der christlichen. Religion und Kirche, Bd. I. Abth. IL p. 42t), whose religious books are written in a corrupted Syriac, and which appears, from the numerous Ghebric expressions which occur in them, to have been drawn up in the Persian Irak. By the Nabataean, according to Barhebrseus (in Assem. T. I. p. 416) is to be understood the former language of the Syrian country- people. On the question, whether the Syrian is still a vernacular language, compare Niebuhr, Reisebeschr von Arabien, Bd. II. p. 352 ; Brown, Biblioth. der neuesten Reisebeschr. Thl. I. p. 489 ; Ferneres Sauveboeuf, Memoires historiques, etc., T. II. p. 169 ; Volney, Voyage en Syrie, etc., T. I. p. 331 ; and Burckhardt, Travels in Syria, etc., pp. 22, 186. 2. Syriac literature, which extends over almost all branches of knowledge, and in a special manner over the department of Theology, and possesses valuable works upon Oriental and Eccle- siastical History, flourished principally in the period between the fourth and tenth centuries of the Christian era. The language itself, which gave proof of its versatility of expression by the translations of Aristotle and other Greek authors, and by its accurate representation of mathematical subjects, had found, at an earlier period, in its own country, zealous cultivators in the departments of Grammar and Lexicography. As the most ancient grammarians, whose works have been lost, history records the names of Achudemen (died 575), Joseph Hu- zita(died 580), Jacob of Edessa (died 698), who labored to restore the purity of the ancient language, Jesudenah (at the beginning of the eighth century), John Stylita (about 830), John, son of Cha- mis. Bishop of Themanum (850), and Honain, the physician (died 876). The first accurate grammar, however, was written by John Bar Zugbi, a Nestorian monk, at the beginning of the thirteenth century ; about which time, also, Joseph Bar Malcon seems to have composed his Refe Pundorum^ and Barhebrseus (died 1286) to have made known his grammatical works. At the beginning of the sixteenth century, the study of the Syriac language was transplanted to Europe. Theseus Ambrosius learned the Syriac language from Syrians at Rome, in 1514, and became, in 1529, teacher to Albert Widmanstadt, who subsequently pursued' the study under Simeon, Bishop of the Syrians upon Lebanon. Through the labors of these men, and of Moses vonMerdin, whom INTRODUCTION. 21 Ignatius, Patriarch of Antioch, had sent, in 1552, to JuUus III. at Rome, and whose instructions were enjoyed by Andreas Dumas (Masius), the publication of the New Testament was effected in 1555. At the close of the sixteenth century, the grammatical study of the Syriac language was much promoted at Rome itself, by the Maronites Amira and Abraham Ecchellensis, whose copious grammatical works had already been preceded by the attempts of Theseus Ambrosius,Widmanstadt, Tremellius, Dumas, and Waser. They were followed, about the middle of the seven- teenth century, by Isaac Sciadrensis and Joshua Accurensis. From this period onwards, the Syriac language has been gram- matically pursued in Germany; partly independently o-f other languages, most copiously by the two Michaelises and Hoffmann ; partly in connection with the Chaldee, as by Ludov. de Dieu and Jahn ; or with the other Semitic languages, as by Buxtorf, Het- tinger, Schaaf,- Vater, and others. The earliest attempts at Syriac lexicography were also made in the ninth and tenth centuries, in Syria, by Honain Isa or Joshua of Maruz, and Gabriel, the son of Bochtiesu. More im- portant, however, are the contemporary works of Isa Bar- Ali (about 885), of Ananiesu Bar-Saru (about 900), and the most serviceable work of this kind by Abulhasan, Isa Bar-Bahlul (about 963,) which is still extant. The lexicons of Dumas, de la Boderie, Schindler, Crines, Buxtorf, Trost, Hettinger, Gutbier, Nicolai, Schaaf, and Zanolini, which have appeared since the sixteenth century, are confined to the New Testament, with which the Syriac literature in 1555 made its appearance in Europe. Fer- rarius, and Edm. Castell, on the other hand, availed themselves of the above-mentioned Syriac works relating to the same subject, and John David Michaelis enriched the labors of the latter by valuable remarks and additions. The valuable work of Lorsbach, who compared all the Syriac works which had then been printed, besides a number of manuscripts, and collected the words and significations wanting in Syriac lexicons, still remains uncom- pleted. More recently, copious works have been promised by Bernstein and Quatremere, philologists of great merit in the department of Oriental literature. Glossaries are contained in the Chrestomathies of Michaelis, Kirsch, Tychsen, Grimm, Hahn, and Sieffert. Rem. — Eusebius (Hist. Eccl. I. 13) cites the letter of Abgarus to Jesus, and the answer to it, as among the most ancient Syriac writings (cf. Assem. I. 554 ; III. P. II. p. 8 ; Gieseler, Bd. I. p. U) ; and. 22 INTRODUCTION. in like manner, John is said to have written his Gospel in the Syriac language. But the most ancient Syriac work of undoubted authenti- city, is perhaps the translation of the 'New Testament,* which must have existed as early as the second century (cf. Hug, Einleitung in die Schriften des N. T., Thl. I. p. 348 ; Gieseler, Bd. I. p. 123). That the Syrians considered their language to be richer than the Ara- bic is attested by Asseman (III. P. I. p. 326 sq.) ; and its capacity for rendering Greek authors may be judged from Barhebr^us (Chron. p. 231. ed. Bruns), compared with Aristotle (Top. I. cap. 4). Abulphara- gius, in his Historia Dynast., ed. Pocock, p. 147, mentions Theophilua of Edessa as the author of a successful translation of two books of the Iliad (cf. Assem. I, p. 521). In addition to the larger work of Asseman (Assemani Bibliotheca Orientalis Clementino-A^aticana, Romas, 1129,) 3 vols, fol., and the abridgment of it by Pfeiffer, Erlangen, 1776, we possess a brief history of Syriac literature by Hoffmann, ni Bertholdt's kritischem Journal der neuesten theologischen Literatur, Thl. XIV., pp. 225-291. I. GRAMMARS. Thesei Ämbrosii, Introductio in Chald. linguam, Syriacam, etc., Papiae, 1539. Aug. Caninii, Institutiones linguae Syriacse, Parisiis, 1554. Wichnanstadii, Syriacae linguae prima ekmenta, Yiennae, 1555, 4to. ed. II. Antwerp, 1572. Toh. Merceri, Tabula3 in grammaticen linguas Chald., quae et Syriaca dicitur, Paris, 1560. 4to. Eiusd. grammatica Chald. et Syr. Yite- bergae, 1579, 8vo. Imman. Tre?ndlii, Grammatica Chald. et Syr. Genevae, 1569, 4to. Ap- pended also to his edition of the New Testament. A7idr. Masii, Grammatica linguae Syriacae (im Tom. YI. der Antwerp, Polygl.) 1573, fol. Casp. Waseri, Institutio linguae Syrae ex optimis quibusque apud Syros scriptoribus collecta. Lugd. Bat. 1594. 4to. Ed. II. Leidse, 1619, 4to. Georg. Amirce, Grammatica Syr. sive Chald. etc. Romae, 1596, 4to. Christoph. Criimii, Gymnasium Syr. h. e, linguae lesu Christo verna- culae perfecta institutio, etc. Yitebergae, 1611. lo. Buztorßi, Grammaticae Chald. et Syr. libri III. Basil. 1615. Ed. II. 165Ö, 8vo. * Hug, in his Introduction to the New Testament, says that the Translation of the New Testament was appended to that of the Old Testament, and that both were included under the same name, Pcshito. — Tr. INTRODUCTION. 23 To. Casp. Myriad, Grammatica Syro-Chaldaea. Genev. 1619, 4to. Herrn. Nicolai, Idea linguarr. Aramaearum per comparationem etc Copenh. 162t, 8vo. Ahrah. Ecchellensis, Linguae Syr. s. Chald. perbrevis institutio. Romse, 1628, 16mo. Ludov. de Diew, Grammatica linguarr. orientt. Hebr^orum, Chald. et Syr. inter se collaturum Lugd. Bat. 1628, ex recens. Clodii. Francof. ad M. 1683, 4to. Isaac Sciadrensis, Grammatica linguae Syr. Romse, 1636, 8vo. Foh. Michael, lydherri, Rudimenta grammaticse Syr. Halis, 163^. Ed. XL, 1646, 12mo. losephi Acurensis, Grammatica linguae Syr. Romae, 164t, 8vo. lo. Ernst. Gerhardi, ^may^a^ia, linguae SyroChald. Hal. Sax. 1649. Awlr. Sennerti, Ebraimus, Cbaldaismus, Syriasmus, Arabismus nee non Rabbinismus, etc. Viteb. 1666, 4to. Eiusd. Cbaldaismus et Syrias- mus, etc., 1666. loh. Henr. Hottingeri, Grammatica Cliald. Syr. et Rabbinica Turic. 1652, 8vo. P^iusd. Grammatica quatuor linguarr. Hebr. Chald. S}t. et Arab, harmonica Turici, 1659, 4to (the Syriac also printed separately). Briani Waltoni, Introductio ad lectionem linguarr. orientt. Hebr. Chald. Samarit. Syr. Arab. Pers. Armen. Copt. Lond. 1653, 12mo, lo. Leiisdeni, Scholae Syriacae lib. III. etc. Ultraiect. 1658, 8vo. Giiil. Bevertdgii, Grammatica Syr. tribus libris tradita. Lond. 1658, 8vo. Ed?n. Castelli, Brevis et hannonica quontum fieri potuit grammatica3 linguarr. Hebr. Chald. Syr. ^thiop. Arab, et Pers. delineatio, Lond. 1669 (preceding his Lex. Heptagl.) Dav. Grafunderi, Grammatica Syriaca cum Syntaxi, etc. Yiteb. 1665. lo. Nicolai, Grammatica linguarr. Ebr. Chald. Syr. Arab. J^thiop. Pers.orientalium secundum prima praecepta delineata harmonica. lenae, 16T0. 4to. Ed. II. Critica Sacra Francof. et Hamb. 1686. lo. Altingi, Synopsis institutionum Chald. et Syr. Francof. ad M. 16 "1 6. Ed. VI. a Georg. Othone adornata, 1701, 8vo. Christ. Cellarii, Porta Syriaca. Cizae, 1677, 8 vo. Eiusd. Porta Syrioe patentior, etc., 1682. Henr. Opitii, Syriasmus facilitati et integritati suae restitutus, etc. Lips. et Francof. 1678. 4to. in compendium redactus a Christ. Ludovici Yiteb. 1669, 4to. Car. Schafii, Opius Aramaeum complectens grammaticam Chaldaico- Syriacam, Lugd. Bat. 1686, 8vo. Jo. Aug. Danzii, Aditus Syriae reclusus, etc. lenae, 1689. Ed, III. 1715, 8vo. lo. Em. Gerhardi, Harmonia linguae Chald. Syr. et iEthiop. lenae, 1693, 4to. 24 INTEODUCTION. Herrn, von der Hardt Syriacse linguae fundamenta. Heimst. 1694. 8vo. (Only Paradigms.) Ge. Othonis Palaestra linguarr. orientt. Chald. Syr. Arab. -^th. Pers. etc. Francof. 1702. 4to. lo. Phil. Hartmanni Hebraicse, Chald. Syr. et Samarit. linguarmu institutio harmonica. Francof. ad M. 1707. 4to. Sam. Fr id. Bucheri Thesaurus orientalis s. compendiosa et facilis methodus Hnguarr. orientt. etc. Francof. et Lips. 1725. 4to. Christ. Bened. Michaelis Syriasmus i. e. graramatioa Unguae Syr. Halis, 1741. 4to. lo. David Michaelis Grammatica Syr. Halis, 1784. 4to. /. G. Kais Grammatica Hebraeo-harmonica cum Arab, et Aram. Amstelod. 1758. 8vo. lac. Ge. Christ. Adlerii Brevis linguae Syr. institutio etc. Altonae, 1784. W. Hezel, Syrische Sprachlehre. Lemgo, 1788. 4to. loh. Gottfr, Hasse Practlsches Handbuch der Aramäischen oder Syrisch-Chaldäisch-Samaritanischen Sprache. Jena, 1794. 8vo. Innoc. Fessleri Institutiones linguarr. orientt. Hebr. Chald. Syr. et Arab. Vratisl. Halis et lenae, 1787 et 1789. Ol. Gerh. Tychseni Elementale Syr. Rostochi, 1793. 8vo, (Ap- pended to his Chrestomathy.) lo. Jahn. Aramäische oder Chaldäische und Syrische Sprachlehre für Anfänger. Wien 1793. 8vo. neu herausgegeben von Oberleit- tier Elementa Aramaicae s. Chaldaeo-Syriacae hnguae etc. Viennae, 1820. 8vo. loh. Sev. Vater Handbuch der Hebr. Syr. Chald. und Arab. Gram- matik. Leipzig, 1802 u. 1817. 8vo. Thomas Yeates'' Syriac Grammar, principally adapted to the New Testament in that Language. Lond. 1819. 8vo. Hampus Tullberg Elementale Syr. P. I. et IL Lond. 1824. 8vo. Paul Ewald Lehrbuch der syr. Sprache. Erlangen, 1826. 8vo. Ändr. Theoph. Hoffmanni Grammaticse Syriacae hbri III. Halae, 1827. 4to. II. LEXICO^^S. Andr. Masii Syrorum peculium. Antwerp, 1521. folio. Fahr. Boderiani Dictionarium Syro-Chald. Antw. 1572. (Tom. VI. of the Antw. Polygl.) Val. Schindleri Lexicon pentagl. Hanoviae, 1612. 1649. Lond. 1635 Francof. 1653. 1695. fol. Christoph. Crinesii Lexicon Syriacum. Viteb. 1612. 4to. loh. Bapt. Ferrarii Nomenciator Syriacus. Romae, 1622. 4to. loh. Buxtorßi mn. Lexicon Chald. et Syr. Basil. 1622. 4to. Martini Trostii Lexicon Syr. etc. Cothenis Anhalt. 1623. 4to. SYEIAC CHEESTOMATHIES. gg Thomas a Novaria Nomenclator Syr. Romse, 1636. 8vo. Andr. Sennerti Lexici Cbald. et Syr. compendium. Viteb. 1666. 4to. loh. Henr. Hottingeri Etymologicum orientt. s. Lexicon harmonicum heptagl. etc. Francof. 1661. Turici, 1664. 4to. Dav. Grafunderi Compendium Lexici, Syr. (Appended to his Syriac Grammar.) Aegid. Gutbirii Lexicon Syr. Hamb. 1667. 8vo. (Appended to his Kew Testament.) JISd7n. Castelli Lexicon heptagl. Lond. 1669. From this has been specially edited the Syriac, by J. G. Michaehs, under the title, Edmundi CasteUi Lexicon Syr. Gotting. 1788. Tom. IL 4to. lo. Ft. Nicolai Hodogeticum Orientale harmonicum etc. lense, 1670. 4to. Christoph. Cellarii Glossarium Syro-Latinum. Ciz^e, 1683. 4to. Car. Schafii Lexicon Syr. concordantiale. Lugd. Bat. 1708. (Ap- pended to the New Testament ) Ant. Zanolini Lexicon Syriacum. Patav. 1742. 8vo. (Appended to the New Testament.) UI. CHKESTOMATHIES. loh. Dav. Michaelis Syrische Chrestomathie Thl. 1. Göttingen, 1768. 8vo. Die II. Ausg. 1783. mit einem Glossar, u. Anm. vervollständigt unter dem Titel : loh. Dav. Michaelis Chrestoma- thia Syr. Ed. III. glossario adnotationibusque instructa a /. Ch. Dcepkc. 1829. /. C. G. Adleri Chrestomathia Syr. Hafn, 1784. loh. Gott/r. Hasse Lectiones Syro-Arabico-Samaritano-^thiopic9e Regiom. et Lipsise, 1788. 8vo. Georg. Guil. Kirschii Chrestomathia Syr. Hofae, 1789. 8vo. (Newly edited by Bernstein.) Olai Gerh. Tychsen Elementale Syriacum etc. Rostochi, 1793. 8vo. Henr. Ad. Grimm Neue Syrische Chrestomathie mit einem Glossarium u. s. w. Lemgo, 1795. 8vo. Gust. Knoes Chrestomathia Syr. maximam pai'tem e Codd. MSS. collecta. Gotting, 1807. 8vo. Aug. Hahn et Sieffert Chrestomathia Syr. s. S. Ephraemi carmina selecta. Lips, 1825. 8 vo. (With a Lex. Syr.) SYRIAC GRAMMAR. PART FIRST. ELEMENTS OF THE LANGUAGE TABLE OF CONSONANTS. "■"■ NAME. 1 'r _— SOUND. 'A 1 o s. 1 5 1 1 Olaph .AK 1 I \ 1 S^oiritus lenis. 1 2 Beth Zu^ ^ £i »o -O B, Bh, V. 2 3 4 Gomal Dolath ? r r ? G. D,Dh(iÄmthi.s). 3 4 5 He loj 01 cA 01 01 H. 5 6 Vau 0^0 a Q W or V. 6 1 Zain r 1 ^ \ 1 Z, ?Gr,cFr. 1 8 Cheth Lä^ J^ M^ •iM. •>« Ch, or Hh.' 8 9 Teth A4 i 4 4 4 T. 9 10 Jud jqI Jk ^ «^ %^ Y. 10 11 12 Coph Lomad 1 n 1 >• ^ K, Ch. L. 20 30 13 Mini vi^So Sd k2 ^ ;>o M. 40 14 15 Nun Seracatli AaSocD J £0 1 m N. S. 50 60 16 Ee K 1 1 \1 Vi 3? Hebrew. 70 11 Phe ]£ £2 £i «£i ^ P, Ph, F. 80 18 19 Tsode Koph 5 JH 5 ^ Ts. K guttural,Q. 90 100 20 Risk J r r J R. 200 21 Shin I » M. -ft -s Sh. 300 22 Thau o2 z A ^A 2 Th. T. Greek. 400 2R CONSONANTS. CHAPTEE I. "Written Characters and their Use. § 1. Consonants. The Syriac, or "West xiramsean Language, has an alphabet consisting, like that of the Hebrew and Chaldee, of twentj- two consonants. In common with the Arabic, it connects together the several letters of a word by horizontal lines at the bottom ; from which arises a fourfold form, though essentially the same, according as a letter is initial, medial, or final, or is connected or unconnected with the preceding letter, as exhibited in the table on the preceding page. Rem. 1. — The character exhibited in the preceding alphabet, is called Feshito, i. e. the simple. It is employed by the Maroni tes and Jacobites, and is said to have been invented by Jacob of Edessa in the seventh century. Besides this, Amira mentions the Estrangelo, not from tfi-poyyuXo?, round, (see Asseman Biblioth. Orient. T. HI. P. IL p. 378.) which, according to Michaelis Gram. Syr., p. 15, means the Gospel character (scriptura evangelii). It was the basis of the Nestorian smaller character, to which the so-called double alphabet, used for inscriptions and titles of books, bears a strong resemblance. There is also the Palmyrene alphabet, found in inscrip- tions on the ruins of Palmyra or Tadmor, and the Mandcean or Nabatoean alphabet. The latter, in consequence of the amalgamation of the gutturals | with 1. , and Ol with j-* , consists of only twenty con- sonants. It is written in a continuous line, with four different forms of each letter, viz., the simple consonant, and the consonant with the vowels a, z, or u. Rem. 2. — The letters |, p ^i ^i \i t? r> ^j connect only with the preceding letter. After one of these letters, therefore, > , • , > , Z , stand unconnected ; and also, with the exception of # , always at the beginning of a word. The final letters are »^ , ^ , -VO , . , ^ , y before Ib^ is written -^^ ; and after it U or }^ . Double J^ , at the end of a word takes the form of vi. The letter G, in words adopted from coNsoNAisrTS. 29 other languages, is written N^ . Several consonants, where they ter- minate a word, are slightly inflected upward ; e. g. »O, »D, %2i etc Rem. 3. — The gutturals express the several gradations of guttural sounds from the weakest to the strongest, f and Ol may be compared with the Spiritus lenis and Sinritus asper of the Greek languao-e (§ 12. 5, b). Deeper guttural sounds are oa ( = the German ch ) and 1 which the Greeks express, sometimes by the Spiritus asper, and sometimes by 7. The sound of «2 is formed in the fore-part of the mouth ; that of «O farther back towards the throat. %» = ^ sometimes stands for g at the end of Greek words, and is pronounced, according to Amira, p. 9, sc before e and i. The aspirated conson- ants Aao,..»jQ are, in some MSS., marked as such with a red point placed over them ; the removal of the aspiration is indicated by the same sign beneath them (§5). Rem. 4. — The division of consonants, with reference to the organs of speech, is the same as in Hebrew. But the gutturals ^1ajG1( occasion less difficulty than in Hebrew, as the Sheva and Daghesh forte are wanting in Syriac. Of the gutturals, in connection with a. and Q, it is to be remarked ; a) that f between two vowels has the sound of y ; e.g. ^(0 ko-ijem ; h) that O quiesces in — and — (= and u), and after — and — (== a and e), forms the dipthongs au and eu ; c) that initial a with — = ^, and even when | is pre- •iOÖVä.] Ihudho ; cZ) that initial 1 ; e. g. J OH ehadh. Rem. o. — The letters of the Alphabet suffice for designating the numerals as far as 400 (Vid. Table of Consonants, Amira, p.l2. sq). In compound numbers, the larger stand first ; e. g. (loZ 441. From 500 — 900, the tens of 50 — 90 are denoted by a dot over the letter ; e.g. «£0 600, •Si 800. Thousands are designated by — placed under the units, ten thousand by "^, ten thousand thousand by — . Tho numbers 20 and 50 are also expressed by doubled yD and ^, tliu final letters falling away where units are added. Fractional numbers are designated by a small line drawn obliquely dov^nward, from left to right, over the letter which expresses the denominator of tho fraction ; e.g. *S =^, . • = 3 &«• 80 VOWEL LETTEKS AND VOWEL SIGNS. § 2. Vowels in General ( Vowel Letters and Vowel /Signs), InSyriac, the vowel-letters f, o, and «a originally served to designate the vowels, and, at the time of Mohammed, the Syrians were acquainted with only three vowel-signs, which sufficed for their language, and which the Arabs appear to have borrowed from them. Afterwards the Monophysites sought to express the Greek vowels, and increased their number to seven (v. Asseman T. I. pp. 477, 478 ; Gesenius Lehrgeb. p. 84), and since the time of Theophilus of Edessa, in the eighth century, the Greek vowels appear to have been in common use. The ISTestorians, on the other hand, make use of diacritical points (Asseman T. III. P. II. p. 378). The Monophysites or Maronites commonly use them only in doubtful cases. Rem. — Even in the last century, the Maronite Gabriel Heva em- ployed the vowel-letters to designate the vowels, making "X = a, 1=0, • I = e, *.* = «, and O = u (v. Michaelis, p. 29). § 3. Voiuel Signs. The Syrians denote the vowels by diacritical points, or by characters formed from and in imitation of the Greek vowels, the latter mode being that now generally used. In ancient manuscripts both modes occur together. FORM. NAME. SOUND. Syriac. Greek. -^ y — or — 7 Pethocho (V-A£)) a. — or — — or — IS Revotzo (T^^') e. — — or — Chevotzo (T^) i. _L or — Zekofo (Hoi) 0. d— , Q— Q— Etzotzo (U>) - DIACRITICAL POINTS WHICH SUPPLY THE PLACE OF VOWELS. 31 Rem. 1. — The names are derived from the form of the organ used in pronouncing the vowel. The Greek forms from which they are derived are easily recognized. — also occui-s without Q = ■?* in ^\o and ^^5^4^- (^or lAji'r^ID, Luke xvii. 29, stands more correctly lA-»;aD Psalm xi. 6). The first three vowel-signs may also be written beneath the consonants. 7 Rem. 2. — As to pronunciation, — seems to have denoted a and ae, though — was sometimes sounded by the Nestorians like a (Y. Asseman T. III. P. II. p. 379). In foreign words it quiesces in Q. In — are contained both the German ö and ü. Rem. 3. — As to quantity it may be assumed with some certainty that — is always long, and — always short ; according to others, — f ' 'K 7 _ with «^, — and — with Q are long ; — is short, except in foreign words. 7 P Amira, on the other hand, maintains that — = a, — == ö, and the *^ others, even — with Q, are common. Some grammarians also denote the quantity of the vowels by different signs, thus ; — — — ;- CJievotzo. O — 'O O — Etzotzo. Rem. 4. — The dipthongs are formed with Q and ^. With Vau ; a) with — preceding at the beginning or middle of a word, au ; e. g. (ZoidD ; b) with a preceding, oi nearly ( the German eu)\ e. g. •jiOlCuA»!; c) in the middle of a word, after a, iu\ e. g. - X 7 '^ ^OlCLirQQJ; c?) Vau doubled, the first with — , ou (according to Amira u). With Yud (besides the combinations b and c above); a) with a preceding — , ai ; e. g. ^Ij^I ; b) with — m the middle and at the end of a word, oi ; e. g. fAxiDpD. § 4. Diacritical Points which siipply the place of Vowels. These were employed earlier than were the vowels, and 32 KUSHOI AND RUKOK. were used even after the invention of the vowels, by the Nestorians. The point which designates the suffix 3 sing, fem. 01 seems to have originated from that system. •X _ • r Rem. — According to Amira p. 51, 001=001 ; while 001=001; «j01=«ji01; *a01=«-i01 . Ludov. de Dieu has treated this subject more definitely in his Grammar, p. 35 seq. ; according to him the point when above the consonant denotes a, o, and u, under it c, un- der «-k and I ^, and under Q u. \ The principal use of this point in the verb, is to denote the different persons and tenses (v. Amira, p. 51 ; Lud. de Dieu, p. 37). Throughout the preterite, with the exception of the 1 sing., it stands under the radicals. In the parti- ciple, it denotes, over the first radical, in Peal, JL, in Aphel, _L, or in Verbs med. Vau, ^. In the imperative and infinitive it may be omitted or written underneath. The future takes it only under the radicals, not under the preformatives, with the exception of the 1 sing., where it stands above it (comp. Isenbiehl, Beobachtungen von dem Gebrauche des Syrischen Puncti diacritici bei den Verbis, Göttingen, 1773). § 5. Kushoi and Rulwh (^jläOD — yDo'i)* 1. [According to Lud. de Dieu and Norberg,yhe Syrians have in fact the Sheva, and pronounce a vowelless consonant with a short half-sound of e ; e.g. ^QOJ pronounced n^ hum. Someterammarians,as Amira^ P-42, and the Zabians} use JL« So too, 'according to Asseman^ the doubling of consonants in pronunciation (Daghesh forte) occurs among the Oriental Syrians, and, according to the analogy of the Hebrew, in Pael ^^ and Ethpaal of Verbs ^a and Ml»* But as the doubly written consonant falls away where analogy would require it to be retained (§ 8), this grammatical usage is still very doubtful. This duplication is retained only in foreign words. 2. Analogous withDaghesh lene is Kushoi,{i.e. hardening), '; a red point inserted over the aspirates, in manuscripts, which removes the aspiration. The retention of the aspiration is indicated by a point placed underneath, called Rukok (i. e. .softening:). ^ * it should be borne in mind that Sheya and Daghesh are not, in I ' Syriac, denoted by any written characters, and appear only in pronunciation. Tr. RIBÜI. 33 Rem. — Some consider Kusboi to be Daghesh forte, which is denied (^y Amira and Gabriel Sionita. Lud. de Dieu, p. 25 sq., places il; a) at the beginning of words, except where ^O,^ precede, or where the preceding word ends in %ji , O , ( , in wKich case Rukok is retained; e.g. l , i Sn\ Z, l , a V)\A Ü; b) in the middle, after a quiescent letter ; e. g. 01^ .NV) ; c) after dipthongs ; e. g. A^ ; IZqSd, with the exception of y^af as. Rukok, on the contrary, occurs, besides the cases noted under a above ; a) when one of the aspirates ends a syllable, but is in the same case hardened by a preceding vacant consonant ; e. g. ^J^M ; ^) when, according to Hebrew analogy, they follow a movable Sheva ; e. g. (A3)Q2 ; c) after an open syllable ; e. o". \rA' ^0 ^^^ these consonants are not pronounced as aspirates in Pa and Ethpa. of Verbs ^, when the J preceding them has fallen away ; e. g. •qXdZ from ^\fij ; and in verbs with the middle radical doubled, where, in Hebrew, Daghesh forte stands. Furthermore, here belong the letters in which one having fallen away before them, is to be com- pensated for, in the future and infinitive of verbs «.^2), or in general where Daghesh forte euphonic stands in Hebrew. These points do not occur in printed works. § 6. Hi^ui (^ao>). '^^^"? 1. To distinguish the plural of nouns and verbs from the singular written with the same consonants, the Sjriac makes use of jRihui, i. e. two points placed horizontally over the word. This sign is still retained, like the vowels, in printed books. Thus, by means of these points | nNV) is read 'i'i \V7 the Icings^ and distinguished from |n\V) , the king. This sign is also used in the 3 plur. fem. pret. of Yerbs ^rad. Olaph in all the conjugations except Peal (§ 32), to distin- guish it from 3 sing. masc. ; e. g. 1 1 S yM they have praised themselves ,from « i S ■ >■ Z] he has praised himself. In like manner Kibui strengthens the distinction between the 3 plur. pret. masc. and fem., where the formatives Q and %a. at the end sometimes fall away from the 3 sing, masc; e. g. ^"^^ =■ Q^4^, -'^t^^- The plurals, which are easily recognized, re- 3 34: MEHAGYONO AND MAEHETONO. main without this designation, though it is not omitted in plural forms with suffixes. In numerals the usage is arbitrary. Some mark with this sign only the feminines, and the forms with suffixes ; e. g. ^ZJlZ, tOauj-lZ. Rem. — Amira, p. 48, omits Ribui, when the plural form ^ (§ 44) has the signification tOJI or tOGLtAaf, i. e. they are^ but adopts the above-mentioned use in numerals, and uses it also with prepositions joined with plural suffixes (§ 16. c). 2. Eibui also serves to denote collectives ; e. g. 1;02 a heeve^ Vfö^ a herd of heeves. RexM. — When Ribui stands over h (with the exception of the 1 sing, pret. and fut., and the participles Act. Pe., according to § 4. Rem.), A^f-m coincides with a diacritical point representing — , one of the points is omitted. When three points come together, one of them represents Kushoi. § 7. Mehagyono and Marhetono. (Ill^OllD _ Woi-r!^). When an accumulation of consonants without vowels, occurs, and the Syrians wish to indicate that a monosyllabic word is to be pronounced as a dissyllable, or a dissyllabic word as a trisyllable, and so on, they place a line under the consonant to which a vowel (usually — more rarely — ) is to be supplied ; e. g. *|ALx»j. This line is called Mehagyono, and denotes a removal of this accumulation in utterance (Diaeresis). If, on the contrary, the voice is to hurry over these same consonants, a line is drawn above them, which is called Marhetono ', e. g. IAdjI. RexM. 1. — Some Grammarians place Mehagyono only before ;M^r).i and before **. in |A**^j. Amira, p. 41. sq., compares the two with Diceresis and Synceresis^ which may have been transferred from prosody into prose. (Vd. Chrestom. Syr. ed. Hahn et SiefFert, Lips. 1825. p. 11). ^^ Rem. 2. — Sometimes a line is found over consonants ; a) in numei Jl; e. g. %i^LJk 12 ; h) in abbreviations ; e. g pO for f a^rJO ; c) over the paMle of exclamation Of, to distinguish it from 0|. LINEA OCCULTANS. 35 § 8. Linea Occultans. This line placed under consonants denotes ; a) that the letter under which it stands is not pronounced; e. g. Z;Q (§ 12. 1); h) that 1 at the beginning of a word, followed oj Ol is to be pronounced weaker, and like 1 ; e.g, »Oil (vid. §1. Kem.4) ; c) that the letter quiesces,viz., in the imper . of the pass. Ethpeel and Ethpaal ; e. g. ^^y^^Z), pronounced ethkail^ and imp. from ^01) ; which with the transposition of the first two j-adicals is ^JOl (comp. § 12. 1). Rem. — Some have extended this also to the imperatives Ethtaphal and Eshtaphal ; but in the latter especially, it appears to be merely a diacritical designation of the imperat. As such it may in general be regarded as coming under b and c above. § 9. Tone. 1. The tone stands regularly upon the penultimate sylla- ble, when the ultimate does not terminate in a üpaovable^ consonant ; e. g. ]t^\v> , Mdlco.t,^ .^ ■ '■ n ^ Rem. — In an accumulation of consonants, where by Mehagyono (§ 1) the penultimate syllable becomes the antepenultimate, the tone remains upon the stem-syllable. It is more difficult to determine whether words, which, according to Amira, p. 462, have Q in the penultimate, follow the same rule ; e. g. Ijcu^I, and should be pronounced achuno or achuno. 2. The tone is on the ultimate, when it ends in a"|»©^ consonant ; e. g. «^A^ ; so too with Q and w». final, if they have arisen from 2q and Al ; e. g. on\V) from 2onSv>. vid. Amira, pp. 467 — 469. § 10. Sig7is of Inierpunction. The Syrians, who do not possess the Hebrew systeni of accents, divide their periods, (according to Amira, p. 475, dnto 36 GENERAL VIEW. protasis and apodosis, which again are subdivided into smaller parts, and include the more precise designation of subject and predicate. In this respect they designate ; a) the separate members of the protasis with (•); h) the close of the protasis with (••), which is also the sign of interroga- tion ; c) the separate members of the apodosis with (♦♦), which also marks longer interrogations ; and d) the close of a period is marked by a point, which as it also occurs in the middle of a period, some consider to be the smallest mark of interpunction, and (♦) or (♦♦) the largest point. Rem. — Amira, p. 479, mentions a point standing over a word which indicates a question, address, admiration, praise, command, and the like. CHAPTEK II. Peculiaeities And Changes of the Lettei^. §11. General View. As the changes in the different parts of speech are effected partly by consonants and partly by vowels, this chapter is naturally divided into two parts. In the first place, those changes which take place uniformly, in accordance with fixed laws, in pronouns, verbs, and nouns, must be accurately distinguished from those which occur only in individual forms. Though the former class of changes will be here principally treated, yet in order to afford a proper connection between them, that which occurs universally will be first treated of, and that which takes place in special and individual cases will be appended, either independently or in remarks. § 12. Changes of the Consonants. Of those changes in the radical consonants which Hebrew grammarians classify as Assimilation, Transposition, Falling CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS. 37 away, Exchange, and Addition, the first only is wanting in Syriac. And this want is only in form, for in point of fact this feature exists in those cases where a letter is dropped in pronunciation by the occurrence of Linea occultans (§ 8. (iomp. Gresenius, Lehrgebäude, p. 132). Here should be no- ticed the following — 1. Consonants are dropped in pronunciation, by the occurrence of Linea occultans, as follows : A) In General; a) in nouns whose middle radical is doubled ; e. g. pjlo mano ; b) > without a vowel before 2; e. g Vh^ ; c) Ol in suffixes of the 3 masc. sing. »^Oi , .jOIO , »aOLi., ^oiOi. of the verb, and »aOlQ of the noun plural (v. Table to § 16); or when Linea occultans has arisen from theGreek Spiritus asper ; e.g. . >v>nm; cpc^pi^yj . ^/) o in derivatives of verbs »a^and ]a, as (ajOQ* from j^* : B) In particular is this the case ; a) with I initial in ^^-»^1 , ^♦•**l , **J! » ^^^ in the pronoun PI in connection with the participle, '\l\ I^m ; h) with Ol, particularly in the following cases ; a) in the pronouns 001 and ^01 , with the throwing back of the vowel upon the preceding vacant consonant ; e. g. ooi Ajlj^ ; or with the falling away of the letter with the preceding vowel ; e. g. GO! |aO pronounced k'^ sheu ; in which case, however, before 001 , — passes into — ; e. g. OOl p] for \i\ ; ß) in looi (v. § 38) when it is an auxiliary verb ; e. g. looi ^\J^ he had killed ; 7) in .äOU for ,^0U to give \ c) with ^ in ^ll to go aicay^ when it should have a vowel which falls back upon the 1 ; e. g. Allffor ASi| (v. § 28) ; d) with J in the pronouns tS\ masc. and ^tS\ fem., and their plurals .oAj I masc. ^Aj I fem., and in some other words ; e.g. (Al* \ and finally ; e) with i in L\Ci daughter ; (v. § 8). Rem. — Linea occultans is retained under f in nouns derived from those adduced under a \ e.g. fZoi i m] , '\L\jS\ . IZqju] , nnd many 38 CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS. Others. It also occurs in (j| , 001, and ^»01 when they are «sed for the logical copula or substantive verb (comp. § 16. 1., § 54. A. 3. a and c). In these pronouns, even when thoy stand pleonastically (§ 55. A), the logical copula is fundamentally involved, as is con- 10 OCn (§ 68. A), which verb loses Linea occultans only when it is used absolutely in the sense of to he, to become^ to come to pass ; As to further inflection of 7 luOOL» compare § 29. 1. Rem, 2. Transposed is I before sibilants in Ethpe.^ MhjM.^ and Eshta.; e. g. ^aI^Aco] from IJco , w*)0A»l from ^JO». 2 1 "^ ^t 'S is changed into *^ after . , into > after ]; e. g. •.m.SQ^ • | for •.*a.Sd»21|, ^?1| for ^Kl« There is no transposition when is doubled in Ethpe. of Verbs «.aJ^ and Ql ; e. g. ^▲TOZZf (v. §31. 2). ( as middle radical is sometimes transposed; e. s^. •.mO (Z|' from <^^* Also J in the imperat. from •.^CJlJ (v. § 8). « 7 3. Dropped are ; a) | with Linea occultans ; e. g. *,aJ^ for *äJ| ;o and as first radical in the 1 sing. fut. Pe. intin. and part. Pa. of Verbs ]si (§ 28. 1); e. g. ^Qol for ^QdII ; and in ^] for ^ ^] ; b) «-a and J as first radical, and Q as middle radical in Verbs *^ (§ 29. 2), ^ (§ 38. 1), and Ql (§ 31. 1) ; e. g. *QSik) from -QSJ. Here belong such nouns as ]i.QdSD for Ho^l^ The same is true also in respect to the middle radical of Verbs Ml (§ 34. 1), and the nouns derived therefrom ; c) one of two Z without a vowel standing between them ; e. g. jZ^^ for IZZpjs*. Also when three Z stand together in the fut. pass. ; e. g. ^\^L1 for ^^iollL Finally Z falls away at the end of the fem. end- ings Zq and Aa. ; e. g. oa^ikiD for Iq2l\^. ■ j^ ■ 4. — Exchanged are ; a) the gutturals 1 ^^ | before 01 ; e. g. 'r^O\\ for ;-iOll ; h) in transferring Hebrew words into Syriac, f passes into > , ^ into »^ , «^3 i^to Z , sometimes -^ into -i and J ; also ") of verbs 13? into 01 ; e. g QUIESCENT LETTERS. 39 Zaia = tlJ^S ; c) Z, when transposed with sibilants, in the passive, goes over into j and »^, according to Kern. 2. above; r/) 1 with Z in the construct state fem., and before suffixes (§§ 45, 46); and in the Mhpe. and ^^/ipa. of verbs ]si (§ 28. 1 Kern. ; e. g. r**ZZ1 for h^IZ]» Rem. — This last has been also applied to nouns derived from \£i Verbs; e.g. ^mJL from vmJ|» In many cases this usage is doubt- ;...£ which may be derived from ;.•£ or J.. (♦ Hence the form IrvtlZ is found. The derivatives from. Aphel do not belong here; e. g. jAujoZ from «->>0(* 5. — Added are ; a) sometimes ] at the beginning, before a vacant consonant ; e. g. Zool for LoD ; wiÄs] for «^A» ; also in Greek words beginning with 2 ; e. g. ^Qa,4^1 = 5-a(Jiov ; ^) 01 to denote the Spiritus asper in Greek' words ; e. g. |u.Sdoo1) 'PwfAajoj (§ 12. 1. A. c); even in compound words in the later Syriac ; e. g. «JCDOjOlJQCD (fv)/oSog ; and in cases where Ol does not reprf^SQnt -Spiritus asper ; e.g. %cco;^Ol2) UsTpog ; c) J is added where it supplies the place IP 7 § 13. Quiescent Letters. The vowel-letters ^, o, 1, and, according to some, 01 also, quiesce in the preceding vowel. Rem. — Here belongs only 01 ; for cfl of the suf. 3 sing. fem. = jTf of the Hebrew. The following letters quiesce : final in — and — ; e. g. P.i , Jj.^ ; 1 medial in — and — ; e.g. ^^dISd , ;SdPD ; and if it have a vowel, this falls back upon the preceding vacant consonant ; e. g. \\mJ for ^|mj. And so in words transferred from the Hebrew; e. g. »Op == ^Jj^^» 40 VOWEL-LETTERS WHICH ARE NOT SOUNDED. Rem. — ] quiesces in — in {SD^, X^, I i f and |)2)Z(* In Greek words » and on are represented by ( — , a» sometimes by wkf — ; e.g. 1Zao)o xiß(^rog ; (CDj|o xa»poj. In the later Syriac ] stands for a and s. 2. o quiesces in — ; e.g. ^Q£) , and sometimes OQ ; e.g. ]l>OQi (§3. Eem. 4). Rem. — In Greek words O quiesces m — , in the termination «QOQ = 0^ ; e. g. «JCOO*^ > N»*'^ == ^iXi-tt-ttoj. «ISQ is also used for ajj ; e. g. %flDQOj( ^ «fX"'^- ^^ ^^® ^^*®^ language we find also .rDQljiZ( = 'Aär]va»j ; *CDQO>| = ctp^«^. 3. «X, medial and final, quiesces, in — and — ; e. g. ^jlL, wi^..Zl» wft initial usually quiesces in — ; e. g. ^^, and — falls back upon the preceding vowelless prefix ; e. g. 7 1 7 1 Ql,uO for Qlr^aO« Also between two consonants Jk. quiesces in — ; e. g. l/uj{ for l^LiJl. § 14. Vowel-Letters which are not sounded (Otiant). In the following cases «-i, O, 1, are not sounded ; 1. ] in the pronouns 2 plur.masc. and fem. ,oAj1 , ^AjI conjoined with the participle to denote the present tense, e, g. ioAjI ^iN^ pronounced koielitun^ in which case the ^ of the participle is not sounded. 2. O and «a at the end of words ; a) in verbal endings without any vowel preceding (2 pret. sing. fem. ; 3 plur. masc. and fem.; imperat. sing. fem. and plur. masc. ; and 2 fut. sing, fem.) ; e. g. ^AL^^ , CL^^n ; h) in the suffixes 7 7 «ji , «A^ , t in I , , «uGlQ , where wi. is sounded only when fol- lowed by ooi ; e. g. ooi «inn pronounced hehyu ; c ) in > i Nv^ Zl yesterday, «i\» rest, and the like, which form ^ in the emphatic state ( § 46. 1). CHANGES IN THE VOWELS. 41 § 15. Changes in the Vovjels. Althongli to a less extent than in- Hebrew, the vowels in Syriac, "undergo various changes and modifications in res- pect to formation and derivation, still they are exchanged, transposed, dropped or added. 1. They are exchanged partly in accordance with the genius of the language, and partly in transferring Hebrew and Chaldee words. The genius of the language requires the following exchanges of vowels ; a) in the preformatives of the fut. and infin, Pe. in simple syllables, in Verbs \zi , wiÄ , (t»-M § 32), — passes over into — ; e. g. ;5^M, AP^ ; but before gutturals and > at the end of words, inta — ; e.g. j^ for >p« ; b) in the feminine with |— , — , in the con- struct state, passes over into — ; e. g. j£i4 construct state Lcii (§ 45. 2). In transferring words from the Hebrew and Chaldee, the following vowel changes may be noted ; a) for — the Syriac prefers — ; e. g. Wit = nbti 5 ^'1 = d1i< ^ T \k "^ T _ T T -: b) "TT is exchanged in proper names mostly with — ; e. g. QfiQjLl = 1^3? ; — with — ; e. g. wmAsl» = nSTlÖ*! ; ^) 1 with T •• • ~ : ■ Q— ; e. g. ]*jQO = tlflp ; or with Q- ; e.g. "toCL» = (Chald. 2. Vowels are transposed ; A) in general; a) Q in the im- perat. plur. masc. Pe. when a suffix is added ; e. g. ol^Q^O, with suffix »aOloS^no ; b) concerning the falling back of the vowel over 1, *a, or Oil, upon prefixes, compare § 13. 1.3; §52. 1; §53.1. Kern.; B) in Particular ; a)in^l), vrhen- ever 1 is vacant, the vowel of the ^ falls back upon it ; e.g. A^l| for A^ll (§12.1) ; b)m some nouns of the form *»0*^pO, when a syllable is appended and in the emphatic state li>Q£) (§ 45. 3 ; § 48. A. Decl. IV) ; of the form Xfik, emphatic state 12,0*=^ ; c) in ^^y^ao and iOjOD with 1. prefixed, Q is placed before n when a and j retain their — ; e. gf. -SoqqS^, - .^ VAr^nV. In A when it enters into 4:2 CHANGES IN THE VOWELS. composition, — moves forward upon r ; e. g. ^^a^X ISo^li* 8. The vowel of a final mixed syllable is dropped^ wKen an entire syllable is added at tlie end, especially when the last radical begins the new syllable ; e. g. in the verb ^\4o masc. AX4o fem.; in the nouns *,i»sV), )a!^!^«* Kem. — This vowel remains unchanged ; a) when merely a formative letter, without a vowel, is added ; e.g. Q^^D from ^^h6^ ; ^) when a syllable is added, if the stem-syllable remain a mixed one ; e. g. ^oA^4^ from v^hS^ ; and moreover ; c) when the stem-syllable becomes a simple one, in the following cases ; a) in the second form of the 3 fem.plur.pret.and 2 fem. plur. imperat.; ß) where inHebrew Daghesh forte stands ; e. g. ^Ol emphatic state (SDI (ü;^, ^72'$) '■> 7)in words ofDeclension I.masc. (comp. § 48.A). In ^^iJL emphatic state \1.aJL\ ^CU emphatic state P^Cl*, the original vowel only reappears (comp. 48. A. Decl. IV). 4. Vowels are added; a) with \ w», and 1, at the begin- ning of words ; 1 and 1 usually take — and — ; e.g. \iQO\ (imp.), jOll : but ^ usually takes — ; e. g. *£5Aji ; b) of two vacant consonants at the beginning of a word, the first takes — ; e. g. |*V)an for t>V)an ; so also when two vacant consonants ni the middle of a word follow — ; e. g. |i\Aj^O for lA>*'r£D ; or when in Hebrew, the first has Daghesh forte ; e. g. U^.^for T^'pyif from tll^i^ ; or finally when three vacant consonants would come together in the middle of a word ; e. g. Al^^Z] for ZCi^^Zl. This assumed vowel is sometimes — ; e.g. AS40 (pret. Pe.) from ^^s-fevO ; or ■ — • before jl, (v. § 13.3), excepting in the emphatic state of the participle fem. pass, of Verbs ]j in Pa., Aph., and 7 , Eshta., where — is added to distinguish it from the.^active participle (comp. § 48. B. Decl.IV. Eem.). Finally Q is as- sumed in the emphatic state sing, of some words ; e. g. VAii^oaSo from WalsD for 1 Alsik) ; c) a vowel is assumed with Q between tAvo vacant consonants : this vowel is _!. when it stands at the beginning of a mixed syllable ; e. g. CHANGES IN THE VOWELS. 43 •QoZOp** ; but — when it stands in a simple syllable ; e. g. (ZOpM . d) The assumption of a vowel is arbitrary, when there are two vacant consonants, of which the first can be attached to the preceding, and the second to the following syllable ; e. g. |M>n,V) and ]M.2rSo; if the second consonant be (, — must be assumed, for a, Q and | cannot stand without a vowel between two consonants. PART SECOND. ETYMOLOGY, OR, PARTS OF SPEECH. CHAPTER I. PRONOUNS. § 16. Personal and Possessive Pronouns. The Personal Pronouns are divided into two classes : Separate Pronouns^ which stand as separate words, and mark the nominative case ; and Suffixes^ consisting of syllables formed from the separate pronouns, which are appended to other parts of speech ; appended to Yerbs, they mark the accusative ; appended to nouns, the possessive pronoun, or the relation of the genitive ; and, with preposi- tions, they form the remaining cases. TABLE OF PRONOUNS AND SUFFIXES. 45 TABLE OF PRONOUNS AND SUFFIXES. SEPARATE. SUFFIXED TO VERBS. SUFFIXED TO NOUNS. <•• J. e. In Sing. In Plural. Sing. 1. 2. 1 1 c. m i 7 7 1 P %Ai 7 Ob 2 m. AjV 1 >-^ ^ >-- * >*- 7 2 f . -AjV ^^^11. «jlD £> ^A^ wa::! 7 3 m. 001 1 01_j I 1 — — «uOIjl oil 7 «aOIQ 1 OCT ^OIQjk «aOIQ 3 f. f X ■ ^01 . p C7U_ 01 01 * . p Ol CT.' Plur. 1 c. 7 7 7 r V p ^ 7 2 m. 2 f . 3 m. 1^1 * Ok P •X 7 -« 7 •X 7 tOOLfe. SEPARATE FROM THE V] SRB. 3 f. ^T ^CT ■» 7 ^OIa. 46 REMARKS AND EXPLANATIONS CONCERNINa THE TABLE. Remarks and Explanations concerning the Table. I. Tlie Personal Pronoun. The second and third persons have two genders, while the first person is of the common gender. The fem. of the 2 sing., is denoted by «u. appended to the masc. In the 3 7 sing. OCT masc. and *aCT fem., are used rather in a demon- s' X strative sense, while OCT masc. arid »-»CT fem., are used in connection with adjectives and participles rather to designate the present tense. And so in the plur., the first forms given above are used rather substantively as nominatives, and the second as accusatives (comp. § 36). Concerning Linea oc- cultans under ] and CT of the 1 and 3 sing., see § 12.1. II. Suffix Pronouns, A. Suffixes of the Verb. In the suffixes, or abbreviated forms of the separate pro- nouns, an ancient obsolete form whose characteristic was not Z but O, lies at the basis of the 2 sing, and plur. (comp. Gesen. Lehrgeb. 203). Of the suffixes to verbs, given in the Table, tbose marked a, fall into two classes ; the first of which are attached to con- sonants (with the exception of ^ ) in the forms of the regular verb ; and the second mainly to the same forms of Yerbs |J, and in part to the imperat. and fut. of the regular verb. The forms placed between 1 and 2, are common to both. The suffixes marked h are appended to forms with Q and •Jb^ which then quiesce in Jl and JL. Where this form is wanting under h it is comprehended under a. Finally the suffixes under c are attached to the forms with ^, and also to the i> sing. masc. and 3 plur. fem. pret. The forms wanting under c are comprised under a. On their mode of union, comp. ^^%Qj and 37, and the accompanying Tables. B. Suffixes of Nouns or Possessive Pronouns. The suffixes of the noun (possessive pronouns) are attached, in nouns masc. sing., to the emphatic state (§ 45,) with the SUFFIXES TO PARTICLES. 47 falling away, of I- ; e.g. .^iSV) , emphatic state ]n\V>, with suff. «>^\^» In the plural thej coalesce with the end- ing of the construct state va., so that they may be considered as attached to the final consonant of the noun ; e.g. construct state « 1 'SSV), with sufF. y > n\V)» Only in the 3 sing. masc. does vA. pass into Q, and in the 3 sing. fern. JL is the union vowel. In the noun fem. the suffix with a union vowel is attached to the emphatic state, with the falling away of ]«-, e. g. OlAi^oAQ from emphatic state lA^oAo» In the remaining persons (1 sing. 2 and 3 plur.) suffixes sing. are attached to the construct state (v. § 46. 2) ; e. g. wiA^oAi) from the construct state Ai^oAo, plur. wi^A^oAo from construct state Ai^oAo« Rem. — For the complete union of nouns and suffixes, compare §§ 46 — 48, and the accompanying Tables. Besides, the possessive pronoun may be expressed in a separate form from the noun, by means of some form of ^^-»> (from J = -]>;2?^ chald. 1*7 and ^ ) with a suffix, thus ; Plural. Singular. FEM. 1. ^^? ^^^* 2. ,^iONi> |Cia^) > your. FEM. CpMM. MASa * iSi> my. 3. ^OUi^) ^Oau^> their. \ C71Xa9 her. OlXi9 his. Rem. — This form, which corresponds with the German der meinige (mine)etc. occurring after a suffix to the noun, indicates an emphasis ; e. g. y>^} «^1*, »V>NZo, but thy scholars. Sometimes it signifies relating to; e. g. ^Qn^> to us. C. Suffixes to Particles. The Prepositions^ which were in part originally nouns, take suffixes sing, and plur. Singular suffixes are attached 48 OTHER PRONOUNS. to *0 m, L the sign of the dative, 2q!^ to, ^lo from^ jAms and >A£) after ^ ^non\ towards^ against^ comp. § 15. 2. Plural suffixes are attached to >Qi»»\r3 aside^ only , iSN*^ without^ i,-M or ^Jj-M a6ow^, ^SlL*^for^ ^X^ oi;er, jK or ^. towards^ after ^ ^yO 5e/öre, 2qa*2 {L^a^L before nouns) under. The suffix plural fern, occurs with ^^^^2^ on account of ; e. g. ^tc^^^iD ; with both plural suffixes and Al lO betiueen. Rem. — For the complete union with suffixes, compare the Tahlo belonging to § 52. § 17. Other Pronouns. 1. The Demonstrative Pronoun is declined as follows : Plural. Singular. F. C. M. R M. -^^ ... ^«^^'1 1j<5, (,a.) , ^ai^ ). these. (V»01) [""■'• IjOI [ '*'■*• J 01 is united with the *• ^ . ' ^ personal pronoun 3 sing. masc. 001 and fem. «-»Ol, forming QJOl and 10 9 •\ I *0 (7 -X JOI» Sometimes 001 and t-iOl precede; e.g. pOl OGl just this, IjOl %jkö\just this. The Chaldee ,^»N>| is only used in compari- sons; e. g. -^'f ^t?, or _k^01 ^t> such. 2. The Relative for all numbers and genders is j, who, which^ that, and with the pronouns ^So c. M-il m. 1r»l / ^> ^if pi. com. preceding, it becomes interrogative. »p ik7 Rem. — P-*l having a relative signification with J following it, is an exception to the general rule. 8. The Interrogative ; a) for persons of both genders and numbers is ^^sD who. It unites with 001 following, and THE VERB GENEKAL VIEW. 49 forms OJlO and \ij] masc. who f Vr-il fern, who f h) liD and ^Sd what^ refer to things ( Uio, lOk) ) ; c) ^^iSi] refers to both persons and things. 4. The Reciprocal and Reflexive Pronouns are formed partly by passives (§ 21. 2. § 22. 2. § 24. 2), or by the nouns luaj soul^ and ]iDQJj3 person^ with suffixes appended (comp, the Syntax). CHAPTER II. THE VERB. § 18. General View, 1. The Yerb is, as in Hebrew, the most important of the parts of speech, since it lies at the basis of the formation of the others. Yerbs may be divided into the three following classes, in so far as new verbal forms are derived from them in accordance with definite laws, or as a noun is to be considered as their stem: a) Primitives'^ e. g. *pAd to write^ VH^ to hill ; h) Verhal Derivatives {Conjugations) ; e. g. J3J1 tojusUfy^ from *0>1 ; c) Denom^nat^ves^ subsequent 7 7^ 7 formations from nouns ; e. g. ^EQ^ tQ tithe ^ from ;IX11 ten ; o^^^f to celebrate Easter* f?r^\w\^%»*^ Easter. 2. The Stem-form in the 3 sing. masc. pret. consists usually of three radicals (verbum triliterum), and is pronoun- 7 ced as a monosyllable, by the help of — placed over the middle radical in transitive, and — in intransitive verbs. 3. From this are formed the Derivatives or Conjugations, which agree closely with the ground-form in the inflection of persons, and the principal characteristics of mood and tense. Modern grammarians have added a third conjugation, ^a^hel, to the two originally derived from the ground-form. The passive is formed by prefixing 2*1, and has not only a passive but also a reciprocal and reflexive signification. 50 THE KEGULAR VERB. The Conjugations are as follows ; Actwe. Passive. 1. Peal ^\^ to kill;* Ethpeel ^Jy^Zfl 2. Pael ^^>4^ ^^ murder ; Ethpaal ^^^.^Z]» 3. Apliel ^4^1 to cause to kill ; Ethtaphal ^^^ZZfl 4 Shaphel ^^^i^^jClM to cause to kill (rare) Eshtaphal ^4^A*1'1 Rem. — All verbs do not have the whole of the conjugations ; and wherePael andAphel are found together, there is usually a difference 7 7 ^ l' in their signification; e. g. pCU to honor ^ r^Of ^o he burdensome. 4. The Syriac, like the other Semitic dialects, has a Pre- terit and Future. It has, moreover, an Imperative in the passive, and two Participles, an active and a passive, in the active. The Hebrew Infinitive absolute and Infinitive con- struct are in Syriac united in one form (v. § 19.B.8). Rem. — The other relations of time are supplied in the following manner ; the Present is expressed by the participle with the personal 10 001 ( ^^rt, T T the former joined with the participle, the latter with the preterite. The Optative and Subjunctive^ are contained in the future, to de- note which more explicitly, 1 001 is also frequently used (v.Syntax). 5. Verbs, finally, are divided into two principal classes, Regular and Irregular. In regular verbs the radical letters remain unchanged, while in irregular verbs, one of the rad- icals either falls ^\y^j {Defective Verhs)^ ot quiQ^QQS [Quies- cent Verbs) V. § 27. 1. EEGULAR VERBS. § 19. The Inflection of Regular Verbs in General. The formation of Verbs, in respect to person, tense, and mood is effected, in general, by uniform laws. The irre- gular verbs are formed in a different manner, in particular *Literally, he killed, etc. The infinitive being considered in English the ground-form of the verb, and for the sake of brevity, is uniformly used to represent the Syriac ground form 3 masc. sing. — Tk. REGULAR VERBS. 51 cases only, according to their special laws. It will therefore be most convenient to treat, under the regular verb, of what- ever belongs to the universal analogy of the verb. In the following Tables of the Inflection of Regular and Irregular Yerbs, the following signs are used : The radical letters are denoted by *. The vowels which stand imme- diately over the *, belong to the inflection of transitive verbs; and those vowels which are separated from the * by ... . belong to intransitive or guttural verbs, or denote other forms in equal use. Radical letters which have fallen away, are denoted in the Table of Irregular Yerbs, § 27 by ®. Those which take their place, stand over this sign. 52 TABLE OF PERSONAL INFLECTIONS. O >-^ o CO P-i o pq < 1 Future. 1 Singular. CO ■5f ■5f CO * .a* r 1 * * * V5 -^4 H * * * 1 Ü tH * * : .d : ^ CO I* L u r a I. 1 * •1 * .0^ CO '1 ^0^ d * * ^ O : * 6 r-( TABLE OF THE TEMPORAL lOT'LECTION OF REGULAR VERBS. 63 1 1 i 1 1 * 1« 1 «^ # : f * . * * * : .d \^ * ,51 * f * : * 1'^ '^' ^J^ i '-3 '=7 '1 '1 ^ « * ^ ♦ * f * t * * * *d •1 Ph 51 51 a. * ^ * * * : - * : ^^ *ö *o • * <. ' 's 'CT '^ 'C7 '1 '1 §, ^ * 1» * 1- # ►. ♦ ■^ « »■ * »• # > * «^ * •>' ♦ ^^ # * * * i * f ♦ * f # *5 ^51 * ^51 ^51 * ^ # * Pl, ,0 # : * : i ■5t •X- 1 # -< •- -J«- "^ -x- r^ # »■ * ^ * ^ ^0 *.. - i 0) 1 ^ ■je •Jf E ■5f ^ * t— 1 , and ai, the active form of which like- wise takes JL* 5. The preformatives of the fut., infin., and part., mostly take JL ; but in Aphel they take J-, rejecting the 1 accor- ding to No. 2 ; and in Pael and Shaphel they are without a vowel. Rem. — For the reciprocal use of these twoTables, which suffice for the complete formation of the regular verb, it is to be remarked ; that Table I. contains the personal inflection of Peal. The forms in Table II. in the inflection according to Table I., retain their charac- teristic vowels, and merely take from Table I. the aflformatives with the vowels thereto belonging. Where, in pret. Peal, the vowel of the stem falls away, the remaining preterits also lose the vowel of the last radical syllable ; but Ethpe. takes _L over the first radical,where this has JL in Peal.* In the fut. the vowel of the last radical syllable is uniformly lost where Q falls away in Peal, except that in this case also in Ethpe.the first radical takes _!.♦ In imperatives the •X vowel of the last radical syllable is retained, as Q is retained in the imperat. Peal. § 20. A. The ground form Peal — its Formation and Signification. I. The usual form of Peal is ^\4^ {transitive verb med. Ä), Besides this the form with _l (med. E) is always used *Thc iiiflectioQ of the different persons in the preterit should be noticed in order to perceive the verification of this remark. Tk. ITS FORMATION AND SIGNIFICATION. 57 for intransitives ; e. g. ^£it^ to sit, JD'^ to be near. To this class also belong Verbs ]l, which throw back — upon the first radical ; e. g. ,^ p to feel pain, or derivatives of Hebrew Yerbs ^y ; e. g. ^^X{> = ÜÜ- ^ne form Med. 0. still ap- pears in the Verb jQ2i£) to shudder. Rem. — With the inflection of Verbs Med. A. agree those with 3 rad. Ol ; e. g. GlSbs to name, OlLoZ to admire. Verbs Med. E. retain — , when in Verbs Med. A. — stands in the radical syllable. In respect to the forms of the 3 plur. fern. pret. « iNfeiD, ,^ ■ Nf^ and ^ji4^ adduced by Buxtorf, the first is found only in Verbs (J and the second seems to have originated from crasis with the affix —jtOI* There are instances to be found, though rare, in which — is placed over the third radical in the 1 plur. ^^Nfc^* The apocopate form of the infinitive with Q is also sometimes found in Peal ; e.g. Luke ix. 33. a»;^V)\» In the imperat.plur.masc. with ^ paragogic, Q final quiesces in _ ; e.g. »oNofi^» Besides the 2 plur.fem.with ^, Araira (p. 300) adduces another form, viz : « aNofcx)» The imperat.of Verbs Med. E.takes — instead of Q ; though the transitive form with Q is also found ; e.g. Q^OpD from JD;£}* Sometimes another form with — occurs ; e. g. Rom. xiii. 3. r^l« More rarely the vowel of the imperat. buffers from that of the fut. as in the Verb ^l*), fut. ^1 M, imperat.^1* Not only the imperat. but the fut. of Verbs Med.E. and of those having the third rad. a guttural, take — ; e.g. ;»»01» In the fut. 3 sing. fem. the form with •-> attached is more frequent. A.lso a form of the fut. with — ; e. g. -**^^^ together with la^Nl» Instead of the part. act. ^^.^^j ^he participial noun of the fonn^\^^, emphatic state 0—4^5 is often used. In the part. act. the emphatic state masc. and the absol. fem. are alike ; e. g. |j-4^^ The active form ^1 »»• (Mark xiv. 67), in immediate connection with ^ax9 (verse 54), is perhaps to be regarded as an error in transcribing. The passive form is always fully written ; in intransitive verbs, the first 7 radical sometimes takes — ♦ Passsive intransitives occasionally occur in 58 DEEIVATIVE CONJUGATIONS. an active sense, sometimes derived from transitives ; e. g. ^ .o^ hearing^ r^-*^l holding. To the inflection of tlie participle belongs also the idiom by which the present tense is expressed by abbreviated per- sonal pronouns, appended, like- afformatives^ to the partici- ple. But this formation occurs only in the 2 sing, and the 1 and 2. plur. masc. and fern., and is as follows : Participle Passive, Participle Active. COMM. MASO. w*Zi;4^' 2^14^ 2 Sing. ^ii^4^ 1 Plur. ^KLJ^ ^oAjJSlx^ ^aS^^ ^oZlJ^4^ 2 Plur 2. From the preceding remarks it appears that the signiii cation of Peal may be transitive or intransitive. Sometimes we find both forms in the same verb. In some cases there is no difference of signification ; e. g. tm\\ and »ff>sS to chew ; and in other cases there is a difference in signification; e.g. «^th^^ to divide^ *\V^^ ^^ ^^ divided. B. Derivative Conjugations. § 21. Ethpeel. 1. The characteristic of this conjugation, as in the other passives, is the formative syllable ^f and the vowel — or in Verbs 3 Ead. Grutt. _L, in the last syllable (vid. Amira, p. 278). The passive conjugations are distinguished from each other generally by the vowels over the radical letters, or by the addition of 2 {Ethta.) or by the insertion of * {Eshia.). Rem. — Upon the transposition of the sibilants with Z see § 12. 2. The first radical takes _L in the 3 sing. fem. and 1 sing, pret., in all of the imperat., in the 2 sing. fern, and 2 and 3 plur. masc. and fern. DEKIVATIVE CONJUGATIONS. 59 of the future, and finally in the part, excepting the absolute state masc. According to others — is used, but only in Verbs |l even when ] falls away ; e. g. Acts. xx. 27. AJ^IÄ»!"; ASi\«T^ This usage however is confirmed neither by examples nor by Amira. The 3 sing. fem. and 1 sing. pret. the imperatives, 2 sing. fern, and 2 and 3 plur. masc. and fem. of the fut. and the part, excepting the absolute masc. cannot be distinguished, according to Lud. de Dieu p. 217, from the same persons of Ethpa. excepting when the first radical is an aspirate, which, in Ethpa. becomes hardened. The passive form ^^i^^^l ^s ^^^ mentioned by Amira. In the Verb «£Q£l4, in Ethpe., «^. is inserted between the two final radical letters. The infinitive however is excepted ; e.g. pret. »CQ-iÄ^Zl ; infinit. Qm£i.^A!sO* 2. The signification oi Ethpe. is ; a) passive of Peal; e.g. ^^,^^^1 5 ^) reflexive; e. g. JQaj^ZI to reflect hy or upon ones self; c) = Peal in intransitive verbs ; e. g. U^ and < > 1 <^Z1 to return ; d) sometimes Ethpe, is passive of Aph. ; e.g. ^a-.iAs] to be embarrassed, from ^Q^uil* § 22. Pael and Ethpaal 1. Both of these conjugations are characterized by _L in the penultimate, and j;;_, in Pa., in the ultimate syllable. The vowel is changed into _L , in Verbs 8 Ead. Gutt. or 5, as it is in the passive. The preformative ( of the 1 sing.fut. Pa. alone takes JL (comp. § 19. A. and B. 5). The imperat. Ethpa. with Linea, occultans and the part. fem. Ethpa. are like the same forms in Ethpe. Rem. — The passive form ^^4^^] does not occur in Amira. It is rejected also by Buxtorf. Amira remarks, p. 339, that in XL»ajZf, the second radical takes — only in the imperat. (vid. Matt. ix. 27). Concerning the part. act. and pass, in Pa. vid. § 19. B.4. The form I 7 ^'^ (Mark. x. 16 ) in pret. Pa. must be considered as an incorrect X 7 mode of writing, since ^*,r> (verse 32) is a participial noun. 60 APHEL AND ETHTAP2AL. 2. The signification of Pa. is ; o) causative ; e. g. ^iJsij to cause to he, afraid^ from ^x»j to fear ; h) intensive ; e.g. Mfi^ to overwhelm from M^i^ to press; c) = Pe.; e.g. >n«l and *na1 to hiss ; d) to hold forih^ to declare ; e. g. «JDjl to pronounce just. The signification of Ethpa. is ; a) passive of Pael ; e. g. ^^-4^21 to he murdered ; h) reciprocal; e. g. ;lo>Zl to wonder within one^s self ; c) = Peal; e. g. *2iajZf to he made to hlush, i. e. to 6Zwsä == «ÄQJ» § 23. Aphel and Eihtaphal, 1. Aphel is characterized by \ placed before the stem, which quiesces in _!!♦ After the preformatives of the fut., infinit, and part., 1 falls away, and its vowel falls back upon the preformative. JL occurs in the second syllable, and, only in Verbs 3 Rad. Gutt. and J , is _!. found in that syllable. In the passive, to compensate for the loss of the characteris- tic 1 of Aph., Z mit Jl. is inserted between the stem and the formative syllable of the passive 2]» The final radical syll- able takes — ; e.g. ^*^4^Z21» Rem. — The characteristic ( of Aph. is retained after the prefor- mative, in verbs, which lose a radical letter ; e.g. ^.k.>jpO from ]jLm* Under the same rule should be placed Verbs p; e.g. «A^p or •^(fil]« But the Verbs «.»aJ2Is| to he ahle^ and «aAsf to drink, do not belong here, since _2^ already re-appears over |* They are rather forms of Pe. with ( prosthetic, as is also shown by their further for- mation ; e.g. fut. «axQaJ, infinit. n»»^«V) (comp. § 20.Rem.), part. P. » ■'^*, and the passive «^j^Aa !♦ In respect to the participles of Aphel the same rule holds good as in § 22. 1. Rem. compared with §19. B. 4. Buxtorf and others do not recognize the passive. Lud. de Dieu p. 238, approves of the abridged imperat. with Lin. occult. SHAPHEL AND ESHTAPHAL. 61 ^i^^^^^l» Later Grammarians however doubt the correctness of this form (Comp. § 8. Rem.). 2. The signification of Aphel is ; a) causative as in Pael ; e. g. ^A^l to bring forward; and then it frequently takes two accusatives ; e. g. «miü-L to cause to put on (something upon some one) ; h) imperative or perrnissive ; e. g. «JdoSl to suffer to mount a horse ; c) intransitive ; e. g. ^^Ja^o] to he weak ; d) = Pael ; e. g. ^^Ji* j and ^^J^jl to frighten. The passive has either the passive signification of Aphel or co- incides with Pe.; e.g. »sAa to dwell, *oZoZZ| to keep hoixse. § 24. Shaphel and Eslitaphal. 1. Shaphel is one of the conjugations, admitted into the paradigm at a later period (§ 18. 3). Its characteristic is » with JL prefixed to the stem, and _1 in the »last syllable. In inflection it coincides with Aphel. In the passive (Eshta- phal) occurs the transposition of m and L and _L appears in the last syllable. The preformative of Shaphel, like that of Pael, takes _L only in the 1 sing. fut. Rem. — In verbs which lose a radical letter, this conjugation some- times furnishes a new stem ; e. g. ^Omw» to he blacky from ^QaaS, Shaph. of y>V)»t» The same is true in Eshtaphal. Thus J*jOA*1 furnishes the new quadrihteral «jt^A»!^ 2. The signification of these two conjugations is similar to that of Aph. and Ethtaphal. Sliapliel is, in the examples still extant; a) causative ; e.g. ^ytp* to let fall-, h) inten- sive ; e. g. *<^\»»» to exchange, from «'^N»» to change. Eshta- phal has sometimes a passive and sometimes a reciprocal signification ; or it forms intransitives ; e.g. \y...>A*( to err, io sin. ^ 62 OTHER CONJUGATIONS AND QUADBILITERALS. § 25. Conjugations occasionally used and Quadriliieral Verbs* The occasional conjugations (vid. Agrell in Otiolis Syr. p. 28 sq.) are similar to Pa. and Aph. and take, for the most part, their signification. They are also to be considered as quadriliterals. To verbs, which take the initial, prosthetic letters Lo , CD , Z, and are, A. similar to Apbel, belong ; a) Maphel, ,^^mV) to make pooTj pass. ^aOQSoZf to become poor ; b) Saphel, •jDCTi;CO to permit to hasten and to hasten =^= JDCny] , pass. ^oJI^dAod] to persecute ; c) Thaphel, ,V)NZ to teach. Rem. — For ^SOaCTI (t-iA»] vid. § 23. Rem.) no special form can be assumed, as similar examples do not occur. B. Similar to Pael are those conjugations which insert i*., Sü, r, Ö, after the first radical viz.; a) Panel = Poel, usually transitive ; e. g. ''Ci.. to chew the cud, pass. ijOoZl to become divided ; b) Paiel, transitive ; e. g. f*^-^ to suffer ; c) Pamel ; e.g. ^mSn .»> to remain : d) Parel ; ^yiP* to dance^ pass. ^>;..Z( to be cut off. C. Not very different from the last are also the quadril- iteral verbs with prosthetic *-» and final ^, viz. ; a) Pali = Pael ; e. g. ^LlJ^ to domesticate, pass. •.aAjlaZj to converse 1» 7 7 7 .»-i> with one ; b) Palen, ^a-»> to be master, pass. ^^»Z] to make one a master. D. Here belong quadriliterals with a radical doubled = * 7 Pilel and Pilpel ; a) Palel = Pael ; e. g. Jr^^ to reduce to slavery ; b) Pealel with its pass. y)Sv>\ mZ] to dream, and n -n 7 finally ; c) Palpel (in Yerbs Mii); e. g. ^QCOSuflO to heal, pass. 7 7 J^'^ ^;^)Z| to he broken. Rem. — Those verbs, which are compounded of t^Vo ground forms, 7 7,^ y 7 also belong here ; e. g. ;S^c » | to blush, from MLd • and 'fL • ♦ In quadriliterals formed from the Greek (e.g. »n\A£) to elect a Bishop), VERBS WITH GUTTURALS. 63 a letter of the ground form frequently falls away ; e. g. yt'f^Si to appoint as Patriarch. § 26. Verbs with Gutturals. Since the peculiarities of Guttural Verbs, are not marked in Syriac, as in Hebrew, either by Daghesh forte or Sheva, the irregularities in verbs of which the first and second rad- icals are gutturals are entirely wanting ; and those only, of which the third radical is a guttural or >, deviate, and those in but very few cases from the regular verb, in connection with which these deviations have already been cited. (Con- cerning Yerbs |a, K, and Xf compare §§ 28, 30, 32). For more convenient reference, these cases of deviation are here brought together. These verbs take ; 1) inthefut. and im- perat.Peal, — instead of Q ; e. g., fat. Jr"^ ; imperat. >^; 2) in like manner in the other conjugations, and in the part, act. Peal, they exchange the _i of the last syllable for _L ; e. g. part. act. Peal, 'A^]'- pret. Ethpe. •rSofZf, fut. '^]lj; Pa. pret. >p», fut. j,a3, imperat. )p», part. act. & pass. >r*^; Aph. Pret. M»>1, fut. ^p, imperat. ^>1, part. act. and r 7 pass. M»^» Rem. — In the same manner in Pa. and Ethpa. are formed the following ; 1*^ to console, ]So4 to soil, W • to defile, and 1 f^Zl to be adorned (comp. § 13. 1. Rem). II. Irregular Yerbs. § 27. General View. 1. Under Irregular Verbs, are to be comprehended, those in which there is a change in respect to one of the three letters of the ground form. Such letter either quiesces ox falls away (Quiescent and Defective Verbs). A verb iu which two let- 64: IRREGULAR VERBS. ters of the ground form are changed is said to be doubly an- omalous ( Verbum dupliciter imperfectum). 2. The Quiescent Verbs are the following ; verbs with 1. rad. Olaph (|a), ^o^Of; 1. rad. Jud (o^), ,^; med.rad. Olaph (\l\ ^ji; med. rad.Yauand Jud {oL,^) ^D (y>QD), ZulD; and 3 rad. Olaph (Uj fl'^. ♦ To defective verbs belong those with 1. rad. Nun (_a); e.g. jaSü, and med. rad. doubled (^); e.g. *QIDJ» Rem. — Here, and frequently in subsequent sections, the designa- tions of classes of verbs are taken from the position of the radicals, of the Verb ^ijsÄ (= ^3?5), by which the variations affecting the radical letters of irregular verbs are kept in view. TABLE OF IRREG Verbs M ; \iy%* § 32. Verbs ^1 ; Part. Pe. | Imperat. Pa. | Put. Pe. j Pret. Pe. Pret. Aph. | Imp. Po. ■» p *** P 7 *** 1. Part. P. Pa. | Imperat. Pe. | Infin. Aph. | Pret. Ethpe. Part. Pass, j Imperat. ***As2) ***zi 3PI.f.Fa.Pe. 2 PI. f. Imp. Pe. 1 3 f. 8. Pr. Pa. 3 f. 8. Pr. Pe. 2.A. a. b. Fut.Ethpa. 1 Pr. Ethpe. _iO** L o^ He Zo :»;»: 7 7 * ***Aj 2S.f.Pr.Pa. 1 2Pl.f.Pr.Pe. |2m.8.Pr.Pe. 1 S. Pr. Pe. It It Verbs CIL and «-*.!; »JlZ.0** j^7 ^7 Zo* * Par.Act.Pe. | Pret. Pa. ,1. * o* 3Pl.m.Fu.Pe | 2 8. f. Fut. Pa. | 3m.Pl.Pr.Pe. | Sf.S.Pr.Pe. 2.B. ^.IIL\ 7 o * * S. A. a. Pr. Ethta. | 2 S.m.Fut. *r:2zi .IlLL Part. Pass. | Infinit. | *o*k) Verbs Ml ; Par.Act.Pe. | Pr. Ethta. ^1. * o * 'tm Pr.Ethpa. | Pret. Pa. *;:z] * 7 ü L A E VERB s — Vid. pp. 51 ,63. ^]i. § 30. 1 Verbs ja ; ^t § 28. j Fut. Pe. 1 Pret. Pe. | | Pret. Ethpe. | Fut. Pa. j Imperat. Pe. | Pret. Pe. | || y * ♦ * * J *** 1. ***zi 1» 7 ♦^ 7 7 1> * * * i.l i 1 Future. 1 Pr. Ethpe. 1 1 Infin. Pa. | Fut. Pa. | (2m.Fu.Pe.) 1 l.S.Fut.Pe. j i| ***Aj 1» 2. ^ " 7 **oJ (*Q*oZ) *Q*o 7 1 7 1 2.1 i Fut. Pa. 1 Pret. Pa. | | Pret. Esht. | Pret.Shaph. | Pret. Ethtap. | Pret.Aph. | || ■K 7 1» •» 7 ** * 3. **o A»*| 7 **oZZl '0 * * o 1 3. Ixio, :>a^* § 31. Verbs wi^ ; ^» § 29. Part. P.Pe. i Pret. Pe. | 3f. S. Pr. Pe. 1 Pret. Ethpe. | Imperat. Pe. | Pret. Pe. | *0* 1^ 1. z:*; *:*2i r I * ** * * * 7 1. Future. | Pr. Ethpe. | | Imperat. Pe. | 1 S. Put. Pe. Infin. Pe. | Fut. Pe. | 1| *o*zzi 2. S.I. 2. Fut. Aph. Pret. Aph. Pret. Esht. Pret.Shaph. | Pret. Ethta. | Pret.Aph. ■*-x -■,. 3. *o*I **oZZ1 .0 * * Ol a! 1 Verbs ^ ; J^Zü. I 33. Pret.Aph. 1 Pret. Pe. | | Fut. Aph. | Pret.Aph. | Infin. Pe. | Fut. Pe. | i| (*)-»y (*), * * 1. * 7 * * O J * * o 1 7 * 7 Pr. Ethpe. | Part. P.Pe. | II *I*il * i^ ** 2. VERBS. 67 A. Quiescent Verbs. § 28. Verbs 1 rad. Olajjh quiescent (\2i) vo] to eat. The following are the irregularities of these verbs. 1. In the Pret. Peal, where, in the regular verb, the first radical has no vowel, ) takes JL, but in the imperat. and part, pass., it takes — ; e. g. ^Qol , ^\^^1» If the preform- ative or characteristic consonant of the conjugation be with- out a vowel, the vowel of 1 falls back upon it ; e. g. fut. Pa. ^|j; pret. Ethpe. ^]lt Rem. — In the fut. and infinit.Pe. the preformative takes Jl, in the verbs j^i; ^T, Hi;^, -rCol^jT r-TryO; e.g. ^QolJ,V5oK But — is used in the verbs j£l" %t *2L^, ^X r^X, >«»1^ e. g. ;iO^, ;Sd]Sd* Both of these forms are found in "{!!{* It should further be remarked that the first class of verbs mentioned above, form the fut. and imperat. Pe. like transitives with Q, excep- ting Verbs 3 rad. Gutt. or >, and the second class form them like intransitives with _!_♦ Lud. de Dieu (p. 265), rightly doubts the correctness of the double form of the infinit, and fut. Pe. with _! and JL, although the form ^l|V^\ is found in I Cor. x. 27 ; but the fut. of it is not found with Q,* Also the correctness of ^qXo|Z in 1 Cor. x. 28, is suspected. The forms of the 3 plur. fern. pret. - »N*^! and '^'^f are not approved. The vowel — is sometimes found in the part. pass. Pe. of the regular verb (§20.1. Rem.). In the passives Ethpe. and Ethpa. of the Verb pMf, (is assimilated to the preceding Z; e. g. ^jaZZl» This formation is also found in some other verbs varying little from regular verbs ; e. g. ^Ü)ZZ| and 2. The radical } usually falls away in the 1 sing. fut. Pe.; e. g. ^Qol I will eat, ;k)l I will speak. ] does not so often fall away in the other persons. The same peculiarity ex- ists in the infinit, fut. and part. Pa., and the vowel is thrown back upon the preformative ; e. g. *2l^ and %2i^"ij» 68 QUIESCENT VERBS. Rem. — The Verbs ^1 1 to go away and f Z| to comCy lose ] in the imperat., and form ; ^{, oil. wilf, ^{ ^12, oZ, JZ, 12. 3. In Aphel and Shaphel with their passives, ] is chang- ed into ♦©, and, with the preceding _L , forms au ; e. g. Rem. — In two verbs f is changed into «.a, viz : fZf , Aph. «-iAiftl, imperat. iLif » fiit. 1^ , infinit. Oi^Liio , part. ]Li}jD. (^] , Aph. ^S^liOl = p)2i*^i \i» Only «jDOU takes — ; but where the regular verb takes — over the first radical, — , with Linea occultans under 01, falls away ; e.g. A^GLt* Lin. occultans with — appears in the 3 fem. and 1 sing. pret. with a suffix attached ; e.g. cnÄOCTL» she hau given him (AaCTU)» In 3 plur. masc. and fern, under sim- «V 7 ilar circumstances, Lin. occult, falls away ; e. g. «-lOIOSGLi they have given him (QJDOIa)» 2. In the fut.and imperat.Pe.the second syllable takes J_» In the fut. and infinit. Pe. this class of verbs is similar to Verbs la, and changes a into I which quiesces in — (vid. 1. above). But in the 1 sing. fut. a falls away ; e. g. ^V The imperat. on the contrary retains a ; e. g. ,^» ^ Rem. — Vi^ and t^A^ follow the inflection of Verbs ^ (§ 33) ; * 7 •» 7-h ^ t, 7 -^ e. g. imperat. ^> and *oZ, fut. ^,J and «joAj, infinit. ^,.Sd and «IDAlaO* In like manner *Q01 imperat. from «£^011» follows the same rule. 3. In Aph. and Shaph. with their passives u is changed into o (vid. Yerbs ]a, § 28. 3) ; e.g. ^iol', ^joi. Rem. — A is retained in m!»l and *ni i] ; still it should scarcely be considered as an irregularity, since from ,JL» appear Pa. ,^0, Ethpa. ^0L\. 70 VERBS MED. RAD. VAU AND YÜD QUIESCENT. § 80. Verbs Med. Olaph quiescent (\L) \i\M to ask. The irregularities of these verbs occur only inPe.,Ethpe., and Pa. with its passive. 1. Peal. In the pret. f quiesces in JL and the latter falls back from 1 npon the first radical ; e. g. ^]ii ; but when ^ is the third radical, it quiesces in — standing before T ; e. g. «aU« The vowel — appears in Aph. ; e.g. \\»\* In the imperat. and fut. Pe. 1 quiesces in — ; e.g. ^|ä , ^"ImJ* 2. In Ethpe., besides the regular form ^^iZ*) , — is some times inserted after Z ; e. g. *»)r::Zl^ Rem. — In both cases metathesis of | takes place ; also a duplication of it ; e.g. ^1, ^]1 and ^]2 ; Ethpe.ai£il2l"and **libl2]* 3. In Pa. and Ethpa. 1 is generally changed into ju ; e.g., tOi ^ and ^ClL^L]* The other verbs retain "j ; e. g. ^1A»]I Rem. Both forms are found from 1 1 • (\\i • ] and ]^^ • l)» § 31. Verbs Med. Bad. Vau and Yud quiescent (oi and wii») ^ao (i»OQ£)) to stand up, A>Vn to die. The verbs whose middle radical letter is Q or ju, and whose grammatical structure generally agrees with that of the reg- ular verb, differ from the same in the following cases : 1. In the pret-and infinit.Pe. of Verbs Ql, the vowel ap- pears in place of Q, which is dropped ; e. g. ^QjD, ^onk)» In the part. pass. Pe., and in the other conjugations generally, Q is changed into jl, and quiesces in _!. in the part. P., Pe., Ethpe., Aph. and Ethtaph.; e.g. ^QjdZi, 2>Qx£)ZZ1, JxIad],' VERBS MED. RAD. VAU AND YUD QUIESCENT. 71 On the coutrarj, ^ is movable in Pa. and Ethpa ; e. g. Ullo, ^>alol]* In the part.act. masc. of Pe.,1 (=y, vid. §1. Eem. 4), which has arisen from Q, goes over in the other inflections into a ; e. g. ^(o masc, |V)in fern. Only in the imperat. and fut. Pe., Q remains and quiesces in _L ; e.g. ^QOJ, in which cases, as well as in the pret. (in Yerbs •-*A), o. appears and quiesces in — ; e. g. A.kLo , i»Qa^nj* Finally the preformatives of the fut. Pe. have no vowel, ex- cept the 1 sing., which takes — over 1 ; e.g. ^ao]* Rem. — In Pe., Ethpe., Aph., and Eshta., verbs of this class, which are at the same time P (§ 32), as (oL and some others which can be referred to no particular species, as oaOr, IQiD, retain Q movable. Some are inflected in both ways, but with a different signification ; e. g. JO] to take a handful, Aph. 'fu]] to deviate from the way. r The Verb ^020, contrary to the rule, takes a. in the fut. and imperat. But Zul£> follows the inflection of Ql Verbs ; e.g. fut. ZoSaj» The imperat. of «OOQa* to spare, takes — (.fOn), with the signification, far he it. In some manuscripts Jl. is found in the preformatives of the fut. and in the infinit. Pe., which manner of writing was received by the ancient grammarians, and which, as is testified by Amira, p. 311, the Mandaeans used on account of metre (vid. Lud.de Dieu p. 292). 2. In Ethpe. i of the formative syllable Z] is doubled ; e. g. >»Qjlo2Z% By this, the transposition of the sibilants does not occur ; e.g. MilZZl» When three Z come together in the 3 sing. fem. and 2 sing, and plur. masc. and fem. fut.. one Z is omitted ; e. g. ^cl»-dZZ» The occurrence of three Z together is unavoidable only when the verb itself begins with Z, in which case four Z would properly come in succes- sion ; e. g. ^oloZZl Ps. Ixii. 10, from ^Z» Ethtaph. differs from Ethpe. merely in signification ; e. g. ^CuSll\ Ethpe. to raise one!s self Ethtaph. to he token away. Rem. — tCfi I g^ZZ I to he convinced, Ethtaph.. from «£CLx2)| , is usually written «rfii^^Zl» 72 VERBS 8 RAD. OLAPH QUIESCENT, 3. In Aph. the preformatives of the fat.,infinit.,and part., lose the characteristic JL , excepting the 1 sing. fut. ; e. g. UJ-1^1» The part, pass., contrary to the analogy of other part, passives, changes a. into — ; e.g. ^OQSd, to distinguish it from the active form y^iOV) ♦ Rem. — No example is found of Shaphel. § 32. Verhs 3 rad. Olaph Quiescent (]]j j]-.. to disclose. These verbs, which include the Hebrew jj^i and f^^^erbs, are different from the regular verbs in the following cases. 1. The third radical ] either quiesces or is changed into •a* Here it should be remarked that the pret. Pe. ends in ]-; e. g. ll-y« , the other preterits in *a; e.g. Ethpe. %-A.t2]» The futures of all the conjugations end in ]- ; e. g. Pe. fj-.ip.j , the imperat. Pe. in wil. ; e.g. «-»--^if , imperat. Ethpe. in «-1.- ; e.g. «.i^..Z( ; the other conjugations in p- ; e.g. Pa. |J-...* The termination of the infinit. Pe. is the same ; e.g -<|.-^« The other conjugations in the infinit, end with O»— ; e. g. Aph. CLiA.|^So , the participles generally with ]- ; e. g. Pe. U-yi— Only the part. pass, of Pa., Aph., and Shaph., ends with w»- ; e. g. Pa. w^-^^.^j-Sd» Rem. — Some verbs with «ia« (*a^) in the pret. Pe. are inflected like the other preterits. Here belong mostly intransitives, or Verbs Med. E. ; e. g. «^.^^CD to he great. Both forms are found in the Verbs (SQa and «iV)a to swear. The imperatives of this kind of verbs, take «.k. at the end. Some verbs with 3 rad. He., seem to 7 I 7 belong here ; e.g. OISD« to name, Pa. «>V>»> Some grammarians, VERBS 3 EAD. OLAPH QUIESCENT. 78 without proof, derive from the imperat. Ethpe. the forms )J...Z( and |J-.iL|» The Verb 1 001 has two forms of the future; e. g. (OOU and fOOlJ» In the formation of the present tense in connection with the pronoun, the part, takes «jk. quiescent, instead of f. ; e. g. Aa10>)SD for tS\ \]Oy\liD* From ]l£D to hate appears a double form of the part. pass. ; e. g. {ICO and (ilfin» The former refers more particularly to things, and the latter to persons. 2. When a letter or syllable is added, 1 is either changed into a. or falls entirely away. A. In the first case, jt, is a) movable in the pret. 3 sing. fern, of all the conjugations excepting Pe. of verbs ending in ]L ; e.g. Ethpe. AlS..Zf ( Pe. AS.. ) ; in the second form of 8 plur.fem. ; e. g. Pa. ^-»-i-^.. ; in the 2 phir. fern, of all the imperatives ; e. g. Pe. ^^i iN>t ; in the 2 and 3 plur. fern, of all the futures ; e. g. Ethpe. ^jl^^iAj ; in the fem. sing, and plur. of all the participles ; e. g. Pe. |j>^yi ; and finally in all the infinitives except that of Pe. ; e. g. Aph. o^.^^ (Pe. |J-.^k)) ; ft) A is quiescent in the 1 and 2 masc. and fem. of both numbers of all the preterits, and in such a manner that a. in Pe. (excepting the 1 sing. A^.t ) quiesces in — ; e.g. A^y. , .oAa^.i* In other cases ju quiesces in — ; e.g. Ethpe. A^..ZT, ^oLäS^yM, B. 1 falb away in the 3 sing. fem. pret. Pe. of Verbs ^0 Alf • ending in }-. with — retained ; e. g. A-^\\ ' ^^ ^^ ^ plur. masc. and fem. pret. Pe., and in the 3 plur. fem. (in the 8 plur. masc. Pe. of Yerbs «-&J^ and of other preterits, *a— remains) of all the preterits ; e. g. Pe. Q^ii ; in the fut. throughout in the 2 sing, fem., while the regular form ^ is changed into ^ ; e. g. Pa. ^-i^.tZ, and in the 2 74 VERBS 3 RAD. OLAPH QUIESCENT. and 8 plur. masc. ; e.g. Pe. vP^vjT^ 5 ^^so in the 2 sing. fern, imperat., where w» quiesces in — ; e.g. Pa. ^yi » ^^^^ ^^ ^^'^ 2 plur. masc. imperat., where Q quiesces in — ; e. g. Aph. Q^y,') ; finally in the plur. masc. of the part., where the reg- ular form ^A— is exchanged with ^a« ; e'. g. Pe. , »^^ !i Rem. — Instead of Pa. and Ethpa.,sometimes the quadriliteral form «-»öi^yi appears. The 3 plur. masc. pret. oLyi (with paragog. Nun ^OQ^..) occurs, sometimes with | retained ; e. g. Acts xxviii. 2. ^00(;£)» But the form Ol.. which Buxtorf adduces, is neither confirmed by examples nor found in Amira. In all the conjugations excepting Pe., the 3 plur. fern. pret. differs from the 3 sing. masc. only by taking Ribui (vid. § 6), for which Amira (p. 266) in verbs ending with «a. , and in Pa. of verbs ending with ^ , writes a double a ; e. g. * i »^yi* In the imperat. Ethpe., besides the form given in the paradigm, occurs the 2 plur. fem. > ' a I General Remark. — Verbs )] or «.».L, which are at the same time |l (comp. § 30. 1), are inflected like Verbs ]] ; e. g. pret. Pe. «jilJ. Zufl, AaV, ^AaV, plur. Olli, etc., infinit. l]Ik), imperat. JO, JQ, etc., fut. IpJ, plur. ^OUJ, etc., part. act. fU, pass. 1|J, Aph. pret. «a|j] and «-i^l, infinit. QafJSo, imperat. JuX fut. %a|jJ, part. %a|jSd* APPENDIX TO § 32. Inflection of the Verb \1j^ to live. In the Verb \xm with a movable, a. is rejected when the first radical and the preformative are without a vowel ; e. g. infinit. Pe. V>iD for )a.*j>1o» Sometimes this verb takes } between the preformatives and the first radical; e. g. DEFECTIVE VERBS. 75 V^lüiD (better perhaps ^*]2i)), fut. ]i»J for ]jLmJ and with ] inserted iCU*(j, Aph. pret. ^a^\, infinit. naM.V) or Qj.AiPiD, fut. twJ and pap, imperat. ]ja(, part. t»xk) and p^pi)« a. also falls away when no preformative precedes, and its vowel falls back upon the first vacant radical ; e.g. imperat. Pe. «i »* for «> ■ .I», part. fern. J^-** for (> > »i» The form ^|-m (Matt. XV. 27) is found in the part. plur. masc. B. Defective Verbs. « 7 § 83. Verbs loith the first radical Nun (^) «n^l to ^o ow^. The irregularities of these verbs are the following : — In the fut., imperat., and infinit. Pe., and in all forms of Aph., the first rad. J falls away ; e. g. joqslj, *£)Q2), «n*^V), *Q2)(» The fut. and imperat. Pe. sometimes take — and — : e. g. *rimj, ^^>^* Rem. — The exceptions to this rule are ; a) Verbs Med. Rad. 7 p doubled (§ 34) ; e. g. ^J ; 6) Verbs Med. Rad. Quiescent; e. g. *2ü ; * ,7 • ' "" c) Verbs Med. Rad. 01 ; e. g. JOIJ, fut. 901U« Those verbs whose third radical is # or Z, are not changed by assimilation, as in Hebrew; » 7 ^ -X . -ft e.g. ^XIQaOI we have believed^ tOZAwJ ye have descended. TheVerb »nmi to mount up^ takes its pret. and part. Pe. from «nVciO (vid. § 35.2). Upon retaining the characteristic ] in Aph.; e.g. P|Z forpj. Comp., § 23. 1. Rem. § 34. Verls with Med. Rad. doubled (Ml) «ma>S to sprinhle. In respect to these verbs it should be remarked : — 1. That the middle radical falls away in the pret., infinit., 76 DOUBLY TRREGULAK AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. imperat., and fut. (having — over the preformative) Pe. ; e. g. pret. «DdS , infinit, jao*^ , fut. *CDOp , imperat., *0DOK Also Aph. and Shaph. with their passives; e. g. «JDOif, »flOjZZI» The part. act. Pe. takes 1 in place of the middle radical, which has fallen away ; e. g. ^ßo]) ; but 1 falls away again when a syllable is added ; e. g. plur. li^M. — Those verbs whose 2 and 3 rad. is ( , an- exceptions, and are inflected according to the rules for quiescent verbs (§ 35. 1. d). In the fut. and imperat. Pe. forms with — (not—) appear; e. g. ****J , ^* The part. act. Pe. has ^*^P^ in the plur. from the Verb ^\l to go in. In the part. Aph. sometimes the middle radical appears again, but it is marked by Linea occultans ; e. g. Heb. ix. 5, ^ 1 WqV) » In Aph. the characteristic f sometimes remains after the preformative; e. g. onM^Q^ from «nn» (Comp. § 23. 1. Rem.). 2. The part. pass. Pe. *£CLi^i , Ethpe., Pa. and Ethpa. ; e. g. * mm >Z| , « mnn ? , are regularly inflected, with the retention of tlie middle radical. Instead of the last two forms, how- ever, Palpel. and Ethpalp. (§ 25. D) are more in use; e. g. Rem. — The last remark holds good also of Shaphel, which occurs more rarely (Comp. 1. above). § 35. Doubly Irregular and Defective Verbs. 1. By Doubly Irregular Verbs are understood those in which occur two of those letters which usually give rise to irregularities. In the inflection of these verbs, either one or both of those letters may retain their peculiarities. This class of verbs consists of (vid. Lud. de Dieu, p. 340, sq.); a) Verbs ^ and ]] ; e. g. ]xxij , Aph. *jlCd] to approve ; b) Verbs ]z> and 11 ; e. g. ]l] to come^ Aph. ^^A**! , ]aOi] to heal^ Pa. .jXdI , |a1 to boil^ Ethpe. *j^W ; c) Verbs J^Si and ]J ', BOUBLT IRREGULAR AJiD DEFECTIVE VERBS. 77 e. g. "liol to swear ^ imperat. ^xSOji , fut. ]io]j , infinit. \s?^ , Aph. «■*,V)ol ; Iia 25ö sprout^ imperat. ^aJ»^ , Aph. ^a^oI and «.i-Vi] ; d) Verbs li and fl '; e. g. 1 p ^ö (?^^<7ö, imperat. »ji^D , infinit. lloSo \ Jf^ to he displeased^ Aph. J2L* 2. To Defective verbs (see Lud. de Dien, p. 34:4:) belong the following, in so far as they occur in the language, either in individual forms only, or have borrowed their defective forms from synonymous verbs, or, finally, vary from the regular verb in inflection and interpunction. a) Impersonal Verbs. From %ojl to he hit^ occurs only the part. act. ,r5jl it hefits. From tPD appear the 3 sing. fem. pret. Aj]Sd it is disagreeahle^ the part. act. fem. pJiD and ttie 3 sing. fem. fut. /ISolZ ; and from llo and IV» appear the act. part. l]o and It it is suitahle. b) The following defective verbs, are completed from others which are synonymous : « oNffi to mount up^ part, act. tiOKm ; the other tenses of this verb are formed from *acaj , imperat. *QDO , fut. •.om.J , infinit. «nmV» , Aph. *qcd| , * 7 7 7-7. part. >r>rr>Vf> ^ Ethpa. ^q^AodV A similar complement is 7 y found in JOOI^^ to give (see § 29. 1. Rem.), imperat. .Ä01 , infinit. ^Äd ,' fut. ^£S from ^L , Ethpe. ^cul]\ c) Those which differ in form and inflection are %^ölj, to run, imperat. .u^JOl ; ^l] to go away and ]l] to come (see § 28. 2. 3. Eem.) ; also looi to he (see § 32. 1. Rem. and § 38), fut. locu and loou ; also from looi is found a fut. apocopate lou , loiZ, plur. tOOU , etc., having the signi- fication of the conjunctive as well as of the usual future (comp. Agrell. Otiola Syr. p. 46) ; lA» to dririk,, with ] prosthet. ^Lm\ , imperat. *aA»1 , part. lA» , fut. lAmJ , infinit. lAnlD ; ^1 , Aph. ^ia»oi to helieve ; V»>* (see App. to § 32), to live. Finally, in four verbs 3 rad. Olaph. ; e. g. "1*0 , ]Uii, lU, laZ) (1>Z), which merely occur in Pa. audits 78 DOUBLY IRKEGÜLAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. passive, the second syllable qniesces in _L, as in Yerbs 3 Gutt. (see § 13. 1. Kern.), and 1 is retained in all of the tenses and moods, while its vowel falls back upon the preceding vacant consonant ; e. g. 3 sing. fem. pret. i^o* The formation is as follows ; pret. Pa. *^Q , part. V^füSo , infinit. o]inV) , imperat. \jlO , fiit. \jl^3 , Ethpa. U-oZl , part. VLb^, infinit. o|IiAi , fut. llr^Aj» 80 PARADIGM I. like \Ethtaphal. '51 u like Aphel. .~^ ->v4 »s^ r>g ^•s^ .rvi .r-i ^«^ p^-, f=^, «i^, *^, •^ "^ 'vl •^ .rvj .rvj ,;v4 t.«^ t.^si ^ JvT ^ "I Q Q ^9^ 1/ I a 3 "I if Q -g 1 J d y • •^ < <3 '•^ ' 'A 'A %.% Q ' -;:5 vj ^ y\ '^'^ g »vj r ■^q "^q "^q "^ '# # -^ ': 1 ^ % a r^ p«vi p'vi V-- Vv| >v4 »^ *^ "-J-- q ^ 1 ' f^ r^ r^ ^*rr r^ r^ «rvi rj- 1 '-3 1 1 '"3 M #1 *6 %/ Q q In ^•3 c 5? -fea =. 1 '^ :^ cj cj '^ 4. n d V -q |i|'; ■I S3. ^ ^^ ^::^ c:j '^ ^ q e^q t«. Q 1 'I c a - a "^ 1^ CO CO c^ ^^ CO OD C^ (M !-< 82 PARADIGM II. f ! 1 A o a ? 1 2 '3 00 5 ^ *'«— *"«— *'*^- ^*^- ^<— ?j ?4 ..^ -'^ r^ o o o o o •-3 '4 '^ 'ä -\ -a o o o ^ % '1 ' 'o^ O o d » CJ r^ Q^ CO CO C^ (>4 T-l t , Verbs First Ead.Olaph, 88 o o 9. n o .r-i r-i ^ ^i >! ^vj -vj .rv| tTvi ,rv| tTxj »«vi O O O O O n. ^-4. n. n. n. 't - .o^ T/ 'T/ I '3 «4. O n. n. ^^. -4/ o '■4. o o q H. '-4. 'i o o '^. '-4. 1 o 9 ?4. ,^. 1 •^ «VJ 1 4. An. 4. •^ "^ »^ 1 I a:i:4.:l;l 1 O 'i : 1 '^ t»- N^ t»- t.- ,.- ;4 t^ H t4 H. t : 1 -^ ^^O I "4 n 1 n. o «•N i^ 'rj.4. i 1 "^ ■1-i :i 1 U. :-!. U. H- 'A *N| «^ 1 1^ a^ CO 4. 4. 4. o =1 o '•4. '4. 1/ "T, v1 A. A. feS s CO CO Verbs First Rad. Jud. 85 o '•4. o 9 o V o 'oT ° 1/ < t-^ t-vi Si :;:-i -^ o "o o -^ '^ '^ c:} d'^ 1 ''^ 3 X^ -J. 4, :^- 4>n. 'a '^ '^ 'S :ö '•4. '^. n. -^. -4, ' 1 ^ '"^ 'i '? '-i. >l. -4. 1 ^4 n »^sj »^ "^ «— J ^^ ^^ ^1 ^1 H.. H. H. h4. h. / 1 ^5 "^ "2^3 4.. 4, ^. s4.t4. :^ '^ ':::) d'^ ^1 a. ;4. H.^. ■I -I n.4. 9 "o n.-4. I ■il 'I 'I o o «^ "•4.r4. 'I 'I '^ '^ I < C:j Qi «^Icj H*^ ^A:A: a. 4. H. a. n. ° V 4^- t H -1 H -I 1 :^ a 5:^:^ a. /I. A. ä:ä. 'I 'I Ha. '13. H*^ H*^ H*^ /rr ; ^Jl '■rIL h^ h^ ''^ ^^. ^^. ^^. /I. ■^i ^.. 4, 4- .^•^^• • G v4 S CO CO Ol d rH '4./1. 1"^ CO CO 4 'vl ^ ->J ^•vp h-»i) ^.-Si) ^-sb e^-ü) 'q j 'i i i f fr""- f f F ^ 'H ^ ^ ^ Jo, -•s> «Cq, ,^ ,v^, « =1 g i '. '1 d 1 t ' q c r -^ «^ -^ ^ i^ i tci :£ t^ :^ -^ 1 ^4 ^ ^ '^ 1 f < f f (■ ^ Cgf C4 -vj »Vj :ii ü ;a 4 4 '1 il ^3 a, 'I "-sp •-■>4> "«Jl "S) -M" .^-sp u-vp '"-vp ''•vp t-vp 1 :| i :J •'. 5i a 11 ' =^ .:| :^ .4 a 1 l£ Jil :il \ ^4 ^ '^ '^ ä 1 n I^ '^ '=^ ':::} r^ .a :^ :^ ^^ ^4 1 ^ '-3 '^ q '::i'^ 'ii :ii va ^^'-^ C 'C n -vi «vj .>>4 %- t.-c± ►.-si) h.-vl> N<^ t^M> "^ X "^^T* "^"S* «^"^^^ '"'*^ * .44 '4 '4 31 1 a a ;^ -^ 'Ü :il :£ ^ü'i 1-3 tl ^^ r^ r^ f*^ «— vj *^ '^-vl «-«4 •^ .^ .^ a -^ 1 1" ^ % % % %% A °r ^l '\ ' ■i'i n ■| 3 3 3 5 1 1 1 "^ 1 1 ^ =-^1 11 ^ C^l (^ 1[^ Ot CO CI c c5 g CO CO "1 -n4 »^ rvj »sg .^ 1 i; ^ ^ '^ '^ r::^ .Q -q -q ^q ^q ^3 '^A '^A '^ A '^ A Hq •^ «^ »^ •vj -vi »»g H Q •^ •^ •^ •^ H n •^ •^ *^q 'I v'-i ^ •^ •^ •^ 5 .q .q .Q ä^ CO CO (M CM t-( 'i O 1 Ä ^9 5»' a 1^ Verbs Mid. Bad. Vau and Jud. 89 hQ hQ '^ '"^ '^ '^ H '^ '^ -^ *— Q H^ HQ HQ ^'s p*^ r^ /^ "«— < VvJ '-sj Qj -vi '^ ^^ ^::J ^:::|'^ •^ "^ un .n 'vi q "Q M Ml 3 ^g h'q h'q hO ^^ 'I 'I --4 -vj ^ V-- 1^lfJ|1:|5 '^ '-3 cj '::^'^ 'I 'I 5} "V^ g --a .-a -a la ^ ^ t ::i ^ ! ^ !^ '^ :>! ::i liM'^i^ ^ '^ '^ cj C:)'^ •I 'I •^ »vj «--4 rr- n ^ «^ »>g ^«— - I ^3 '8 ^g 1 % ^a ^ci ^o ^o ^ ^ ^ "l^i.i'^4"^^ Q^ c^ (M ^ CO CO • 1 % Vr!^ 3 : a f I "I ^^ f^4 pj3 ■%■ Bra ii 'I 'I 't '-! u 'y] i-i y\ y\ ^ y\ f \ 't44i. n 'J 'I 3 '^ y '4 a '-1^ a C4 .i, ^ a :/:^^ ^^-.^^ V^:^ % n S3. :=»^ r^i '»s-Tfi jsJ \ y\ y\ y\ ^Ji CO CO ^ .^ »«Vl ■i I 't v-^-v ^ a «*4 S «4-: ^ J ^ CO CO (M (N '-' ' . Si -vl .^ J 4 q ^ 'S Verbs First Bad. Nun. 'J f D «*^ /^ c*Vl •"«— 1 '^ 1 \ 1 ^v4 ,!VI r^ / ^ •^ «^vj :^ <^ -:::{ ^ 'f? :^ \^ '^ :^ ^^ iVl pM t ! 'I '4 '^ ^"^^1 n -vi «^4 -s^ ^*— er? ^«3 ^.^ «^n I f •^ -^ ..; ^. ^ f-T s| -vj »>«4 'vl «^ .-g ^-vi r^ r-i «^"^ ^ -I I -i 'I 1 f.rs »^ f» q ^1 I I 'I •^ .>s| »^ "^ »vj tuvi ^v| ,rv| ^-M ,rvi • r> «^.»N «^»rs '^•'^ ^•r^ 1 ..^ M M I • *N f«!? f»*N c'^^ f»'* ' (, - 'I' ^t 4 •'t I J 1 1 ^ 1 r 'I ^1 r H «^ «^»^ b,»^ b«^ u»^ fl ffl .fl ffl f 'V"^ ^'1 % I-. Q «A '^•' f^_ f f f f »vl ^ ^ ^ ^ ^Q Q (=a «:a a •*v| «^ «^ »vi «^ • r\ ••^ ••> •r> »»s " '«i^ V ^O- H 'I ••^ M«J ^ 'I I J 'I 1 *9\ .rs %< e :^ I .1 ^ 9 9 I Q^ CO CO i .f^ ^ ^ ^ '^ '::J Ci CS (■ I ? "^ -vi -vi r;; f 1 •^ -»si f •:::i =7 n ^ q ^ 1 :1 'I > CO CC O^ (M ri t»^ ^§ 96 PARADiaM OF THE VERB WITH DIACRITICAL POINTS. PAKADIGM OF THE YERB WITH DIACRITICAL POINTS. ( Compare § 4. Rem. ). 3 m. Preter. Sing. ^H^ ^Ho ^U^ Plur. Fut. Sing. Plur. ^oHi^CiJ ^Ql^OJ Imper.Sing. m. ^Q^^ ^Q^O jPlur. m. * 3/. Al4o 2 m. 1 c. Al4o Ai4o Alio A14Ö A140 A140 I ^q14^Z| ^q^oj Infin. ^J>4^nlD ^Jy^nSo ^^^^ülD ^^y^^ik) oSf^oV) etc. Part. Act. ^\4^ m. V^^ f^ jPassive ^^U^D ^^u^O ^\jl^ ^H^iSd I ^4oAi ^5)4oASo ^J^oAk) Rem. — ^The forms of the verb wliich are omitted in the foregoing lable^ are not marked with diacritical points, since they may easily De recognized from their formation. VERBS WITH SUFFIXES. 97 § 36. Verbs with Suffixes. The union of verbal forms with suffixes is much more simple in Syriac than in Hebrew. It should be remarked in general that the vowel of the first or second syllable either falls away ; e. g. — in the 3 fem. and 1 sing. pret. and Q in the fut. ; or the vowel of the second syllable falls back upon the preceding consonant ; e. g. in the same per- sons of pret. Pe. in which — of the first syllable falls away. The verbal endings «a and O quiesce in — and — * Verbal forms, unless they terniiruite with •u. and CL. , remain unchanged before the suffixes .QS , ^j^» Also the character- istic vowel of the first syllable of Fa. and Aph. remains unchanged, and the suffixes of the 3 plur. are attached to verbs in the form of separate pronouns. In respect to the particular persons the following should be remarked (see Table of the pronouns, § 16. and table of the verbs, with suffixes, § 36). A. Preterit with Suffixes. _ y *^ * ^ 3 sing. masc. ^^4^ before the suffixes ^QO , ^-i^ m the 2 plur. masc. and fem. The other persons ^^y^^ with sun. a. 1. 3 sing. fem. Al^n before ^QO , ^» The others Ai^ with sutf. a. 1. 2 sing. masc. A^^ unchanged, and by way of exception with suif. c. 2 sing. fem. ^Al^O is changed into ^Al4o with suff. b. 1 sing. com. ti^ forms Al|^ with sufi". a. 1. 3 pirn-, masc. ol^ becomes oi^^' with suff. b. or with ^ parag., excepting before ^ , ,^* ^ 3 plur. fern, wii^ either ^^ with sutf. c. or with , parag. ^-»A^» 98 FUTURE WITH SUFFIXES . 2 plur. masc. and fern', and 1 com. retain the forms .oAl4^, ^Al4o , ^JiixD with suif. c. Rem.— The 3 fern. 2 masc. and 1 com. sing, in some forms with suffixes are only distinguished from each other by the diacritical point, which, in the tirst person, stands over the consonant (vid. § 4). Verbs Med. E. with suff. follow the form of Verbs Med. A., and retain — where the latter retain — ; e. g. 3 sing. fem. l±^£^ with suff. OlAl^^. Yet the form OlÄSOMi occurs in Ps. cxviii. 167, instead of which, since no similar example occurs, the punctua- tion should perhaps be —.♦ The same is the case even in Verbs Med. Olaph. Quies. So the vowel — belonging to ^l» is changed into — over Ol^^A ; but in the 1 sing., — remains ; e. g. ^A^]a« In respect to verbs 1 rad. ( and j^ quiescent, it should be remarked, that where, in the regular verb, the first radical is without a vowel, | retains its — and a its — ; e. g. OlA^f^ But where, in the regular 7 verb, ~^ stands over the first radical, this class of verbs retains it in the same manner; e. g jlo| with suflf. Cn^iSDf , |N i with suff. V,\ I» Defective verbs, or those with Med. Rad. doubled, retain — in the pret. unchanged, like the form ^^4^* "^he 3 fem. and 1 f> 7 7 t\ -K 7 sing, change — into — ; e. g. Adj with suff. 01 Aoj ; but they remain unchanged before »QO and ^oJD ; e. g. iQ2AO)* Pa. and Aph. retain the vowel of the first syllable unchanged. In respect to — of the second syllable, it should oe observed that where Pe. retains — , Pa. ■" 7 retains — ; but where — falls away or falls back upon the first sylla- ble , — is lost. The 3 sing. masc. and 3 plur. masc. and fem. in Pe. and Pa. with sufl'., are hence all similar, and can only be distinguished from eacli other by their signification in the context; e. g. OlX^O (from ^^4^ ^^ ^^4^)* ß"t these forms are exceptions to this rule when standing before tQ2 and ^a^^* B. Future with Suffixes. Throughout the sing, and in the 1 plm-., Q , which has been inserted, remains unchanged before the suffixes tOO and IMPERATIVE WITH SUFFIXES. 99 ,-aS» Before the other suffixes it falls away, and the form ^^4^ takes the suff. a. 1. ; but if the suff. is in the 3 person, only the suffix, a. 2. is used. The other persons are treated according to the rule laid down. In the plur. the 2 and 3 niasc. and fem. remain unchanged with suff. c. Rem. — «.A parag. of the 3 sing. fem. falls away, and is connected with the sutf. after the form \s.^L* What is true of Q in Pe. is also true in Pa in respect to the falling away of the vowel of the Last syllable, excepting before ^QD and ^aI)* In the 3 sing. masc. with sufF. of 3 person masc. ; e. g. «jQlOiNf^ni , -« appears sometimes over Q.* But this form is neither mentioned by Amira nor by Sionita. The 2 sing, sometimes takes ^ before the suflf. of the 1 sing, and plur. The same is true in respect to the imperat. ; e. g. « > I iZoldZ |J put me not to shame. In Verbs Med. E. the middle radical retains — . , and in Verbs 3 Gutt., —.* This peculiarity, Amira, p. 389, refers exclusively to quadriliterals , i. e. to Aph. ; but examples are also found in Pe. ; e. g. Ps. Ixxi. 9. ed. Erpen. « i1 iO0*^»Z |J , ed. Paris. - »i<^o^7 ^ and in Pa. Ps. cxviii. 172, ■ »1 i*^\ Z» Amira adds that this form is found particularly in prohibitory negations, which remark is likewise confirmed by the examples given. The persons of the fut. with ^ remain unchanged. But it should be remarked that if the form ^oSfcni takes the suff. of the 3 per. sing. masc; e- g. - >nn» ir>V^rM sometimes # falls away; e. g. Matt. viii. 25, «aOIO'HuUn C. Imperative with Suffixes. The 2 sing. masc. \SQ^ remains unchanged with suff. a. 2. of the 1 per. sing, and plur., and of the 3 sing. fem. When the suff. is in the 3 sing. masc. the form of suff. c. is used. In the 2 sing. fem. of the form ^O^^ with suff. h.^ quiesces in — .♦ In the 2 plur. masc. Qi:^a4D passes into a^ao with 8uff. b. 100 INFINITIVE WITH SUFFIXES. The 2 plur. fem. is rare, and omits # before the suffix. Rem. — The imperative with — and in Pe. and in the other conjugations, retains its vowel unchanged ; e. g. - '^ Avr>^ ^^^u^ ^^^ «-iCn> \*^n receive him. The forms of the imperat. pass., with an ~ 7 T> active signification, also remain unchanged ; e. g. ^>M ^^ reminded^ with suff. •aJLk'f^JL}* In respect to the transposition of Q in the jjlur. it should be remarked that 1 of Verbs |2) (§ 28. 1) loses its vowel _* But in those \£i Verbs whose imperat. does not take •X 7 * Q , this vowel is inserted after the first radical ; e. g. Or^l with suff. ^OlO^lDOf« Yet this transposition of Q does not always take place, as the form t,>JO\0(>Q sometimes occurs. In Pa. and Aph. —, in y -x 7 ^ o. 7 Verbs 3 Gutt., , falls away; e. g. 0i.»O» with suff. «aOlOM^QA prnise him, o\no| with suff, >-i01Q\*^0| lead him hither. Verbs |l are an exception, as they retain — .; e. g. t^kJQ£D|.^| do me good. Also a form with . parag. sometimes occurs ; e. g. tQ^Q^O with suff. P -xt , -x ^ %Aaia.JaA4^^^* 1" t'^^ ^®"^- P^""*' ^^^ paragogic form is the more usual ; but in Pa. and Aph. both forms occur together. D. Infinitive with Suffixes. 7 -»> The infinitive Pe. ^4^Sd with suff. a. 1. remains un- changed before the suff. of the 2 per. plur. The suffixes of the other persons are attached to the form ^4j^k3. But . . . . . *' the infinitives of the remammg conjugations with a are treated as feminine substantives, the feminine suffixes of which (those of the 3 plur. excepted, which are attached separately to the form with Q) they take, attached to the termination Zo- (Compare § 45. 2. and § 48. B. feminines, declension 1). Rem. — In Pe., where — of the second syllable falls away, some grammarians insert, in its place, — ; e. g. O lNfcnV^N » Buxtorf adds yet two other forms with Q a Q inserted after the third radical ; e. g. PAKTIUIPLES WITH SUFFIXES. 101 >mr>\^oVr> ^nd «^OloNf^nV)» If the vowel be — , as in Verbs GlL , it remains unchanged ; e. g. QlVnoVflN» E. Participle with Suffixes. Participles, which are considered as nouns, take their suffixes. This occurs, however, more rarely in the part, act, where either prepositions are used ; e. g. v^ , ^^i\n who seek thee^ or a noun formed from tlie participle is joined with the suffix; e. g. jA supporting^ OljO,^ his helper. On the contrary participles with separate pronouns (vid. § 18. -t. Rem.), or with afformatives (§ 20) form the present tense. 102 EEGULAR VERBS WITH SUFFIXES. Proper Form. Sing. ] c. ' 2 m. i 2 f . Pret. Pe. ) ^^ Sing. 3 m.) ^^ .4jX4ß >»i^ ,inVf)jD 3f. JbS^O ^ujZli^ j^'AL^ woAL^o 2 m. t^4^ ^2^14^^ * * . > 1 »Aa^j;^ * * 1 c. Al^ # ;ai^ ^^^^ •■ *jlDq!L4o i 1 .A^ 1 2 m. .o'Al^ . » 1 ioAV^^p * * ! 2f. ^Al^ «ajjITa!!^ * * 1 Ic. ,Ji^ » .A^ «inlSfi^Q 1 Infinit. ^Jy^^Q!^ -»jX^qId ^K(^n^ ^AnVfc^QLo I"P-ing.) V^a^ * * ; 1 ?, f *An^o .»IiKq^T) * * » i in\4sia * # 2 f ^^\nt\n •-^ «^. * i 1 1 ^--^^^ng.} ^4a3 woX^ni Y%i^ ^ijol^ni ^jq14qj Pret. Pa. ^5y^ ..A'fco >.i^ ^Zol^nV) ^Zol^nVo ^ZqI^So ! EEGULAB VERBS WITH SUFFIXES. 103 3 m. 3f. Plur. 1 c. 2 m. 2 f . aCi^ 01^4^ ^ yOsLin . kri\i\n ait\^ oiii^ (tH^ .qdAS4d ^AlL4o oi^^l^ (t^n * * •^Gf1GuA^k4^ ouAl^ ^'av^ * ■X- OliM^ oiAi^4^ * ^Al^ >«^AVAr^ 1 «^aial4^ 1 ^3Cl^^O » ? «.t . 7 «, ...-h 7 a ^VA'o ouoAL^ ^o^Al^ * * ^^fn « 1 «AxAr^ oiL»A^4^ ^'Al^ * * ^aiA.iX^o oiilk^ * • ni^Ao oiS(^nvl oill4^ ^S4c^ ^inSt)nvt ^olJLq^o olJ^o^^ ■X- * ^CTICL^Q^^ ou^q4^ ^i^O^D * * «aOIQ^QO .o\^on * * ^C71CuX4qJ oiSa4^ oiL.Sa4o * * aL..!^4^ 44^ ■^onLo^nJ ^»nSo^QJ «-*01aJq!^QJ oijQ^Qj ^jol^oj QHJol^OJ oCi^ ciL^ ,^ ^a:iL|!D ctZqI^qSo ^"ZqI^ \QS^ö^4cik) 104 SUFFIXES TO VEftBS WITH THIRD KADICAL OLAPH QUIESCENT § 37. Suffixes to Verbs with third J^adical Olwph Quiescent (]])♦ Verbs ]J (§ 32) differ so widely in their mode of connection with suffixes, from regular verbs, as to demand a separate treatment. It may be remarked in general : 1. That the termination X^ either loses ] , as in the 3 sing, masc. pret. Fe., or in the sing. masc. of the imperat. Pa., Aph., Shaph. with suff. c ; or 1 is changed into wi. movable, as in the infinit. Pe. with suff. a. 1, excepting before #00 , — aO , where the ^ which has arisen from | also falls away, accordino: to some. So the termination of the fut. L. is IS chano^ed into .»- with suff. b. 2. Forms which end in «^ either omit — entirely, and connect the suff. a. 1, with jl. movable, as 3 sing. masc. pret. Pa. and Aph. (and sometimes Pe. with «-&. final), or remains with suff. b, as 2 sing. masc. imperat. Pe., and, X without exception , — remains also in the first case before •X -n t .QO , -jlO» The terminations of the imperat. fem. •-»• , ^1 I ■ are changed into a- (or ^jL) with suff. b, and into l-i— with suff. c. 3. The forms which end with Q otiant., take for Q the forms OQ (and 0|^) ; and for Q.^- the form CL» unchanged in all the preceding cases with suff^. b ; e. g. 3 plur. masc. ' pret. of all the conjugations excepting Peal. In respect to individual persons of this class of verbs with suffixes, the following should be remarked : A. Preter. with Suffixes. (Comp. Table of Verbs |J with S affixes. The 3 sing. masc. Uy« loses 1 and appends suff b, and Buff. «aOU of the 3 sing. masc. to the form -^.i» FUTITRE WITH SUFFIXES. J 05 The 3 sing. fern. Al.. takes, unchanged, suff. a. 1. The same is true of the 1 sing. Aa^..» 2 sing. masc. AjAy, takes, unchanged, suff. sing. fern. .uZlA.. attaches suif. b. to the form ^l5u!L... o plur. masc. olyt is changed into OcA' , (and oil',,) with suff. b. ^ \.' \: 3 plur. fem. «^yt remains unchanged with suff. c. 2 masc. and fem. and 1 plur. take, unchanged, suff. c. Rem, Yerbs 3 rad. ^ , as they are mostly intransitives, take no suffixes in Peal. But Pa. and Aph. of these verbs with a transitive signification, as well as of Verbs ]] with the same ending, take suff. a. 1, with the falling away of — , exceptmg before ^juD , tOD , where remains. The 3 sing. fem. remains unchanged in Pa. A.JXyi and Aph. Zuly,V The same is true also of the 1 sing, in both conjugations. The 3 plur. masc. occurs mostly before the suff., with o doubled • 0. 7 {see Amira, p. 372); e.g. Ps. liv. 3, ed. Erpen., aiOQl^ they have sought them. Sometimes the original | appears before both OO; e. g. Ps. Ixxvii. 16, »^ooIi-m they hme seen thee. In Pa. Q^(f and Aph. Qj^v\1, — falls away before the suff., and jl. becomes movable; but Q quiesces in — ; e. g. Gu^ with suff. yO^r^ ; CuZuf with suff. ^abolAiV The 3 plur. fem. in Pa. and Aph. in the simple form, takes the suff. given in the tab. with the falling away of — over ^\ e. g. *jiCruH./|* The paragogic form of these two conjugations takes suff. c. given in the table, without change. B. Future with Suffixes. The 3 sing. masc. 1],^ and all the persons which terminate with U- , aflax to the form alJ suff. b. The 2 and 3 plur. masc. and fem. remain unchanged, and are connected, as in the regular verb, with suff. c. 106 IMPERATIVE AND INFINITIVE WITH SUFFIXES. Rem. This mode of formation also occurs in Pa. and Apb. Sometimes also takes the place of — in the suff. 3 sing. fem. ; e. g. Matt. i. 19, OU^u that he should dismiss her^ or in Pa. ; e. g. Luke xiii. 18, 20, oulDjl I shall liken it And with the falling awaj of »^ ; e. g. tQOClMf / will show you^ the correctness of which Lud. de Dieu^ p. 398, doubts. C. Imperative with Suffix h>. 2 sing. masc. «^yf is unchanged with suti". b. 2 sing. fem. *j»--^v» is changed into "v* with suff. b. 2 plur. masc. Q-^.t is changed into OQL^y. (and ollyi) with suff. b. ^ \^ \^ 2 plur. fern, ^i i\.. affixes suff. c. to the form J->-^yi« Rem. The imperat. Pa. IJ.t and Aph. iJytf take the suf- fixes of the pret. in connection with the 3 or 1 person ; e. g. OlflDf heal her. The same is true in the plur. masc. of the same conjugations. In the fem., the paragogic form with suff. c. is the usual one. (Compare 2, above.) D. Infinitive with Suffixes. In the infinit. Pe. Vmt^, in place of- 1—, «.* without a vowel is inserted with suff. a. 1. In respect to the falling away of ^ before ^QO , ^jlI) , (see 1. above,) Lud. de Dieu., p. 395, doubts. The infinitives of the other conjugations are treat- ed as in the regular verb. (Compare § 36, D.) E. Participle with Suffixes. (Compare § 20 and § 36, E.) Passive. Active. Plur. Sing. Plur. Sing. v°,^>l ^A v°Ä ^>i ^^ ,r^\v ^AA^ m. 2. 1, PARTICIPLE WITH SUFFIXES. 107 The participles of the other conjugations are inflected in a similar manner, retaining the characteristic vowels ; e. g. Pa. act. .oAjA^ ye ask, Aph. ^joSo we thank^ Ethpe. ^1aI£)ALo we turn about. General Remark. Verbs of the form of V^ to console, never lose the third radical letter 1 when taking a suffix, but throw back itg vowel upon the middle radical, which, according to § 36, usu- ally stands vacant ; e. g. pret. 3 sing. masc. .juIIq , ^Vi.s> , 3 pi. masc. »-jJO^jlO, yoU^i, fem. *-^].*ii, ^OuIaIS, fnt. 3 sing. masc. «^M-OJ, ^h-^ü, imperat. 2 sing. masc. « 1 1 1] i n , ^ouVi^ , fem. « 1 1 1 1 1 n , •uOICIaIajd , 2 plur. masc. tO]jkO , ..7 7 0..7 fem. %aJMJD, «aOUl.«^* 108 VEKBS ]] WITH SUFFIXES. Verb )] Proper Form. Sing. 1 c. 2 m. 2 f. Pret. Sing. Pe. 3 m. Pa. T 7 P 7 •n 7 Pe. 'f' Pa. * a;.? 1 c. A^^ * •^'/u-o «jOAji*^ Peal. Plur. 3 m. } Pael. ' Q*mi j *aJOO;£) ^ 7 *> 7 3 /. ■ ••7 »7 ..P7 p *7 ..p 7 P " 7.. *•* 7.. Infin. r;oii «jJLl;nk> p i> Imp. { Pe. j 2 m.\ Pa. I P 7 * * 2 /. I XP * * Plur: 2 m. o-o 1 * * 2/ ■^.o * Futur. 3 m. Uni >-^ •,«ni;ni VERBS fj WITH SUFFIXES. 109 3 m. 3f. Plur. 1 c. 2 m. "■ 1 ' -^ 7 alia . P 7 r r »> p «K 17 -^ X 7 i cillo ail-n .9.7 7, ^QdZ-£5 ■« . 7 7 oiLaIo diL-iO * ^qdZu^ ^Zu^o iK 7 •X 7 dioo-D 01 Ol'^ ^00-D .QSOO'O •X -x^v -n -X 7 ,-jLDoVrD .. 7 - . 97. 01-» pD OUUr^ pT. p*r. •x p ^ ^. < ' '^ 1 au*rnk) ÖU',jQk3 ^•r^ ». P -^ •X P ,-« » p * -« p * 7 6u*o . P 7 oi;o P 7 * ■x- 10 Gulo I IP * 4^ •X 7 öioo-jd öiol-o •9f * . P -^IP ^^ * * -n -n ou^ ^•^ •x * ■» .on»;n3 f>aiOi;ni 110 AUXILIARY VERBS, OR VERBS SUBSTANTIVE. § 38. Auxiliary Verbs, or Verbs Substantive, 1. There are in Syriac two auxiliary verbs (verbs sub- stantive). One of these, fool to be, which, in Hebrew, exists as Vau conversive, is used to form the moods and tenses which are wanting (see § 18. 4. Hem.). The other, which is properly a noun, La being, substance, essence {essen- tia), with Olaph prosthetic A*] , takes the place of the aux- IP OGi, belongs to Yerbs ]J , like which it is inflected, but in respect to which it is to be particularly observed, that, when connected with the participle, preter.or future, the 01 (with Linea occultans) is not pronounced ; this is also the case when the verb is ooi *^\M he has begim. Upon the double formation of the fat. ^oou and loou, see § 35, 2, c. The inflection of A*] is as follows : Sing. F. C. M. ^L^ {lam) 1. i^V {thou art) yuk^tJ!( 2, OUA.»! {he, she is) ^OloZul 3. Plur. r. c. M. ^Aa| {we are) »^»A^l (ye are) •QTLiA.il -aGUAa| {theij are) tOOUA^I 2. In connection with p is formed Au.^, which is inflect- ed similarly to A»]; e. g. *^Aa.S / am not. LÄ\ in connec- tion with looi forms the imperfect ; e. g. looi A^l or looi ^axo'L^he was. The same tense is also expressed by looi looi. looi doubled marks the pluperfect ; e. g. A^ooi AaOOi / had been. DERIVATION OF NOUNS. lU CHAPTEE III The ISTouN. § 39. Derivation of Nouns. 1. Nouns, as in Hebrew and Chaldee, are primitive, derivative, and sometimes compounded. To primitives belong nouns of one and two syllables, which indicate ani- mals, plants, metals, numbers, members of the bodies of animals, etc. (See Gesemics, Lehrgeh. p. 478, sq.). Inasmuch as they coincide with simple verbal forms, they are always recognized as nouns by the nature of the object which they y y i> designate; e.g. \£Q:^ßesh, *aai} gold, %Si£QO silver. The derivatives, which are by far the most numerous, are form ed partly from verbs (verbals), and partly from nouns (denominatives). 2. The derivation of nouns is effected ; a) without any change of the original word ; e. g. t^i...^Vf> counsel^ from «,■ \V) to counsel ; ^^Xjd] mourning^ from ^^ä] to mourn ; or by a mere change of the vowel ; e. g. y \o king, ;flD I fetter ; h) by the falling away of the radical letter ; e. g. (Als sleep^ from ^J*a ; 1^ t care^ from *2) f--» ; \^^ ^^^ heart, from «.nn^^ ; but especially c) by the addition of formative letters or of entire syllables. Those letters, if initial, are ] , So, j, 2, * ; if medial, they are ^ and Q ; final, 1 , 1 , 2^ Several of these formative letters are some- times found in the same noun ; e. g. y.iifl^2 scholar, ]l4^Q* dominion, l2oiV)»i^ compassion, ]LiJ:i01^ flame. 112 NOUNS DEEIVED FROM VERBS. § 40. Nouns derived from Verbs. Verbal nouns are kindred either to participles, and de- note the subject or object of the action (Concrete Nouns), or they are kindred to the infinitive, and receive the significa- tion of the action or quality itself (Abstract Nouns). But frequently in the formation of these nouns, rare or obsolete forms of the infinitives and participles arc chosen. The following tables present a collective view of the modes of formation. TABULAR VIEW OFDERIVATIVE NOUNg. 113 TABULAR VIEW OF NOUNS DERIVED FROM REGULAR AND IRREGULAR VERBS. I. PARTICIPIAL FORMS A. Of peal. a. The simple hut unusual Participial Forms^ ivhich are most- ly Adjectives. Absolute state, j ^^4^ j Vi^i^ Emphat. state., ( UJ^ 1 ]1^ Ji^.. a man. \}Q£D foolish. \^j^ an associate. VI OLD rural, quiet. l^ryi leprous. ^rI5 sick: Ql and %A.l ^ \a.M.\ mournful Ir^:^ pure. y and «Jh^ lo», ]la» c^wa^. lio hard. e — ' — y. \^l^ impure ; «HytfO much. \0% ♦. r From these are derived Abstract Nouns ; e. g. '{LcIj^O hardness; '\Lo\a.yjJD multitude. 114 TABULAE VIEW OF DEKIVATIVE NOUNS. b. Usual Participial Forms of Peal. a. Active. ß. Passive. Absolute state, J ^O ( ^u^^ Empliat. State, * W^ii ( WT^^ >ai£D a witness. ^iNn sound. >aO( black. [OuGl.^ given. t^LZi Ql and «u.1 foA^ aw inhabitant. %^.^^ cursed. fai*^ ji f/ry. |*LkJ so/if. ^ Mi •.Qa>l righteous. (^.•1 a hireling. «^^ IpQJ a herdsman. Ql and »0 IV (^^^ long-sufferinq . y^i^ reviling. ]]" • » s pL.19 a herdsman. poij^ a landlord. U'and la |jl£0( a i^hysician. )l"and U IP* beautiful. 1^1*^4 renowned. |*^>*^»i beloved, \j\lkfree. ]j-aJ^> rare. P' PSQO concealed. V'and U fl^} m. (ZulS) f. beautiful. |J and ^ 1 11*^1 prophet^ ]Ai*^l prophetess. Here belong also AbstractN"ouns, as (ZojLflDl ^eaZ^w^, IZqjQajQ^ publication^ \L09[^ freedom, QO^>l and |^QQji)l righteousness, (ZQAjl,^-^ dryness. TABULAR VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 115 c. With Immutable Vowels. Ab. Stat., j Vy^ ^q4i3 , ^q4o \q^ ^OD & with [ Emph, , ^ P^' Uoi^ ]]q4^ ]]q4d Ü^Q^ ]JL }i»,\^ a plough- J Oil smaZ/. J^Ory« ^ ^^«^- (oSjDQflD a rei man. * ^lohemer. {color). (^^- t(;ea^. |4n^>» (^ ^ob, pkO>l a sower. t^LOLK») a friend. _a l2) l© mere?-.] ]ä lj-fc.J a carpenter. \iQSi\a preacher. |aO)| a Aam- fSD30| black. Ql and «-*J^ ^2) Ql and «-»A Pr>i0 fa j905sessor. ()Q>j a spend- fJQ^^ damp. PCIaI a ^*ver. Ql and «.i^ i/in/^ oL and %jui li-.i> a y^cf^e. licuj a destroyer. \LaA^mortal. \i::iO^ fortunate. -x 7 (» «^ p %p *. divorce. lUi a combatant. TjO, J a yowfA. llOU« « &ar6er. U-Soj a i/Z/ o/ [i^S^ an orator. \MQMy^aspy. [l^J a cleft. ]]"and - '^ fl'and «.i-i U and wk^ X^iL a seer. X^O^ mournful. UO^ creator. ].VV> quiet. 1®°?5 ^ mocÄ;er. B'and la \MJSi\ a baker. From these are formed Abstract Nouns, like VZq^ Sm rejection, VZoioi] littleness, ]la»Oy( division, ]la2CU\ giving, etc. 116 TABULAE VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUITS. B. PARTICIPIAL FORMS. a. Of the other Active Conjugations. Pael. It takes the usual ^ form, and the form j with pL. and the [ form V^QSd J p^^ a leader. |o;rnV) poor, fl'hNV» a teacher. ^.^ a torturer. ^ Ql and «jlI iO)1d united. ]lkll-^ high. Uand^A P-kUvSo seditious. pUjOTiD a leader. ]] and]ä fl ifiDtSiO a physician. 11 and K • P» 7 PI i*^V) a comforter. Aphel. Usual form and 1 ^•^•V) a dwelling. t4o\V) pincers. |JO«nV) an offense. 7 J ^>>nV) despairing, injurious. X,-\£^ Shaphel. Usual form and (,nSiiV) a slave. |'^\»>« changing, •^0 7 \1^\Ql» a deliverer, Wand *A 10 7 ■ NSaVo proud. Part. pass. « iNV)aV> completed. Q.L and «.^JL 11 and ^' |1m>V) a watch-tower, •P -X 7 poVyJbO a sickle. U and «-^jS) ^P P 7 p^jQvo a confessor. From these are derived Abstract Nouns, as lZcü;2,l0 direction, ]2oi<^\V) doctrine, l2oi.Im]ib healing, &c. TABULAü VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUNS, b. Of the Passive Conjugations. iir Ethpeel. Usual form and Ethpaal. Usual form and Eshtaphal. Usual form and Usual torm ana j Usual lorm and ^ Usual form and ) those with # , (1 i those with # , |l ) those with'^, ]l ) Ql and ^ ViSrsJ.Ak) curdled. ]] and ^ ]imi<^2ASo entreat- . r jil^SoZlftiD /w//. pLlr-fe^iO renowned. Ml ]lK\V)ASo eloquent. C. PARTICIPIAL FORMS OF LESS FREQUENT CONJUGATIONS. Palel. Pealel. Paiel Usual form and \ Usual form and | Usual form and J lia^Cl a church- |V)\V>S» unhurt. Irt-»^ a farrier, treasurer. Parel. Usual form and Taphel. Quadriliterals, Usual form and ^ |£^ »l\AKn an accuser. ..>* a pitcher. r^v'^ ^^ interpreter, loOijiQiO sudden. 1,a^^Z a pupil. 118 TABULAR VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUNS. II. IISrFIlSriTIYE FOEMS. A. OF PEAL. a. Simple Infinitive Forms — Segholal£S. Absolute state, J ^\^ j ^\^ Ernphat. state, ^ V^i) 1 IJ'^Ö |jl2U the soul. t^^? rain. |V)i»\ bread. ft JJ^Ia sea-grass, pD^ herbage. \r^ ^ child. OL and «u^ |J and «.«^ lOj-M joy. Ml *P 7 \\y% a treasure. ]] and \L |mJ) morning. |A£)* diligerice, (for jAS)^-.*). Ql andtjLl |1juS peace. » P 7 l^aj a dwelling. ]]'and ^ Ml Pq!^ ^/a^ heart. Wand ]i \MyQjD holiness. pa 9 0*1 a wag. Ql and «.LI |^q4 goodness, * p p (QCD an end. Ml (Zja countenance. \LO\i labor, pCLO coldness, |J and «.i^ (A£)0( anguish. It is seldom that all three forms are found derived from one orig- inal ; e. g. fJ^AA a rope, |j£^aj a pestilence, JjsQlm guilt ; oftener two forms, as |Jl an oalc, \1\ a storm (from ^1). TABULAR VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 119 b. Infinitive Forms with Immutable Vowels. Abs. Stat. ( ^5)^ ^ ^QO { ^Q^ { qI^o Em. Stat. ( ]]^ ( 1]'^'q£) (U^Q^O (I'ZqI^ID '\y\y% a herd. \f^Oy a piinc- \jJDn^\ seizure. q\'^?0 folly. 1 ^-^v n ann^'h turc. \k'iCi'^^ affiauce. fZo^NV) a king . -, ^p p -x _ . „ dom. ja f^Q2 gleaning. (2) l^fiol a ^^Vc?Ze. ]a (and ]1) 'U^QCo'l a fetter. *o K^ ing. \'^Ou\ renown. \i^ a vessel. ^„ P>^0^ to/Ä:ai^^;e Q^ and U LUk anu ...^ »p^ Val? a flowinfj. Jf-^ «"'1 *^ li and ^ \LoQS> perfume. ,^. V and ^ I ' C ^^^ arrival. IJ and *^ c?^7Z(:e. f iSi a sprout. (J and ^2) ^P P -x Pfc.sQJ error. ness. tion ]Lk\0 re *p p iing. Ql and «.iA •x 7 O^k (j favor. |J and «u-^ IZqjüI indecency. «p. -x 7 IIQuOVm appear- ance. »Pj -x 7 (ZOQID posses- sion. ÜandU ^Zoa^ orna- ment. 110 TABULAR VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUNS. B. USUAL INFINITIVE FORMS OF PEAL AND OF THE OTHER CONJUGATIONS. A Peal Pael. Aphel. Shapliel. Usual form Usual form Usual form and and and ^c^,^c^, "^s^i^ ^^4^ Hod» ^Q^OLD or^Q4o2 lAfHAM^D ]^^mQS thought, change. \d^£>^ a heel. \cL»JlZiL flattery. IZo^Cil* slavery, Yfl^^ a desert. y^^L help. JjpAqSD a concussion. Qa^aSD a thrust. \moboL combat. f^OQA delay, ^ la ^ \£ ^^ili)^ a speech. '{LSQ.^Lmer- IZqj^QSd c7e chandise. struction, » u t * ^,iO insight. \t^^*>*QLdespair.\L^U\0^a gift. \h\OQM deliver^ • I, II II » ^ Ql and «.kA ^2) ance. llO2i!L0 departure. f;rf>V) a saw. ]^>0Vn bellows. 1A»Q^Z rubbish. l;oV) a Aoe. qÜ and *A.i U'and wi^L l]"(and \si) IJVd «^ )Z^!!^ harTcen- *|ZLiXQd2 a maw- IZcuAxSO aii as- ]>SV)Q> cow- Z72^. ^Ze. sembly. elusion. ]] and «.B^ |J and «^xS (j and «.^2) |J and «.a^ P',10 a drawing 1Aa)oZ doctrine. IZoi i^oV) cow- |a>OQs a^o- 'o/* (of water). elusion. IJ'and la jA^Z^i arrival. TABULAE VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUN'S. 121 C. INFINITIVE FORMS OF THE LESS FREQUENT CONJUGATIONS. Palel and Palpel. Pealel. Pavel and Paiel. (•^)011 splendor. I'AVlSviS, In. pJLoZ a worm. Ql and %ju^ nocence. V'and *A ^vh^Qit motion. Pali. \[tr\r\^ contam- ination. liftGI^Qi:^ astonhh- ment. Parel. Pamel. Taphel. ]Q0l5Qfö swiftness, \^^Q» shame, Ir^oLoZ doctrine. 122 DENOMINATIVE NOUNS. § 41. Denominative Nouns. Here belong : 1. Noans ; a) without any formative additions, derived from some other nouns, which may be either primitives or derivatives of verbs ; e. g. JHyi a gardener, from Holy» a garden ; ]»» ^V) a seaman, from ]»»\V) salt ; h) with the formative syllables ]i- masc., |Aj.- fern., (Patronymics or Gentile ISTouns) ; e.g. V^ioooij Roman, lA > \;m k\Israelitess ; with the falling away of the syllable »flOQ in names of towns ; e. g. ^iffl^] an Ephesian, from «laomal ; or Feminine Abstract Nouns, terminating in "jia and ]Aa— ; e.g. ^Zqi\^ youthfulness, from P«.^ a youth ; '|Zo;aQl blind- ness, from ;^Q1 blind; \LkM^y beginning, from «Aa9 ^/i<; Äeac?, principal ; c) diminutives with .Q or cfioa masc. and |AjJQ fem. attached to the noun ; e. g. po«^ a little son, from Vr^ ; Vscu*! a ?^V^?e brother, from "U*] ; lA^oZ;a a lit- tle daughter from IZrD ; |flOO*^\^ a young dog, from |ol^« Sometimes we find both forms in use ; e. g. |jo;^.. and pDO;o.. a manikin, from Ir^yi* Diminutives from com- pound nouns also occur ; e. g. pomJ^ from 1jl];0 ; also a double formation ; e. g. 1jQflD0;.O.t a very little man, |AjJQAjoZ;iD a very little daughter. Rem. — Amira (p. 145) mentions a form with the third radical letter doubled, and Q inserted between them ; e.g. Ih^O^oS a little assembly, from l4^^« 2. Adjectives belong here, which are formed ; a) by affix- ing the terminations p masc. and IZLj fem. ; e. g. \l»^Oj masc. (AaJjsjO) fem., spiritual, from paOj ; b) by affixing the terminations U masc. 1A^- fem. ; e. g. ]aIü«Q.. masc. COMPOSITE AND EXOTIC NOUNS. 123 IAaIq^Q^ fem. corporeal from ]Sfl*Q^. ; ordinal numerals (see § 50. 8) ; e. g. "^AAZ the third, from ]hll ; c) by affix- ing the terminations V"J masc., ]LkJ fem.; e.g. IlLloj masc. |Aai>jO> fern. Rem. — lu respect to the cases under a. and c. above, Amira re- marks (p. 106) that the latter is rather used in metaphorical lan- guage, yet he also admits the interchange of the two forms. § 42. Composite and Exotic Nouns. 1. The formation of words by composition is more frequent in Syriac than in the other Semitic dialects, (see Michaelis, p. 151 ; Lud. de Dieu, pp. 73, 74). The words most fre- quently used in forming compounds are ;i son ; e, g. M^J^i man, \lOL\:i^voice;\i2^ sir ; e.g. \s^ , N SO enemy; *Sirmi(ch; e. g. \Lm^ jDj householder; j^j^j principal ; e.g. (^NNvao firstling; ]Lk:D house; e.g. AaO Jroao corn-house; sometimes ^\l>*| eating ; e. g. 1 »;o\ol adversary. In changing the Concrete idea into the Abstract, either the last part of the compound word only is regaraed ; e.g. |Z onn,\sn hostility, or both parts are changed into the feminine ; e. g. 12oA*Ä 7 7 t^j house-holding. Upon, the plural inflection see § 44. 2. The Syrians have introduced many Greek words into their language, and given them either Syriac terminations or permitted them to retain, more or less, the Greek forms. The following are examples ; jly. V a/ja, ^CuXy^^o] kayysXm, ^i nVn .m ^ysp.(^v, yd\\-n fxaXXov, ]4^1ALD fxaärj/xara, .fn oVnm . ! nVnrr> (i\)Woyi(i[kog. There are some peculiarities 124 GENDER OF NOUNS. in the formation of these Avords, for which see § 12. 5. and § 44. Eem. 8. At the time of the Crusades, the Syrians introduced words also from the western languages ; e. g. VLvT^a the Franks, ^toUT Germany, »lAxS^l England. \Lk'^ Prince, «jt)901 Henry, etc. § 43. Gender of Nouns. The Syriac language has but two genders, masculine and feminine. The latter is distinguished partly by the signifi- cation and partly by the form. 1. In respect to the signification, the gender is fixed by the same rules as in Hebrew. Masculines are the names of men, masculine ofiices, nations, mountains, months and rivers. Feminines are the names of female persons and ani- mals, countries, cities, and members of human and animal bodies, which are found double although they have mascu- line endings in the plural ; e. g. ^^^yofeet from ^yi', etc. 2. In respect to form, the feminine is characterized by - ( 1^ ), wi«. , Q- , Z» But the first of those final syllables, which is particularly used for the for- mation of feminines from masculines (e. g. \'rCLt^ female com- 7 panion from ;^ija masc), must not be confounded with a similar sounding termination of masculines (the emphatic state, § 45, 3) usually given in the lexicons, as the only mas- culine form in use. To distinguish this fern, form from the raasculineSj it is usually given with the termination }L ; e. g. IAqj^ the queen. The forms with cL and «.a» have arisen by apocope from U ; e.g. on» (, goodness, ^lo learn. The last of the above mentioned endings L is seldom used ; e. g. LiHiD part. GENDER OF NOUNS. 125 Rem. — 1. The feminine ending I- is generally found in adjec tives ; e. g. JD^ masc. \^ fern. If the word ends with 1 , this letter is changed into a. , and forms ]^ ; e. g. \cUi masc. \lnl fem. Gentile nouns and numerals ending with w*-« change that termina- tion mto P».- ; e.g. w»jOOU masc. M)0C7U fem. Nouns with \L final are masculine when Z is a radical letter of the noun ; e. g, (AjtO boiv, I Ao . ornament, lÄul olive. Rem. — 2. Many nouns with a masculine ending are feminine or common. They are usually given in the emphatic state (§ 45. 3) e. g. "Jsi-S. ship, V^)0) wa^, |l-S^ rib, ]1j1 earth, ]lyA pitcher. 1". -»^ »py »p-x ^P^\i >|£:3 well, |;00 he7'd, IjCl.r Zme of battle, \xa\ com. img ^ P "" ^ P 7 ^ ^mP 7 *t? ^ J£51 leather bottle, p^;ja sword, com., |J^qSd burden, (;2D ^a^^w^ |£)P s^owe, I^D;^ 6eZ/?/, |lii\ com. tongue, \m£ü soul, IjQJ ^re, IP» .kP7.»PP »PP 9CU2D com. moow, |;^(T> shield, \££l£D com. mo^A, |<^!\ branch \£ß'rL bed, |aji09 com. «^mc/, (AjZj com. terror, |SiO> com. ;^rwza wiew^, ^Qju* hades, (Aj^QA rws^, jiV?» com. heaven, (jkSQji com 5?^w, ^'Q' ^^^y- Names of animals also are of the common gen der ; e. g. |l^*» an ass, \}J^ , a camel ; also the cardinal num bers from 20 to 100.. Greek nouns retain their gender ; e. g, po-x 1^^'^ •iSCOpJOfiO ö'uvoiJof, (0^/U> 5ia^y\xr\. In general, those nouns are considered as feminine which come from the feminine of the He- brew, ending in HT, and all of those nouns which, in the emphatic state, end in '\L (§ 45. 3). 126 NUMBER OF NOUNS. § 44. Number of Nouns, There are two numbers in Syriac, the singular and plural. There are, indeed, four dual forms, taken from the Hebrew, ending in ^-ju- (^>2 masc. two^ ^Ihl fern, two, ^2]^ two hundred, and ^>^^ EgyjpPj ; but they cannot be considered as a special form of the language. Pairs are usually ex- pressed by the plural, and duality by the numeral two. Tlie plural of masculines is formed by annexing the syllable ^x. to the noun sing. ; e. g. ^'Q^ 'mountains, from io^ ; that of the feminine by ^ (instead of | ) ; e. g. JjoAa virgin, plur. ^oAs« Rem. 1. Plural masculines of derivatives from Yerbs U , ending with V- a.nd •-*- , terminate in ^-ä- ; e. g. \H hoy^ .. -n 7 7 _-« 7 plur. ^iN^ ; *.*;-äSd dioelling, plur. ^,.ftSD* Feminmes ending in q and L take tQ ; e. g. on\V) kingdom, plur. p • 7 IP I tOO^SD : those ending in •-»- take ^ ; e. g. ^'^ creature^ plur. ^;:d* Nouns derived from Yerbs Mik, if the doubled consonant appear again in the plural, take Linea occultans I ..7 under the first of the similar lettere ; e. g. ^ * Vj V).> from m^ 7 X.. 7 «P7 pD^ sea, ,^1 V)V)S from jSos people. Bern. 2. Some masculines form the plural in the same manner as feminines. Here belong : (coj physician, plur. •QfiDj; Jujoj cno, plur. |ZCL»)Of ; |^>| mö?i, plur. (ZQ-a>| ; jZ"! j?Z«cö, plur. tO)2] ; \laL snake, plur. IZoQAi ; ^JjQO mwZö, plur. VZojjQD ; ImjQD throne, plur. .qcd>o:d ; ]I!^!^ night, plur. *o\iN ; Uaa memher, plur. (ZoJ^QO ; J^J ^ -up P70-»>P herdsman, plur. (as a part. ^->^5) tOiJ ; |ci» cup-hearer^ »p. p 7 p , plur. |Zaa* , &c. (Compare Agrell, Comment, de varietate generis et numeri, p. 68 ; and upon the absolute and ein- phatic states, th'-''- form and use, see § 45. 1. 3.) NUMBER OF NOUN'S. 127 Rem. — 3. The following feminines form the plural like mascu- lines ; a) by rejecting the feminine ending of the emphatic singular (§ 45. 3), \!iDXell, ^J^V; ((ltS( woman, \m^) ; Xtsof wall, ]sxi]] l2\l . ^art^ew, "llyi ; UjQLd.. coa^'^^yi ; Xt^} ßc/-basket, ^>Sn> ; li^l^?^ ^^«^ K^? ; XK^ thorn, \^ ; 1^4^» loheat, \^Z ; TZoi window, IcLd ; lÄ£lL ^/Ze, iLoS ; I'Aoh^ &a5m US ; U\^ ieaf {of paper), W]^ ; 12\\^ sickle, ]]'^ ; l2\SQ**iD sieve, \la**^ ; 12\1Sd w^orc?, IJLo ; l^di hair, "JjiO^ VZ^io cave, Ip^D ; 12*^^3 barley, iJlflO ; VAl^SlflD sAzp, ll-*^; VA^üJ!^ cZws^er (of grapes), ]nil ; lAo'^l //io?i^, 'in'fL ; UjcL^ 6nc?Ze, I'Sjr^ ' 12\2^0 bark, ]sSo ; ]^n^ almond, ]r^', I'Ali year, ^^J» ; I'Ali hour, ^-.JLj» ; VZüfi /^, "^112, etc. ; b) by retaining 2 ; e.g. Xh^ ^ooty, X^A^ ; lAl^cry, 1^1^; 12{a* 5z>A^, Uvm ; X^\^'^oxious means, "{b^ ; \l^f^ugliness, U]^; IW» care, ^As^ ; l^lß caZZ^r^9', V/^ ; ^LJom rust, lA>*Q* (see Agrell, passim, p. VO. sg'.) Rem. — 4. Some nouns form a double plural (the feminine form 17 ^ ^ ^, . ^ M^^^^ ^dioV and iCTloV; ^^ army, ^ÜLum and ^ oS i m ; ]lr*I Örea5^, ^jx» and ^Oj*I ; ^1 ^me, ^oloi and ^1 {times, turns in repetition) ; ^1 hand, ^^Tand ^rA {ff^^^ ^/^Ae hand); yjOi day, ^^qI and ^q1 ; \oS>, heart, ^^^ and ^Qii-^ ; lilD Zort^, ^-^^ and ,0'^ ; höU stream, ^hou and ^OJOIJ ; lU^Vea.^, ^^^Ll^nd ^?K ; \LjL eye, ^Li and ^ifoun- tain) ; ^2.01 heel, ^»OOl and ^-tEiqI ; jj'rO Aorw, ^> and ^•^ (corner) ; ]^ name, ^OlSO* and ^OTSQ* , etc. Some 128 NUMBER OF NOUNS. masculines as in some of the above examples, take Q or 01 between the plural ending and the last radical. Also some feminines in |Z take Q and 01 before the plural ending ; e.g. \tiiDO\ people, |ZqLd|; XtlliDpart, l2oiV); l^Sl o/mX^, VZoill; \^]\noiher,]l(AiD^, 1A!sd1 handmaid, jZoUdI (compare § 49). Sometimes a. is in- serted ; e. g. (ZjQQj 6e^, |Au>QQ> ; (AOOj ^?ace, |A.i^Oj ; (ACDQQD mare, (AjlCOCLCO, etc. Rem. — 5. The composites (§42.1) form the plural in such a man- ner that either ; a) the last part of the composite is inflected ; e.g. (£Q2lD ZXjlO granary, or ; 6) the first part ; e. g. |«1 i1*^ maw- Ä:/^c?, or ; c) both parts ; e.g. (j-iDZllli tattling. Rem. 6. — Some words only occur in the plural ; e.g. y^liD water^ (juM Zi/b, \Si\face, y.k^^'i worth. Rem. Y. — Some singular names (collectives) take the plural mark, «p ••? ikp»« y *9"0 iiJe&wi (§ 6) ; e. g. [mm horses, (r^O cattle, (lA «A^ep. Amira (p. 95) also places here Ir-^^ ^*^c?5 and (r*A2 draft-cattle. Rem. 8. Greek nouns, without regard to gender, take the Syriac plural ending of masculines in f- ; e. g. yZiOOSSi^JZi} i'jt Kf xo'n'oi, L^2) cpaXayysg, tSü..O> i^o/fAara. Less frequently do they take the plural terminations of feminines in \l ; e.g. (ZOID^ (xiip^avaj, IZojAcol (froiSicc. Letters which constitute the Greek singular terminations are commonly omitted; but in some instances retained; e. g. |sQnV)l vofxoi from vojxoj. The plural terminations (Js? and rsg, from ig and a?, are represented by |,i and |4 ; e. g. j, iSo xXsiSsg from xXsig', [^ijkJfi] olvSpiolvtss from avS^iag. The Syriac often re- tains the termination of the Greek plural and of the cases, represent- ingthe accusative aj (first declension) by «IX), %CD(, JCDO and «£00 f; 7 «7 7 I 7 3:*%7 e. g. «1X1301 ^wva^, «JDD|J_a^ (pjaXa^, «löQJjZI 'Aä>)va^, 17-^ 7 - «X ;'^in Ksyx^sag; oi and ou^ (second declension) by Q and DIFFERENT RELATIONS OF THE NOUN 129 »COO; e. g. QQaQ^^I 27-WÜ0J, %CDQ2uJ1aä ^/Xj-jr-n-ou^; and ; e.g. llJaLO xs(paXaia; the geuitive 'i ^-S' \®^-*^'l ä^X^iwv ; SS and a^ of the third declension are represented by «iXLfc., *CD, %£0\ and ^flOO ; e.g. *£D;rQO Kajtfa^a^, JDD|o\a-7rXaxag, >00OlA-^g1 'EXkr\vas *, £«? from the singular in is is represented by «£CU. ; e.% g. «miCTD?] a]^s(fsis ; and the neuters ending in ara, are represented by |4 ^^i Soy liar a. Some of these plural endings occur in Latin nouns ; e. g. «ID pQJf annonm ; %S£i\\^SC)\o castra. The same is true in respect to Syriac words ; e. g. kTOjl.. garden^ for 1i-t from lAl^. (comp. Ägrell Otiol. Syr. p. 46—49). ' § 45. Different Relations {States) of the Noun. 1. Besides the absolute and construct state of the Hebrew^, of which, the latter marks the genitive, there is in Syriac and Chaldee, an emphatic state. It originally marked the noun with, the definite article. It also occurs where we should not expect to find the definite article. Rem. — The indefinite article is expressed by the absolute state, or by pM one. There are many nouns which never, or very seldom, occur in the absolute state; e.g. [[I^QM heat, }^(10 situation, Yjo'Z hull, VZoli death, etc. 2. The construct state ; a) of nouns niasc. sing., does not differ from the absolute state ; e. g. ^ good ; but in the 180 DIFFEEENT RELATIONS OF THE NOUN. plural, the ending ^a- is changed into «-».- ; e. g. *i *^C con- struct state from ^ajqZ» Nouns masc, which form the plural •n . . . '' by -ju- (§ 44.Eem.l), change that termmation mto »a^ ; e.g. ^JLA^ from ^r^ ; 5) in the fem. sing., (- of the absolute state is changed into 2 ; e. g. Aoi from )^4» To the ter- minations Q and *j^ only 2 is added ; e. g. 2on\V> from nn\V) , A^'^ from wi^» In the plural^ Z is appended instead of y ; e.g. A£l4 from i^.^* 3. The characteristic of the emphatic state, for both gen- ders and numbers, is final 1 (= ^ the Hebrew article). This IS ; a) attached to the sing, of nouns masc. with _1- preceding; e.g. {Sül from ^Ql people. In the plural the xioun masc. takes the termination (* with the falling away of *jl- ; e. g. I r^y. ^/le men, (from the constr. state ^»r^y») from ;^yt; h) in the emphatic state fem. sing, and plur. |-. is attached to the constrigkct state. In tji^ sing., i_ falls away before L ; e. g. lA^oArü from constr. state A^oA^^ In the plural, — is retained before Z ; e. g. 1 A^oAo from A^oZ^» •J) 7 Rem. 1. — The emphatic state plur. masc. ends in (j^. in nouns which take ^.a« in the plural, (§ 44. Rem.l) ; e. g. (',^^ from ^ ,.ÄiD» Only three nouns take (.»» instead of (ju. ; viz. (••^4 «•n«. P ^ i>..9 bo7/s, \^jk^Q fragments, and (-a^M i»reas^, from the emphat. sing. U-j^, M^^7 H»r**» The emphatic forms }Ll}h water, and I > V)» heaven, belong here. Buxtorf cites yet a third form, with »Ö P »9 9.. * 9" 9 ^ 9. «9 «I U- ; e. g. Rom. IX. 24. (a^; 26. |-jLliD; Ephes. ii. 11. f-M*r"1* But these forms are not recognized by Amira, and the form in (a»« should perhaps be restored in these cases, as more correct. The fol- lowing should be noted as irregular emphatic plural forms : p*^*^j DIFFERENT RELATIONS OF THE NOUN. 131 from \£i\ fruit, [iMukJ from U»^> odor, J-JOV^from \Q\j^si(/ht^ (Aq from {A^i^ house, etc. Rem. 2. — Feminines with masculine endings (§ 43. Rem.2), form tlie emphatic state like masculines by attaching the termination (-.; e.g. ^)( mr^Ä, emphat. state Jl) I ; ^0;ü ^nee, emphat. state iDJQSiÜ* Before the ending (- of the fern, absol., Q is inserted and quiesces in — ; e.g. JLOpj»* from jOfj^yoy. Forms with ^ju^ take \Da^* Some words in the emphatic form take Q before the last radical; e. g. 1A-^CId|Sd from |jD]k)/ooc?. Feminines which are formed from masculines, like l^r^y« from J^yi, and especially adjectives, form the emphatic state fem., by affixing the syllable ifL to the masc. absol. ; e. g. lAli^ (from ^i masc). Adjectives in t change this termination into w»- ; e.g. lAa-jL^ from ü-^ ^"^^• Those in ^ take u. after 1 ; e. g. I A i I^m '^Lo from ^IOm*^ compassionate. In the emphat. state plur., some words change a. before finto Q ; e. g. IZoiu from IIqj «Aee/». Some take Q ; e. g. VZoiiiD from t^ part. Others insert jl ; e. g. 1Aji^]Sd from 12'pfiD^ bundle. Rem. 3.— The emphatic form is found even before the genitive, which is formed by J ; e. g. "Jli!^? ^^ servant of the king (vid. Syntax, § VS). 182 TABLE OF RELATIONS OF NOUNS. Table of the Different Relations (States) of the Noun, MASCULINES. ^^^ fM^l^ ^ A. Nouns of one and two syllables with immutable vowels. (Decl. 1. § 48). Plural. u Singular. emphat. constr. ..7 P 7 .. 7 -X 7 .>WÖS absol. B emphat. ..I p 7 .. X .X 7 i..p p »i 7 ^0 >. 7 fcoL constr. {,nd absol. 7 •X 7 ^ p. p Head. Vessel. Thief. Herb. Nazarite. Nation. B. Nouns in which — and — of the ultimate syllable fall away, but the vowel of the penultimate is retained (Decl. II). ^^.. 7 IjCJlCD X .. p 7 .. p 7 ...X 7 7 :.r * P 7 IP p JCJICD 7 7 sJO^r^ Talent. Witness. Hand. Altar. DECLENSION OF NOLANS. 133 C. Nouns in which — (in gutturals — ) of the ultimate syllable 7 falls away, and the vowel — appears over the antepenultimate radical consonant. (Decl III). jX^r^AliO ^i'Sfc^^Ak) W'^t^ \4£>tiO (One dead).^^^-,^-^^' D. Segholate forms, which begin with a vacant consonant, over 7 1» ... ^ , which the original — or — reappears in inflection, or Q is assumed in their stead (Decl. IV). I ^ ..-« 7 |Soa» .. .7 7 ..7 7 ■liii^ * P -x • •X -X ..IX 7 .. X 7 7 King, Holiness. Master. Day. Eye. Impure. E. Nouns derived from Verbs 1]" ending with V- , *^5 *^ » i^ which 1 passes into «^ and is movable as in both the other forms (Decl. V). • P 7 p.. ^P, TO.. IZoij 7 P" . P 7P" Zql> ■» p.» P 7 "P 1^7' * ^ > o« 7 7 1 » oa fo» Prisoner. (ij Herdsman. , > VmVn ^ [bandoned. 184 DIFFERENT RELATIONS OF THE NOUN. F E M I N 1 1^ E S. i.^A'^H^ lui A. Nouns with immutable vowels (Q, «-i-.,etc.) before the ending U (Decl. I). UoAq Virgin, JJo Bride, ^L^ City, Plural. empbat. constr. AL'^Io absol Singular. emphat. constr. A^ absol. floAa B. Nouns, whose final syllable begins with two consonants, which, in the emphat. state sing, have _I_ or -1. inserted between them (Decl. II). l]k)>l Widow, 13!^' Chariot, ^Jl Alms. 12^^-,'r ASsoiT -ioiT l^^i^if t^sS Xi^;^ Ai,^ ^.^ IV ^^ l^oji Aoji ^?1 VAoji Ao)i C. Nouns, in whose emphat. state, the vowel of the first syllable is moved forward to the second vacant consonant ( Decl. Ill ). * IvnjI Par^wer, flLl Cowr. p .. 7 12-,^^« 2*^L ii^- ^- ^^ 1^ *x^ DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 135 D. Derivatives of Verbs ]] ending in ^-Zand lo, whose «^ and O in the emphat. state sing, quiesce in.^ and _:^ ( Decl. IV ). |!Lk»0* Blame ^ fni n Animal^ \"^L ^"*^' l2\l>[»'o *Pi 0" AjIajo« ...X ( lolL •• 7 Ali^ ^ l^^o 12< • 7 7 ZCLiLJ» U-mO Ui^ E. Derivatives of Verbs p ending in Q and «.x« ( Z ), beginning with two consonants, and having O iind wi movable in the plural ( Decl. V ). «k 4\ X X • Q.^* Thing ^ Qm.Lo Plague^ ^r-^ Creature, Q.^» Request^ Alio Par if, OjSd .Dominion. Alio ..1» l2aMl^ Zqj^ ^a^ Xt:-^ Zu'3 ^•^ M^l ^.5 \°^l 12^ 2oiV) 7 .. ^qiSd l2o3i> 2o3i5 P..7 P VZoo, 2Qa^ l2o»vi 2aMio lA.-^ A^>o Viol, 2ai^ l2dio Alio rzä-Ai) Lh-^ 136 NOUNS WITH SUFFIXES. § 46. Nouns with Suffixes, The noun, in taking suffixes (see § 16. 2. B. and table of suffixes, § 16), undergoes the following changes : 1. In masculines ; a) the suff. in the sing., is attached to the emphatic state, with the falling away of "U ; e. g. pNV» (from .^,S^), with the suffix .in\Vi> In decl. I. III. IV. V. (§ 48. A) the radical vowels are not changed. In nouns of decl. II., the final vowel of the absolute state _2_ or _!_, re- appears before the suffix of the 1 sing, and 2 and 3 plural ; e. g. ^-^, emphat. ]^\n , with suffix . iV)\s ; jOL-flO, jOlflO , with suffix .OOljCflflD^ So also monosyllabic nouns, which lose Jl or _!_ in the emphatic state, take it again before the suffix of the 1 sing, and 2 and 3 plur. ; e.g. 2>a* , emphat. |^»s , with suffix ^«^s , y!^£uM (^'^ from •^Q), etc. In nouns, derived from Yerbs ]] ending in \1 , emphat. state t (Decl. V), v* before the suffix of the 1 sing., 2 and 3 plur., quiesces m _^ ; e. g. «i »\^ , .o^ > \ ^ from )]!(5 , emphat. Ij^L^ ; but before the other suffixes w> is movable ; e. g. »^j^^ , o i > \^ ; ( and according to Syriac grammarians, *u is movable even before the suffix 1 sing ; e.g. wi.1^.4)- The same is true also of nouns ending with »-»-I (passive participles of Pa. Aph. and Shaph. of Verbs ]]j' §32.1, •X X 7 7 7 T 7 §48 masculines, Decl.V); e.g. ^oouAmio, »^AmLo (. > . A^Vn ) from ^Amk) drinh. These nouns with suffixes of the 1, sing, are pronounced like the absol. state ; e. g. -» A^Vn Ytiy drinks («-lIöjQO m?/ throne from "ImjCLD is an exception). Here belong all the emphatic forms ending with ^L» , having a vacant consonant preceding, excepting \k*^ master^ which with a suffix is as follows : ^'fh , j^',1d, cft^Sd , .OOT^, etc. Finally, in emphatic nouns ending in [a, having a vowel preceding, the general rule is followed; e.g. ]lyJJl reflection^ NOUNS WITH SUFFIXES. 13; with sultix »A-Ä.1.01 , or faO'rlD creator^ with suff. *xuO'-Q "'^ " ^ ^^ ' ^O'rO» The same is true of nouns with ll for ]u ; e. g. llUao with suff. J\^ori , yUciCi, ^^Siilaa, etc., plur. J(1q^ »^P»Q^» But in cases where the termination |"| does not stand for "U , as in l)ico , 1 takes Lin. occuL in suff. 1 sing. and 2 and 3 plur. ; e. g. J\iai , ^tia> , etc. In the other suff., and in the phir. with suff., the vowel of ] is thrown back upon the preceding vacant consonant ; e. g. «jLDpLfiD , ^fl£0 ,plur. wapiX) , ^pL£D , etc. b) Plural suffixes in the masc. are attached to the construct fern (§ 45. 2. a) with which the suff. 1 sing, forms a crasis ; e. g. »*n\V)» In the sing, masc, however, w*. passes into Q ; e. g. wiOinn\V) (also .-lOlO-. == Germ, aü (Engl, oi, nearly ), according to Lud. de Dieu^ p. 160, but not according to Amira) ; and in the 3 fem. — before «^ passes into «, ; e. g. OlinSv» (§ 16. B). Plural nouns with ^^ , attach the suf- fix to the construct form ending in «uui ; e. g. ^->-^yi with suff. %,in!!^.. , waOlOi^..^ So also in the emphatic ending % 07 ^\ ~ fV^ ^\ ••■7 with U- ; e.g. >»^-i^yt , w»oiQJi.y. (see Lud. de Dieu, p. 163). Also plurals with ^ll ; e.g. ] i A ^ , with suff. JX^ and «i l\l, and those plurals which, with the suffix of 1 sing., differ from the sing, with the same suff. only by taking Eibui ; e.g. llAmLo drinh^ with suff. ^4*^ ; pl^^"- emphat. j-i IAaSd ..7 7 7 . •• 7 with suff. »uAmSo and ^aAäSd my drinks. Rem. 1. — Collective nouns sing, with Ribiii, take the sufF. sing.; e.g. lliwith snff. CJul , j^il* Only ]jül takes the suff. plur. ; e. g. ^OlÖmil^ Amira p. 213, supposes that U>Q£) with both suffixes belongs here. 188 KOUNS WITH SUFFIXES. Rem. 2. \st\ father, \j^\ brother, \j!l^ father-in-law, are formed anomalously. The first two, with the siifF, of the 1 sing., change — into — ; e. g. »-uQ|» The last takes — ; e.g. «iSf)»t. Final | before the other suffixes is changed into Q; e. g. ^QS| , •ulSOSI , •X ^7 . 9v »7 9^ ^7 •jOlQIDf , OlQOl , ^QQf , etc. 2. In Feminines ; a) the suffix in the sing, is attached to the form of the emphat. state with a union vow el preced- ing ; e.g. oii\Lk5j1 from USO)*) widow, emphat. state lAVvn;^, The suffixes of the 1 sing, and of the 2 and 3 phir. are attached to the construct state without the union vowel, to avoid the concurrence of three vacant consonants ; e. g. ^1\Cua from VrOjs* , constr. state L\Cl»^* Rem. — From l-ZfiD (emphat. state) mistress^ is found tOCn2;SD» In \L*f^ daughter, constr. state, Z^ with the sufi*. of the 1 sing.,-« moves forward from the first to the second consonant ; e. g. tuL'^iDi ♦ It should be remarked that the letter marked with Linea occultans is to be pronounced, if the above suffix occur ; e.g. |Ai*,Sd with •X .7 X ^9. I .71 ■■ * sufF. .QD/\l-i,iO, |£pl with suff. •alpl» Amira asserts (p. 190) that the laterSyrians have the form.tOCJlAX-i^ , etc. b) In the plural, feminines take singular saffixes ; e. g. wiAL'oAq , yj^ot^ , etc. Rem. — In respect to the cardinal numbers (§ 50. 2), it shouJd be remarked that they take both the sing, and plur. suffixes, forming with the first, possessive pronouns, and with the last, demonstrative pronouns ; e.g. OlZ;£Ql his ten, ^OOIajZ those two, ^Ou2>Z those two, .OOuALZ those three. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 139 § 47. Declension of Nouns in General. Nouns are varied in respect to inflection (§§44.46) accord- ing to their form, either with or without any vowel changes. Thus they are divided into tv/o principal classes, viz. ; those with immutable and with mutable vowels. The latter class, on account of its diversities, may be arranged under several paradigms, and together with the former class, takes the place of the declensions of the western languages (comp. § 48). § 48. Exhibition of Nouns according to Declension. A. Masculines. Decl. I. — This includes all monosyllabic nouns as well as those having more syllables than one, with immutable vow- els (^, , Q, Q,) e. g. %ä^> liead.^ p^O master^ ^O^JiD lean, Q.i midst, ^.Jj^kQSi partition^ »aZoZ native. To the latter class belong likewise those nouns whose penult, syllable is either a close one ; e. g. t ClOJ-» herbage^ (gentile nouns with «.k. ; e. g. *>A'r^ Nazarite\ or such as would have a close penult syllable, if the Syrians employed duplication of letters 7 (= Dagh. forte) ; e. g. *^2l1.. thief Rem. — Here also belong nouns derived from Ml Verbs with — ^ which in the plural, double the final radical letter, and mark the first of the two doubled letters with Lin. occult. ; e. g. 7 17 -X 3: ^QLnation, plur. -.biOSOl« But monosyllabic nouns having Q and a., - I *> 7 and m the emphat. state, which change — and — into — , belong to «s *0 7 I segholate forms(Decl.IV); e.g. ^CL» day, emphat.state JSOQa ; ^-lA eye, emphat. state ]uS ; as do those also in which under the same circumstances Q is transposed ; e. g. **0j£) holiness, emphat. state ]i>QD^ In J>ai^ young man., ^IQl kid, and ja^V^ paradise, _1 falls away in the inflection and u. with JL preceding, forms ai ; e. g. emphat. state |^r>i\\ , etc. 140 DECLENSION OF NOUNS. Decl. IL This includes nouns, with _I_ and JL, which have two consonants ; e.g. ^Q* name^ or two syllables, of which the penult. is either a mixed one as in ^\4^1d (part. pass. Aph.), t»»naV) mighty ; or whose middle radical must be 7 7 7 -n doubled; e.g. po a talent ; ;2)« sparrow ; or has an immu' •7 9 _ ^•' * ^ «a 7 X table vowel ; e.g. ^1^ eternity ; jOlfiO witness ; ^\.^.. wheel. In these nouns, the vowel of the final syllable falls away excepting in the sing, before the suff. of the 1 sing, and be fore the 2 and 3 plur. ; e. g. emphat. state ]^\s with suff. Ol vis S , . iV^Ss, and .OOlSoSl* Rem. — Here belongs also pt hand^ emphat.state |r»( ; plur.,_ipA|, y* 7 -^0*7 ' etc. Forms also like «ax!D^ altar , and (m^,^ belong here, which take a new syllable with _2_ over the first radical letter in conseq'ience of an accumulation of consonants ; e. g. t^iJSrSo (see 7 7 ^ * 5 ^ § 15. 4). The following are examples : vMJflO morning^ «.^A^lLo opening^ etc. From ^i\V) fountain^ appears the emphat. state ]t I \V) , plur. fju- i W)> Decl. III. To this belong those nouns, which, throughout their inflection, lose JL (before gutt. JL) of the final syllable ; but take _L as a helping vowel over the antepenultimate radical consonant, viz. ; in participles Ethpe. ; e. g. ^^y^^Alk: dead^ emphat. state IJ^^AliD* Decl. IV. Here are to be enumerated all nouns which cor- respond with Hebrew segholate forms (see Gesen. Lehrgeb. p. 568 sq). Such for the most part in Syriac, are monosyl- labic nouns which begin with a vacant consonant, and have for their characteristic vowel _L or _l, which appears first in the emphat. state over the first radical. In this form the noun remains unchanged throughout its formations. They may as in Hebrew, be divided into derivatives of verbs with and without gutturals, and derivatives of üi and »^^ Verbs. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 143 A) To tlie first class belong forms like j^ Idng, emphat. state ]alk) ;^ -^ hooh, emphat. state l-a»; Xrc/u'^ em- phat. state ]'^-^ with suff: oiolso , .ooi-r£ia> , J\^, To the form with Hholem in Hebrew corresponds ^o^ holiness emphat. state Ujab; j^o-^Q hiee, emphat. state ]l)>aQ (comp. § 15. 2. B. b). The same applies : ^ B) In forms with gutturals; e.g. j^i slave, emphat. state Ijni ; ^i^ master, emphat. state |]1q» Here belong also emphatformslikellifear^/i, "{Vji cedar, \iho\ food, X>^yo]way. C) Finally, derivatives of Yerbs ^ and oi lose -lor -^ belonging to the middle quiescent radicals a. or Q» In con- nection with _L, JL and Q form the dipthongs ai and a?^ ; e.g. ^^^ eye, emphat. state ^jA; jdOm ^^^^7^!, emphat.state ]ocuI, (AjtO constr. state, /iowse, emphat. lAxO). Rem. — The following forms take — , viz. : ;£QQ flesh, ;^lö side, ^J^ counsel, and the emphat. forms lib] mourning, \iAJXsea, ^Jjl threshing floor, \ZL^ ship, I'^l Zam6 ; from ^^"^ etc. Some words which would in Hebrew, take Pattah, in Sjriac, take J^ ; e.g. ^yi'/<5^^5 emphat.state My») , etc. f is considered as a guttural when at the end of JSO^ impure, emphat. state IfSQ^, plur. absol. -j)Sa|^ constr. <-itSü.4 , emphat. 1 pio^ ; and in the emphat. form ]] j2, plur. ^|)Z ( also ^? |Z ) from the absolute form (jZ grass. Bed. V. Here belong derivatives (mostly participles and infinitives) of Yerbs P (comp. § 40.) ending in 11, «^ and ^i— The distinguishing characteristic is, that ] is changed into »jl, and is movable as well as both the other endings in the emphat. state sing, and before the suffixes with the union vowel ; e.g. Vx* emphat. state H^i« » with suff. ouA . ♦ But before the suff. of the 1 sing, and 2 and 3 plur. 1 quicsces in 142 DECLENSION OF NOUNS. — ; e. g. .oouiyt» The sfime is true in the plnr. which ends with ^ (§ 44. Eem. 1) with the falling away of ] ; e.g. »^ ,- The suffix is attached to the emphatic state ending with Xä as well as to the constr. state ending with ^j^a* In respect to the changes of the vowels, it should be remarked that the form with ]- takes in the emphatic state, if it be a monosyllable and begin with a vacant consonant ; e. g. Iju^.. from p.. revealed. In words of two or more syllables the preceding vowel remains unchanged ; e. g. ^V^^ from [^»Vr> |>\ Av> from |J..ASd« Monosyllabic nouns with *JL mute likewise retain their vowels ; e.g. "jLao from , >nn wine. Finally nouns ending with «x. (part. pass, of Pa. and Aph. see § 32. 1), lose _L in the emphat. state sing. ; e. g. ] Arr>Vn from >i\mV) abandoned ; but — appears again in the emphat. state plur. ; e. g. ]iSmV>» » i> Rem. — From monosyllabic nouns ending with (— we find forms with — ; e. g. (ifflO (Matt. vi. 4) from }£QD» Also from fj^ we have the plur. emphat. Hk.2L4 as though from %%\(j* Here belongs also f "^^ from the obsolete form pjQA, constr. state plur. - >V/^*. The part Pe. act. differs from the noun of the same form by being inflected as usual,while thenoun,in the plur.takes the form of feminines of decl. IV., and f is changed into Q movable with _I_ preceding ; «.g. [Ly pasturing, plur. ^^^> , constr. « i iS> , emphat. [^lLj ; yLy herdsman, on the contrary, becomes in the plur. tQl9, Zoi), \LQLy* From |;1d master, both forms of the plur. cccur ; the latter form in (fiD)QD throne. The noun ('^^ prophet, in the plur., contracts a and I into u., |>ni ; while the adjective « i .i ro takes yet anotherf, «j^P 17 -117 ij7 I 7 .»«•»> I y <;mphat. |Jju^,phir. ^U-^^, *u^^, (|-v^^^ DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 143 B. Feminines. Decl. L This includes all the Feminines ending with \J, which have an immutable vowel in the penult syllable. In this case the penult syllable has either a vowel with a letter quiescing in it ; e. g. ]] oAo vir^/m, or the noun is a derivative of Verbs ^, in which case in the plural, the first of the duplicate radicals reappears, and takes Linea occultans ; e.g. |Jl (also 13^) pretense from ^Sil ; ]]o hride^ plur. _!LSo^ The suff. of the 1. sing, is appended to the constr.state with- out the union vowel ; e. g. ^^A^oAo^ The suff. in other persons is joined with the form of the emphat. state ; e. g. ^^oAc) , etc. (comp. § 46. 2). Rem. — From ^LaLqH waistcoat^ appears the plur. _jJ-iZqO as if from (^.I-äZqO or taljZoO» Some forms with final \l take Linea occult, in the emphat. state under J ; e.g. )la,I^ city, emphat. state |Al^r^; or J falls entirely away as in \^\*S\ another, emphatic state iZ^jaf* Decl. IL Here belong all nouns fem. whose final syllable begins with two consonants. They have the peculiarity, «hat between these two consonants, in the emphat. sing., — or — is inserted. This vowel is determined by the vowel belonging to corresponding masculine terminations ; e. g. llSoi"! ividow, (from ^"^^^j"! masc), emphat. state f ALSdj] ; II40 (from ^\4^ masc), emphat. state lA!i4^ ; before guttu- rals — is always the vowel inserted between the two conso- nants in the emphat. ; e.g. [j^'^fowl, emphat. state jAj^^a^ In the reception of suffixes this declension agrees with decl. I ; e. g. c^A^if , OlA^SoiV;, ^AÜL^^ and OlAl|i>» Rem. — Some insert Q ; e. g. ]]ak?/a//, emphat. lA^oaiD» So too f;lD>Z wonder, ]»i>,*^«Z love. Decl. III. This includes those nouns fern, whose vowel of the first syllable is moved forward, in the emphat. state to 144 DECLENSION OF NOUNS. the second vacant consonant ; e. g. }^ilLia female companion, emphat. '\L\ii** ; Uyrl cow, empliat. ]Äi^.Il» Nouns of this class, taking a suff. in the sing., are treated like nouns in decl. I. and II. Rem. .— Some nouns have several emphatic forms. Thus pDjl alms, has three emphatic forms ; e. g. lAojl , lAojl , ^Aoj]» In the same manner also are inflected |m^> offering, jAoUD terror, f*^m woman, Pj^ j fear, etc. The following contractions in the emphat. state should be mentioned : I^h^ for \LLf*^ new, 1^^v\ for (Aia.. from (121.. vine, ^A^^ for ]Al*S\ from ]l*^\ brick. Decl. IV. This includes fern, derivatives of Yerbs |J end- ing in U and |0» It should be remarked in reference to them that the immutable vowel of the penult syllable is retained, and jl. and Q, in the emphat. state sing., quiesce m — and — ; e. g. |i\AJs*o • from (^.jsaO . reproach, (ZOi-k» from 1qj-m animal. If the masc. be monosyllabic the vowel of the first syllable falls away ; e. g. lA^-L^ from l!!^.^ girl, (Bi masc). But in the constr. state, and in all the plurals, jb and Q are movable ; e. g. AjumO . , Zq-»-m , A^A^ » plur., ^i mO> , etc. Rem. — Here belongs also the participle act. of Pa. and Aph. ; but the fem. participle pass, in the same conjugations, ending, in the masc, with %j. , takes — instead of — in the emphat. state. With this vowel jl forms the dipthong ai ; e. g. ^>\.tV> , emphat. |Ai\..V) from «^..k)» Decl. V. To this belong mostly monosyllabic derivatives of Yerbs U ending with Q and «-a^ (some end in 2 ), which begin with two consonants ; e. g. OwiD calamity, w»;a crea- iure. Also dissyllabic nouns belong here with immutable ANOMALOUS NOUNS. 145 vowels in the penult syllable ; e.g. qo] victory^ ^jo2 thanks^ whose O and wt quiesce, throughout in the sing. But in the plur. where o and ^ are movable, some nouns (derivatives of Pa.) take — after the second radical letter; e. g. ol^. entreat?/^ plur. »Q^f , Zo-ik. , (ZoLi«» Nouns ending with ^ belong here, which in the plur. take Q with the falling away of 2 ; e. g. A^ offering^ plur. # Ciill , Lq!Ll , fZci^» Other nouns (rierivatives of Pe.) take — after the first rad- ical letter ; e.g. QiDj resemblance^ plur. tOiOj , 2qLdj, IZqSdj; or with gutturals following, they take — ; e. g. CUkSo hlow^ plur. tQ*AiD, etc. Rem. — The same peculiarity of taking a new vowel is found also ^ p "7 «» * 7 in 0;Sd authority, plur. tO^SD , etc. ; liOl sheep, plur. tQOJ and I pO a hundred, plur. (Zo pD as if from QOJ and OpD» So also in some nouns which are not derivatives of |J ; e. g. QoN*^ partition^ p fy -x P »0« p -^ o\ plur. .Q-tJi^) ; OjClCD testimony, plur. |ZO>Ol£D, and even r>'^\Vn ^ n^XVn ^ besides tO^\V) , and some others. § 49. Anomalous Nouns. Some nouns of very frequent occurrence are inflected in a manner varying more or less from the above mentioned paradigms (§ § 47, 48). This arises either from an attempt to unite different ground-forms, or from the simple ground form conforming less closely to the general laws of inflection. These nouns are the following : 146 PARADIGMS OF NOUNS. MASCULINES. Plural, emphat. constr. absol. loial •' 7 ^7 i2ou3r la\i:i( |Jl10 .A.IO ^ TÄO ^h^ ..I p ]2oiSai ioisoi ]loyir ZoTzr P "7 ,^7 Smgulc tr. emphat. constr abso W ^r Father, 1-^ 7 7 Son. liuo Ax^ 7 House. ]Sa« ^ ^ Name. lur i'zr i2r Place. FEMININES. I2(kir ZoüiDr ^cÄLÖf 1 ^r 1^ Ali p .. •{l-^ Z;^ •{li^x zo^r P "^7 \ -iLL l2cniir zoii^r , ]ho]' Ai^r I2i •• 7 »7 ^r ' IM' Ak)!' ^Qi^r iovbr ,j^r i l^Sl AiiSäi 1I£. wUL» ^-^ li^ii Ai. «p. p •• * |Zq2l£D /n<^m .Q2i£D I^SUX) ._^ fAlöoj Alüo) ^o; 1^0} Aao) 5.01 ]i^l % P -x Mother, daughter. Sister. Maiden. ML People, Year. Lip. Place. 148 NOUNS WITH SUFFIXES. Paradigms of Nouns A. Masculine Nouns. Singular. Decl. II. Decl. IV. Decl. V. Stat, absol. >cnco »^i^D n ^iLm^ Witness. King. Boy. Drink. Suff.Sing. 1 c. ^JCJUD •xa^V) .^2^ .» >A^Vn 2 m. »^jcnoo ^i^Llo .^ 2 f. wklS^OlCD .inn\V) ..n^'i 3 m. OlJOlflO oialk) oiAl oiIAaLo 3 f. OIJOUT oioLk) chA4 ouAaSd Suff.plur. 1 c. ^jOim ^n\^o .A^ ^AaSo 2 m. .QOjOlflD ^oan^V) -o«^»A^v> 2 f. ,-i-OjaiCD ^.nnVo ^-k^Li/^LLO 3 m. ^001>0T£D ^oaialLD ^cuSi 3 f. ^OIjOlflD ^oiiiLk) ^olJU (To the sufF. 1 sing, of the forms y^ and *jiÄm!i add § 46. 1. a). Plural. ^JOICD ^ 7 9 SufF.sing. 1 c. i-ijaiCD *Aa\^ -14 -l:^ V 2 m. ^)OICD ^^aLV^ .-^ --1^ 2 f *jL.ILi>C7lC0 .»OinNV) -aA4 ..n/.Vi 7 l> 3 m.*u010)ai£D •jfno.'^V.V) *jaia!i4 w>aiQli.'(J 3 f. OU?Ol£D oiinNv^ cfiA7 oull2 Suff.plur. 1 c. ^J01£D 2 m. . QUA) aim K 7» 7 2 f. ^-JLlLijOm) ^-»^ 7f 7 3 f. ^dujoicD ^ctLoÜ ^ou2L4 ^oulll^ NOUNS WITH SUFFIXES. 149 with Suffixes, Comp. § 49. Table. Son. p • 7 Father •X .y •X ..y ^01 on)] .- *■ ..y •X -x .»y ^ -" X ^7 •x -x ^y .001 anil i^ooc?, Waters. .. 7 .. 7 ^aioio oilso ^^ * ♦. .. 7 »> •• 7- » r>rn,Vn .001 1 iV) B. Feminine Decl. 1. Decl. IV. Maiden. -Alia ;a^4 ai'AA^ ^ooiA^oAa ^ooiAH^ ^oiASoAs ^oiAIX^ ^SAo ^ -Al!4 WoAa Virgin. vaIjALoA^ oii\lbA£i oi^LoA^D .ÄLoAiD Nouns. Decl V. Petition. oi7q1* ^ooiZol. wkASoAo j^ASoAo ^judIMLoAi:) OlÄSoAlD oi'ASoA£5 tASoAiD oi^Alli (ii^AlVi .QDAlLi .qdALoAo ^.^Al^oAo ^-IdAH^ .ooiASoAni ^ooiAll^ ^oiASoAts ^oiA.A.4 n^. y^ •Pm p«y^ oiZa\# ,001 ZcA» ^01 zix; 150 ADJECTIVES AND NUMERALS. § 50. Adjectives and Numerals. 1. Adjectives being derivatives of verbs (see § 40. and tables) and having the same form as nouns,, are inflected ac- cording to the same laws (see §§ 44, 45, 48). In respect to denominative adjectives, see § 41. 2. Rem. — The Syriac has no special forms for the comparative and superlative. For the manner in which these are expressed, see Syntax § 77. 2. Numerals are either cardinal or ordinal. In the former we should notice the peculiarity, that masculines from 3 to 10, as in Hebrew, have feminine endings ; but feminines, on the contrary, have masculine endings. From 20 to 100 there is only one form for both genders. The numbers from 1 to 10 are the following : C A.RDI N ALS. Fem. Masc. Fem. Maso. r,- 7 ^ 12» 6. ^Vl ^»Z 2. MlQ* T^ 7. t^l . l'^\ '■ ]liß2 tj^l 8. ^s-^ llojf 4. ^2 K.r 9. IaIqI» 5. •^ (•^£01 10. Rem. — Upon the union of these numerical words with suffixes, see § 46. 2. b. Rem. The tens from 80 to 90 are expressed by the plural of the cardinals from 3 to 9 ; e. g. ^£L2 30, ^^ > \n'i( 40, ^^■■V)m 50, ^^i 60, ^^iSn» 70, ^ilV)2 80, ^-il»2 90. The plural of 10 (^jini) represents 20. All plurals are of the common gender. Iti) signifies 100, ^ifco 200, IILdZ^Z or 1Zo]Sd alz 300, etc., with the preceding unit in the fem- imne. .^iiL signifies 1000 (instead of *a!5^ or »ai^, em- phat. IslS., plur. ^i^'^,l[at^); ^lA^^jl signifies 16. ADJECTIVES AKD NÜMEKALS. 151 2000, ^^■•ii^ 1^1 8000. etc. (with the preceding unit in the masculine). The intermediate numbers from 11 to 19 are formed by the union of units with 10 in one word, in the following manner : Fern. Masc. Fern. Masc. 1 ,m:^ZjZ 'rfXiijZ 12. 'rmiZA« J X'ioiiKLl -^Z^Z 13. f^cüü» ;TT>sn» 11. y. rf>\n >y 'rmiAfDjl' 14. T'rr^l^fJ.; ;msik)Z ) 7 7 7 I i VOM ^PZ. ^ P « r 1 fi r.Vs;V)M f^f^^ 15. ,.. ,, -rmiAiLoZ) 18. •r£QlAaV>M ^ 1 ,m{>Z -r£QlsZ 19. The intermediate numbers from 21 to 29, 81 to 39, etc., are formed by the numeral representing the number of tens, followed by the numeral under ten preceded by O ; e. g. (A^Zo ^L\l masc. 83, «aLOmO ^A» fem. 65. Sometimes the units precede ; e. g. ^;mio p^J ( 24, etc. So if the number of numerical words combined be large, the greater numerals are always placed before the smaller ; e. g. U^o ^".mio ll^l^Zo A%. 1827. 3. The ordinal numbers, from 3 to 10, are formed from the cardinal numbers by adding the terminations f-i masc, ^Aa- fem., and inserting ^ before the ultimate radical. Foi the first^ a particular word is used, and for the second^ a form differing somewhat from the form of the cardinal for 2. ORDINALS. Fern. Masc. Fern. Masc. VAaIDpO V^r^ the first. lA^A^^ XkLkL» the sixth. I'A^w;/ X^^^ the second. VAiSan» liSi*^» the seventh. ILLJSZ 112uXZ the third. XLJl^I lA^l ' the eighth 12u1a£) ]1Ll£j the fourth. ^AAiuiZ XILm^L the ninth. iLA^^ ]'>^>^- the fifth. IL-^jlCQI ll-^jjni the tenth. 152 PARTICLES — ADVERBS. The tens of ordinals from 20 are expressed, as in Hebrew, either by cardinal numbers or by the addition thereto of the terminations {jl- masc, *|Ajl fem. ; e. g. |ajL;£ü1, ^JuA^Z, [ > 1 » K.^\\ , etc. The units are put after ; e. g. {-»Aa^Z The intermediate numbers from 11 to 19, etc., are formed by uniting the ordinal number 10 with a unit of the cardi- nals, into one word, the unit preceding ; e. g. ^A.^^mv >f fem.,|ji;>mSrM masc. the eleventh, \Lä\ > m\Z>Z fem., (>'>or>k;/ masc. the twelfth, etc. Sometimes the ordinal 10 is united with a cardinal number and the word is preceded by j ; e.g. 7 7 7 7 ,-»> • 7 ;mSpi^> , 'rCQuZj , etc. Rem. — The Syrians, like the Hebrews, express the idea oi a part^ •X by a feminine form and the insertion of Q after the first radical letter ; e.g. ^A^oZ, (1209, |a1dQa« third part, etc. Upon the other relations of numbers comp. Syntax § 78. CHAPTEE FOURTH. PARTICLES. To Particles belong adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions and interjections. In respect to their origin they may be considered as primitive, derivative, or transferred from other parts of speech. The last are by far the most numerous. § 51. Adverhs. 1. The following may be considered as primitive adverbs: ^1 so, JJ , Q^ not, ^iDL there, p here. 2. Those derived from nouns and adjectives with the characteristic endings Aj , Zo. and A^l , are the following ; PEEPOSITIONS. 153 Lk-r»J\_at last, AllOyO at first, IqjUI again, A^^aK godly, Lä]\jk^ in short, Aj^Vr^ Hehraicalhj, lüol today. 3. As transferred from otlier parts of speech are to be considered those : a) from substantives ; a ) with a preposition ; e. g. IZ'^M^ finally, IVrAT^ truly, \XCi\Oi once, QyA inwardly, « i \« 1 ^immediately, u^S;i^ anew ; j3) without a preposition; e. g. I »\n {want) not, lAmSD enough, oiSo , ^^ wholly, en- tirely, also in the plural (AllDl sometimes ; b) from adjectives, numerals and pronouns; e. g. «jQ^ , ^.i .t m very, >a»A^, »CLm^Lo only, r**^} 5 \r**^] «^ once, ]r**^ immediately, |SßD Aoit? m?/c7i f |i^\ , Ql5sD tvhy ? c) from verbal forms, as the infinitive, ^^61 again ; or participles ,^m»»V>\ , ^frlulo ^ almost. Rem. — Some adverbs are transferred from the Greek ; e. g. oWvn (xaXXov, |^m>-\V) (xaXjrfTa, foa*! s/x*]. The Syriae lan- guage is especially rich in compound adverbs. Such are tlie fol- lowing : ]Ljk] where ? ]aulJ liOA wherefore? jJ ^^XulD,^ not yet, «^ASd|] liOpl how long? \»ül notv, (SDr^ I^OI^ until now, etc. Among compound adverbs may also be placed the circumlocutory AfV not to he (see § 38). The simple interrogation is either not 7 expressed at all, or by the addition of .j^ : the negative interroga- tion, is expressed by ]] , and loi !]♦ The syllable w**) prefixed to pronouns and adverbs expresses an interrogation ; e. g. PjiI ^ whence ? (J-» f who ? § 52. Prepositions. 1. To the original Prepositions belong the prefixes *Si , J (gen.), ^ (dat. and ace.) which are always joined with a noun or pronoun, and are vacant when the noun or pronoun begins with a regular consonant ; e. g. ^QaT) , n\Sn^ > Prefix prepositions take the vowel, which is usually JL, when 154: PREPOSITIONS. the following consonant is vacant ; e. g. ]>Vn*«^ , )>V^V , or when the vowel falls back from the quiescents ] or Ol; e. g. 'l]^QO from 1|Sd for ]%D ; *AiD00i*S for wijiooi'^» Before words wliicli begin with 1 , •-» or cu^ , the vowels, in which these letters quiesce, fall back upon the preceding prefix ; e. g. p^^l^ , IjI^jO^^) , 1^»]] , liAA , 901^ from 11>1', etc. Rem. — Before |Aji 6, and ^As, these prepositions take — , pro- bably because they were also written (Aa| and —aAsI« In >\QQD and VOjQD the preposition -^ quiesces in Q , * which falls back (comp. § 15. 2. B. c. and the tables following); e.g. VV<^r>r)\ y>,jDQ^ , except when suffixes are appended with a union vowel, in which case the J_ of the second syllable falls away and the original form reappears ; e.g. Ol^>I^on\ etc. Among the original preposi- tions may also be reckoned the monosyllables ^Ql with, LoSi^ by, ZqI to. 2. Most of the other prepositions are considered as trans- ferred from other parts of speech ; a) substantives in the P.7'X »0 7 7 constr.state ; e. g. ^^O before, LPOy instead, »SlXw/or, . i1 lO and Al.k^ between, >r^ and wtj^K» about, ZcLmZ and L^.j>*Lunder, -Ld (iiomL^liD 2Duri) from, >Ao after ; b) substantives with prefixes ; e.g. jAfiQQ according to, ^^ioQ-^ against, ^r^QJ^ before ; c) compounds ; e. g. ^ I^A until to, ^\lL over, ,Ä!l2 — SD without, >,.** —So around, about, M.2i£)QJ^ ^IsO against. 3. Several of the prepositions seem to have been origi- nally plural nouns, on which account they are united with plural suffixes. Here belong \^over, >|., ^. after, a- gainst, jSLLt^for, ^^n before, lQj>*L under (comp. § 16. 2. C. and the following paradigms). ^Instead of saying that ^ quiesces in Q the author should have said that L takes the vowel .. with Q quiescing in it, as j^ is not a quiescent (see § 13). — Tr. PREPOSITIONS WITH SUFFIXES. 155 Prepositions with. Suffixes. ( § 16. IL C. and § 52 ). A. With Suff. of the Sing. B. Of the Plur. Masc. Fern. in. to. after. against. over, on account of. Sing. 2 f. «inn ^Lql^ ^jSi'ib^ . >nKonr^^ .,n.Kv ^j^dAS^ 3 f. 6\L 6\LhL^ giIAo diSxzaoo^ oiiSs oi^Aso Plur. 2 m. .onii .qoZqL .QD>i\£) .onVnoo!^ .oniSs .o^AÜI^ 2 f. ^jljqo ^««iZol ^ jAo ^inSnool ^i^iSs ^AS|i^ 3 m..ooir:i ^ooiZol. .ooi>Är^ ^üC^asnna^^öuS^ ^6oiAi^5iD 3 f. ^aio ^diZa^^ai>AQ^ai\noo\ ^OLkük^diAX^ Rem. — The following take no suffixes : LaJOi in, \Ci^ without^ Q.LL within, ^*5yl^ over, L^t^ under, \^^ until to, and ^!^ 'f^SQ except. 156 CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. § 53. Conjunctions and Interjections. 1. The original Conjunctioüsare the copulative O , j that^ because (^before infinit.), # f z/J ^ as, since^ q\ or^ «.^D hence^ ^Cl^ (for this preposition in questions see § 51. 3. Kern.) 7 namely. ^> lest. Rem. — O and > , like «2 and ^, are prefixed (see §52. 1). 2. Compound Conjunctions are ; a) with ^1 ; e. g. Qläv if, ^f fli andJJo^ unless^ ^^ although, ^J OOul and ^jJI if but, ^0 — ^lo be it— be it ; b) with > ; e.g. üj lest, especially after prepositions ; e. g, j j^l as, > \>h4^ , ? ^^ and j «< ^\m because, j ^ ?es^, j P^A wn^z7; c) with other conjunctions ; e. g. ^^u^Ol hence, ^ i^V) ?zow;, tQ.i p therefore, *£i^ p although. From the Greek are borrowed |J ( aXXa, ;a. . ya^, ■7» 7 \^ 3. Interjections as primitives are mostly onomatopoetic ; - X^ \ e. g. 0*1 , ^o I ! «-»o wo ! (01 behold ! «.aGU Äey .^ Aa / They are sometimes borrowed from other parts of speech ; e.g. «äoAäI , ^CL^ifyet! nsnn I^ray you ! PAET THIKD. SYNTAX. CHAPTER FIRST. THE PRONOUN. § 54. Use of the Sepo.rable Personal Pronouns and Suffixes, A. Separable Personal Pronouns. 1. These pronouns at the beginning of a sentence, denote a certain emphasis, and stand in various relations to the verb which follows in the same person. This relation is not only ; a) that of the nominative absolute ; e. g. Rom. xiv. 10. 5^a>*]j Ajf . (> pio _-»j Aj| hut ihou^ ivliy judgest tliou thy brother ! Eph. iv. 20., Acts xix. 15., II Tim. iv. 5 ; but it may be also represented ; h) by the oblique cases ; e.g. a) by the genitive ; e.g. Matt. iii. 11. o\naV^\ pMo* |Jj 001 7 ~ . «-»01QJ£QSd luhose shoes I am. not worthy to unloose^ John xix. 11., Ephes. vi. 20 ; /3 ) by the dative ; e. g. Kirsh. ii. 2. •jul - »^ .ri)*^ ]3 \i\o hut no one comes to me, Luke xxiii.41 ; 7) by the accusative ; e.g. Kirsh.iv.7.-9. ^^iSn ^oAj)? fSD 001 Bo aiLil^ «^^ y^^ ISuSOfclo ^QmSimIj \\ \\n ^oAjI ClL^^SiMfiuhat you seek to find in the night, I seek to find in the day time^ and find it not. 158 THK PRONOUN. Rem. — They are also emphatic after the verb; e.g. Luke iii, 14. — JUa ^ I ,^S1 \xhD what then shall ive do ? Upon ^Qj] and » ^ f as accusatives, comp. § 16. Rem. 1. and tlie preceding table. 2. United with substantives, adjectives or adverbs they mark the Present ; a) of the substantive verb looi (see §38); e.g. «-»01 Vr^'fM she is true-^ Matt. xxiv. 26. 001 ^^OkkO he is in the desert ; verse 23. 001 p>01 he is here ; h) of the finite verb with its participle; e. g. p] '^'\ I say^ tS\ pJl.ji thou art horn (comp. § 64). Rem. — (Upon ] and 01 see § 12. 1. B). — The contraction of the pronoun with the participle or adjective into one word is found in the y -^ (J V I I 7 1 pers. plur. ; e. g. ■ 1 »;0 we read , ^1 » • ^^Q we are holy. It is also found sometimes in other persons ; e. g. Eph. iii. 13. P^l« •X 7 I beseech ; Gal.v.3. Q£la,x» he is guilty ; iii. 11 (comp. §20.and§37.E). 3. Farther in these cases ; a) the pronoun of the same person may be doubled, so that the former will denote the subject and the latter the substantive verb ; e, g. John i. 20. ]^\ \l\ I am ; xiv. 20. tOAjl ^jJ^ i oAjI ye are in me ; Matt, xxvi. 73 ; or the part, present of the finite verb is placed be- tween ; e.g. Matt. iii. 11. 1j] y S LlLD )j*| / baptize ; xxvii. 4; John xiii. 13 ; Barh. 68, 16 ; 105, 14 ; 148, 15. ft) In the simple pronoun may be contained both the subject and substantive verb ; e. g. Gen. xxix. 4. 1«^^ .;>* -i — ^£^3] joSüji] whence are ye? — ive are from Haran ; Assem. I. 33 ; 12. 13. c ) The pronoun 001 , as substantive verb, may follow the 1 and 2 person as subject ; e. g. Acts xxii. 8. ^OAa 001 PI lam Jesus ; Luke xxii. 67. U»,i«V> OOl Aj] ^ if thou art the Messiah ; verse 70 ; xxiv. 18 ; Ephr. I. 214. E; Bnrh. 173, 18-20. Also ^Qjf and ^jf, follow the 1 and 2 PRONOMINAL SUFFIXES. I59 pers. as subject ; e. g. Matt. v. 13. 11j]> OuAk> .qjI^'.oAj] ye are the salt of the earth; I. Cor. iii. 17; Barli. 183. 1. Rem. — Instead of the pronouns, thePhiloxenian version of the N.T. uses Aal with suff.; e. g. ^aOIoZLI '^Xlain\ ^OIuA^l ^bS{>je are. B. Suffixes 1. The pronominal suffixes of the verb denote the accusa- tive ; rarely, and for the most part in translations from the Hebrew, the dative ; e. g. wjjAooL for ^ AsoL thou hast given to me. Rem. — This imitation of the Heb. is neglected in passages of the 0. T. ; e. g. Zach. vii. 5. comp, with Ephr. II. 296. B. and Isa. xxiv. 4, comp, with II. 65. C. 2. In the relation of genitive, the suffixes are attached to the nomen rectum or to the genitive proper; e.g. Ez. xvi. 18. wiJDAo»> P PsO thy erahroidered garments^ literally of thine embroidery or ornament ; vii. 20; xi. 15 ; xxvii. 16, 27; Matt. vi. 11. ^IQJQCDj }V)»»N our necessary hread^ literally of our need. Rem. — The suffix is seldom found with the nomen regens ; e.g. Ez. xvi. 27. |ZCL*.J1> «-i^AjaJOf ^Ld of thy lewd ways, usually in con- nection with )l iV)! the right, and |jSü£D the left ; e.g. Acts. iii. 7. [1 »Vr> »^ OlpitQ on his right hand\ Matt.v.29; Rev.i.I7. Sometimes • p -x p • 7 a double suffix occurs ; e.g. Ephr. I. 204. B. and C. j^pQl^ yV^^ thy first horn. ,3. The noun taking a suffix stands before an adjective connected with it ; e. g. Ps. Ixxxvii. 1. l«uir^ oijQ^^ • p p ,■" ^ in his holy moimtain] Ez. vi. 9; Ephr. I. 284. A. \^ Oij^o] his good treasure. 4. The suffix to the noun is often understood objectively; e. g. Exod. XX. 20. Glll^yfear before him ; I Cor. xi. 25. »AJpoJbi in remembrance of me] John xv. 10. GidO^ love to' him] Barh. 218, 14. Rem. 1.— Possessives are also expressed by ^J with sufF. (§ 16. B) ; e. g. Barh. 49. 7. oCLäl ]LmMuJ his commander ; 146, 10. 160 PLEONASTIC USE OF PRONOUNS. This manner of expression is used particularly when a stronger em- phasis is required than is indicated by the mere suffix ; e. g. Matt. vi. 13. 1Zq^!^Sd k^Ol vA-Li? thine is the kingdom ; Barh. 146, 1. •^O) ^-^? fAO) (Z,.! our great church in Haran. If the sufF. to the noun be also repeated, it indicates (emphatically) the Greek possessives s/xo? tfo?, &c. ; e. g. John iv. 34. « i\a> «ji^.QbfSD sfxov /S^wfxa ; vii. 6 ; xv. 9 ; Rom. 3.7. The same repetition of the •I' X 7 suffix occurs also in prepositions ; e. g. II Cor. v. 19. ^-^? ^^ ^v »jjuorv ; I John ii. 2, and in certain forms of expression; e.g. Matt. xxvii. 4. ^!^ pD — !^ r» t(f% >;|aaj ; John xxi. 22. P 7 Rem. 2. — We should mention the use of the suff. in %^;L0 , t;iD, for the pronoun of the second, and in ^^tj,*^S, k^ASD( , ^p2I^,for the pronoun of the first person, when the discourse is addressed to superiors ; e. g. Genesis xliv. 16. %ji;ik2^ ^h h^ what shall we say to thee {my lord) ? .^ji,^\\ |cn4>* our [thy servants'') iniquity ; verse 32. St) kings in speaking of themselves use ]n\V) ; e. g. Esth. viii. 8. ]nlv?> ]Snan CLDo'Aa write in (my) the Mng^s name; and in reference to God, GUJ^ is used ; e. g. Gen. v. 1. Also w»^ stands connected with the second and third persons ; e. g. Mark xii. 37. t^^So CTL^ y^O 7 he calls him his {my) Lord^ and differs fi-om ^;lD , in that the for- mer is the common form of salutation, while the latter marks the pluralis majestatis, and is used of Christ in the version of the New Testament ; e. g. Acts i. 1 ; Rom. xiv. 8. Rem. 3. — It is rather to be considered as an imitation of a Hebrew idiom, when the suffix relates to a noUn which does not occur till later in the discourse (comp. Gesenius Lehrgeb. p. 739) ; or when the noun itself is repeated instead of the pronoun; e.g. Gen. xvi. 16. § 55. Pleonastic Use of Pronouns. A. Separable Personal Pronouns. Here belongs the pronoun of tlie third person ooi (Ol) (comp, § 12. 1. B) united with nearly all persons of the sing, and plur., by which an emphasis is denoted, which is disregarded in the later language. It is found still in such PLE02s"ASTIC USE OF PRONOUNS, IQl passages as John viii. 26. ]^Vv^ ]j1 WCvnVn q^ -oSoi (hat {exactly) I speak before the world; verse 28 ;~ xv. 16 ; Rom. iii. 31 ; Heb. ix. 17. It is to be considered merely as pleonastic in Luke vii. 19. Ji^Ar^Sn ooi ^-^tf of or shall we wait for another ? Rom. xiv. 8 • Heb. xiii 22 • I Tim. i.4; v. 9; Barli. 133, 3 ; Assem.L 221,A.5, especially where it occurs with a feminine noun ; e. ^. Rom. iii. 28 i^'rd ^OjjliD 001 fZoiSOiOlO by faith is a man justified. 001 is sometimes connected with a plural ; e. g. Ephr. I. 214 D. ^ -'y y 0. -x .. y -K .7 -n ' ^OOU-l^iO 001 ^OLlmJ AlilO on account of his wives and children. Rem. — Sometimes also the fern. ^Ol (still more emphatic), is found ; e. g. Rev. xxi. 2. A^Ijs* IAäj^ ^01 l^i /y^K n and I saw (it) the holy city ; xxii. 19, and the pkr. .QJ01 Assem.L *^ 7 \ 7i, A. 20, 21. 001 and 001 are sometimes united together without emphasis ; e.g. John v.9. |SoCL» 001 0010 and this day ; Barh.148, 3. Also in the plur. ; e.g. Matt. iii. 1. .QJOl lAkJQjL^ — »j tO^Jl^ but in these days. The pleonastic use of OOI is confirmed from the fact that the Philoxenian version omits it altogether. B. Suffixes. 1. The suffix is often used pleonastically with the verb, when the object with ^ as though by way of explanation ■« 7 t t 7 * «^ follows; e. g. Matt. i. 21. OlSd^ wiOIOa-mJ ;a.. ooi/or he shall bless (it) his people ; verse 24; ii. 6, 11 ; Mark xiv. 47. Without ^ in Matt. xxv. 25. j^jIiD ClLä^ I buried (it thy talent ; xxvii. 5 ; I Tim. vi. 14. Rem. 1. — The suffix also occurs pleonastically with " after verbs of motion, yoing, cominy, &c. ; e.g. Gen. xxvii.43. «^ ^1 yo ; Luke viii.SY. OlS ^l|j> therewith he departed; Matt.x.C; John xi.31; iv.3. *OoZ 01^ l2lo and he came ayain ; Assem. 1.44, A.l 7. OLl joaJ he went out ; 186,A.30. |lki')f Lx^l^ OlS loOl ZujJ he had yone 162 PLEONASTIC USE OF PRONOUNS. to the Aramaeans ; Eplir. I. 220, B. (ÄQ!iO OlS ^£) Moses stood up ; Matt. iii. 2. lüo») IZonSV) OlL Ao'^O the kingdom of heaven is near ; the same is true frequently, after LjJ^D { = to depart from this life) ; e. g. John xi. 14. 01^ A.kiO 9V^ Lazarus is dead ; Mark ix. 26 ; Assem.I. 367, 9 ; Ephr.l.204,A ; sometimes 7 with verbs which have not the signification of motion ; e. g. ;*^rO to believe ; John xi. 31 ; ^^ to make^ Barh. 217, 10 ; \^ to be * ^^ foolish^ Rom. i. 22 ; and even after (OOl John i. 15. Rem. 2. — On the contrary, the suffix in active verbs, sometimes, falls away when it can either be easily supplied from the context, or the same object has already preceded; e. g. Barh. 424. 9. ^CJlQlD^ IaDO - llOlO '^J ^\b »na"! he brought out all of the silver coin and heaped [it) up before him ; particularly the 9v* 7 7 neuter..; e. g. Gen. xxiv. 49. wk.JO|CLis» inform me thereof. In many verbs following each other the suffix which is to be repeated falls away ; e.g. Matt. xiv. 19 ; I Cor. xi. 23, 24. Where two follow each other the suffix is usually added to the latter verb ; e.g. Barh. 419,5. CTI^ 1 »'«^^^nn — 1»l.*DjQ!sD ^üe esteem and honor it. 2. The suffix is also pleonastic in the nomen regens wbicli precedes the genitive v^ith j ; e. g. John iii. 18. OlSnaD Pi^M^) in the name of the only begotten; xii.3. ^QAjiJ wiCTlQ-^.. j the feet of Jesus ; verse 31 ; Acts v. 2 ; Ephr. I. 87, B. Rem. — Here belongs also the repetition of the suff. before ^i«*j (§ 54. B. 4. Rem. 1) and after ^\o == all., without J following it ; e.g. Matt. xiii. 2. \aX^ uC^D the ivhole multitude ; ii. 3, 4 ; Kirsh. 114, 10. iM/^k) ^01^ all cities. Sometimes ^\o with suffix occurs after the noun ; e.g. Barh. 71, 6. Ol^ ^J pßl but the tvhole people ; Matt. vi. 33. ^Gl^O ^^G1 all these things. Without the suffix ^\d signifies each^ every ; e. g. Matt. iv. 4. ^^ jISiD every word ; Acts xviii. 4. 3. Finally, a pleonastic suffix is attached to prepositions thus ; a) 1 is placed before the accompanying noun and is PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 163 considered either as a sign of tlie genitive (§ 52. 2) or as a relative; e. g. I Tim. i. 8. IcdqSdjj dlod] according to {it) the law ; Jolm i. 42. V^qä^j Cljthi to {him) Jesus ; xviii. 15; S^ Rev. V. 11 ; 2qL Luke xxiii. 7 ; ^^So Rom. viii. 3. ]ilu4j^? oiAS|^ for {it) sin ; ^ Acts iii. 6 ; ^ Rom. xiii.6 ; Barli. 74,18. |jO'r4? ^OlolLl against {him) the tyrant; 7 0" ^1 76, U ; J>OjX3 Luke v. 19 ; b) or the preceding preposi- tion with the suffix is repeated before the noun ; e. g. Luke ii.8. fylloi aih in {it) the field; Barh.192,7; Assem.l. 27, 1, 29; Ephr.L87,B ; ^ John ii. 2. ]loLm^\ aiL to {it to) the feast; ^ Acts viii. 85 ; ^^ Acts ix. 21, etc. General Remark on Personal Pronouns. In. Sjriac, we also find in personal pronouns enallage ; a) of 7iumher in A*] ; e.g. Barh. 166, 6. ^;CD^ #0010 wiOioA^f \r^» |;£Qi>0 (*J there were among tJ-em twenty women and ten children ; in words whose plural only is used ; e.g. Luke xxiii. 45. OiAiJLd ^k) UaaOl» ^isl J^] ^'r-^^lo the vail of the temple ivas rent {in us midst) in tiuain. The same is true in the dual ; e. g. Hebrews xi. 26. ^'^? CT^ V^ ' ^P the treasures {of it) Egypt; Barh. 108, 2 ; h) oi gender ; e. g. Michael. Chr. 20, 9, 10. ^Oio — T2oiZl\ooilo all places —in these ; c ) of gender and nwnher together, if by collec- tives sing. fem. are signified name^ of countries and cities, men or inhabitants ; e.g. Barh. 565, 18, 19. 12qaj] Q*jii»f ^7nV'o 0-^j .ootI ^]o — UUy^ they found a great moMymen, — and these cdso they led into captivity ; \lculX 580, 1, 2 ; tAi.>o 591, 5, 6 ; .^'^aVlöO, 11, 12. 164 RELATIVE FRONOUNS. § 56. Use of the Relative Pronoun (§ 17. 2). 1. The Relative > gives to adverbs of interrogation, place, time, etc., a relative signification; e. g. p^l ivheref > p^j there, where, John i. 28. ^1-mQji looi ^SDlLo? PjiI there, where John baptized ; verse 40 ; Barh.82,2 ; '^^ ivhither f ? ]L^ thither, where; e.g. John xiii. 36. \i\ ^llj paV lohither Igo ; Barh. 198, 18 ; Assem.I. 27; 2.3. v. E ; ]xzu{how f ? Uif just as : e. g. John iii. 14 ; v. 26 ; xiii. 33 ; ^tl£>\ when f J ^ASol when, as ; e. g. v. 25. ^QlSoal? ^Ak)] tc'/ien they shall hear ; \^£iD how much? > ^SüD so much ; e. g. John vi- 11. Cl^ .5 1^0 rzs mwc/i as they would, j gives the same mean- ing sometimes to nouns; e.g. >2| joZöce ; J jZ] where; e.g. John iii. 8. 2. The oblique cases are formed by some mark of the case followed by a suffix ; a ) the genitive is indicated by the suffix added to the nomen regeiis ; e. g. John ix. 11. ^Oma olSüÄj whose name is Jesus ; Assem.I. 165, A. 14 ; h) the dative^ according to the following example ; Rom. i. 9. pj ^aSDaSo 01^ j whom I serve ; verse 31 ; c) the accusative, thus ; e. g. John i. 26. 01^ ^bS{ ^^^ ]]'^oAj1j whom ye know not. The accusative is also expressed by the suffix at- tached to the verb ; e. g. iii.34. OiipÄ IcnjLj whom God hath sent ; d) the ablative by JD ; e.g. John i.48; by ^^ Rom.i.6. In a similar manner the relative is united with the preposi- tion ; e.g. ^OL, John iii.2. aiSoi loC^j loith whom is God, etc. Rem. — In connection with the suffix of the 1 and 2 person, added to the verb, it (the relative) forms, with reference to a preceding subject of the same person, the oblique cases loho, I, whom, me, like the Lat. qui ; e. g. Gen. xlv. 4. *jJJoAlCil> ..arOQa \z\ \i\ I am Joseph whom {me) ye have sold ; Num. xxii. 30 ; Isa. xli. 8 (Ephr. 11.88. E) ^AU^j A^l ^'CqI thou art Israel ivhom {thee) I have RELATIVE PRONOUKS. 165 made strong. The same occurs with prepositions.; e. g. Num. xxii. * 30. thy she ass *k\\ Aj| J^LkHS^i u2Jon ivhom (me) thou hast ridden. The relative alone sometimes marks the accusative, particularl) y s' • • •>> the neuter; e. g. Gen. i. 31. ^I^) \0 all that he made. The re lative is sometimes used before the mark of the case ; e.g. Barh. 43, 12. OUOV^J to which time ; 137, 5. |oai (jl.i4^> which belonged to the Arabians. 3. The Syrians express the relative with a demonstrative preceding Ae, or this^ wlio^ that^ which^ etc., as follows ; a) by J OOl , J 0C71 , J pOl rnasc, ? «^Ol , > jjOi tern., and m the plur. J ^OlOl masc, ? ^^01 fern. ; e. g. John vii. 16. lOI «^^•9 OOlj 5w^ 7n5, ti^/io has sent me; Eom.iv. 5; vii. 6; Phil. ii.6. *jiaioA^1> IjOl that^ which was; John i.24. obZ^lj .OJOl those lüho were sent; Barh. 17, 2 ; 170,5 ; &) by > ^isD masc. and fern., and > UJ^^i) neut. ; e. g. Matt. xiii. 12. A^l? ,-SD^ »oai-aAj aiik to liim who hath^ shall he given ; John iv. 34 ; V.30 ; vii.l7, 18 ; Mattxiii.l7. ^oAjV^uI? V)^^ that luhich ye see ; Kom. i. 28 ; viii. 25 ; c) by ? ^Ll masc, j IJ fem. and plur. j ^»Kifcom. ; e. g. Eom. ii.29. OCT ] > mnr: )> M he who is inwardly /John ix. 8 ; Rom. ii. 2, 3 ; iv. 7 ; v. 14 ; Barh. 85, 3 ; d) frequently by the participle ; e.g. Rom.vii.l. |ffr>r>Vr>i ^ . v .. those who know the law. Rem.— If a particular emphasis is to be indicated the demonstra- tive is doubled ; e. g. John ix. 8. loOl *oA1? OCT QJOT this very one is he who sat. Sometimes, like the Greek attraction, the demonstrative is wanting; e. g. John iv. 14. CT^ \^l\ p|j USD •ro-: UaTog ov syu) ^wfTw aura) ; or the relative is wanting ; e. g. Heb. v.2. »'^^^ ]L]o and he {or this) who can; less frequently are both wanting, according to Hebrew usage ; e. g. Job xxiv. 19. Finally the relative occurs pleonastically before participles; e.g. Amos vi. 1. .a»OT I^ ^i.^S' -*0 ^0^ ^^ ^^^^^^ ^^^^^ dcpiseZion ; Ephr JI.2V4.D. 166 DEMONSTEATIYE AND INTEEEOGATIVE PRONOUNS. § 57. Use of Demonstrative and Interrogative Pronouns. The demonstrative is neither used for the relative^ nor does it give, as in Hebrew, a special emphasis to particles and numerals (comp. Gesen. Lehrgeb. p. 750 sq.). It is used only in its proper signification. Rem. — It is emphatic in connection with OOl and ».aOI (§ 17. 1. Rem.) ; e. g. Matt. v. 47. Sometimes pOl may be translated by hicce ; e. g. John xix. 19. 2. The interrogative pronoun ( § 17. 3 ) is united with nouns of both genders and numbers ; e. g. Matt. xii. 48. cjL>j] ^QJ| -üiOO -'^1 *uai _SD tvlio is my mother and who are my hretliren f The oblique cases are either so expressed that, in the genitive, the noun in the constr. state precedes ; e. g. Gen. xxiv. 28. wiAjj ^iD L\!^ whose daughter art thou 1 or so that ^Jk) follows with ? preceding ; e. g. I Sam. xii. 8. ^^j Ir-^l ^SD/rom lühose handf or OlSoj stands before the noun; e. g. Matt. xxii. 20. I^jAoo poi \{d\* QiLdj ivhose image and writing is this ? The other cases are form- ed by the special case-signs preceding, or by prepositions ; e.g. Assem. 1. 84, 6. ^2] ^Üi^ to lohom shall I give ? Matt xii. 27. "JlSüD whereby ? Rem. — Sometimes flaf occurs instead of the relative in the indirect question, without J following it ; e. g. Matt. xxiv. 42. ^QOjlD \L\ |AlA \fjk\^ at what hour yo2ir lord will come? and QliiO mcludes fOOl ; e.g. John xviii. 38. p;* QlSo i^^ai t* ^rw^A ? vii. 20. § 58. Pronouns for which the Syrians have no special forms. A. Eeflexive Pkonouns. The Syrians express the reflexive pronoun (§ 17. 4) as fol. fows ; a) by the passive (comp. § 21. 2. § 22. 2. § 24. 2); h) often, particularly in the third person, by the personal pro- OTHER PRONOUNS. 167 noun ; e. g. Barh. 54, 15. ^^4^ Cl!£ OOl he hilled himself; 77, 5. lalÄ ^OOUi 0V) i o '| they chose themselves a king ; 83, 16 ; by prepositions ; e.g.Barli. 164,12. ^ocTuiL. QiLilo and they lead hy themselves ; c) by \m2ky and ISdqio» The former is used in reference to persons ; e.g. Matt, xxiii. 12. -^7 x7T> 7 OlmSLJ Ul^;J) ;-»... ^!iDAe who exalteth himself; Barh. 56, 2 ; 84, 15 ; 144, 12 ; less frequently, in reference to tilings ; e. g. Luke xi. 17. dlaSU ^\l ^^^^Lly oiiVo ^»5y^ every hingdo'^.i lohich is divided against itself JiDQio is used in reference to both persons and things ; e.g. II Cor. xii. 15. ^"2*1 *.»^aiD I give myself; Luke xi. 17. ^^SiibäD OliDQlö ^j \L^Ci a house which is divided against itself Rem. — Less frequently occur in u reflexive signification, XoSk heart ; e.g. Lukeii .51 ; uuS head ; 'U*oS spirit ; e.g. Dan. iv. 5, 9 ; III» life; Ps. vii. 6. The pronouns |m£iJ and V^QID by way of periphrasis for other pronouns ; e. g. Rom. x. 3. |Zo]ja .OOlmaJj their own righteousness ; 1 Cor.vi.l9 ; Phil.ii.4,5 ; Rom. ix. 3. - -Vn r>ir> \!\ I myself ; Heb. i. 3 ; ix. 28. B. Other Pronouns. The other pronouns are thus expressed : 1. This, thai, see § 56. 8. 2. Each, every, are expressed ; a) as substantives, by l--i^.Gen. xL5; ^1 I Cor. iii. 8 ; vii. 2, 8 ; GaL vi. 4 ; the latter is doubled "in Acts ii. 88, 45 ; I Cor. vii. 17 ; xi. 21 ; II Cor. v. 10 ; I Thess. iv. 4. Sometimes they are expressed by ^J ^^ Bom. xiii. 1 ; r^ r^ ^ Eph. v. 88; ^.-j1^ Lukexiv.33; .m^'r^^ or ^'^ ^ Kom. xii. 18; h) as adjectives; a) by ^' Matt. vii. 17 ; lJohniv.8; ^^^ ^-lo Assem. L 11, A. 19 ; ^) by a re- petition of the noun defined by each, every ; e. g. II Kmg? 168 OTHER PRONOUNS. xvii. 29. ^1 5>ai every nation ; Matt. xx. 10 ; 7 ) by the plural ; e.g. Amos iv. 4. Ir^^-^ every morning: sometimes by the singular which is to be considered as a distributive ; e. g. Jer. xxxvii. 21. lk>Q-ijO each day. The neuter is ex- pressed by io^ >\o John iv. 25. 3. Whosoever, (quicunque), is expressed by %mj\ \iD or .äILd John i. 7 ; 1 Cor. iii. 13 ; > ^ Matt. xiii. 19 ; J iLf ^ä I John iii. 8 ; > ^ Mark vii. 16 ; Barh. 195, 3 ; 198,12. The neuter by > t^Q^ Acts iii.22 ; iv. 23 ; j ^^ Matt. X. 27. ' 4. Somebody^ anybody (aliqids)^ in interrogative and con- ditional clauses, are expressed ; « ) by ,aJ[ and In^it John iv. 33. ^tül ^\^ CFi^ ^"A.*"!' ^j] l^nl ÄarÄ «/i/y owe brought him aught to eat ? vii. 48 ; 1 Tim. vi.3. afcJf A^] .( -7\ y _ y" ^ %2i^k5> if any one teach ; Kev. xxii. 18 ; fe) by > ^io Mark vii. 16. CTl-i Zl»1j ^So hath any one ? c) sometimes by ^io Kom. iii. 3. ^ooiiSd J s'l rtvsg ; Mark xii. 5 ; or more in ac- cordance with the Hebrew idiom, by \m2Li Lev. iv. 2 ; v. 1 , 2, 4 ; vii. 27. The neuter is expressed ; a) by ^^ Acts V. 36 ; ^dj OOl ^r^J that he tuns something (great) ; John vii.4 ; I John ii. 15 ; h) sometimes by ^ Lev. v. 9. ]Ldj ^ «?• «x some {of the) blood; or (ZQHi. (= ^i^tj ) Gen. xviii.l4. ^ TT 5. Nobody, no one ; a) as substantives, are expressed by ^mjl ]] Matt.ix.l6; John i.l8 ; James i.l3 ; U'wAjI Acts xviii. lOflCor.ii.ll; •ra^l]'Num.xxxi.49 ; .aj] ;i j] Jer.li.43; dftj"! Zu^ John vii.4 ; sometimes by ^mS\} Zu^ John xv.l3; > LjjL or simply by Au^ v/ith an adjective or participle fol- lowing; e.g.Matt.xix.l7. V^lL^nooneisgood. The neuter, by !>OjV^ U'or V'^^k) Phil. ii. 3 ; I Tim. vi. 7; AA' fol- OTHER PRONOUNS. 169 lowed by U>^^ Matt. x. 26 ; with U)^ preceding, II Cor. vi. 10 ; without ^^So James iv. 2 ; b) as adjectives, by IJ after the noun, with the verb, I Cor. ii.9. 1\js* ]] ]i »v no eye hath seen it ; before the noun, Eom. viii. 39. lA^'^ 13 no creature ; by Aa.^ with the noun following, Luke iv. 24. U-^ A^ no prophet ; Heb.iv.13 ; with the noun preceding, Eph. V. 5 ; with the words standing between, John xv. 22. IAa^^ tOCJlL iooi Aa^ they would have had no sin. 6. Some, any^ are expressed ; a) by j A^t Matt. xvi. 14. ^,j;V)l> A^l some say ; John ix. 9 ; with words interposed, vii. 12. ^•r^l? 'ri-yt OOOl iU| for some said ; > fjü] A^] I Cor. viii. 7 ; xv. 34; II Thes. iii. 11 ; h) by aul "^j Phil. i. 15 ; I Tim. iv. 1 ; ^ 1*^1 John ix. 16 ; c) elipti- cally, by ^, Matt, xxiii. 34. ^hS\ ^Ji4^ ^ooilk) some shall ye kill ; Mark xii. o ; Acts xvii. 32 ; Eom. iii. 3 ; d) sometimes by the plural of the noun ; e. g. Dan. viii. 27. 1i\LDQl some days ; IjQII , Gen. xxix. 20. The neuter is expressed by ? A^f, Matt. xiii. 4. ^^^> A^l some fell ; also in verse 8. 7. Some, others, are expressed ; a) by P'h^[— tr*^!» ^^^^ xxviii. 24 ; or by oJl .mj1_— .äj] .aj1_ Phil. i. 15 ; Z^) by ^'^l»! — J Aaf Matt. xvi. 14 ; John vii. 12 ; or with j A^t repeated, Assem. I. 10. Eem. 1, 2 ; c) by ,00lliD — ^oouSo Acts xvii. 32 ; Barh. 105, 10 ; with the sign of the case prefixed, 114,14. (ooili^ Sek ^oauSülo ol^^ ^oouSülo some they killed, others he blinded ; finally by ]jr^1 — ^, Barh. 93, 18. Rem.— When some signifies the greater part, it is expressed by 170 OTHER PRONOUNS. p,.jaf ^Sd |{a.i^CO , John vii. 40. Some this — others that, by VAIJ'^1 Vr-»^1 Acts xix. 32. 8. The one, the other, {alter) are expressed ; a) of persons, by ;iiyt masc. "{L^h^ fem., repeated; or by \^\\ — Ij^^u* Isa. iii. 5; \^\\ — H^l Gren. xiii. 11 ; also of inanimate objects, Matt. xii. 13. 6\L\C1j^ yj^ blalo a\^Y ^m2i he stretched forth his hand and it became sound as the other; I Cor. xiv.7; Col. iii. 13. "ISDloi ailciZ ^i ^mjQ M\r tf one hath an accusation against another ; Phil. ii. 3, 4 ; h)hj ^^ or ^Ol repeated, Rom.xii.lO; j.**-^ r^ oiie to the other {=each other, comp- Remark) ; Matt. xxiv. 10 ; John xiii. 35 ; also by fj^j^l - r-^* Matt. vi. 24. ^'r^] — ^-»^j^I John iv. 37 ; c) by the repetition of the same noun, Acts xxi. 34. ^fSo ^,lD — tJüf one this, another that ; or by (j^j^ Gal.vi.2. '\}r**'i 1r^^^ QH^^O let one hear another's burden. 7 7 Rem. — One another is represented by ^a* ^jsj, with a preposition interposed between, John xiii. 14; xxii. 34, 36 ; sometimes by the simple preposition with suffix, Rom.i.24. ^OOIO among one another ; y^*^ John xvi. 19 ; Barh. 41, 18. 9. The same, himself, herself, itself, are expressed ; a) by 7 a personal pronoun doubled, with p placed between ; e. g. Heb.x.ll. UkS? tOJCfl jD .QJOl the same sacrifice ; Phil.iii.l. ^j^JOl rO ^.».JOl ^Äe «ame; also without ^ ; e.g.Assem.I.44,13. «£\ P ••?* -X P 'X • |ALOQ-fc .QJdO ^OOIO at the same time ; 6 ) by a compound- ing of the demonstrative pronoun (§ l7. 1. Rem.; § 57. l. Rem.) ; c) by the pleonastic suffix before the noun; e.g.Mark «^^ p • p 1.42. jAlAO aiQ at the same hour; Heb. ii. 14; ix. 24. |.a.SDftl OlS into heaven itself ; Matt. xxvi. 44; Heb. ix. 21. OTHER PRONOUNS. 17 1 (Sdj ^Ld OUSo i/;77/i ^/ie same 6^ooc? ; with \u> and tlie noun following ; e.g. Assem. 1.415; 3. VAlij oTlL} the same year ; 416, 1 ; d) sometimes by liaJ and ]Sdq1£} with suffix (§ 58. A), Matt. iv. 6 ; John v. 26, 43. Rem. — More definite are 001 QJOl , equivalent to just the same^ exactly/ the same ;Jolin i. 15 ; vii. 25 ; Barh. 26, 2. 10. ^ certain (one) ; a) by ,-m masc. |,js* fern. ; John iv. 46. pK» (auiLo a certain king ; v. 2. (r** I'^OJ a certain ;?/ac6 ; Barh.l 16,10 ; 117,3 ; with «!sO following; e.g. Assem. I. 33; 22, 27 ; Barh. 93, 6 ; h)hj :>oJiD relating to things ; e.g. Barh. l70, 3. io"^ T^>^ ^ P when he had entered into a house ; l78, 2 ; 194, 3. Rem. — In proper nouns it is sometimes expressed, by circumlocu- tion, by OlSüÄj *«jl;e. g. Assem. 350, 18 ; 351, 2. 11. As great — as (tantus quantus) is expressed by ^i*]; e.g. Barh. 190, 16. OCT ^DQ-»? l^^ol »^V— op^ V^Z/c?/ sai/J no need so great as on this day. Of which nature — of suchy or so as [ialis-qualis), are expressed by U^Ol — j "^Dd] ; e.g. Assem.1.39 ; 17,18. wiCToZuTliioi - IjoSßll Ajf l{>lj ^^ as the statue which thou hast seen, so is he. This latter idea alone is also expressed by ^fand a pronoun following; e.g. John iv. 23; ^CT »^1? such; Barh. 55, 13 ; 70, 18. CHAPTER SECOND, THE VERB. § 59. General View. The use of the Preterit and of the Future^ as in ihe He- brew, is so comprehensive, that by them almost all tue other relations of time are designated, in accordance with definite rules (comp. § 65). This, however, is usually in such a manner that the preterite designates those tenses which stand in connection with past time, while the future has the same influence vc^oyl future time. § 60. Use of the Preterit 1. In the Past it designates ; t, 7 7 a) the absolutely past tense ; e.g. Matt.ii.2. Oi^iooo ^W we have seen his star ; OlS -^SliL ^Z") me are come to wor- ship him ; John iii. 16 ; Assem. I. 861, 26, 27 ; h) the Narrative tense {Aorist) ; a ) mostly hefore the sub- ject ; e.g. Mark xi. 11, ^SaIo]] ^Qm> ^ Jesus came to Je- rusalem ; John ii.22. «-lOlOrJ-i^Z OpjZ*! his disciples remem- hered; ß) after particles (when something aciJwa? is denoted), e. g. |0, Barh. 68,12. q\oo ]] ^ since they did not receive; line 4. ? \^r^ until that ; Matt. i. 25. ZjL»j "t^jl until she brought forth ; Barh. 24, 6 ; Zuiij ^ojl until he died ; 213, 18 ; 217, 3 ; Assem. I. 31,l7 ; Ephr. 1. 196, F ; USE OF THE PRETERIT. I7ß c) the Pluperfect ; a) in relative clauses whicli define the principal action, and in point of time, precede it ; e.g. Matt. i. 24. ll-riß? CJlOpSo (sÜ rCia? Ki.T pi he did as the angel of the Lord had commanded ; Mark xi. 6 ; b) after particles • e.g. p lohen, after ; Matt. ii. 1. K,Qm1 j2L2f p when Jesus was horn ; verse 9 ; John ii. 22 ; vi. 23, 24 ;' Barh. 90 9 • Assem. 84, B. 6. > jA^) q/J;er ^/la«;; Barh. 89,7. ^5^> )Äd •XSOa^r^ after that he had slainDarius; 164,8. j ji\a _Ld, ibid; Assem. 1. 213, A. 25; > Ir*»^ 5o 500?^ a5 ; Barh. 79, 12. Rem. — More frequently, however, for the pluperfect, stands the 10 0C71 ( § 65 ). 2. It denotes the Present Tense ; a) in verbs of quality and condition ; e. g. Matt. xvi. 2, 3. jiV^» AnV)m the sky is red; John iv. 35. 0>C1m> ^UH^ the fields lohich are white ; Isa. i. 3 ; Ephr. II. 11 7, Ä ; 6 ) in general designations of time, denoting simply what is usual and customary ; e. g. Ps. xiv. 2. jCUjI )1'^ the Lord holes down ; xxv. 2 ; c) when it denotes a state or condition ; e.g. Gen. iv. 6. ^^ «-»^Z*! ]lV)\ w^Ay art thou angry? 3. It marks the Future Tense ; a) in prophecies, asseverations, and the like, (for the most part, however, only in translations from the Hebrew),, which are viewed as already fulfilled and accomplished ; e.g. Isa. ix. 2. ]aj fjOlQJ OVm they shall see a great light ; Gen. xvii. 20 ; sometimes after verbs in which is involved the idea of a future action ; e. g. Barh. 80, 1. *riou> •^'( he promised that he would give ; h) the completed future {futurum exacium) after j (IsO ; e.g. Mark xii.25. (A^io ^ QiQOj psD ?/;Ae7i ^Aey sAa^Z rise from the dead ; John iv. 25. 4. In exhortations, and in clauses which contain condi- tions or conclusions, the preterite also expresses the rela- tion of the subjunctive ; a) of the present tense, (]ooi with a participle or adjective) ; e. g. I Thess. v. 6. ^;.i^ ^ooi hi us be ivatchful; verse 8 ; Eph. ii. 11 ; Tit. ii. 9, 10; /;) of 174 USE OF THE PKETEEIT. the imperfect : e. g. John ix. 41. Aa^ ^oAaOOI (aV^ff) o!^ VAji^aj .oa^ loot if ye were blind, then would ye have had no sin; xv. 19 ; c) of the pluperfect ; e. g. John xi. 21. •jLjal looi Zpi? )] AjiOOI ^Z q!^ hadst thou been here my brother had not died; Barh. 93, 10 ; Ephr. I. 225, E. Rem. — In the first case (under a, above) jOOl is sometimes want- ing; e. g. Matt. ix. 17. ^Ol ^'^f2:D |Jj the bottles do not thereby hurst ; xxv. 24 ; Mark i. 44 ; ii. 21,22 ; Luke v. 36 ; the imperfect subjunctive is more frequently expressed by the future (§ 61) ; and sometimes the preterite with ».aQ^ oh, that, denotes tlie optative (§ 65); e.g. Rev. iii. 15. AaOOI (^^jO %jiGu^ oh, that thou wert cold ; Ephr. III. 284. Oil jll ^ ZuOOl U'^ol would that I were not of her children. This idea seems also involved in the cases under c. 5. Finally, the preterit also stands for the Imperative and the Infinitive ; 10 001 occnrs as an Imperative in connec- tion with an adjective or participle ; e. g. Mark v. 34. ]<^ A>> ^AjOOI IVäj \)yiy\g ; II Tim. iv. 5 ; Rom. xii. 9, 10. no» >>|i ^.».Süja) .OA^OOI love your brethren ; I Pet. ii. 13 ; iv. 9 ; after preceding imperatives ; e. g. Luke x. 37. ,^11 AaOOI \LD(J\ tS\ »2) I ^1 «Tfopsüjs , xai tfC 'ifoUi h[kolbig ; I Pet. iii. 15 ; b) the preterit stands as an Infinitive after verbs signify- ing to come^ to go, to send, etc., without the copula ; e. g. Barh. 415,2. oai ^ ]{• Xl'f he came to besiege Acco ; 402, 8; with the copula, Barh. 403, 16, 17. qLdo-Oj^^ they sent to entreat ; especially after ^\m ; e. g. Barh. 68, 1. 7 -n .7 i7 u*.O^0 — fcj^Aa ^\M he began to open — and to offer up. USE OF THE FUTURE. 175 Rem.— But this union frequently denotes merely the aorist ; e. g. Assem. I. 288, 2. o2f QSuO thei/ arose to go i. e. they went. §61. Use of the Future. 1. The Future stands ; a) for the Absolute Future; e. g. Matt. xxiv. 35. ^jmj U *.*J^0 ^0*,£:i2J tl>lo IaIq» Heaven and earth shall pass away, but my word shall not pass away ; i. 21, 23 ; Luke xviii. 8 ; John xiv. 13 ; b) for the Complete Future in conditional clauses, (with the future in the conclusion of the sentence) ; John v. 43. ^n\nnZ OoOi aimsn ^Omo ]l\i ^\^] .f if another shall have come in his own 7iame, him will ye receive ; viii. 28. XV. 7, 10. 2. Furthermore, it denotes, the following relations of time; a) the Present although more rarely than in Hebrew ; e.g. John iv. 13. fcn^ *£5oZ USo ^^01 ^ fAmJ > >\o flfa? 6 'n'/vwv Jx rou i)(JaTo^ rovTCfo, (5"j-v|/^fl'£» «raXiv ; with tf verse 48, after > ^'^ Luke xxii. 61. 1]1..-J>2^ I^QJ j ^^3 Z)/orö iJÄe coch crows ; b ) the Imperfect ; a) after such verbs as y ^\M ; Assem. I. 27, 20. Olli '^\l ? *^J* ^^ spake to him {began to speak) ; ß ) after particles J V^^ until; } >OjiD before; e. g. Luke ii. 21. llD'rio ^^Aj j W^o before he was conceived in his mothers womb ; Barh. xi. 15 ; c) more rarely the Perfect ; e. g. Jud. v. 8. louS. \^^ Grod hath chosen; Isa. xliii. 17, 19; d) the Pluperfect: after P'^ , J io^ 5e/öre ; e. g. Jer. i. 5. '3. It serves to express the following Moods ; A ) the Subjunctive ; a) of the Present; a ) in general ; 176 USE OP THE FUTURE. Jolin vii. 37. ]AmJO «^Zo^ ]l\2 let him come to me and drink; Bark 79, 1. ioLOJ \\ > n V> yio^? let him die; ß) after ? , J] J with a preceding present or imperative ; e. g. John V. 10. 5^pr^Qa*2j yS .f^i\» X^it is not lawful that thou shouWst carry thy bed; vi. 12. \>0^ jS^J ]]? — QmtD gather — iÄa« nothing he lost ; Matt.xxvi.41 ; Assem.I.377,10, 11,13 ; h) of the Imperfect ; a) in conditional clauses ; John ix. 22. Oia IjQJ «Jü] (\ if any man should confess concern- ing him ; ß) after a preceding imperfect ; e. g. John ii. 25. jOlßOJ «jUf) (OCJl «n>lff) |J it was not needful that any one should testify; after a preterite; v.27. Jiaj piQl jOOUj Olf)\#I he gave him authority that he should execute judgment ; i. 31 ; Barh. 80, 3 ; Assem. I. 359, 5 ; after the pluper- fect; e. g. John iv. 8. .Ql£)p9 — ooai Q^ they were gone that they might buy ; y) sometimes with looi appended; e.g. Ephr. I. 223, C. looi Oli^ilJ ]inj!ihow he would do ; As- sem. I. 297, B. 3. v. E ; c) of the Perfect sometimes, in con- ditional clauses, after J and ^| U] {in case that) ; e.g. John vii. 51 ; Ephr. I. 237, B. and E ; d) of the Pluperfect, more rarely, and only with jOOl appended ; e. g. Ephr. I. 40, B. fOOl IAjlJ ^P^^ Uili*? IjOfirU fOOl |00U P'^Om pl^ what harm luould have arisen because it had brought forth good ears ? Rem. — May, might, can, should, must, and the like, are also ex- pressed by the future ; e. g. Ephr. I. 203, F. IvmJO ^iV? that he might go and see ; John iv. 40. •OGlZo^ (OOUj GUSiO QIO they entreated him that he would remain with them; verse 47 ; v, 14 ; Rom. vi. 1. fQQJ *^U \^ '^hat shall we say, shall we continue? Gen. ii. 16, 30, 31 ; Luke xviii. 1 ; John vi. 28 ; Heb. USE OF THE FUTUKE. 177 i. 6 ; Barh. 63, 19. ZoSCU ^w^^J ]]? ^ every one who of- fered not should die ; 68, 18 ; Mark ix. 49. 1Am^> ^ i»»SV)ZZ f» » \V)n every sacrifice should he salted with salt ; 7» I 7 Prov. XX. 9 ; r^\^ ^iO who can say? By way of circumlocution, P 7 may and should are expressed by J %*^t n ; e. g. I Cor. xi. 7 ; must — by J Uo with a future following ; e. g. John iv. 24 ; I Tim. Hi. 2. B) The Imperative ; a) in Prohibitions ; e.g. Matt. i. 20. ^\Lil \i fear not ; John iii. 7 ; vi. 20 ; I Cor. xv. 83, 34. ^Ql^L 1] sin not ; h) after a preceding imperative ; e. g. John i. 40. ^OVm2o o2 gpxstfäs xa* 'ihrz^ verse 47; viii. 11. Rem. — The third person of the imperative, which is wanting, is always expressed by the future ; e. g. Gen. i. 3. (9G1QJ (OOU let there he light. C) The future marks the Infinitive after verbs which in- volve the intention of some action ; e. g. Barh. 34, 4, 5. •^. J^j ]lo he sought to kill ; 90,7,8. ^^OloA^QJ? ^Ju.Zt he thought to kill him ; Matt ii. 22. ^l)j? ^? he feared to go; Assem. 1. 33, 25. ll'JjO 2>00*J? ^'t» he began to fast 071^ io prflv ; John iii. 3. (U»J? ^»n«V) U Äe cannot see ; verses 4, 5 ; xv. 4 (without j following, Matt. viii. 28). In like manner occur fZT Matt. v.l7 ; ^^ xvL 3 ; jOa Luke viii. 55 ; Acts i. 4 ; and many others. Rem.— The infinitive with ^ also follows these verbs. Com- pare § 63. B. 4. Finally, the future is also expressed by ^Al ready, about tobe ( = fxeXXsjv ) and a following infinitive ; e.g.Matt. xi. 14. ]1\^ r»ÄlJ he who is to come ; John iii. 14. lül > 01^ Qk}>ZASüii r»^ ]xio\ even so the Son of Man is to be lifted up ; vi. 6 ; 'vii. 85 ; in the plural ; Luke xxi. 178 USE OF THE IMPERATIVE. 9. looiSijJi ^jb^Ol ^jj] ^hA^ this will come to pass; verse36. The implied idea of the imperfect is expressed by looi ap- pended ; e. g. John vii. 39. o\nn^\ 0001 ^^kAl) paO» the spirit which they were to receive. Rem. — Also occurs J ^kAl with a following future ; e. g. Assem, I. 481, 22. f;jüj ^JOID r*'^? the priest shall begin ; 37, 17 ; Ephr. I. 197, D ; in the plural ; John vi. 15. The idea of willing, purposing, is also expressed bv M^» ; a ) with J and a future fol- lowing; especially Matt. xvi. 24. «-»)Ao fZpj t^*? ^3;0 whoso will follow after me ; v. 40; Barh. 68,6 ; or without > ; e. g. Luke xviii. 13. UIji^J.. (001 lo» U he would not — lift up ; b) with an infinitive following ; John i.44. «n*^V)\ ^Q » he would go forfh. § 62. Use of the Imperative. 1. The Imperative expresses either a command ; e.g. John • ■»7 P 7 1 1 -X *, V. 8. j^OlO ySQ"^ ^QOs y)QO arise, take up thy bed and walk ; or encouragement and permission ; e. g. Mark i. 38. V>>on\ on^Ol go into the city ; John xi. 15. Rem. — In the same signification the Syriac appends the impera- tive of l2f (vid. § 28. l.Rem.; 2. Rem.) to the future of the finite verb, especially of "jZ and wkZ in the singular, when two, are in- tended ; e. g. Gen. xxxi. 44. ]V)iO y)in] l2 let us make a covenant ; xix. 32 ; and oZ in the plural, when several are meant ; e.g. John xi. 7. ^IP oZ let us go. 2. The imperative standing after the future, some- times acquires a future signification ; e. g. Gen. xlv. 18. oLoalo — ^qdIu ^2^ I will give to you— and ye shall eat; USE OF THE INFINITIVE. 179 or the latter of two imperatives, following each other with- out a copula, denotes the infinitive; e. ff. John iv 16 ^;£) *A^1 go to call ; verse 29. 0\j^ oZ come to see ; Ephr. I. 201, E; or with the copula they stand in the relation of cause and effect ; e, g. Gen. xlii. 18. Q.»-mO Q,*^v Ijoi do this and live, i. e., if ye ivould live. Rem. — In this latter case the future also follows the imperative ; e. g. Isa. viii.lO. >iV)iOZZ l]o IAIj^ o\Sv> speak a word, it shall not be fulfilled. 8. Of two successive imperatives, when one is negative, it is expressed by the future (§ 61. 3. B) ; e. g. John viii. U. ^.^4**^ " *^ÖL 1»01 ^iDO *aLi go and henceforth sin no more ; Eom. xi. 20 ; Eph. iv. 26. Rem. — Concerning the third person df the imperative, com- pare § ßl. 3. B. Rem. On the use of (001 to designate this person, see § 60. 5. a. § 63. Use of the Infinitive. The Syriac, which has not, like the Hebrew, a double form for the infinitive absolute and construct, denotes the latter by ^ prefixed (compare § 19. B. 3). A. Infinitive Absolute. The infinitive without ^ is mostly used adverbially, and in connection with its finite verb, which it precedes, denotes ; a) a strentheninsr of the action ; e. g. Hebr.vi. 14. ..> . or>1 n> mVn r> w»0;Id1 QD^Q^ / toill bless thee exceed- imrly and multiply thee greatly ; I Sam. xx. 6 ; xxiii. 22 ; John ix. 9. OlS ]Sx>j \^^ he is very like him ; Acts v. 180 USE OF THE INFINITIVE. 28 ; Philem. verse 9 ; b) certainty^ confirmation ; e. g. BarH. 15, 18. ^}L ^r^ thou shall know with certainty. Neg- atively with ]] before the finite verb it is equivalent to, by no means ; e.g. John xx. 5. ^Ü U ^ÜSo he by no means went in ; Rom. ix. 6. ; c) it sometimes denotes continuance ; e.g. Isa. xxx.19. tOatoZ |j f^nV> ye shall not always weep ; Exod. xxxiv. 7. Rem. — By the infinitive absolute are also expressed, rather how- ever after the idiom of the Hebrew, other minute points of the language ; e. g. much^ much more ; Jer. xxii. 10. O^n p*^^^ weep much ; somewhat^ indeed ( Germ, etwa ), Gen. xxxvii. 8. >V<^ AjI 1 A^^^ n^ vVnVn y^Ht thou indeed rule over us ? then^ truly; xliii.7. ^001 ^->-^r^ ^r^ could loe then know ? per- haps, indeed ; Acts vii. 34. Aap^ f l »*^ I have indeed seen. More frequently it is merely pleonastic ; e. g. Luke i. 22 ; John xiii. 29 ; Acts vii. 45 ; and it is appended to the imperative ; e. g. Isa. vi. 9. \1SqaSo QSSfl» hear ye. The negative sometimes stands before it ; e.g. Gen. iii. 4. ^LQ^l ASbSD |J ye surely shall not die. The case a, in translations of passages from the01dTestament,is also expressed by the noun formed from the finite verb ; e. g. Gen. ii.l7. 2qSdZ *|ZqSo t1^)3?l tl1^ ^^^^ ^^«^^ surely die (compare Ephr. I. 24, A), which is closely connected with the ordinary Syriao mode of expression ; as »^4 1^^' 1^0 ,-m |,-m rejoice exceed- ingly ; see § 67. 1. c. B. Infinitive with ^ or the Construct form. The Infinitive with ^ stands ; a) after verbs which denote a purpose, wish, determina- lion, capacity, command, etc. ; e. g. Luke xi. 54. »^*^ Jo*^ r^U^^ they sought to catch something; Matt, xxi, 46 ; THE INFINITIVE. 181 John V. 16; vii. 1. oaii^OlSuL looi ]£il J]' Ac would not go; Matt. xiv. 5; Barli. 14, 18; 83, 6; Matt. vi. 24. » K fc S'^V^S ,»» n«V> .ajI |J no man can serve ; Mark ii. 7 ; John iii. 2 ; X. 21 ; Barli. 192,20. ^Zsol ^ioif ^2 Uaf here also could he not remain ; Luke xv. 15. ]v *Vf>V OXJ^ he sent him to feed ; John iv. 83. VV^]^V SLa'( he. brought — to eat ; Ephr. I. 230, D. oicfuScA -. ^Qiimj they shall take — to kindle ; John xi. 31. ]nnV)L JJl] '[ ;*->r.V % that she goeth unto the grave to weep ; Barh. 12, 20; h) after verbs signifying to begin, to cease, to be accustomed ; e. g. Matt iv. 17. Oi;nV>\ ^;ji he began to preach ; xvi. 21 ; Barh. I, 1, 2 ; 5, 2 ; Assem. I. 513, B. 20 ; Acts V. 42. 0'^\Sn\ 0001 ^^iV« J] they ceased not to teach ; Eph. i. 16; Barh. 5. 10. n'^\M>aV)S ^^^ they were ac- customed to changes. Rem. 1. — The infinitive with ^ (which can sometimes, viz. in passages translated from the Hebrew, be rendered by while^ or when ; e.g. Gen. ii. 3. ,*^\Sn\ fOu^ fr^? which God created, when he made it); forms, after ^^Al (§ 61. 4) and after looi, a cir- cumlocution for the future ; e.g. Gen. xv.l2. %*^\\^iy\ \mliD» ]ooi the sun shall go down. But of the Hebrew idiom, by which the infinitive, joined with a preposition or conjunction, is explained by the finite verb, there occurs in Syriac, only the construction with > ^ before ^ ; e.g. Assem. 1. 42,8. oaSSüLj ^ ]ocri IJ* Jlo and he ceased not to teach ; negatively, in Hebr. iv. 1. W vVr>\^ V> «-*(^? '^ho should refrain from entering, i. e., who should^ not enter ; or comparatively, without y ; Gen. iv. 13. /"^^^^^ ^ «jiZcL-Xnco «uOI pb) my crime is greater, than can be forgiven me. Rem. 2. — Tn the poets we sometimes meet with a transition 182 USE OF THE PARTICIPLE. from the infinitive to the finite verb; e.g. Ephr. III. 129, F. ]lni .siLj^ä )]o I'A^vnV \lVn Ucn» /^^ «^^ ^^ «M>n*=^ |v r>nVn >\jlQJ far better is it, in time of thirst to drink water ^ than, instead of drinkiwj to measure fountains (literally, and we will not measure) ; and likewise conversely ; which seems to be done for the sake of the metre (compare Hahn et SiefF. Chr. p. 7 . Anm.). The Syriac also expresses the infinitive by the future, with or without J prefixed ( § 61. 3. C ) or by the participle (§64.3.B). § 64. Use of the Participle, 1. Participles may be considered either as Adjectives or as Substantives : A) As Adjectives^ they assume tbe number and gender of their subject; and take their object in the case or with the preposition of the verb from which they are formed ; thus ; a ) the Active Participle ; e. g. John ii. 14. UQ-^O tl^r^O \jOL ^^ a l*^ pQ> ^i NOI those who sold oxen, sheep, and doves ; verse 16 ; viii. 44 ; Barh. 52, 4, 5 ; 74, 20. 1c7i!L ^^j ]n\V) a king who fears Qod ; Assem. I. 270, A. Rem. 9 ; Acts vi. 3. l^'r^? C5U*oi ^iSv> full of the Holy Ghost ; Rom. i. 29 ; John iii.l5. oii ^^cnk)> .aiSo every one who believes on him ; b) the Passive Participle^ with the case or the preposition of its active '; e. g. Ez. ix. 2. V. QO .Ä-Jli^ clothed in Byssus ; Barh. 82, 14 ; 108, 6 ; l70, 19. |r*| «.|^A2 maimed in the hand ; Lev. ii. 4. ■J" ,* ^ i^ p I.. ^i&SQO ^A^2> . ^jif.. cakes anointed with oil ; I Sam. ii.l8. HpQ-^ ^92 blessed of the Lord. B) As Substantives^ participles stand, in a genitive re- lation, in the construct state, before the noun ; thus a) the USE OF THE PARTICIPLE. 188 Active Particijple ; e.g. Gen. xxiii. 10. "{LyL «lS]i those who went in at the gate \ Rom. vii. 1. "IflDQiüJ «-«Ar^ those who hnow the law (literally, the hnowers of the laiu) ; Barh. 1 95, 11. I^im %h{f<\% loho had drawn the sword \ 214, 1 ; even before prepositions; II Tim. iii. 2. fZonafcjD *j ,£kO who deny (i.e. 7'efnse to acknowledge) favors; I Tim. i. 10. fASook) ^\L ^r^^ breaker of their oath ; b ) the Passive Participle; Gen. xxiv. 31. "Ur^? OOa'^O bl&ssed of God; xxvi. 29. 2. Participles mark the following relations of time : A) The present, in connection with the separable pro- noun denoting the subject ( § 54. 2 ) ; e. g. John iv. 9. Aj] ^|i thou prayesi (art pro^ying); xv. 15 ; Assem. I. 34, 9. tflo ^Sd ]j1 f^^iSi J] / have no command from our Lord. Rem. — In the third person which is usually already rendered definite by a preceding noun or pronoun, the separable pronoun is omitted ; e. g. Luke xv. 5. Ol^ ^\njiO and he heareth it {the sheep) ; verse 6. «^GIOSTIm;^ Iji^O cnAinS IZlo and cometh into his house and calleth his friends ; John iii. 18, 20; iv. 36 ; vii. 17 ; viii. 47 ; iv. 23. li^li iLZf IJT but the time cometh, B) The past ; a) the Imperfect ; a ) in connection with looi (§ 65) ; /3) without loCTI after a preceding imperfect ; e. g. John. iii. 22. .iCilSDO ^OOliOii loCFl »^OlAlo he tar- ried with them and baptized ; iv. 27, 31 ; vi. 2 ; 7 ) after the preterite in a relative parenthetical clause ; e. g. John vi. 5. pan?/ who came to him ; verse 11 ; Assem. I . 75, A.36 ; joined with o copulative ; e. g. Barh. 4, 3. IjQ^^ onSoD 184 THE PARTICIPLE. ^IajO ^qSo>>9 they went up on Mount Hermon and abode ; b ) the Perfect ; John vii. 52. ö'^yt ^r^ U^?" ^U^O *a^ y)]^ U search and see, that out of Galilee hath arisen no prophet. Rem. — It is to be regarded as a mere imitation, and not as a constant idiom of the language, when tlie Hebrew infinitive ^^^j-| or the participle n^n» (^7 which, coming before the finite verb, is indicated the continuance or gradual progress of an action), is expressed in Syriac by the participle of ^l] ; e. g. Gen. viii. 5, ^•mio 0001 ^iV ]2do ( -i^om -jibn vri D'^Tan-) ) and the waters decreased more and more ; I Sam. ii. 26. ^ ^ilo ^iT U^o ( nit)i bi!^n tibn -i5?5m ) «^ t\ie hoy grew from day to day. C ) The Future ; ö ) the Absolute Future ; « ) in general propositions ; e. g. John xi. 23. .-a.DQa*( ^(o thy brother shall rise again ; ß) after a present ; John xi. 24. y>{lD) p| |l,a / ^nozü /!/ia^ he shall rise again ; iv. 25 ; 7) after a preterite, Barh. 80, 20; 81, 1. >A£3j oil ;Sd] ]2j-i^V)^ OlS ^1 ^oSiSD ^-ÜqI \t^l he said to him that in three days he would surrender the city ; John iv. 25 ; ^ ) after a future ; John xiv. 23. ^-i-»Z| oiZolo ^oiQLa.Lcujp ^aO] 7ny Father will love him, and we will come to him ; Assem. I. 862, 5, 8. XA looi ]i i'fcmip -^ j »A ^ouAj ^* if it shall be granted me that — then will I become a christian ; s ) after an imperative ; Mark xi. 24. ^oAj] ^-jLTiflDJj Qli£UOI believe that ye shall receive ; ^) after loi, John xvi. 32. \blM \kL\ (01 behold the hour shall come ; Gen. vi. 17 ; xlviii.4 ; Exod. ix. 18 ; *] ) in direct and indirect questions ; USE OF THE PARTICIPLE. 185 e. g. John vii. 41. ]» » i«V) fZf ö^yi ^ \i£L^i shall the Messiah come out of Galilee ? verse 81 ; viii. 22 ; xiii. 27. AjI r^il> y>jSD what thou wilt do ; h) the futurum exactum ; a ) after particles ; e. g. John vii. 27. l2"|> *aAi"| when he shall have come ; verse 81. Barh. 133, 2. ^bS\ Uso») \J> as soon as thou shall have heard ; /3 ) in conditional clauses ; e.g. Epiir. I. 218, F. \^ ^ooil Vl *QOiI> tff imless I shall have given him water. 3. In like manner, participles indicate various Moods ; A ) The Subjunctive ; viz. a ) of the Imperfect ( with |00l , compare § 65 ) after ^( ; e. g. Barh. 88, 10. ^oZASo ]] 1)21 ;o2A^ I^W ^1 everi though the vessel broke, the ground — would not break ; Assem. I. 879, 2. Zlio ülo 1> >' 1>> . J>o ;ao ^1 2/ Äe d'eM/ec? Christ then shoidd he live, if not, he should die ; after ? 13 1, Barh. 56, 12. rifice ; in relative clauses depending upon a future ( = imperfect subjunctive ) ; e. g. Assem. I. 862, 19. ^.iJ^pi) ^lO ^QOCCLkSf .oaü JDOUAJ) rn£> Aß ordered that he shoidd be given them as Bishop, lohom they should 001 in conditional clauses (compare § 60. 4. c) ; e. g. Gal. iv. 15. iooi K»naV) oiil -,-\ —LÄOUO .oAaOOI 11 riiOnr ^ '^ had it been possible ye would have plucked out your oivn eyes, and given them to me; Heb. X. 2 ; xi. 15 ; I John ii. 19. B ) The Infinitive, after verbs signifying to begin, to cease, to permit, to command, to be able, etc. ; e. g. Matt. xii. 1. v^\V^^ Qji";i they began to pluck ; Mark i. 45 ; Luke v. 21 ; 186 USE OF THE PARTICIPLE. XV. 14 ; I John ii. 8. 1V**ASd ^'^ fioiQJ theij began to see the light ; Assem. I. 87,15. (l£) ^y he began to call ; 50, 5 ; Barh. 96, 7 ; 108, 19 ; 160, 7 ; 180, 5 ; 83, 12 ; |Z|i ^^ito ^ ^^4^ he ceased to build churches ; Matt. xiii. 30. ^-luTd) noon» suffer to groiu ; Luke xviii. 16; Jolin xi. 44 ; xviii. 8 ; Luke x. 40. *^ l>r^ ^ '^'\ bid her Äe^ me ; Mark ii. 2. ^QJ] r**l •^*^»| U 2^ com/^ wof hold them ; vii. 15 ; Jolin v. 19 ; viii. 43 ; Acts x.47 ; Mark vi. 37. ^fcfOS^ .OOlL ^Äj we will give them to eat. Rem. — Sometimes j also stands before such a participle ; e. g. Matt, xxiv.30. VZ1> liülj OT^n^ ^OVmJ they shall see the Son of man comiftg ; John v. 19 ; Acts xxi. 32. ^^i »»Lo? ^So Q^aiA tOOO^O^^ OOQI £'7ra;;ö'avTo Toitrovrsg töv IlauXov. 4. The Absolute Participle is distinguished by a) p pre- ceding it ; e.g. Matt.xiv.25. »^oiLo p ^Q«u ^ooiZoj^ ]!} Xlü^D ^^ /esw5 came to them walking upon the sea ; xv. 32; John ix. 7. lu* P U]o he came seeing ; Barh. 62, 6. AaId tä'rOO ^-^Ak) p disquieted by war he died ; 73,4. ]ijDj p ]]Vi*o]^ P H not standing, but bowed to the earth; b) by > preceding ; e. g. Mark ii. 14. ]mnV) Zu.o jd^j sitting at the receipt of custom ; xi. 2, 4 ; Matt. xiv. 26 ; xxvi. 64. Rem. — If to such a participle, a noun he appended, this con- struction sometimes expresses the Latin ablative absolute ; e. g. ..7 ikl p .. P ^1 P 7 Matt. XV. 20. «jiCJIOHkl ^^^^ '^ r^ ^^^^ unwashed hands ; Mark vii. 2, 5 ; John xi. 44. wiCnoly^JO ^aiÖj-»"| ^^0)1 p 6oww^ Äawc? a?ic? foot. In the translation of the New Testament, the participle is sometimes to be understood as in the person of the finite verb following it ; e. g. Matt. ii. 8. OnOS Q^] «ropsuä^vref i|crafl'aT£ , verses 9, 10, 11, 13. USE OF THE PARTICIPLE. 187 5. The passive participles frequently have an active signification ; a ) those from transitive verbs ; e. g. I^Iatt. Viu. 18. ai^ ^HH^? t}^ose surrounding him ; Luke vii. 14. Ollik 0001 ^-JLiuO»/ those hearimr him ; John v. 4. f i ^^ fOOl MAlk) troubling the water : Actsxxi.l6 ; Assem. I. 30, 4. U^^^^^il» yO fteffrm^ ^Äe child; 34,9 ; 37,8 ; 377, 2. Olr^l^) olL Zooi 1n»n\ she drew him ly the hand ; h ) those from intransitive verbs ; e. g. Matt. v. 4. jlJDIJ ^OOLi^Q^ blessed are those ivho mourn ; Mark vii. 30 ; John xi. 19. 0001 ^^21 they were come ; xii. 15. I/jlI ^' ,SljSi't riding upon a foal ; Barh. 170, 2 ; 223, 1. |CC>) M^l «^aAä ^ sitting upon a bed. Rem. — Participles sometimes have the signification of the Latin participle in -ndus ; e. g. Barh. 128, 2. ^'Owi-m) timendus. Here also belong ( compare No. 5 ) such constructions as ^\b «.k.!^ >ni*^« / have forsaken all ; ^t£^ ->^ \ASiD I deny thee ; «jk^ V)a »*>) ^f as I will. 6. Finally participles are also used impersonally thus ; _•^.. X 7» '^p _7 o) the Masculine ; Eom. xvi. 2. ]■ i,n\ *0>1j j^^f «s it hecometh saints ; Heb. viii. 3 ; Philem. 8 ; Assem. I. 33,20. ^ ^Oji *j;ä my son, it behoveth thee ; 455, A. 24, 4L loi!§^9 li^^^ W^ V it behoveth not a servant of the Lord; John iii. 30. ]A«VnV "jooi l]o OOl 0(yi^ he must increase ; ix. 4. IJo ^ Z must ; Acts xxv. 27 ; xxvi. 1 ; Rom. xiv. 4 ; Mark iv. 38. ^i I^j-j ^ ^4^ P «^ M-'^^si coi, bVi dt'B'oXXjfxsäa ; 6) the Feminine; especially to denote the neuter; e. g. Gal. vi.9. ^ X^\^ ^ocn ü' /e« i^ «o^ be bur- densome to us; Barh. 45, 13. U^? l?^'! this is probable; 188 MOODS AND TENSES. Assem. I.179,B.22. Zooi 1^ it was necessary; 482,24. ^)|0 ]1qs it is honorable and right ; 5 19, A. 4. I^EM. — Here belongs also Rom. xiv. 4. iJiOlO^fO \^sD it comes into his hands ; i. e. he can ; and in the feminine, Acts v. 39. nn > ^] A ]>^ oiasu oooi ^'^*^^ ^oioi who sought the chiMs life ; iii. 5. JOOU olSo Zooi josu all Judea went out ; John xvii. 12. AaOOl \%i I kept ; h)hj the prete- rite (§ 60. 1. b), and rarely ; c ) by the future ( § 61. 2. b ) ; C ) of the Perfect J besides cases noted in ( § 60. 1 ) ; a) rarely by the future (§61. 2. c); ft) by the participle (§ 64. 2. B. b) ; D ) of the Pluperfect ; a) usually by (001 in the same person and number added to the preterit ; e. g. Luke v. 9 MOODS AND TENSES. 189 (001 Olf*^] |01SdZ terror had seized him; John iv. 8. OOOl QUI they had gone into ; v. 13. looi ^ii2f he had hidden himself; x. 22. fOOl fOOl he had been ; h) by the preterit ( § 60. 1. c ) ; c) rarely by the future ( § 61. 2. d ) ; E ) of the Future besides cases noted in §61. 1., some- times ; a) by the Preterit (§ 60. 3. a) ; h) by the impera- tive (§ 62. 2) ; c) by the participle (§ 64. 2. C); F ) of the Futurum exactum ; a) by the preterit {§ 60. 3. b), more frequently ; h) by the future (^ 61. 1. b), some- times ; c) by the participle (§ 64. 2. C. b). //. The Subjunctive ; A ) of the Present is given ; a) by the preterit of looi (§ 60. 4. a ), very often ; b) by the future (§ 61. 3. 1. a ) ; B ) of the Imperfect ; a) usually like the indicative of the same tense, by the participle with fOOl in conditional clauses ; e. g. John viii. 19. »Sf ^oAaOOl ^jlIh* *" ^L^ |0Aa001 >^. > - >*^|i //"ye ÄWCIÜ me, ye would also knoiu my father ; verses 39, 42 ; xviii. 30, 36 ; xxi. 25 ; b) by the future (§ 61. 3. A. b), sometimes ; c) by the participle alone (§ 64. 3. A. a) ; C ) of the Perfect; sometimes by the future (§ 61. 31 A.c); D ) of the Pluperfect ; a) by the preterit (§ 60. 4. c) ;: 6) by the future (§ 61. 3. A. d), more frequently ; c) by the- participle with looi (§ 64. 3. A. b). Ill The Optative is expressed ; a)hy the interrogative- 190 THE PERSONS OF THE VERB. pronoun with a preterit or future following ; e. g. Judges ix. 29. wA^jill^ poi '{SqiL oiLq^I ^> ^^ oh that I had (who will give over to me) this people in my power I Ps. iv. 7 ; lv.7; h) by the particles ^^oJi and *aoA»l oh that, with a pre- terit following (§ 60. 4. Rem.); the Future; e.g. Gen. xvii.18. ]I*p %2)oA«l oh that he might live ; or the participle with looi ; e. g. II Cor. xi.l. ^ ^oAaOOi ^;nimV) »aoA»! may ye yet hear with me I Rem — The optative is sometimes also expressed by A or Q-ä^ ; 7 7 7 '^If* e.g. Ps.lxxxi.l3. tilSV)» «iVtS Quäv would that my people would hearken to me ; by verbs that denote a wish with a following j ; e.g. Exod. xvi. 3. 1^^109 ^001 ^^ i„0 » would that we were dead! When the substantive verb denotes a wish, it is omitted ; e. g. Luke. ii.l4. loi^fJ |Aa*QÄ*2 glory toGod. Sometimes instead of 7 7 the Hebrew ^^^ 1)2 occurs the almost correspondent J ^^Ql ^So ; e. g. Job xxiii. 3 ; but it is literally translated in Cant. viii. 1. «.a2^ ]>*! ^*!^Aj ^Sd oh that thou wert my brother» lY. The Imperative^ besides the cases under § 62, is ex- pressed ; a) by the preterit of looi (§ 60. 5. a) ; b) by the future, especially negatively (§61. 3. B). V. The Infinitive, finally, besides the cases under § 63, is expressed ; a) by the preterit (§ 60. 5. b) ; h) by the fu- ture (§ 61. 3. C) , and more frequently ; c) by the partici- ple (§ 64. 3. B). § m. The Persms of the Verb, 1. The third singular masc. and fern, of the active and passive conjugations is sometimes used impersonally thus : THE PERSONS OF THE VERB. 19 i a ) the masculine ; a) of the preterit ; e. g. Heb. x. 34. ^oa^ jd]d it pained you ; Luke x.34. ^jiOIqSi OlL ^^y^^Z^ he cared for him ; ß) of the future, Deut. vi. 24. ^ ^a\^ it would be good for us ; Jer. vii.6. tOnlL «^]jQj it icould harm you ; h) the feminine ; a) of the preterit , Ps. xcv.lO. 001 ]j^ *^ AjJSd it shames me, (I am as ham- ed) of this generation ; Ps. xxxi.9. wk^ Aoi it grieves me ; Luke xviii. 23. Oiik A^'^o it pained him ; ß) of the future, Gal. vi. 9. ^ t1^l2 M it will not be grievous to us ; Ps. Ixix. 20. OlL IpZj ^^üL whom it grieved. 2. In like manner in Syriac, the neuter is usually ex- pressed ; a) by the third person singular feminine of the verb, thus ; a) in impersonal phrases, as Luke vi. 13. OVyjLj it was light ; John vi. 17. AOaa* it was dark ; pas- sively, Barh. 84,14. AiSdA«| the report was spread abroad; Assem. L 298. A.ll. OlL AjJSk.tZI it was revealed to him ; 481, 7 ; ß ) in connection with the demonstrative pro- noun or with adjectives as subjects ; e. g. John i. 28. »jiOOl |a±1 Aa-CiS -jki^OI this came to pass at Bethany ; i. 3. Zooi Ir** W^l Ihere was not any thing ; Ephr. I. 240, F. ^qSjD »1 -^*^ Ijoi L'^HM it seemed good to Moses ; passively, Assem. I. 380, 4. ^ Zup^Zl ]o>l it seemed just to us. Yet we also find for the neuter ; b) the third person singular mas- culine ; e.g. Isa. xxiii. 12. »jlu^ «m>*11 |J there will be no rest for thee ; Barh. 133, 8. OlS 'r^olZ] it was said to him; Assem. L 362, 5. oJS ^aulj ^^it shall be permitted to me, 8. When the subject of the verb is general or indefi- nite, it is expressed, in Syriac, in various ways, as in the English, thus; «)by the third person singular ; e.g. 192 THE PERSONS OF THE VERB. Gen. xi. 9. ^'fO he calls ; (i.e. one callsy it is called) ; to which is also appended by way of explanation, after the Hebrew idiom, the participle or participial noun of the same verb ; e. g. Isa. xvi. 10. l#CLft) ^O^i the wine ireaders shall tread ( no more wine ; i. e. no one shall tread); or \mS\ and Ij^yt ; e.g. I Sam. ix. 9. ];iii« looi ;iDl he (i. e. any one) said ; John iii. 4. "tofiO \r^s% ^SuiAj j .-^^^ U^l ^^^ ^^^-^ one 5e horn when he is old f or passively Matt. xxvi. 13. ^SiioAj it shall he told ; Acts xvi. 13. A^ lool IvmASd ^2 ^Zq^» there prayer was wont to he made ; Barh. 58, 13, 15 ; h) by the third person plural ; e.g. Isa. Ixiv. 3. oZ # |J they ( i. e., men in general ) have not heard ; xlvii. 1 ; Dan. i. 12 ; Heb. xi. 3. ^OOl ^V**A^? ^-^-^01 ^^/la^ ^Aey see (i. e. what any one sees, what is seen ) ; also with an explanatory parti- ciple or adjective ; e.g. Isa. xxiv. 16. O i Ss I |jdl they fail- ed ; c) by the second singular ; e. g. Luke ii. 4. *£:i*faL p when, thou bringest; I Tim. ii. 1. >o;nV> loCJlZj /A«^ ^Aow o/'- ferest (i. e. ^Äa^ ^Aere he offered ) ; sometimes the verb is in the second plural. Matt. vi. 24 ; d) sometimes by the first plural ; e.g. Mark vii.27. )i^JO -« «nmi> (or by the infin- itive with ^, Matt. XV. 26. o>V);^\o — >omV)\ xxii.17), that we (i.e. anyone) should take — and cast;' e) more fre- quently by the participle alone; e.g. Matt.vii.l6. >^r^V ]C^\ do men gather f v. 15 ; ix.lT ; x. 29 ; I Cor. iv.l2 ; Barh.6.2. ^•iof they say ; 58, 9. Rem. — Here belongs also f^LDfASD they say, it is said ; and im- personal phrases with an infinitive following ; e. g. Matt. xii. 12. <^vVnV «4^Sa one may do ; Acts y. 29. QfiOSL^Ak^ fJo we {any one) must obey. VERBS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 193 4. When the Deity or those in high stations (e.g. Kings), speak of themselves^ the first person plural denotes the ^p p ^ •»»1» plurdlis excellentice ; e. g. Gen. i. 26. \mi\ ,äU let us (i. e. I will) make man; xi. 7; Barh. 90, 9. _iqAd loi be- hold we (i.e. ij Justiniav)^ have written ; 11. ^ *abAo write. to us {me) . Rem. — Sometimes though for the most part only in passages translated from the Old and New Testaments, the construction changes from one person to the other, viz. ; a ) from the third to the second, or vice versa; Micah vii. 18. yLOD\ \6C^ Lm^ AjV r>^V Mo oi2oZ;I> t)'^> l2u4>* ;nsSoo floL .nn»? there is no God as thou^ who forgiveth sins^ and remitteth the transgressions of the remnant of his heritage^ and retainest not (compare Ephr. II. 284, A. B); Mai. ii. 15; Gal. iv. 21. ]rr>nVr>i LjJ*l .OOOU) ^^t? ^^iSi] .oAjI «^ 0;k)l "kiysri /xoi, ol vnro vofAov ^iXovTSg e/vai ; Rom. ii. 1 ; Matt, xxiii.37 ; b ) from the first to the third person ; e. g. Isa. xlii. 24, 25. r>m.\v ^1 CTl^ — lu^J»*? ^^ because we have sinned against him, — hath he poured out upon them (us). — Here also belong the instances where writers include themselves, in the first person plural, in what they declare of their ancestors; e. g. Psalm Ixvi. 6. OlO li-M^ ^^ then did we rejoice in him. When several verbs having difi'erent subjects follow each other in the same person, it appears to be rather according to the Syriac idiom, not to indicate more particularly the difference of the subject ; e.g. II Sam. xi.13. § 67. Construction of the Verb with various Cases and Prepositions. I. Verbs with the Accusative. 1. "With an Accusative are construed ; a ) Transitive Verbs ; e. g. Matt. ii. 6. «jiCnOiAp OOlf 194 VEBBS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. ..x}£i^ who shall feed my people ; iv. 16; even intransitives, having at the same time a transitive signification; e.g. Barh. 214, 2. IjSOm looi *^y he rode upon an ass ; 215, 11. Rem. — Here also belong such verbs as in other languages govern other cases ; e. g. fdSi to command ; Matt, xxvni. 20. ^^V^ aCJl to believe ; John xii. 38; Romans x. 16, ( with J^ John ii. 23 ) ; Ill to answer ; Ephr. TIL 285 ; ;0«> to announce ; Acts xvi. 10. §tc. h ) Here belong the following classes of verbs ; a ) those signifying to put on or put off clothing, to adorn, to gird, to cover with anything ; ««nS I Cor. xv. 53 ; Eph. vi. 11 ; Barh. 223, 12. ^a#0*^\ «•'^\l> that he put on our gar- ments ; »M>\« Col. iii. 9 ; Jflo] I Sam. ii. 4 ; Acts xii. 8 ; even passive verbs ; e.g. *2i4^Z| Acts xii. 8 ; « > «nZf Ps. civ. 2 ; and ß) those denoting a want or excess ; e. g. Acts vi. 8. lJju**0 fZoni 4 fOOl USD he was full of faith and p)0W' er ; xiii. 10 ; Rom. i. 29 ; Mark viii. 36. 'rfiCUjJ Oliaj . ^ if he suffer ha^rm as to his soul. Furthermore here belong ; y) verbs of remembering and forgetting, >oll John xv. 20 ; Luke i. 72 ; pjif John ii. 17, 22 ; lU Heb. vi. 10 ; and finally ; ^) verbs of coming and going to a place ; e. g. Matt. XV.21. >0f ? pDQjaAiL lZ]o Ae came into the region of Tyre Mark v. 38 ; Luke ii. 5 1 ; John iv. 5 ; ^11 Luke iv. 42 7 m. 9 John vi. 1; ySiöl Luke ii. 39 ; iv. 14; \^ Acts ix. 3 AjIj John ii. 12 ; -oaj i.44 ; «.oSro v. 1 ; ^ xviii.33 ; c) several neuters also take an accusative, viz ; a) in connection with a noun, as their object, formed from the same verb ; e. g. Judg. xiv. 12. Üh^o] ^] to VERBS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 195 propose a riddle ; Ez. xvii. 2 ; Acts ii. 17. — ]jo'vis» Ivm fSn\n NoS»! to have visions — dreams ; Matt. xiii. 24 ; Ephr. I. 251, C ; 253, A ; especially ß ) when the noun is more accurately defined by an adjective ; e. g. Matt. ii. 10. |Ao> iZOpivj Q^rA* they rejoiced exceedingly; John iii. 29 ; Assem. I. 862, 18 ; Gen. xxvii. 34. XLi^j Xtil^X'^^'i he lamented sorely ; Zach. i. 14. 10 001 , in the sense of to befall^ to happen to any one, also governs the accusative of the object ; e. g. Luke xiii. 2. tQj( |001 |JL201l , because this has befallen them ; Acts vii. 40. fcAOUOOl |JL1o what has happened to him ; Acts xxviii. 5, 6. 2 The following govern a double accusative ; a ) verbs in Pa., Aph.^ and Sha.^ Pe. of which takes an accusative, viz.; a) verbs of putting on or off clothing, adorning^ covering with anything; e. g. *an vv, «t>N»| Mark xv. l7,20; Ephr. I. 289, A. fZüJu^QO ^cuf ut^o he clothed them with garments ; II. 178, D ; John xix. 2. VsQy.ilj lAwJ »-iOlQjLCQOO they put upon him. a purple robe; Ez. xvi. 10 ; ß) verbs oi filling up, satisfying ; e. g. Ephr. I. 527, A. V^wai tlSüL A.\v> lAlijf ^Äe w;?:(^ow; ^^Zeci <Äe vessels with oil; Luke i. 53. |A£l4 ^^*^ffl pÄO ^Äe hun- gry he fills loith good things ; y) those which denote teaching^ or showing ; e. g. John xiv. 26. ^, V)\n . on<^\i /-e w;i7 /mcA 2/ow all things ; I Tim. iv. 6 ; John xiv. 8. 1^1 ^Qlm shoiv us the Father ; verses 10, 82 ; b ) verbs in Peal with a double accusative signification. Here belong ; a) verbs of clothing^ covering (also with J3 of the thing) ; e. g. Ephr. 1. 289, A. ^Hn^Ci ,Qjf -^£01' he 196 VEKBS WITH PREPOSITIONS. f r girded them with girdles ; «,i(iV) to anoint^ Ps.xlv.7; ^)1 to sow ; Lev. xix. 19 ; ß) verbs o^ filling up (also with *o and ^)\ e. g. John ii. 7. '(l^ V^ ^l^oSso fill {them) the water pots ivith water ; verse 9 ; Barh. 212, 2 ; Assem. I. 832, A. 12; 7)verbs oicommojuding ^ordering ^ (also with ^iDand ^^ol the person and thing) ; e.g. Gen. vi.22. OlrOQj \y.D all thai he had commanded him) Mark viii.ll. IZ] Olik 0001 ^-i-^l« they demanded of him a sign ; ^) verbs of showing or doing any thing to any body, or mahhig a person or thing to he thus and so ; e. g. Gen. xvii. 5. »^AOOU V^] / have made <Äee a Father ; John viii.53. «^ji£ü Aj] r^ai OliD t^/Aa^ maÄ;- s.si5 thou thyself? Heb. i. 2 ; Assem. I. 346, A. 4. v. E. Al- so with an accusative of the material of which anything is formed ; Q. g. I Kings viii. 32. Vjä^ ]£)p!^ ^1 ]^ he built of {them) the stones an altar ; e) verbs o^ naming^ \^ Isa. Ix. 18 ; I John iii. 1. II. Verbs with Prepositions. 1. Verbs are construed with ^ which in English are joined with m, on, upon^ ahoui^ concerning, etc. Here belong especially ; a) verbs which denote some state or emotion of the mind ; e.g. Luke i.l4. 01fSoV)0 ,0^*0 they shall rejoice at his birth ; Barh.90,20; *Q V^% to have pleasure in some- thing ; Matt. iii. 17 ; Heb. x. 38; ^ CtiiL^ to wonder at; Matt. xxii. 33 ; Luke ii. 47 ; *^ J^ifiD to hope in ; Matt. xii. 21 ; John v.45 ; JD ^kltOI to believe on ; Mark i. 15 ; John ii. 11; ^ ;-J to look at ; John i. 36, 43 ; Barh. 190, 13 ; Assem. I. 89, A. l7 ; *Q ZoiO to be ashamed of ; Eom. i. VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS. 197 16 ; *0 Jl.^ to rebuke ; I Tim. v. 1 ; l]o iUd. or threaten ; Matt. viii. 26 ; Luke iv. 41 ; Barh. 53, 10; ^ ^\^ to mock at ; Matt. xx.l9 ; xxvii. 31; ^ *£Uk) to laugh at ; Acts ii. 13 ; b) verbs that denote acknowledging^ denying, swearing by, calling upon ; e. g. Matt. x. 32, 33. ^jlC^ IjQJ? %ai1o whosoever shall confess me ; Mark i. 5 ; Acts xxiii. 8 ; Eom. x. 9, 10 ; Matt. x. 33. »jlO joaojj ^Sb whosoever shall deny me ; xxvi. 34 ; I Tim. v. viii ; Assem. I. 341, A. 23; 372, 8, 9; Matt. xxvi. 63. \1L loüLa^ ]j1 ]SdqLo 7 adjure thee by the living God ; Mark v. 7 ; I Thess. v.27; *a ]\D to call upon ; Gen. iv. 26. Here also belong ; c) some verbs which denote a doing something for or against some one ; e. g. *0 r^^^ «-i^jf and %^CLm to prove against some one ; Acts xxiv. 27 ; xxv. 9 ; Eom. ix. 17 ; 1 Tim. i. 16; *Q >01fiD (also with ^\l) to testify against ; Dent. xxxi. 7 28. Of verbs of motion, here belong ; d) *a \\2i to encoun- ter ; Luke viii. 27 ; xxii. 10 ; and ^d |21 to come with (i. e. bring) something ; Psalms Ixvi. 13. Rem. — Here also belongs «Ä 1A« to drinJc from ; Gen. xliv. 5. ^;iD OUD 1A»J |cQO the cup from which my Lord drinks. Some times vO denotes a ^ar^ of the object ; e.g. H Sam. xxiii. 10. yi A^Vty^«^ JDJ>* Äß 7wac?e an overthrow among the Philistines ; and here are to be placed *0 ,£l1 and ^^iül to labor at something; I Kings ix. 23. 2. The following verbs are construed with ^ as a sign of the dative; a) \h.os>Q o^ giving, permitting, commending; e. g. John xiv.27. .onS t^l *Q^ -^? t^^ ^^ peace - .7 -x *^7 gfüe / fo you ; Matt, viii.21,31. ^ - %aJi^ *£Cxa| ;?em?^ we — us; Mark V. 13; Luke viii. 32 ; Acts xx. 32. ^^^ 198 VEKBS WITH PREPOSITIONS. \p »» %%7 *- loL^P • Qol^ p1 / commend you to God ; I Peter iv. 19 ; h) those of pleasing and displeasing ; e. g. John viii. 29. 01^ ;£!»> ^r^ that which pleases him ; Kom. xv. 2, 8 ; Heb. xiii. 16 ; or c ) those that denote likeness^ similarity; e.g. Luke xiii. 18. loiJ^j lZonNV> USoj ]l2^ to what is the Kingdom of God like ? verses 9, 20 ; Heb. ii. 17 ; Barli. 137, 12. aC^ AjI loi thou art like him. Rem. — Here also belong impersonal phrases, such as ^ |J0 it it fitting for^ and ^ Aa| equivalent to to have ; e. g. Matt. iii. 9 ; Luke xvi. 28,29 ; John x. 16. (with the accusative of the object in relation to ^^s^v, II John 9. OlS AjiVl«^© t^P© iJoi ouTof xal loi!^ ^ ]J'*2)f fearest thou not Godl John ix.22; Barh. 94,9; Kom. ii.3. *£)0;i2 Aj]? JOI-S^J OUaj ^Sd that thou shalt escape the judgment of God; I Cor. vi. 18 ; x. 14 ; Barh. 170, 4 ; Matt. x. 17. oioijlj \m\ \\n ^ beware of men ; xvi. 6, 12 ; Luke xii. 15; xx. 46 ; John xvii. 15. ^ajlO ^ ^ojf «^Z? that thou shouldst keep them from evil ; 1 Peter ii. 11. öiL^j^yO Jk5 dO'^l] Vrs^} abstain from lusts of the flesh ; Acts xv. 29 ; I Pet. iv.l. |0l4>^ ^io 01-^ *.*. N« he caasethfrom sin; Barh. 102,9; K C ^ '^ 4s, "A 7 Assem. I. 42, 8; II Thess. iii. 3. |r-^ ^So ^oaoiQAJ he VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS. 199 tvill keep you from evil ; b) those of filling up, lacking, and failing ; Luke xv. 16. ]^0^ ^ OlfiDp fisüiül to fill his belli/ unth husks ; Barli. 69,1 ; I Tim. vi. 10. fZoiSOiOl ^ Q2L4 they came short of the faith ; II Tim. ii. 18 ; c) those of asking, beseeching; John iv. 31. OUiD 0001 ^^ iVO they besought him ; verse 40; I Peter ii, 11. Rem. — ^SO also expresses the Latin proe ; e. g. ^lo A^iO to die before ; or per^ with ^\1 and »oNm, John x. 1, 2. 4. With ^J^ are construed verbs, which, in Enghsh, may be followed by about, concerning, viz. ; a ) some which ex- press an affection of the mind; e.g. Matt.xv.22. ol^ Xlm9A| be merciful to me ; xvii. 15 ; Eom. ix. 15 ; xi. 82 ; Matt. vi. 28. ^oAjf ^g^t ' jliD j»Qa^ \iA why take ye thought for raiment ; Luke xii. 26. ^ Ut J to be anxious ; Matt.v.22. ^ ^amoZf to rejoice over ; Eev. xviii.20, ^ po to weep over; Lukexxiii.27,28. ^ yS^lX to take counsel concern- ing ; Matt. xxvi. 4; b) those which denote power or authori- ty over something ; e. g. Luke xix. 14. poi ^^iNs «^^SüJ> that this person should rule over us ; Eom. vi. 14 ; vii, 1 ; Barh. 40, 6 ; Matt, xxiii. 85. ,Qn^!Ll ]l]l shall come upon you ; Luke xxi. 84 ; John xviii. 4 ; Luke i i' . laOloSl AllLaj VaJImJ fear fell upon him ; c ) those which denote a do{7ig for or against, or an occupation with some- thing; e. g. Acts vii. 58. ^OloSl Ojoicoj ^^SJ{ those ivho testified agaimt him ; Matt. xxvi. 62 ; John i. 8. "^ ?aimjj II01OÜ that he might bear witness of the light ; ^ iii. 26 ; v. 81. ^SS^'i too,ccuse; John viii. 46 ; ^ ^^ to ?^n7e of concerning, John i. 46 ; v. 46 ; Acts xxi^, ^ 'M and 200 VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS. WsD to speak of^ about ; John i. 22, 30; xiii. 22; vii. 13 ; d ) verbs of covering, protecting, or burdening ; e. g. Matt, xvii. 5. ,00U.^ Aj^I fZ'^olJ Jill a bright cloud covered <Äe77i ; Luke i. 35. «iniNs _^ U-^^? cn\i*> the power of the Most High shall cover thee ; ^\l ^4^ and ImD have the same signification ; Jer. xviii. 23 ; II Sam. xiii. 25. ^»jlSi \o\i '^y so that we shall not burden thee. And finally ; c) several verbs that denote a charge, command or petition ; e. g. ^^ J^Si to charge one ; II Chron. xxxvi. 23 ; ^i^ %QÄD to prescribe for one ; II Kings xxii. 13. ^^ \i^ to pray for : John xvii. 9. ^^ ^[» to ask after ; Assem. I. 50, 6. Rem. — Here also belong phrases compounded with nouns derived from these verbs ; e. g. I Peter v. 7. louL ^i^ O^ tOoAa» cast your cares upon the Lord ; Barh. VV, 5. O^iQl ]«^Vvr> V^ |ZoN » fc^ they took care for the King ; Isa. i. 14. «jlLi 0001 fZ;n i\ they are a burden to me ; Job vii. 20. 5. With AxD , *i i 1*^ and ALiä between, are construed verbs which denote dividing, separating, distinguishing ; e.g. Gen. i.4. po«»A I^OICU AjlO— .^ja he separated be- tween light and darkness ; Kuth i. 17. La^ ^ ^ > and \u* to see, to perceive a difference between ; II Sam. xix. 35 ; Mai. lii. 18. 6. With iAi after, are joined verbs which signify to go (equivalent to to follow ) ; e. g. Matt. iv. 25. OIjAo rK\\ they followed him; xii. 15; Mark x. 32; Matt. iv. 19. uSbi^ ol follow after me ; xix. 2 ; John viii. 12 ; i'Ao ^^5^^ I Tim. vi. 1 1 ; II Tim. ii. 22. PASSIVES AND THEIR CONSTRUCTION. 201 Rem. — More in accordance with the Hebrew idiom we find fAo with verbs signifying to put away, destroy : e. g. I Kings xiv. 10 ; xxi. 21. General Remarks. To seern^ to appear^ are expressed, as in Hebrew, by til iSn in the relation of genitive or with the suffix be longing to the person ; e. g. Gren. xix. 1 4. * % 1 i\n looi «uOIOjAm he seemed to his sons-in-law; II Sam. x, 3. y.i.K'^ (he) seems to thee. When rendered more definite by the adjectives good or had^ they are expressed either by ^ *^M and ;>'^» , or »»liZ] without til i\n ; e. g. Acts vi. 5 ; Kom. xv. 2. .S ; Gen. xxi. 11 ; Matt. xxi. 15 ; or in connection with «./iiSn ; e. g. Ephr. I. 240,F. "jooi \.x2i» \a*^ ' '^ -^*^ i-kS luould this seem good to God f In the trans- lation of the New Testament, SoxsX is usually expressed by ^VvmASO; e. g. Matt. xvii. 25; xviii. 12; xxi. 28; xxii.17: Luke X. 36. To suffer^ permit^ are expressed either by , Of?) to com- mand^ or j^ to cause (without the copula^ following) ; e g. Barh. 72, 12 ; or they are expressed in such a manner that the thing to be done is implied in the imperative itself ; Barh. 27, 2; 114, 14. III. Passives and their Construction. 1. The active cause in passives is usually expressed by ^; e.g. Matt. vi. 16. ]aliVo^ ^op^Aj? that they may he seen hy men ; Luke viii. 29. OlS locn \^ he was caught by 202 VERBS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. Mm; Assem. 1. 89,14, and 16. flo oiS ^iSoA»! there was a voice heard by him ; Barh. 152, 11. Rem. — Yet we also frequently find ^SsD, Matt. iii. 14. «^1^| Vr>v 7^ that I should be baptized of thee ; v. 13 ; xx. 23. 2. Passives whose actives govern a double accusa- tive, sometimes retain one of them ; e. g. Luke i. 41. ^^ao> 1^0) AJVvn /^ she was filled loith the Holy Ghost ; ii. 40 ; Barh. 32, 14. Uq^ .ain\> I'r^yt ^ ^'^^ ^^^ ^^ cZac^ m ^?/ssws ; 90, 14 ; 108, 6 ; 223, 15; Assem. I. 86, A. 27, 28. 3. When passives, especially in verbs relating to the mind, have an active signification, they are joined with the accusative ; e.g. I Thess. i. 2. tZoj^^ ^oaJik ^pjAlD tu« remember you in our prayers ; «na»iZ] to ^Am/^, Eom. ii. 3 ; XV. 5 ; ^joA»1 to recognize^ Acts xix. 15 ; ^liA»] to obey^ Eph. vi. 1 ; Col. iii. 22 ; ^J^^ to wish, I Tim. vi. 10. Rem. — Here also belong such passives as 99Q..Z| to chew the cud, Lev. xi. 3,5 ; and hence also may be explained why participles passive of the Fe. (§ 64. 5) take the accusative of the object. 4. Passives have also frequently a reflective signification (§21, 2; §22. 2 ; §24.2; §58. A. a) ; e. g. John viii. 6. .OlyiZj ta^t^ ^Qju Jesus bowed hiinself down ; verse 8 ; Mark i. 7 ; I Tim. v. 14. ^y^o?P ^^J^? ^«»-!Laf those who are young shall marry ; iv. 13; ^ojlajZ] to wax strong^ Acts xix. 16 ; xxiii. 11 ; »»«^Zl to hide, John viii. 59 ; *aAsZj to turn around^ Matt. ix. 22., etc. Rem. — Many neuters take a passive signification ; e. g. t-^ to MODE OF EXPKESSING GEEEK COMPOSITES. 203 err^ Luke xxi. 8. fCIl^Z ]iQ^ ^^ «rXaviiäijTS ; ^Cl«* to burn^ 9QlLD ^^i,ni xa/ ^^*^ ava/3aivo;jLSv ; viii. 1. AmJ ^ xaraßävTi ; iii. 2. QQoZ ixsravosTrs ; xvi. 5. QL^ iirsXa^ovro ; or by verbs which ; b ) without respect to the Greek preposition, answer to the simple Greek verb ; e. g. Matt. xi. 5. ^W oL^aßXintoxxii ; Acts xxiii. 33. Q20U ava^dvra^ ; Rom. 14. 9. (o-m avs^iiö'sv; Luke xv. 24, 32 ; x.31,32. ;£il ävTi-rrap^Xäsv ; Acts xxvi. 5. ^jul^ «n'po^'jvwfl'xovrsj ; Rom. XV. 4. ilDAoZI <:r'pos^pa97i. 2. By verbs ; a ) with a preposition answering to the Greek ; 6.g. ^JjaOQ^ = avT< ; Luke xiii.l7. OlSoOoS OOOI ^ i V> > n > 91 avTjxsi'jxsvoi auTW ; Acts vi.lO ; Rom.xiii.2. ^^= sVi' andxara; Luke X. 34. ^OIGLil diii ^^H^Zl xa< i] aurou ; Matt. xxvi.62. - - ' ^^ .^mmVn xaTafiaprupoutf/v tfou ; ^aL = ö'uv ; Rom, 204 PECÜLIAKITIES OF VERBS. * 7 « IS I 9 vi.8. GlLOl (mJ Cu^Tjfl'ofjisv aurw, Heb. iv. 15 ; II Tim. i. 8. y)rO -= 'n'po ; Acts vii. 40. ^■>V)yO ^QJ^^p) oJ' <;rpo'7rop£ufl'ov9 ^SD tAof ava^svvyjö'aff ^/xa^, Heb. vi. 6. ^Oi^ ^ = <7rpo , II Cor. xiii. 2 ; ZjSoV^CLirO ^ fposi^rixa. , Rom. i. 2 ; Col. i. 5. 3. By another verb representing the preposition, which usually stands first, without any connective particle, in the same tense, number, and gender with the finite verb ; e. g. ^^ ( to come be- fore ) = "TTpo , Mark xiii. 23. L'^\ t^^O irposiprjxa, Acts vii. 52; Rom. iii. 9 ; xi. 35. This verb sometimes follows ; e. g. John xx. 4. 4. If the composite is formed from a noun or adjective and a verb, it is usually resolved into its components ; e. g. Mark iv. 20. p (£) ^jlIDGIa xap<7ro(popoua'iv ; iii. 4. J^^L^J Of «^^9 ^^^-^^^^ ayaäo'Tr'ojVa« ->; xaxo-TToj^rfai ; Matt. xix. 18. Z09GIQO ^GlfioZ |J I^QA ou 4'SU(Jo|aap ( = 'iD — o^' )> e. g. John iv. 1 7. ]] k^ . »V Aa^j •^^'r^l Jaä* thou hast rightly said, I have no husband; verse 53; ii. 17; vi. 31 ; Barh. 51,11. AlSoij jk>1' p as he said; I {he) have heard; 135,10 ; 69,7.. \l\ looi 1] ]<^i" A ]^Vvr> % "Jsa* -Jij 001 he swore, he would (I will) be no King of the heathen; 223, 11, 12. Rem.— Sometimes > is wanting at the beginning of the direct discourse (especially before 61 ) ; e.g. Barh. 131, 11, 12 ; 374, 13 ;: 443, 8 ; more frequently '^V ; e. g. Barh. 106,3 ; 183,9 ; 219,5 ;, 206 ELLIPSIS, ZEUGMA, ETC. 243, 10 ; 486, 5 ; 543, 19 ; 596, 11. Compare Assem. I. 479, A. 24, with 480, 1. The indirect discourse also occurs; e. g. Barh. 79, 19. I^lr^ ^OOlüi laaco flj Oli^ O'^V^Aey said to him, the tribute is not sufficient for thee ; 94, 1 — 3 ; 97, 1. Sometimes the direct discourse passes over into the indirect ; e. g. 276, 8 — 10 and vice versa ; 166, 19, 20 ; 513, 5, 6. C. Ellipsis — Zeugma — Paronomasia, and Puns. 1. When a verb has previously been used in the protasis, it is usually omitted in the apodosis, where it would proper- ly be repeated ; e. g. Matt.i.22. lEoAjj Zooij (tC^ ^j IjOl hut what has happened {has happened) that it might be fulfil- led; xxi. 4; John xx. 31 ; Rom. v. 20 ; I Cor. ix. 25. *nnmi> ^j^01>9 ^a^CJI those who run (run) that they may obtain ; II Cor. v. 13 ; Heb. vii. 19 ; viii. 3 ; I Peter iv. 11; I John iii. 6. Sometimes the verb is to be supplied from the context ; Matt. 27,25. ^^iNs OlLoj his blood {come) upon us; Acts XX1V.6. ^fiDoSüiO» ^| as %t {is written ) in our law. Rem. — The ellipsis must be considered as a pecuharity of the Sy- riac language, where the Philoxenian translation, omitting the > in the apodosis, adheres strictly to the Greek words ; e. g. Matt i. 22. ZoOl oC^ ^> IjOl rouro 8s oXov yiyovsv ; John xx. 31. Con- 'ierning the omission of ;Ld| see B. Rem. above ; and concerning the elliptical use of fOOl see A. Rem. 2. Sometimes a verb, by its signification, can belong to only one of two connected nouns {Zeugma), so that to the other noun another verb must be mentally supplied; USE OF THE KOUN IN GENERAL. 207 e. g. Job IV. 10. -'rLiZf U*o _ llilj IASdou the roaring of the lion {is stilled) and the teeth are broken ; x. 12. 8. Paronomasia and puns occur but rarely in Syriac. The former is a mere imitation of the Hebrew original in Ps. xl. 3. ^Oy*Jo lU^ ^01^? ( rilijT^] tr^T\ ^55^T ) that many see it and r^'oice. Puns occur mostly in names where the language does not require any such alteration to be assumed ; e.g. Gen. xlix. 8. ,0>qj ^ Ijooil Judah {thy brethren) shall praise thee, verses 16, 19. CHAPTER THIRD. The Noun. § 69. Use of the Noun in General, 1. Abstract nouns not unfrequently in Syriac take the place of adjectives and then they stand in the relation of genitive to the noun, with ? ; e. g. Matt. iii. 11. l«)aO) 'UjO;^ with the Holy Ghost; John xv.l. 1>^#> l^yt the true vine ; I Cor. xv. 44. Especially does this union, as in Hebrew, occur with adjectives which denote the material or substance of which a thing is composed ; e. g. John ii. 6. ]ki\^} UVil stone water-pots ; Heb. ix. 4. ioai>> ]^ino 208 USE OF THE NOUN IN GENERAL. a golden box ; II Cor. x. 4 ; II Tim. ii. 20 ; Barh. 11, 7, 8 ; 20, 10 ; 88, 2 ; 172, 8 ; 228, 7. l>0iajj fjoSoL a fiery pillar. Rem. — Adjectives of material, however, do occur ; e.g. Barh. 59,4. I^AjlmJ ];.A^fiD| a brazen celestial sphere ; and in the same con- struction adjectives of quality with J prefixed, used for substantives ; e.g. Michael. Chr. 85. f'^^? lA^Ä week of the white (clothes). Abstract nouns with > in connection with a pronoun, supply the place of the predicate ; e. g. Rom. vii. 14. pf ;ffio> ^j pf but I am carnal ; or with a preposition prefixed they supply the place of an adjective to which a noun is to be supplied ; e. g. Heb. ii. 17. fCTlIl^r^ in divine ( things) ; Luke viii. 49. ^iD %mS\ AjlOj one of the household ; even with sufiixes, «jiGIO^Is) ^aijxovj^ofxsvoj. Some abstract nouns, in the relation of genitive with J following, precede as nomen regens ; e. g. Barh. 170, 20. ^Aij Uvi^iöO '^^(^'»'y writings ; 172, 4 ; 178, 5 ; 195,16. \^\M^ |imia> in the remaining fortresses ; 198,13. Here also belongs ^oÄ according to § 55. B. 2. Rem. 2. Especially are adjectives or concrete substantives de- noting possession^ custom^ similarity^ etc., expressed bj way of circumlocution, by means of the nouns '^ eon ; 2jQ daughter ; \il^ and f;iO hrd^ master ; »Ä> and *muj prince^ ruler ; and Aaä house. In respect to the use of these nouns it is to be observed ; 7 a) \Ci designates ; a) Gentile names^ inhabitants^ etc. e. g. Tit. i. 12. 14-0 Min Cretans; Barh. 167,1 ; Acts xxi. 12; _P «^7 ..7 m^ X 7»» |jZ] ^aXO^ oi hröiim ; Barh. 80, 17. lAjLfc^ «>1Q citizens] 91, 2 ; ß) the idea of race^ species^ kindred ; e.g. Kom. xi.l4. l^fiQO ;ä a kinsman ; Deut. xxiii.2 ; I Cor. vii.22. |>ps» ;Q USE OF THE NOUN IN GENERAL 209 a freeman ; John xviii. 85. |SQ1 ^xia heathen ; Michael. Chr. 5. .min>>01 jo a heretic ; Assem. 11.248. ^^V^*^ \^ a courtier ; Kev. ii. 14, 20. (Here also belongs 1«JJQ) ; 7) participation^ likeness^ {= tfOv ÖfAo^) ; e. g. Eph. iii. 6. fZoZ'^ >i,lO (fuyxX^ipovofxo» ; I Thess. ii. 14 ; Acts xviii. 3 ; xix. 24. '|ZqiV)o1 'r^ ojaoTs^vo? ; Dan. i. 10. ]l» jo con- temporaries ; Phil. iv. 3 ; Gral. i. 14 ; ^) locality, situation, and other circumstances ; e.g. Isa. xxyi. 1. lid» ;i a moa^; Psalms cxxxii. 2. IjO» ;q a nec^ chain. And finally; s ) the adverbial phrase 01 Al« ;^ forthwith, immediately ; Matt. xiii. 5, 20 ; John v. 9 ; xiii. 30 ; Acts x. 33 ; xxi. 32. h) Z;i plur. Aia forms ; a) rarely abstracts; e.g. ]a>] A^ circumcision; more frequently concretes in the feminine; e. g. I Mace. xi. 7. IJ^m i;0 one horn free ; or it denotes; /3) the product of anything ; e. g. lAl^^ ^r^ grapes*, lASOa 2;^ (/wm 071 sea-iueed ; and tropically Jj£5 2;^ voice ; Kom. X. 16, 18 ; Gal. iv. 20 ; and in the plural, Acts xii. 22 ; y) implements, clothing, lAl£^ L\^ naphin ; ]> ^ 2jjD nn^ ; (^ descendants, nations, etc. ; e. g. Luke xiii. 1 6. iOOl'pQl L\^ the Hebrews ; Matt. xxi. 5. ^CUOl^ 2*^ Jeru- salem, or its inhabitants. c) ^Mq denotes ; «) mostly concretes ; e. g. Rom. xi. 34. ]^V0> ^^AO counselor ; Matt. v. 25 ; xiii. 28, 39 ; II Chron. xiv. 5. lLDaM2 ^Üq neighbor ; ^) sometimes nations ; e. g. floSoSo ^i^ an Ethiopian. In like manner ; c?) V^VO Luke vii. 41. lioJ IjiD (ZeZ^tor ; Ephr. IL 360, C ; e) *o J forms ; a) principally concretes of masculine offices 210 GENDER OF NO [JMS. e. g. II Sam. xviii. 1. \zl^ %£ij a chiliarch ; Luke xvi. 1. fAjJD %Q> o/xovojao? ; Heb. iv. 14. | ,10QD »jDj a^'xis^s\>g ; I Pet. V. 4 ; Luke xix. 2 ; /3) abstracts ; e. g. Luke xvi. 2. fZoAjk^;) As) o/xovo/xiot. In like maimer ; /) ^mjA ; a) concretes of masculine offices; e.g. Luke viii. 41. |A»aio ola) dtpxitfuva/w/oj ; John ii. 8, 9 ; Acts ii. 29 ; I Thess. iv. 16 ; ß) more rarely abstracts ; e. g. Matt, xxiii. 6. |q2qLd «JLa> -rpwToxaäs^pj'a. Sometimes it denotes ; y) the extremity of a thing ; e. g. laSoo^flo"! ^m^h orifice of the stomach ; M-»^ ^«lij aperture of the mouth» Finally ; ^) AjlO denotes; a) the ^Zace ot receptacle^ in which a thing is found or kept; e. g. Acts. xii. 17. X^^\ A*^ prison; Matt xi v. 2. lAllO Ajä grave; Acts xvii. 19. \LkJ LäS^ judgment hall ; Luke xix. 29. lA*i Aaä oZ^^;e ^ar- (ien ; Heb. ix. 4. fV)fno AaQ censer (literally, house of in- cense); II Tim. iv. 13 ; ß) countries^ cities^ etc. ; e.g. Assem. I. 169,B.7, UioooiJ Aa.Q the Roman dominions; Michael. Chr. 10. UfloiÄ Läh Persia. Rem. — Here, however, do not belong ^9013 A^^ Mesopotamiay and |la.l AjlS forehead, where Aa.2 signifies between. More rarely we find similar compositions with *Si\ father, and ^1 wo^A- er. Of the latter only occur yMjS^ jiol /Äe croi^fw of the head, and (a1D9 PD| hydravMcs. The Syriac also, though more rarely than the Hebrew, uses the names of countries and cities for nations and X I ^7 inhabitants ; e. g. Barh. 150, 12. %\r\t\Si\ Africans ; 248, 6. Aa;..1Z Tagritians. § 70. Gender of Nouns. 1. Nouns which in the plural take the termination of GENDER OF NOUNS. 211 another gender (§ 44. Kern. 2 and 3), retain the gender of the singular, and in this case respect is rarely had to the termination. Here belong ; a ) masculines with a femi- nine termination in the plural ; e. g. Matt. xii. 43. •OOIO AaJ^ m-^? fZojZf place m which there is no water; I Cor. X. 9. (locLm ^QJ| OpSOf the serpents destroyed them; ]2qS1L ( from BU) Luke ii. 13 ; fASooi ( from fcodi ) Matt, xxviii. 20; '{lo^ (from ]££) Luke xxi. 34; VZoi'au (from 1>0U) Matt. vii. 25, 26., etc. ; h) feminines with a masculine termination ; e. g. John xi. 35. ^2f ^QA^> «.aOIQILO) *a001 fears came «nto ^/le eyes of Jesus ; i^ (from \h^) Matt. xiii. 30; Pio (from l^li) xxiv.35; liSo (from IAiSd) x. 30 ; ^jJ^ (from Xtlm) Acts xxiv. 17 ; i^ i S * (from (Ai^) xix. 84., etc. 2. When the abstract stands for the concreto, or when the noun takes another than its proper signification, the gender in both cases, is regulated by the sense. Concern- ing the former of these cases, compare § 80. B ; to the lat- ter belongs IZiSV) Xoyos^ Christ; e. g. John i. 1 — 4. IALLo looi •uOIoAjiI it was the word; verse 14 ; or ]xm Icu^ (literally, beast of tooth) == avri-x^pKfTos^ Rev. xiii. 1 ; xvi. 2,13; xvii. 7, 8. Q^> a myriad {of onen) ; Acts xxi. 20 ; Barh. 65, 9, 10 ; 334, 6 ; 395, 19. UsJJ, in the plural, = inhabi- tants; Barh. 159, 10; 236, 8 ; 548, 20., etc. 4 3. In Syriac the neuter of nouns, as of verbs, is desig- nated by the feminine ( § 66. 2 ) ; e. g. Rom. vii. 18. fA£l4 aya^ov, lAju^ xaxov ; in the plural, Assem. I. 218. 212 NUMBER. B. 11. IIZj-mO lAcLiAllL r> Aoft] tfiey despwed the old and the new. § 71. Number. 1. Some nouns, particularly those which denote cohesive materials (liquids, metals and the like), form a plural only when they may be conceived of as consisting of several parts ; e. g. (Z;.LflO barley^ iplur. |,1I3D barley-corns; in like manner \^ from fA^^ ivheat ; Matt. iii. 12 ; John vi. 13 ; I Cor. XV. 37 ; and |m i o timber ; I Cor. iii. 12. 2. Some nouns singular have a plural signification {col- lectives § 44. Kem. 7), and then they take Bibui § 6. 2. As such they are joined either with the plural ; e. g. John iv. 30. (ajI qqsjo there came out people ; or with the singu- lar ; e. g. John x. 3. 01^ jlSO» 111 ^^e 5Äeep hear his voice ; verses 4 — 8. Rem. — 1. As collective plural forms, the following sometimes occur, l(v^O locust ; Michael. Chr. 63,11 ; 79, 6. l^liD (proper- ly ^ari) remainder^ members ; 102, 5, 8. Rem. — 2. As pluralis excellentice, the Syriac has, merely by im- itation of the Hebrew ^aJj| or t-iJOj| = "i^li^ , Michael. Chr. 30. ]j1 |SQa •jUO)!:^ / swore by the Lord. § 72. Apposition and Duplication of Nouns. 1. A noun in apposition, usually includes a more accu- rate definition or explanation of the previous noun, as for APPOSITION AND DUPLICATION. 213 example in the names of cities , lA^'^D, lAa>^ fAu^, Assem. I. 349, 3. lAo> lAu^ ]>^0>fcif Aniwch, a great city. The noiin in apposition takes the number and case of its subject ; e. g. Matt x. 3. ]mnV) ^ASo Matthew the Pub- lican ; Barh. 32, 7. ]iSnn> \h^ ^^uijj IpAa the image of Baal {of a) god of the Babylonians ; 11, 8 ; 12, 2. 1* 1^^^ «^?] I n\V> ^io /row Melchisedech {from the) Ca- naanite. Rem. — Sometimes the noun m apposition stands before the principal noun; e. g. Barh. 39, 11. «oLiO*,^ V^^Ajf .nmi he took for wife Roxane ; so too with nouns of weighty measure^ 7 • .XI*. ^'il' J and time, m the genitive ; e. g. Rev. vi. 6. «fiOOniinO |i^^^ I r^SO> Mree measures (of) barley. 2. The duplication of the noun denotes ; a) a great num- ber or quantity ; e. g. Ephr. III. 154. -jJQJ ISOtA CHQ Aa| ^^QJ there are many fish in the sea ; b) the distributive sense expressed in English by each, by ; e. g. Matt. xx. 9, 10. p-»j p-i> a penny each ; Barh. 85, 6. ^^laO ^^mO % heaps ; 424, 10 ; 165, 19. Especially in respect to numbers ; e. g. Mark vi. 7. ^jZ ^>Z ^it^o eac^ ; verse 40. ]]Sd ]]Sd a hundred each ; II Cor. xi. 24 ; c) it forms a circumlocution for a??, every (§ 58. B. 2) ; e. g. Matt. xxiv. 7. ]00> loO^O xam to-ttou^ ; Tit. i. 5. ILjSD ]jLijiü*D xttTtt -roXiv ; «f ) a diversity, variety ; e. g. Mark ii. 17. ■,^.#^ ,^>A various diseases ; John v. 4 ; Acts x. 46. ivT AV^ with different tongues ; xxi. 34 ; ^xxy. 19 ; Assem. 1. 13, A. 6. v. E. io^D y>>D ^? l]Sß]S^ discourses having various contents ; 191, A. 7. v. E ; 280. 214 THE EMPHATIC STATE. B. 13. V. E ; e ) a strengthening of the sense (§ 77. B. b) ; e.g. John vi. 7. ^^wxlio ^^So very Utile ; II Thess. iiL6. § 73. The Emphatic »State. 1. The Emphatic State expresses the noun with the article with less definiteness, from the fact, that in many nouns this form also denotes the absolute state (§ 45. 1), which is no longer in use ; e. g. Matt. x. 9. Sometimes also it supplies the place of the indefinite article ; e. g. John iv. 7. ^;iQo ^iD IZAjI LL] there came a woman of jSa» maria ; ix. 1 ; Acts vii. 37 ; xi. 24 ; even with r** masc. ]y** fem. appended ; e. g. Luke xix. 12. ^»^ Ir^vt a man. ^ Rem. — From this should perhaps be distinguished the cases in 7 which pM is used numerically ; e. g. Eph. iv. 6. 2. Hence to avoid any ambiguity ooi is also sometimes joined with the emphatic state in order to designate it as such. It stands either before the noun ; e. g. Matt. ix. 33. iM'rJ^ OOI mSD the dumb spahe ; John xviii. 16 ; or fol- lows it ; e. g. John v. 9. 001 V^.. No^mZJ the man became whole. Rem. — In the first case the absolute state usually occurs, when > follows 001 ; e. g. Luke xxii. 27. %aSüaSD9 001 the servant. 3. Hence also the emphatic state with ? following is used in the relation of genitive ; e. g. Eev. xviii. 2. THE CONSTRUCT STATE AND THE GENITIVE. 215 YlVjli \jLoy V5yi>> VZio^jo laljj ]1'^ a habitation of devils and a hold of all unclean spirits. § 74. UTie Construct State and the Genitive. 1, In the Sjriac also the Construct state serves to denote the relation of genitive, more frequently, however, in the plural of the masculine and the singular of the feminine, where it can at once be recognized by its special form ; e.g. Matt. xi. 12. ^IjaOi JioOi ^ since the days of John ; xiu. 48. |Sq_ji »^,äco the shores of the sea ; Acts xxiv. 16 ; Assem. I. 2, B. 1. Vr**o ^AlLZ Al» ^cti that is the thirty- first year ; 37, 3, 4. jjdo'hlI^ Al^SßQ in the midst of the clerus ; 40, 4. .OOlioilaiai ^0*^*^0 their deficient faith^ literally, the deficiency of their faith. Rem. — Yet the masculine singular of the noun occurs also before the genitive in the construct state ; e. g. Matt. x. 41. fi*^l V)iiO in the name of the Prophet ; xiii. 2. pii \Zk£^ \^ on the shore of the sea ; verse 50. In addition to the nouns which supply the place of adjectives ( § 69. 2 ) it also occurs in Q.. midstj and ^.^ hand, etc. ; e.g. Matt. xiii. 1 ; Gal. iii. 19 ; Barh. 255. 11. ^ji^|j£) ^ir^ in the interior of the palace. Here belongs moreover the use of the construct state in adjectives and participles (§ 64. 1. B), followed by the noun with a preposition or particle belonging to both, by which is denoted either the genitive relation ; e. g. Luke i. 28. IaIO D^a\^ blessed of (among) women. ; II Tim. iii. 3. lÄ.."5ik . /<^vLvr> slaves of passion ; I Tim. i. 10. • ft 9 " y ft ' "7 * |AVr>r>Vf> \\^ *-»,jQl violator of an oath ; or a more accurate 216 THE CONSTKÜCT STATE AND THE GENITIVE. definition of the adjective or participle ; e. g. Luke i. Y, 18. .OOiASdQaO %a^k..|iX> far advanced in their years ; Rev. xiv. 4. \lj\ ,-Sß ' ^ ■> *^1 redeemed from the earth ; Acts, xxiii. 23. 2. Far more usual is ; a) the connection of the emphatic state as nomen regens^ with a following > before the genitive ; e. g. Matt. X. 5. \Zil*^y paiola into the way of ike Gentiles ; verse 15. 1j^>> ]Sdcuä at the day of Judgment ; verse 42; xii. 42. "jjiHiZj lA^Vvn the queen of the south ; xiii. 11, 45 ; xxiii. 85 ; xxiv. 3 ; John viii. 47. loilLj IIld the word of God ; or h) with a pleonastic suffix referring to the genitive following, ( § 55. B. 2 ) ; e. g. Matt. xii. 8. ]A£äÄ> 6\'^ Lord of the Sabhath ; xi.2. ]»iaV)> ^010,^1 the work of the Messiah ; xii. 40. ll)|j OUijiÄ in the heart of the earth. Rem. — Rarely, and chiefly in foreign words, > stands after the construct state before the genitive ; e. g. Matt. xiii. 22. >Zq19 - '^^(^ the deceitfulness of riches ; John x. 23. tOV>i\»? lofcml the porch of Solomon. But it is commonly used when one or more words are interposed between the nomen regens and the genitive ; e.g. Barh. 421.13,20. ^QAsSol) OCT 1jZ| the region^ that is of Jerusalem ; or when several gen- itives follow each other ; e. g. Assem. I. 83, B. 21. ^a|jlQ£d1J I'rliJjij ]L.1>Q£D> loilL' V^ Lm^J Vh| the convetit of the Mother of God, of the Syrians in the Scythian desert ; Barh. 81, 2. The nomen regens is sometimes wanting, and the genitive is then to be distinguished by > ; e. g. Rom. xiv. 8. 7 7 . 1 »t tr^> the Lords are we ; Matt. xxii. 21. Sometimes > is wanting when the noun forms an apposition with a preceding genitive ; e. g. Matt. xii. 39. |>^1 ^Q-i> CTZ| the sign of Jonah the prophet. > stands before proper nouns, especially the names THE CONSTRUCT STATE AND THE GENITIVE. 217 of countries and cities, when they thereby acquire a more de definite designation ; e. g. Matt. ii. 1, 6. ]>oaU9 ^QmJL Lm^ Bethlehem in Judea. In some instances, especially in the super- scriptions of some Psalms ; e. g. Ps. iv, v, vi, ^ (^ auctoris) sup- plies the place of >; very rarely elsewhere ; e.g. Barh. 17, 4. Mh^ ^1D)Q2) the deliverance of the (i.e. 5y the) Lord ; Assera. T. 340, A. 25, 26. So too with ^So, when origin or descent is indi- cated ; e.g. Barh. 3*72, 16. ]l^wJ^,^ ^ 1^^ ^-^^^"^ -^rni he took fifty cities of the Franks ; or when there is indicated a choice or selection from several ; e.g. 271, 1. ^0X0 ^f^ ^Sd r*^ one of his slaves ; 270,18. [aDjoL ^LD \\jk.y^ many of the Turks. 3. The genitive is sometimes to be understood objectively; e.g. Markxi. 22. loilLj lAoiSOiOl faith of{\, e. in) God ; Jobn ii. 17. »^A.i^j OIU^ the zeal of (i. Q.for) thine house; Up X 7 -« »I »■■V)? 01,£XLm i/i«; reproach of Christ (i.e. iAa^ attached to hirn). Rem. — Other turns of expression imitating the Hebrew are Isa. xvii. 2. ;jh.lO;^> m>C10 Ci7ie5 o/" (a6ow<) ^roer ; Exod.xxii.il. ^;SO> OiASdqSO aw oath of (by) the Lord ; Ez. xxxv. 5. •0C71^> |JqL iniquity of (at) their downfall ; Isa.liv.9., etc. Not unfrequently is this genitive of the object connected with the preposition of the verb, from which the nomen regens is derived ; 7 9 7 ^''«'>' ' e. g. Barh. 53, IS. tr^^? IZqiSOiOI the faith in our Lord ; Assem. 1. 347,20. 4. Sometimes, especially when geographical references are made, tbe genitive occurs (as in English) where apposition would be more strictly correct ; e. g. Acts vii. 40. ^^^^ ll>f ^ from the land of Egypt ; xx. 6 ; Kom. xi. 8 ; Barh. 114, l3. ^i^^? I'^i oiS'^\ the whole mountain* of Lebanon, 218 DESIGNATION AND USE OF THE OTHER CASES. 5. Standing after adjectives, the genitive is often used merely to define them more accurately; e.g. Luke xxiv. 25. (£L^ «J, iH lO yLkl^-i «,>, trf>»i Of /oo^$ and slow of heart ; woo 7 •• 7 _«? Acts vii. 51. PpO <> >an of ye stiff necked ; Cant. ii. 5. ]ASDja9 ZoLi;0 sich for love. Rem. — Sometimes a noun in the genitive takes the place of an adjective; e.g. John, xviii. 10. (1 >V)»> OlJjf ^w n^Ä< ear; xxi. 6 (§54. B.. 2. Rem.) ; and vice versa the nomen regens ; e. g. Luke iv. 25. |A^SO)| «-^vh^D 'jroXkai x^P«' ; John ii. 12. In the first case the Philoxenian translation uses, instead of J, the explana- tory 001 and *ji01, equivalent to that is, namely ; e. g. 01J9| ; IAaJLlIQa wiOl and J is to be understood as a relative, when it follows prepositions with suffixes ; e. g. Assem. I. 30, 17. (£)QO£Qjl£)(> ^OOlid with (them) the bishops. Compare § 55. B. 3. § 75. Designation and Use of the other Oases. 1. The dative and accusative have ^ for their common sign, which may be omitted before the accusative ; e. g. Matt. xvii. 4. ,^ > SSfc lD ASZ ,^iU let us make three tahema- cles ; Barh. 60, 9.yixO| |oj (jLaop he raised a great perse- cution. No difiiculty is thereby occasioned even when the two cases stand together ; e. g. Acts xiii. 21. ^o'lftiL «oai^ «AOL» he gave them Saul ; xx. 32. Rem. With verbs having a double accusative (§ 67. 1. 2) ^ falls away in both cases. The same is also to be recognized in the pre- ceding pleonastic suflSx to the verb (§ 55. B. I) . Usually DESIGNATION AND USE OF THE OTHER CASES. 219 ^ ( = ~in}»< ) stands before the noun in the emphatic state ; e. g. Barh. 14, 9 ; or before proper names, 11, 20. |01 il\ OUO he built Nineveh. For this, in Gen.i. 1 — 3, the Peshito has tuk = H^jj^ (compare Ephr. I. 116, D), which moreover occurs in Eccl. ii. 3 ; iii. lY ; iv. 1 ; viii. 9, 17 ; Cant. iii. 5 ; viii. 4. 2. The accusative is also used adverbially, and tlien de- notes ; a) direction towards a place (§ 67. 1, b) ; e. g. John vii. 14,35; viii.14; xviii.3 ; Barh.58, 18,19; 6) in indicating time it denotes ; a) the question, How long ? e.g. Barh. 7, 5, 6. -aIoQa — xlS)] t;4^ l^^ ^^^ ^^'^^ continued forty days ; 3, 15, 16. '<• 1)Ld ^OIClSl o\^12i they mourned for him a hundred years ; 24, 7, 8 ; 85, 19, 20 ; 195, 6, 7 ; Assem.I. 18, A.] ; ß) When ? Luke i. 59. ]ilV)Z? ^oLL ^oct it came to pass on the eighth day ; Ps. i. 2. f»^^*^ JSqSQji hy day and night ; c) in reference to measure and weight ; Hoio long ? How high ? etc. ; e. g. Barh. 38, 19. looi ^jf ]Sd1' l^uLZ it was three cubits long; 20, 6; 179, 13. — iÄ • ^i£) jj — %oAa Kv^ ^^^ snoiü lay four fingers deep; d) concerning^ in relation to, as to ; e. g. Barh. 37,16. \.^^m ^001 lASOQO he was beautiful as to form ; 17. JQII ]iDQ2)0 y ^^ he had small eyes and a small mouth ; 38, 4; Assem. I. 74, A. 30; 77, A. 22 ; 86, A. 25. Rem. — In indicating time, How old ? is commonly expressed by JO or L*^ with the addition of the years ; e. g. John viii. 57. ><• ^»^<^>> ;«3 fifty years old ; Barh. 3, 20. 3. Derivative nouns also take the accusative instead of the genitive of their verbs, viz. ; a) participial forms; Heb. 220 THE CASE ABSOLUTE. xii. 2. >/rnVr>>m\ \S Q^^ the finisher of OUT faith ; James iv.6 ; i) infinitive forms ; e.g. Kirscli.Chr.136,1. MIo-ä-Sd .rr>>Vrti >^^1^ffn^>r^\ ^^^ conquest of Constantinople, 4. The vocative is distinguishable in part by its connection ; e.g. Matt. xxvi. 39, 42. ]»»^aV) J *juO| m?/ Father ij it he possible ; Rom. viii. 15 ; partly by o], prefixed ; e. g. Rom. ii. 1. laJ'rO o] man ; verse 3 ; I Tim. vi. 11 ; James V. 1. Rem. — The Philoxenian translation imitates in Greek nouns the vocative termination belonging to that language ; e. g. Luke i. 3, and Acts i. 1. ]]laof2 oT w ©so^iXs ; I Tim. vi.20. 5. Finally the ablative is distinguishable by the preposi- tions, *0, ^!sO, ^Qi, etc.. prefixed. Rem. — Time, When ? is frequently expressed in a similar man- ner ; e. g. Gen. viii. 11. yaisDy yr^:^ at eventide ; Prov. vii. 9 ; Assem. I. 37, A. 11. § 76. The Case Absolute. By the case absolute is meant a noun, which, at the be- ginning of a sentence, by itself and without connection with what follows, forms a clause, and is usually to be ex- plained by supplying, as to, concerning^ and the like. Here belong especially ; 1. the Nominative absolute^ which ; a) either forms the subject of the following clause ; e. g. Gen. xxii. 24. «401 «2} I Z,XaO . OiAdo>>0 and his concubine — she also bore ; THE CASE ABSOLUTE. 221 or b) is to be rendered by an oblique case, wHcli a suffix to the noun, in the clause following shows to be ; a) a gen- itive ; e.g. Ephr. I. 242, E, Ol'^moj ]^^<^^ ]ooil p \^] l^t,'^ \0 if there be found on the skin of the body of a man a blemish ; I. 110, D ; Matt. iii. 4 ; or the suffix to the prepo- sition indicates it as ; ^) a dative ; e. g. I Cor. vii. 7. ^Gl!^ ^iD 01^ 1^01.-» IAogIQSo »alSn to each one is given a gift from God ; Acts xv. 21 ; /) an accusative; e. g. Ephr.I. 223, F. ^OUOOI |iSd ^1>* ^^r-» W — \»Q^ ^e know not what has befallen Moses ; (§ 67. 1. c. Rem.) Ps. Ixxiv. 17; tf) an ablative (with a following *Q and ^isO) ; e.g. Heb. x. 1. %1^'i l2£il^j OlO looi Aaf 12^1 lS^ IqdqSüJ in the law is the shadow of the good things to come ; Ephr. I. 287, A. X^\yn\ U^joo Guk) ^onro2 ]]' ^jlO) ^o ;iV>m ^ of anything leavened and of honey ^ bring ye no gift to the Lord. 2. The accusative absolute; e. g. Gen. xlvii. 21. (;r>\ 1^ So .QJf wUü |V>s\o the people led he (literally led he it) from one citg to the other. 3. Oases with prepositions ; e. g. Gen. ii. 17. Olli) ^QofZ U" VAaajdjo 1^^? 1^,^? U^V ^ of the tree of the knowledge of good and evil {of it) shall thou not eat. Rem. — Sometimes, instead of the suffix, the preceding noun absolute is repeated ; e. g. Esth. vi. 7 — 9. — l I'^yiN ^;*^ 1^ »-»OIQJUjQ^O as for the man — thus let him be clothed ; likewise with the pronoun ; e. g. Jer. xxvii. 8. 222 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. § 77. Comparison of Adjectives, A. The Comparative. The comparative is usually expressed by the simple ad- jective,with ^ = prce following and before the object com- pared ; e. g. John viii. 53. .QTa] _So Aj]" »£5> AjV ]SüL >Oai^| art thou, then, greater than our father Ahraharri ; vii. 81 ; xiii. 16; xiv. 12 ; xix. 11 ; Assem. I. 378, 19. wi^f I^ ^NVo ^lo ,jiJ^ {o4 my mother is dearer to me than the queen ; 372, 3. v. E ; Barh. 82, 20. f^/. ^OOlÜ) ^O f ASo) Zooi ]lLfe9f she was a cubit taller than any man. Rem. — Besides ^SsO, sometimes also «JQ^ very, or \aL^ more, equivalent to by far, is added to the adjective in order to strengthen the meaning ; e. g. Acts xx. Sb. ;aAj» «AOU) t^U »^OIQ^O^ * Or Q l > ^1^1 ^iDhappier by far is he who gives than he who receives; Heb. iii. 3 ; iv. 12. The simple adjective is used as a comparative in stating the age of two persons ; e. g. Ez. xvi. 61. AÖrf)1> fZ>OS l \o lAaiinN «.^ZcLmP since I have received thy sisters^ the elder and the younger ; Barh. 27, 6, 7. Rarely after the He- brew idiom, are we obliged to supply the comparative adjective from the context ; e. g. Job xi. 17; more frequent is ^SsD = too ; e. g. Deut. xiv. 24. p^Sof --^^ »-lOl ^|> ■» fy> the way is too great for thee ; or before an infinitive with ^ = than that ; e. g. Gen. iv. 13. «n*^«V)\ ^Lo pDj greater than that it can be forgiven, ■n This construction with ^Sd occurs also with verbs of quality ; e. g. Lam. iv. 7. f^Nn ^iO O^QmO V;^2 ^Sd QaD> they are purer than snow and whiter than milk. The adverbial more or less, in respect to numbers, is expressed by ^iD piA^and^j^Q; Barh, 156, 2 ; Assem. I. 414, 3. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 2?3 B The Superlative, The Superlative is expressed ; a) by the positive^ with the noun following in the genitive plural ; e.g. I Cor. xv.9. |»»,i\»> »001)011 the least of the Apostles ; or with ^Ä in- stead of the genitive; e. g. Matt.ii.6. IjOOUj ]^V<^^ Vr»V^ the least among the {princes) towns in Judah ; or simply by the emphatic state ; e.g. Matt. v.l9. Ir'^^ ih^ ^^^t ; Barh. 85, 7. IjlI^Ij "|Aq> IÄla^ v*jioj B^me^ the greatest city of Italy ; Assem. 1. 323, A. 20; 335, A. 14. v. E ; in the plural, ICor.vi.2. jÖpOj eXa^irfra ; II Pet.i.4. (£3909 iiiyKfTct; or when a preference is given to one individual over a ft *^ ''* whole species, by ^^ ^So and a following plural ; e. g. Ephr.I. 204, C. ^GLiilO ^ ^ lL> the greatest of all evils ; h) by doubling the adjective or noun, so that the latter stands in the relation of genitive in the plural ; e.g. Gen.ix.25. ^r^:il r£il the meanest slave ; Exod.xxvi.33. ^aj^QO ^mq^Q the holy of holies^ i. e. the holiest place ; Num. iii. 32 ; Barh. 530, 3, 4. ]»n.\V) yi i A . V) the hing ofkings^ i.e. the might- iest hing; c) by *£i.6 and ;-iA^ before the adjective ; e. g. Eev. xviii. 12. l; n i V> r'AJ« ]rfi>0 the most precious wood ; Barh. 87, 3. Rem. — To denote the superlative, use is also made of the words «Aa) and l^iO; e.g. Barh. 170, 13. |La£0| .Ji^) the most excellent physician ; Assem. 1. 335, B. 4, 5. püja9> (jSo the most merci- ful ; more like the Hebrew, by IoTlSv ; e. g. Ps. xxxvi. 6. f JO^ ]oi!äv the mountains of God, i.e. the greatest mountains. In verbs, a strengthening is denoted by « i .i CD much ; e. g. Barh. 56, 11. fc>j^>Z] - ' 1 ^ he was much disquieted ; or, by «JOJ many (§ 67.1. c. ß) ; e.g. Barh. 6, 5 ; 135, 1. To be noted also are such forms as OlASßajaj, literally, whose wisdom {is known) for the wisest. CONSTRUCTION OF NUMERALS. § 78. Construction of Numerals (§ 50). A. Cardinal Numbers. The cardinals from three upwards, are connected with nouns in the following manner ; a) the object numbered pre- cedes the emphatic state plural ; e.g. Luke i.56. lA^Z U*r^ three months ; Barh. 133, 1 6. ^LyLQ ^^*,m\ \äJi» tvjenty-two years ; 4, 5. •aSQaiO ^ZflD (▲!• ^w;o hundred and five years; or 6) it follows in the absolute state ; e. g. Matt. x. 29. ^f^t ^LJL two sparrows ; xiv. 20. ,^i1 i^OO ;mi9^ twelvt baskets ; John v. 5 ; Acts xx. 3 ; Barh. 135, lO. Rem. — Exceptions to this rule, however, occur, the object num- bered standing after the number in the emphatic state ; e. g. Barh. 160,17. l^äi ^1«^^ Uj^^ eif/ht thousand slaves ; 121,8; 164, 4 ; or the cardinal, though rarely, stands as nomen regens in the construct state ; e. g. Matt. iv. 25. \l\ i|V) Z;£Q1 ten cities^ (literally, the ten of the cities). Some nouns, such as ]lOGLi, f AjL» also follow the numeral in the singular ; e. g. Assem. I. 213, A. 21, *P77 17 77'»> 22. ^Oa pmO ^^>aV)»> 0;iQlj ^Sd when fifty-one days had pas- sed; Barh. 10,1 6. Concerning the designation of age by '^ and Z;0 comp. § 75.2. Rem.; Assem.I. 31,21 ; 377, 1 ; Ephr.I.195,D ; Barh. 50,13 ; 179,4; with the omission of _xl# ; Barh. 5, 12. l]2i ;L •aSQaaO ^lmO one hundred and sixty five years old. For the combination of numerals without any numbered object, compare § 50; in respect to which it is to be noticed that, contrary to the He brew usage the smaller numbers follow the larger ; e. g. Num. iv. 43 ; 1 Kings v. 11. Concerning suflSxes to cardinal numbers, see § 46. 2. b. Rem. B. Ordinal Numbers. 1. Ordinals are connected like adjectives with their nouns in the same number and case ; e. g. Matt. xiv. 25. li;4^lQ^ CONSTRUCTION OF NUMERALvS. 225 f i NN ? (AjlIajS) in the fourth watch of the night ; Eev. iv. 7 ; vi. 9. ] i «iVl >i llQ^ the fifth seal ; verse 12 ; xvii. 11. 2. The cardinal numbers also supply tlie place of ordinals as follows ; a) the units, especially in designating time ; a) with the noun standing before the numeral in the emphatic state plural ; e. g. John xix. 14. A« ]l.s j^^") about the sixth hour ; ß) with the noun after the numeral^ in the absolute state ; e. g. John iv. 6. ,^iV» Ai ^ooiAa^ it was the sixth hour ; verse 52 ; Acts iii. 1 ; x. 9, 30 ; but more especially ; h) in numbers above ten with the noun preceding in the construct state ; e.g. Luke iii. 1. IrCQlAiQAj ZimQ in the fif- teenth year; Assem. I. 2, A. 1. 2, v.E. )*^ml£i»b l|io ALäQ in the one hundred and seventeenth year ; p. 3, A. 17. B. 19 ; 388, 3 ; 389, 1, 3, 5; 407, 10 ; or with j following in the emphatic state ; e.g. Barh. 4, 16. ]^Ss> IslS^J lAlio in the year of the world one thousand; or c) the ? prefixed raises the cardinals to ordinals ; e. g. Matt. xxii. 26. ^9>^> the second; VaIZj the third ; verse 39 ; Luke xii. 38. t^li A ^'^>'^? the second or the third ; especially in designating the years of the reign of a sovereign; e. g. Barh. 1Ö, 14; 11, 1 ; 86, 11. Rem. — Sometimes also, in accordance with Hebrew usage, the object numbered is repeated after the numeral in the absolute state plural ; e.g. Gen. vii.ll. ^'<* "I^Sd As Alan in the six hundredth '/ear; and the years of the reign are given with v»-i> with a suffix ; .'. g. Barh. 19, 9. OlSu) ;£QlAlA2 in the tenth year of his reign ; <)0, 8. In giving the days of the month, either *£) without >Oa,^ is repeated after the numeral, before the name of the month ; e. g. Assem. I. 2, B. 12. v. E. ^ > ^'^ limiASAo on the IS th of Ni- san{Äprii); 272,B.31 ; 399,19,20 ; 407,8,9 ; or, reversely, after the name of the month, before the numeral following it ; e. g. 397, 13. OIQ ]i»Ao ^p.» «^^jlID on the 9 th of June ; or with ^CUQ 226 BELATIONS OF NCJMBERS. before the numeral and the name of the month which follows with •Q repeated ; e.g. 398, 7. ^OIT) oJ^^O ^j-CQlO ]Ln3 iOcL^ on the 21 th of December ; 274, 30; or reversely, so that SOOaO stands after the name of the month, before the numeral ; e. g. 399, 14. Oli ^^CQIO ^>Z U>aiJD •£>! «KM'pi^ 071 the 22nd of Au- gust. This takes place even in designating the days of the week ; « p " ? e.g. Matt, xxviii. 1. \*^m*^ pM the first day of the week ; John xx. 19; A.ssem. I. 2, B. 12. v. E! C. Other Relations of Numbers. 1. Distributives are formed ; a) by doubling the cardinal numbers (§ 72. 2. b) ; e. g. Mark vi. 40 ; Barh. 19, 14 ; b) sometimes by circumlocution by means of ^^^ ; e. g. Barh. 41, 16. r^ ^jZ ^i^ two each ; 17. 2. Numerical adverbs ; a) in answer to the question, How many times 1 (Multiplicatives) ; a) by h^ and »Q before a cardinal number following, which more 'clearly defines it ; e.g. Gen. iv. 15. f\n«n ^k» seven-fold; Luke viii.8; without *0, Jer. xvii.18. ^jZ ^ twofold; ß) by the simple numeral with .JO, Luke xix.8. 'iio))^ (i.e. lai^) fourfold; b) in answer to the question How often f a) with the signification of a cardi- nal, by means of ^1 time^ plural ^.U^l times ^ as in Eng- lish; e. g. II Cor. xi. 24, 25. ^\ I^m once ; ^~LLCi\ -^^>r five times ; Matt, xviii. 22 ; Luke xvii. 4 ; John xiii. 88 ; by VAlil plural fAlil, Asssem. 1. 484, 27, 30; sometimes by .A ti^ne^ plural ^^i-^, Barh. 10, 19 ; more rarely by Vk»9o] way^ or merely by the feminine of the ordinal num- ber , e. g. Gen. iv. 24 ; ß) in an ordinal signification, in such a manner that either \i:Oi\ of the cardinal precedes with J, and is repeated after it in the plural ; e.g. A^Zj |i^l CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH ADJECTIVES. 227 ^^iöf (also elliptically ASZj ]x^] or ^Aüf A-i^4) for tke third time ; or by adverbs of the ordinals in 2o, e. g. Jude, verse 12. Lew > ^Lfor the second time. 3. Fractions are represented ; a) by special forms derived from the cardinal numbers ; e. g. Rev. viii. 7. IALoZ one- third; vi. 8. liob> one fourth ; Heb. vii.2 ; h) by circumlo- cution ; e.g. Rev. xi.13. VrCQl ^ y** one-tenth ; Ephr. 1.204, D ; Ez. V. 2. ^QiSb ASZ ^ lU^ § 79. Connection of the Noun with Adjectives, The adjective is related to the noun either as epithet or predicate. I. As epithet it follows the noun in the same gender and number ; e. g. Matt. xvii. 1. po> l>CL4 an high mountain ; xvi. 4. lZ',-i.y»0 lAa>o lAri'^i a wicked and adidterous gener- ation ; xi. 8. |^ i ^ > |A*jJ soft raiment ; John xi. 47. IAaIi^sd IZoZ*) many miracles. The same is true in respect to pronouns and participles ; e. g. Matt. xv. 8. lioi ]V)S ^Aw _peop?e ; verse 12 ; xix. 1 ; Rev. iii. 8. Uiu»Ä2) Iij2 (2?2 o/^en door. Collectives in the singular are followed by the ad- jective in the plural ; e. g. Assem. I. 78, A. 4. ^^^ )SQ2k ]or>r>Vr>i the people who hold to the lavt ; so also with nouns in the plural having a singular signification ; e. g. John vii. 38. t** Ijio living water ; Heb. x. 24 ; or in the singular ad sensura ; e. g. Num. iv. 5. jCXU;^> liLiZ *Aja| the vail which was spread out. Rem. — The pronoun frequently comes first ; e. g. John xi. 47. \'f^\% MCn this man ; Matt, xviii. 1 : xvii. 18. Adjectives are also used 228 CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH ADJECTIVES. emphatically ,especially in titles; e.g. Assem.l.25,A.l4. «^pD pL2a4 yOu\S^ the jnousEphraem; ll7,B.23.,-Ls*GU ^*^ l*-»^ the holy John; 286, A. 1. If an adjective is appended to the dein onstrative pronoun for the sake of more particular designation, the pronoun usually stands between the noun and the adjective ; e. g. Ephr. 1. 124,E. falD,^0 \r^JB\ OOl (901QJ this light first spread abroad; 127, D ; or before both, 132, F. ]£j ]l<^\V> OOl this great teach- er. — ^\b occurs (as a noun) exclusively before the noun ; e.g. Matt. XV. 13. I pa I |AOf^ ^\d this whole planting, (with suffix, compare §55.B. 2. Rem.). A word, generally a particle, sometimes stands be- tween the noun and the adjective ; e. g. Acts xvii. 20. Ja.« \\J^ »p. 0" f jiQxi wine with which myrrh was mingled ; verse 26. lAi^ Zooi |iDuÄD as reason was written ; Matt.xv. 28. «-»^ZoiSOaOl »aOl tQ> great is thy faith. In like manner the pronoun ; e. g. Mark xv. 26. ^^'boU) ]n\V) CU<^ that is the King of the Jews; Luke ii. 12. \L\ ^oh^ |j01 that shall he for you the sign. Rem. — Sometimes the adjective, as predicate, follows the noun, viz.: when several words follow which define more closely the signi- fication of the adjective ; e. g. Gen. xix. 20. |oa;q ]jai '{Lk\Ci ^SoAj^ tn;SV)\ «jiGFI this city is nigh to flee unto ; or an adver- bial idea is embraced in the preposition ; e. g. Gen xxix. 7. V^ ^'^ .^ ^Qjk£i fSOQ^ it is yet high day, i. e. high in the day. Sometimes CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH THE VERB. 229 the adjective singular, as predicate, stands before the plural noun ; e.g. Barh. 542, 14, 15. ]jLd oio %^a&3 to that same were the words written; or it follows a plural, being itself in the singular ; e.g. Assem. I. 21,5, 6. 01^ , *n\ fZ^jkl^lO (AjL.*QfiO songs and hymns were composed by him. But especially the adjective in the plural follows collectives; e. g. Rev. xix. 1. ^;Si3|) |Pk.ye£0 [mlO a great multitude, who said ; Barh. 88, 4. The predicate is also expressed by a noun ; e. g. I Cor. xii. 27. |m>i«V)> tOAjf C7i;.t^ ye are the body of Christ ; Eph. v. 30. 3. When several nouns of different genders are connected, the adjective as epithet and predicate, usually conforms to the masculine ; e.g. Luke i. 5, 6. — MQa ■ \\ OlZAjfO Mpl fOl-^ >0^ 0001 _.&.Qa>l »OOLk^L Zacharias and his wife Miz- abeth both feared God ; verses 6,7 ; Barh. 106,9. Rem. — Concerning the neuter the same rules prevail as in § 66. 2, and § 70. 3 ; e.g. Assem. I. 36, 6. 1AaÄ0> v*01 that which has been written; 372, 19 ; Ephr. I. 241,B ; Barh.24, 18. üHjuS) ^ he did that which was evil. § 80. Connection of the Noun with the Verb, The Yerb conforms in number and gender to the subject; but to this there are mriQy exceptions, which may be refer- red to the following cases. Compare Agrell Comment, de varietate generis et numeriin LL.OO. Lundce, 1815, 4. A. In regard to Number. Here it should be remarked : 1. That collectives or those nouns which are regarded as such, are connected with plural verbs. Here belong, |J.»-m; e.g. Barh. 94, 10. oLa^V«^'^^ lliooji 1].i.ja the Roman army 230 CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH THE VERB. proceeded towards Persia ; 96, 9 ; ^ ; e. g. Acts xxvi. 13. 0001 - ><^^^ ^\d all who were with me ; Michael. Chr. 15,5 ; and its compounds, r**-^;e.g.Assem.L39,8 — 5. CLoADf ffc»\n all— wrote ; ^lols ; e.g.Michael.Chr. 14,15. O'^ifj ^ScAb all who said; *äj1 ^D; e.g.Barli.277,6. OJOlZ »Jtilo? that every one wondered; also}jalD; e.g.Lukexxiii.l.^OOULlD 01-^ Qiao the whole multitude arose; lLrQCO;e.g.Bar]i.422,10.1]ytQ£D o2f a great multitude came ; Assem.I. 386,15,16 ; (iül; e.g. John V. 3. IcnlpJ 1^^ ^^ OOCil ^jiUi'i ^jlLoIO in these (pools) lay a, great multitude of invalids ; Assem. I. 483, 19 ; Barh. 95,6,7; 227,8; 312,7; Uj'r*'; e.g. Barli.211,8. o.-^ ]i-^ »£);\V)\ the others fled ; 342, 19. According to the same construction are names of places put for their inhabitants ; e.g. IfsoQl cloister; Assem.I.411, Note B. 4 — 6. P— I'^dl «aOIOOVm when the monks saw him. Rem. — The same nouns also are found with the verb singular ; e.g. l]j-M, Barh.551, 13 ; ^\d, 288,12, and its compounds, .»»S^"^; e.g. 309,14; ^V^\n; e.g. 314,2 ; ^1 ^ or . ■l\n;e.g.3'73,l;also]jÜLa"; e.g.Acts xiv.4 ; pQl; e.g.Acts v.26;Barh. 301,9,10. In like manner, abstract feminines occur for concretes; e. g. |ZQaJ|, Barh. 490, 18. Ld\^ (ZojuI Ou^ all men fled ; (AaJQa for prisoner; Assem. 1. 490, A. 31 ; ^Al^fSiO for inhabitants] e.g.Acts xiii.44 ; |Z,i for con- gregation; e.g.ICor.xiv.23. Still more remarkable is the construction of these nouns in one and the same period with a singular and plu- ral verb ; e.g. Üjlx», Barh.212,1. »aOlO^lO— 1]j-m %a01q!^ ^Jkl an army conquered him and took him captive ; *Mj\ ^oJD e.g. 388,3, 4 ; ISüi; e.g. Acts xxi. 36 ; Barh. 371, 8. 2. Nouns with a plural form having a singular significa- tion ( § 44. Eem. 6 ), are either ; a) in respect to form CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH THE VERB. 23 1 connected with the plural verb ; e. g. )si\, II Cor. iii. 18. (Aji-^y. l£)|o with unc0vered face ; Barh. 201, 1 ; \21*\ e.g. Johniii.l5. ^!bklIL> |l!l» Olli ^OOOIJ he shall have eternal life ; V.26; Barh.219,12 ; llio; e.g. John v.7. Ql^fZZV? to \.^\d when the water was troubled ; Barh. 194, 3 ; 268, 7, 8, 12; and], ■Sn»;e.g.Mark i 10.]uiß* QO>Aflo| oupavo/ ö'x'^°M'^v°' '» James v. 18. 1^^ ClOOU (,«iDS 6 oJpavoj usrov £(Jwxsv ; or fe) more rarely, in Tespect to signification, they are connected with the singular verb ; e. g. Luke xxiii. 45. wiia] ^\^ A ^jZ th^ vail was rent ; John i. 4, fOOl [»jt.^ OlO in him was life ; Num. xxxiii. 14. |.i V) ^-^Z lOCTI Aj^j^ there was no water then ; Luke iii. 21. f >Sn» «-mAsZ*! the heaven was open- ec?; as feminine, II Petr. iii. 5. ^Qji;id ^ Zooi ouAaj |a1q» oupavo/ ^tfav gx<7raXai ; Barh. 228. 10. 3. With the noun plural also is connected the verb singu- lar ; a) when the verb preceding is used impersonally ; a) Lk] and A^ ; e. g. John vi. 9. i e»rii «jbSOm ^OIQ^ Aji| ^oJQJ ^^LO I^ICD) he has five barley-loaves and two fishes ; xxi. 25 ; I Cor. xv. 40 ; Barh. 144, 8 ; with locJl, John v. 2. >r>^ »uVmH ^^^^'^ «jo- * ^ -* P 7 7 peared many of the heavenly host ; Barh. 124, 11. ta,* q ^^^ pjb» //?e Arabians made peace ; 133, 12. . alL li^>1 A^iO there died four thousand; l77, 14; 339, 9 ; or h) when the verb follows though more rarely ; a) A^*) and AaJi; e.g. Barh. 148, 10. !>00«in\ looi A^t IjO» ^SoI» Chisum had five ivalls ; ß) other verbs relating to persons ; e. g. 232 IN" RESPECT TO GENDER. Barh. 1 12, lO. ^\ix)Z1 l^K^ fftf^^y were slain ; 125, 14,15. >-^^l ?-•-»— 4 ^he Arabians chose for king ; 190, 9. ^lO ^\*I> p -. lAi^3^ since the inhabitants feared ; 298, 17 ; 613, 3; 532, 19.* Rem. — Some havo attempted to explain this singular of the verb as the third plural pret. defectively written (§ 6 ; comp. Agrell a. a. O.p. 12,13) ; still it is remarkable that one and the same author, as Barhebrseus, should employ interchangeably both ways of writing. On the contrary this construction is found in Hebrew and more frequently in the Arabic ; and to both of these languages, such a defective form of the 3 pret. plur. is unknown. When a plural is to be considered as distributive {one of them, or each one of them)y the Syriac uses not only the singular but the plural also, and marks this construction more accurately by , »» \0, tOOULO f** or ^lO r^^Ol; e.g. Barh. 434, 12. Ol'ilV f»».\o ^lY.QJOT each one of them went into his country ; 101, 14, 15. ^a* , n\n 0>1^ ^O «^ ■»> • • • •OQlllO each one of them had answered. 4. The dual, which is used in four words only, (§ 44), is connected with the plural verb ; e. g. Matt. xxiv. 40. ^OOOU ^jZ two shall be ; xviii. 19 ; xix. 5 ; Barh. 165, 19. ^UltkL'iL t^^jLtO and they both brought forth. Rem. — Sometimes, also, according to the sense, the verb in the singular is found with ^9^So ; e.g. Barh.396,12. ^9^ AOSÜJ 01p»1 ^i) that it should be called Egypt ; 433,20. Similar is Barh. 121, 11. ^;*LO ^LiL Lih there departed two armies. B. In respect to Gender. 1. Nouns masculine, singular and plural, sometimes take the verb, whether it precede or follow, in the feminine when they are masculine in respect to the termination, but not as to signification (compare § 43. Kem. 2, and § 70. i.b). CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH THE VERB. 233 Rem. — It must be considered as a solecism or a designation of the neuter when the verb feminine is found with a noun masculine ; e.g. Barh.527,16. |aSD) LOCI fD when it was evening ; compared with Matt. viii. 16 ; xiv. 15 ; or Barh. 152, 14. V^Ji^L^ - ZoOl there arose a quarrel ; compared with Matt, xxvi^ 5 ; Acts xxiii. 10. 2. Feminines take a verb in the masculine; a) when they are feminine merely in respect to termination (compare § 70. l.a) ; h) when abstracts stand for concretes (compare § 70. 2) ; e. g. ^ai, lAiaj/or mankind; Barh.236,8. ^ oAaSd ] AäSIJ |la^ ^mSüi» there died about fifty thousand men ; 548, 20 ; 585, 14. ]2;jiai army; 581, 12. Qmliif ]Z;*^rCl^ ^^01 these armies were assembled ; or 1^n>Aey^ milita- ry for soldiers ; 607, 20. Rem. — These nouns are also found with the verb feminine ; e. g. Barh. 341, 10, 11. ^-iaj \ls&. JCQläZ y^ ^bJiJjü there died about twelve thousand men ; 348, 15, 16. But the preceding verb masculine is to be considered as impersonal in such cases as Barh. 612, 14. '\tsSi\ JDOVaZf there tvas occasion given ; compared with 579, 14. Zool lAlDJ lAal there was much occasion ; or 606, 19, 20. lA^jaj OiZq!^ fOCn he had fear ; compared with 136, 6. " j^Vvn V^ lA^kjaJ L^tSLl fear fell upon the king, 3. Sometimes the noun is connected,in the same sentence, with the masculine and feminine of the verb ; not only, a) nouns of the common gender ; e.g. Mark v. 13. U*Oy QOSU GlLio lAsiL^ , i^<^ these unclean spirits went out and entered ; but h) such also as have a determinate gender ; e. g. Barh. 268, 10. QoLmZIo »aS^^I ^OuZjZ they both {mother and daughter) fell and were suffocated ; 260, 11, 12. 234 CONSTRUCTION OF SENTENCES. G. In respect to both Gender and Number. 1. Collectives feminine often take, in accordance with the meaning, the plural masc. of the verb ; e. g. Barh. 661, 6, 7. 0001 ,^>ni^ — VZojkj'l the inhabitants had fled ; Gen. xli. 57. o2l U'l oi^ the whole people {country) came ; Matt. viii. 32. olaj _ ^6\ I'^oa dlli this whole herd — perished ; Assem. I. 53, 17. ^^^Q p lAi^^^ OlSo AjUoZI all the inhabitants {the V)hnle city) assembled and wept. So too the names of cities ; e. g. Assem. I. 51, Note B. 1. qX^oAi^ AqSU «^01)0 1 the inhabitants of Edessa went out tobe slain ; Barh. 248, 6, 7. |Zq*.,a^ for Mohammedans; Barh. 580, 1, 2. 2. With nouns plural feminine, sometimes occur verbs singular masculine^ as well before as after the noun ; e. g. Isa. iii. 1Ö. tOUJiOl^ Al£5 ^Qj»iZZ| the daughters of Zion are haughty ; Barh. 215, 7. Oi'Zqq^ ^Ollo fvoZIß// o/ Aw ^ooc?s ÄacZ been plundered; Ephr. XL 145, A. loOl ^TIaAo lA^Ao ^O l i Ns there were writings composed concerning iÄem ; Jer. xiv.5. . nn« j-^-» - (A^j ^^e Ä7*?ic?ä cahed and forsook; Barh. 368, 11, 12 ; 10, 9. *a01oLV,I^' ASZ there were three eyes. Rem. — Seldom are cases found, where the verb singular feminine stands with the noun plural masculine ; e. g. Job xxxix.l3, 14. OlAlD 1^*^* ^fc»»,*^» the ostrich leaveth her eggs. D. Gonstruction of sentences when there is more than one subject^ or where the subject is compound. l.When the subject of a sentence is compounded of a nom- inative and genitive, the verb conforms ; a) usually to the CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH THE VERB. 235 nominative ; e. g. Barli. 228, 7. IjQSüL ZoLoj tl\Ll^ there was seen the form of a pillar ; 613, 14. ]tnmVi> lAl.. AiSoAsl the cry of the poor was heard ; 348, 20 ; h) the verb conforms to the genitive, when the latter contains the principal idea ; e. g. Job xxxii. 7. ^^<^\So M^> llyi Q^ the multitude of years shall teach; Barh 96,8,9. \L \ i. ,^ ) OTjL.QflO A\«y>i a great part of the city was destroyed ; 141, 10; 241, 10, U ; 188, 7, 8. oooi ^^dot^JD — . \k^ ^a} a muiti- tude of the dead were buried. Rem. — In the last connection ^O, almost always is found ; e. g. Matt. viii. 34 ; Acts xxi. 30 ; I Cor. xiv. 23 ; to which the verb rarely relates, as Barh.611,3. OlÄloZ ^01^ yio^mJ all of his petitions should be granted. 2. When it has several subjects connected by and, the verb stands as follows ; A) when they are of the same gen- der ; a ) in the plural ; thus a ) before the subjects ; e. g. John xxi. 2. "iLooVZo ]Si]D ^QISüä Yr»*£]' OOOI ^OGfuLf ^^pAjO there were together Simon Peter, Thomas and Nathaniel; Barh. 19, 7. .AjQ-»o \o\» a^u^]^ Saul and Jonathan were slain ; 78, 8 ; 193, 17 ; Assem. I. 30, A. 1, 2. ^%mty-) p ^AlD OlSoo J20oja.i^ when the clergy and the whole congregation were assembled; Ephr. 1. 223, A ; /3) after the subjects; Exod. xvii. 10. r^ns\re^ jOmO ^ojOiIo "lioSo Moses, Aaron and Hur, went up. But the verb is also frequently found ; h) in the singular ; a) before the subjects ; e.g. Matt, xxviii. 1. ]2>*1 ^'»Sdo li\jLS_i^i ^'rSD Z2] then came Mary Magda- lene and the other Mary ; Barh. 106, 4, 5 ; 121, 19 ; 159, 9; 160 13. Ij^qSdo llao looi there arose famine and pest- ilence ; 193, 19; Assem. I. 272, A. 35, 36 ; Ephr. I. 216,B; 236 CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH THE VERB. 280,D ; ß) after the subjects ; e.g. Johiiii.2. ^Q«u 001 *2i( ^'rOL] 1 >mo^ ^Kr\/n Jesus and his disciples were invited ; Barh. 1 11, lO ; Assem. I. 284, A. 5. v. E ; B) when the sub- jects are of different genders, the verb conforms ; a) to the gender of that standing nearest to it ; e. g. Barh. 106, 9. f '^^^ (aJO t rQyi ^i^ilO rO when men^ women and youth had ^ «p.e.. **••«. f I «Y* assembled together ; 192y 10. (L9)...0 |>0-4 Oi.Ny(i£f mountains and islands appeared ; 195, 4 ; or h) the masculine is pre- ferred, especially if the verb follow the subjects ; e.g. Barh. 74, 12, 13. 0001 y^^rAt^ OiÄa*0 JDcLlDOjofi Theodosius and his sister were educated ; 77, 7 ; 78, 2 ; Ephr.I. 258, A{ C) finally, when there are several subjects, if the construc- tion commence with the singular of the verb, in the con- tinuation of the sentence, the plural of the verb is used ; e.g. Barh. 137, 14. QO'lo" ^Olo',rLKlo lln.I J^o Oahala and his confederates arose and fled ; 155, 16. P-ij OlZo-^ «A2U QQjßO (Uu90 the judge and the elders went out and brought. Rem. — The verb in the plural also follows, when several subjects are united by ^Ol with ; e.g. Barh. 197,5,6. ^Ql >Q2unxJ ^O QIQ (aIDO)) IZoXa^jM when Nicephorus with the Roman army returned; 72,2; 85,9. When there are two different subjects, of which one is a pronoun of the first person, the verb follows in the first person plural ; e. g. Luke ii. 48. jajOfi^ ^dOfO (jj ^A^ ^001 ,^>SO Ipb.^^ I and thy father (we) have sought thee with much sorrow ; Assem. T. 173, B. 23 — 25. Yet sometimes when the subjects are in the first and third persons, the verb is in the first person singular ; e.g. Assem. 1, 347, 28, 29. ^mujiSDO \i\ ukLjk} \ljkD rM land the Messiah are (am) one nature» PECULIARITIES RELATING TO NOUNS. 237 § 81. Peculiarities relating to Nouns, Ä. Mlipsis, 1. If the subject of a sentence would be repeated in the predicate, before a genitive for the purpose of defining it more accurately, that subject is omitted, and only the geni- tive is used ; e. g. Matt. iii. 4. l^l£D? oi»q2lL ]oai «-»oioA^f V^sxi his clothing was ( a clothing of) cameVs hair ; John V. 36. ^ImQa? ^3i^ fOJJ \LOyoLSL a witness which is great- er than that of John; x. 21 ; xi. 4; Heb. iii. 3 ; v. 14. ]L]J'f» lA^QO^Si 1 r-'lQy*> to those who are of full age belongs strong meat ; Col. iii. 22. Rem. — This Ellipsis also occurs in designations of time and place, with TAi» ; e. g. Assem. I. 394, 6, 7. 0U3 ZoOlj 1^1* iO^. j, A.10 .«JCOOJOUQCD a year before the Nicene council, for (Als , ^Ali ^^ ; 1. 11. lAl»> oijAo the year thereafter, for lAl», VAi»? OljAii ; Mark xiv. 9. IjOl »aZ',^ fpZ^j InaV ^ (viz : iZ]) where-ever this my gospel shall be preached, 2. Sometimes the accusative is wanting with the active verb, when the object can be easily supplied from the sig- nification of the verb ; e. g. 'r^j to plough, literally to drive difSi the yoke— plough), I Sam.viii.l2. (in full,Luke xvii.7) ; , V > to bring forth, Aph. y-SoVto beget (U^), Glen. xvi. 1 ; XXX. 1; ».r^mi to marry, literally to take (IZAj]); Ezra. ix. 2, 12 (in full, Barh. 39, 11) ; ^a^j] to cast lots, literally to cast (Ima a lot)', I Sam. xiv. 42 (in full, Ps. xxii. 19); also nouns with prepositions ; J>QOD to consider, literally to lay (] '^^^ in the Heart)] Job xxxiv. 23 (in full, Acts v. 238 ZEUGMA AND HENDIADYS. 4) ; ]>> to ship, literally to go^ (ISüjLa upon the sea) ; Mark vi. 48 ; Luke viii. 23. Rem. — Here also seem to belong impersonal phrases ( § 66. 1, 2) like ^ ^r^) ^ AjpD to which may be supplied ykSH or VmO> ; and ^ t^p to which may be supplied \£l^* To ^^Lj it is clear, and Aiijlm it is dark, it is forced and unnecessary to supply y^y] or IALdOa» B. Zeugma and Hendiadys, Zeugma occurs with the noun as well as with the verb (§ 68. C. 2); e.g. Gen. ii. 1. ^OCJllx>l Olloo U>1o llso» the heavons and the earth and all their host ; or Hendiadys ; e.g. Gen. iii. 16. ^aILlI^O *> n i n p thy sorrow and thy conception, i. e. the sorrow of thy conception ; Job iv. 16. Cases of Paronomasia are merely imitations of the Hebrew; e.g. Isa. xxviii. 10, 18; and passages of accidental asson- ance ; e.g. Barh. 102, 18. Hifinn flY ]rn i'«^n P' not by persuasion but by the sword. APPENDIX. 77ie Rendering of Composite Greek nouns. The Syrians render the Greek composite noun as well as the verb (compare Appendix to § 67) into their language, in the following manner ; 1) by simple Syriac words of like signification ; e. g. I Tim. iv. 13. avapwö'iff ll-i;0; ^apaxkrivr> oVn» IITim. iii.2. ax^oKfroi IZosu^ö *a,ao ; or b) by two nouns, of which the latter stands in apposi- THE RENDERING OF GREEK COMPOSITE NOUNS. 239 tion ; e.g. John xi.l6. (fv^^ia^riTai a-Wov ^cno^^^ |^ «Vnx/ • c) by a participle and noun whicli correspond with the verb ; e. g. Acts iv. 13. a/pa/xfxaroi |;jzifiD -^.> |J : or by participles and adjectives and the noun with ^ pre- fixed ; e. g. II Pet. iii. 16. Svcfvorirog jJ-Oom^ .o^rrtv ; or d) by the pronoun and verb ; e. g. I Cor. vii. 8. a/afj^oj \mJi ^ai\ LJ^} ^^ i S »1> If the composites are form- ed -from adjectives and nouns ; 3) they are frequently re- solved into their component parts, and rendered in the same manner as in cases mentioned above ; a) in thci relation of genitive; e. g. Mark x vi. 14. CxXTipoxap^/a ]AV ZcuaD; urn Col. ii. 14. p^ffipo/pa(pov ^Qcu* 'r^ ,' Matt. xxiv. 24. -l^svSoifpocpriTOLi (ZoOjOj |jL*aJ ; 6) by the noun and adjec- tive ; e. g. Phil. ii. 3. xsvoSo^ia, {q.a;co ^kOQs ; II Cor. xi. -..> |n,iN» ; 4 ) sometimes we can trace definite laws of rendering ; a) nouns, adjectives, and adverbs compounded with 'jra^, take ^i»D ; e. g. Luke xi. 22. flravo'jrXja P-»l 01^ ; xxiii. 18. <;rajx<7rXiiä£? JaIO 01^ ; Sap. xviii. 15. "jravro^tvttfAOff V»^ ^*i^> ; 6) when they are com- pounded with a privative, the latter is represented by fl'and tfj ; e. g. I Cor. xv. 53. Ä^avac/a ]ldlajlD ]]'; Eph. i. 4. afxwfjoo^ ^C^ Vj ; Matt. iii. 12. (i(fßs(fTog ]aij ]]j» Finally, in composites formed with r*0 he sent again ; Assem. I. 208, A. 7, 8 ; Gen. iv. 2. y^lV)^ AaCDol she bare again ; Barh. 152, 8 ; also by ad- ding pleonastically *Qo2 again ; Gen. viii. 21. »SifiDo'l M |l>]] C7i4^SQ^ %QoZ I will no Tnore curse the earth ; h) ,nsV>\ 1 i.yt rt>1 he did much evil ; c) ^qSjb to end fi)X wholly ^completely ;e.g.(aQX).,xxiY.\b. oWv>V)\ NoS» ]] Äe Äarf not yet done speaking ; d) y>rO to precede (always without the copula) for before ; e. g. Z^| tijD^ I have said before ; Acts ii. 31 ; vii. 52 ; Rom. iii. 9, 25; viii. 28,30; xi. 35 ; xii. 11 ; I Cor. ii. 7; Gal. iii. 8. Rem. — More according to the Hebrew, seems to be the expression in Hos. vi. 4 ; \^Q S^JoSoj ]]'U ("jj^n d'l^tp^^ btp) t^ ^ew, which early is scattered ; Gen. xxxvii. 7 ; or II Kings ii. 10. t^a^m A^JOdI (iS^töb iTl'^topn) thou askest too great a tking;com- pare Ephr. I. 519, D. E ; Jj^i^ön ^^ II Chron.xxvi.l5,is expressed by ' ' a ^ I » compare Jer.iv.5,and onward. If the finite verb already precede, it may be omitted in adverbial usage ; e. g. I Sam. xx. 41. I »» X7 7 r ,»-00 1 ^o> y);£^ . Q2l2 <Äey mourned — but David the most. 2. Adverbs like adjectives, are connected with nouns and stand ; a) before them ; e. g. Luke iv. 25. .i.tfn Xt^^^^y] many widows ; John ii. 12. IASocLa ^u\nfew days ; Barh. 78, 1 ; 105, 3 ; 106, 8 ; Assem. I. 30, 15, 21 ; 270, A. 6. V. E ; with words standing between; 284, A. 10. V. E. ; b) more seldom after the noun ; e. g. I Cor. v. 6. ^»i.xi^O l;i^fi»i a little leaven ; II Chron. ii. 9. ]ffl.i .n «jL^j-OD much wood ; Barh. 80, 16. Aa*A^ ^ IjQJ the fire placed under. Rem. — Sometimes nouns represent the adverb by a following geni- tive ; e. g. Ephr. I. 219, A. llllj l^IioV ^OOli^ JooiAjiV IjqSqio they had continually the cloud and the pillar. Particu- 242 INTERROGATION, AFFIRMATION AND NEGATION. larly should be noticed ; ^^ \>> iNoO almost ; or — LD ^ »^^ \y iNo jZ] ^iD, •-»-yjhCD partly^ etc. 3. The repetition of the adverb indicates ; a) a strength- ening or increase of the meaning ; e. g. Gen. vii. 19. JOi^ %£i^ 9.^'^^ ready ; Matt. iv. 24. «aiO »HiO 'z;er?/ 5ac? ; John vi. 7 ; Barh. 65, 14. ^JuJio ^.Snn and 84, 17. jAq 5ÄO J?/ degrees ; h) sometimes a diversity is expressed by adverbs of place ; e. g. I Kings xx. 40. Iq^o \il^ here and there. % 83. Use of the Interrogation^ Affirmation, and Negation, A. Upon the construction of the interrogation, it should be remarked ; 1. That the simple direct question is distinguished ; a) eitber by being preceded by an interrogatory pronoun or particle ; e.g. Luke xxii.27. *£)> ciliD ivho is the greatest ? John ix. 26. »A r^^ U^ what has he done to thee ? verse 10. . ^ 1 > 1 > \ »^-mA2)Z| llOjij hoio were thine eyes opened ? verse 19; vii. 35 ; Assem.l. 33, 15; 179, B. 25. ^OkliV-So ^aJ^OI 0001 ^^r* whence know they thisi or h) by the position of the words employed, the prominent word in forming the question being generally placed first ; e. g. Matt. XX vii. U. MjOOUj p\V> OOlAjj art thou the Icing of the Jews? Assem. I. 33, 17. U^t >*^ ^1 is it thy wish f 2. A question with |1 usually contains an affirmation ; e.g. John iv. 35. 1?^ fZ] ^^^ U^'T >Ac)> ^'^öf xptJ\ }j say ye not, that after four months cometh the harvest ? INTERROGATION, AFFIRMATION AND NEGATION. 243 xvni.26 ; but with ]Sxii it embraces a negation; e.g. John v. 45. ^OaL ]j1 *y.i4^ 1^1? ^oAjI ^laSO ISol believe ye that I shall accuse you ? x. 21 ; xviii.80 ; or a doubt ; e.g. Matt, xxvi. 22. ^-rSo ij] tnl Lord is it If John ix. 27; xviii.25; so also with *jbO ; e. g. Ephr. I. 240, P, ^ji looi ;-<^^ fa;So « 1 1 1 sn yjould this please God ? Luke xviii. 8 ; xxiv. 18 ; John vii. 35. »7»7 ^ Rem. — The direct question is also found with fjf (apa), Barh. 131, 12 ; with "lliO for fcü!^ 119, 10. 3. The indirect question is indicated by /j = whether ; e.g. Matt. xxvi. 63. |01^> a\\n f»>iaV> OOl Aj] J whether thou art the Christ the son of God. The disjunctive {whether — or {utrum — an) is marked by 0^ in the second part ; e. g. Matt. xi. 3. ,^1 > nmV) OCT ^'^y'oVli]? OCT 0CT*Aj1 art thou he who should come or shall u^e look for another ? John ix. 2; Assem. 1. 87, B. 12, 13; 377, 20, 21. Rem. — The affirmation or negation of a question is usually expres- sed by a repetition of the leading verb with the personal pronoun ; e.g. Assem. I. 375, 7. O'^lo — 2'3soVj ^'^ *LmV ^oAlSfi« Z;SO(> ^,V^NO ^)!i£lm have you heard ^ my brethren^ what I have said ? and they answered, yes, all ; 10. QIjDO — , \1 Of tr^\M p.. I 7 ^ , , . . . r^'fBy is it true or not ? and they answered it is true, i. e. yes ; sometimes by another verb; e.g. Matt.xx vii. 11. Z;iD'| tS\ thou hast said it, i. e. yes ; in the negative with the same repetition ; e. g. Assetn. I. 3*78, 7, 11. Sometimes only |] == not, appears ; e. g. Assem. I. 33,19. %A^i\ |j ;iD|0 and he said, JVo, my father. B. The negative particles fl and Q^ (and nonne ? ) are distinguished from Au^ by this latter forming the negation 244 PKEPOSITIONS. to A— i], and with nouns, adjectives, and participles (§ 58. B. 5) or with suffixes (§ 38. 2), it includes the substantive verb. Rem. — ]] is repeated in the latter of two negative clauses ; e. g. I Cor. xi. 11, 16 (but the negative sense is lost when the parti- cle is to be taken affirmatively ; as in Matt. v. 25 ; Luke xxi. 34). To adjectives and participles it gives a negative or privative signifi- cation ( = ww, in, -less) ; e. g. Eph. i. 4. ^CdX) |J spotless ; Rom. i. 23. \\»^>>AVf> (J imperishable. Before nouns it signifies nothing less than ; e.g. Deut. xxxii.21. 0 l^Hi y^} without hands and without feet. § 85. Conjunctions. The Sjriac language, in common with, the other Semitic dialects, is very deficient in conjunctions ; but affluence of periodic diction in all languages arises from this class of words. Hence in syriac, upon the one hand, the periods are wanting in variety and continuance ; and on the other hand the connective particles which do exist have many significations. In general the following may be observ- ed : I. Those conjunctions (e. g. lühen^ then) are frequently omitted, which, in the protasis indicate the relation to the apodosis, and the two members are united by and ; e. g. Gen. xix. 23. ^ ^olo *naü |jdQj» when the Sun had arisen^ Lot came ; xliv. 4. Rem. — Moreover the following fall away ; a) O {asyndeton) after verbs of motion ; e. g. Matt. ix. 7. ^1 f ^QlO he arose and went ; Barh. 25, 1; 197, 19 ; especially in earnest discourse ; e. g. I Sam. XV. 6 ; b) o{or ; e.g. II Kings ix. 32. ^jLlSoioiSD Xt!Ll ^jl two or three eunuchs ; c) J more in accordance with Hebrew- usage ; e. g. Isa. 1. 2. *mS\ A^O Lkl\ ]{V)\ wherefore was, I came, (when I came), no one there. On the other hand O is often repeated {polysyndeton) ; e. g. Barh. 61, 20. ;-lio21o Aa^DO fiV>«\ «n\rPO >QO0 he died, was buried, arose, and went to ; 82, 17; 38, 5, 6. 2. As correlatives, conjunctions are used doubled in a CONJUNCTIONS. 247 sentence ; a) the same word ; e. g. o — o and •£)] — *£i\ as well — as, both — and ; e. g. Assem. I. 291, A. 10, ll,v.E; oi ^o( either-— or ; Barb. 112, 4 ; 223, 4, 5 ; \!{—\\ ^wheth- er — or; Q.g. 217,13; or 6) different words ; e.g. Jiaoi — )^| like— as; Assem. I. 75, B. ll, 13, v.E; 374, 23, 24; with > llkil preceding; Bphr.I. 214, E; ]] T— ^"i although— yet; e.g. Barh. 91, 12, 13. 3. The conjunctions j = that^ therehy^ or (Jj = that not^ are usually connected with the future (§ 61. 3. A) ; e. g. As- sem. I. 515, B.32 ; Barh. 213, 6 ; but in as far as they have the signification of since, because, {qixod), they are connected with the preterite ; e.g. Matt. ix. 8. «sau> (GLi(J <^'^>*^^ they praised Ood, because he had given ; 12, 41 ; 13, 11 ; Barh. 24, 9. 4. Concerning the use of particular conjunctions, the fol- lowing may be noted ; a) o I is sometimes used in comparisons (=^ ^So) ; e. g. Matt, xi.22 ; xix. 24 ; and likewise h) »^1 in comparing one thing with another of the same species ; e, g. Isa. i. 7 ; Job xxiv. 14; Assem. I. 75, A. 1. v. E ; 168, B. 29 ; with numerals it signifies really, about ; Barh.104,13 ; c) q!ä if^ ( = Tj^ ^av ) denotes, in doubtful cases, the relation of the subjunctive ; tl = Ü|j^ s' in cases of certainty, denote^ the indicative, and also occurs in indirect questions (§ 83.3); it is negative in those passages containing asseverations under oath, yet only in those which are translated, and which, according to the Hebrew idiom, are without any negation ; with a negative U /j, ]] ] or ^ (j 1, it is afiirmative(compare q;j^ and jiJii ü^, Gesenius Lehrg. p. 844) ; e. g. Cant. 2. 7. 248 CONJUNCTIONS. <;julZ tlo Cr^l {\ f^a^s noij rouse not ; d) > (for tlie further use of which see § 56 ; § 69.1 ; 73. 3 ; § 74. 2.; § 78.B. 2) a) from particles which it follows, forms conjunctions e. g. J n^just as J Assem. I. 34, 17 ; so ihaij Matt. ii. 13 y iSiuV Just asj John viii. 28 ; Ephr. I. 214, E ; j ^Aif (of time) 05, i(;Äen, Assem.I. 485, 15 ; j wiOlQ smce, because^ Barh. 112, 7, 8 ; 160, 12 ; y >2^, 39,7, and j jAq ^, As- sem. I. 213, A. 25, afterwards ,- > 0lAl»;o as sooti as, 1.218, 27 ; ? ]!^ (of time) ^Äew, 1.485,20 ; y ^i^, Barh.160, 16, and y ^, 158,12, sincefiecause ; y ISo^l wn^ i(Äa^, (including the terminus ad quern), Ephr. II. 125, B ; 242, A ; ISo'^ y ^öl^somuchthat,'B2LThA9S,2; > 2>0^ 6e/öre,150,l3 ; ^3) in the signification of that, y is sometimes omitted before the future ; e.g. John xxi. 3. POJ jo."! pf ^l] I go thati may catch fish; after ,1, John v. 7. \i\ \2^ W ^ until that I come ; or it is pleonastic after J ; e. g. Matt. x. 13. OOT «I |Aa^ |as> when the house is v^orthy ; Mark viii. 3 ; Luke vi. 7 ; John viii. 36 ; after ^f. Matt. ix. 21 ; ]]'q!£ Mark 13, 20 ; e) the copula o also denotes a) that^ especially after verbs of sending^ entreating, commanding, etc ; e. g. Assem. I. 77, 23, 24 ; Barh. 11, 18 ; 97, 8; 105, 1 ; 152, 5; 221,2; it forms ß) the apodosis ; e.g. Barh. 39, 7.8; and is y) equivalent to but ; e. g. Barh. 11, 16; 16, 9 ; (5) it sometimes supplies the place of the comparative ^] ; e. g. Job V. 7. Also the Hebrew üb^i^ is translated by the fre- 7 T quently occurring ^'p-O yet, nevertheless. INTERJECTIONS. 249 §86. Interjections. 1. The Interjection which denotes an imprecation or cry of distress, is usually connected with ^ following ; e. g. Eccl. X. 1 6. « i*^N «-»0 woe to thee I ii. 1 B. ^n*^\ %aO woe to you ! Matt, xviii. 7; xxiii. 13-16 ; xxiv. 19 ; Ephr. II. 135, E. IjOOUaj ]nSv>S ^o woe to the king of Judahl 274, D. (Al ^^in*»iASOfS 1^0 woe to those who meditate deceit ! 351, 0. wkiOQlQ^ ]jO; or with E appended; e.g. V»0 ^ji^woe to me! Ez. XXX. 2. ]SdQjlL 01 o] woe for the day! sometimes with ^M ; e. g. Jer. 1. 27. |Oai \ \\ «^o woe la you ! or ji, Amira p. 449. |>01 (Ao;^ ^^ OlOf woe to this generation. Without an intervening preposition, they are the usual ex- pressions of grief and mourning, and the noun is then to be taken in the accusative ; e. g. Judges xi. 35. «^2^2 01 o] alas^ my daughter ! Eev.xviii.10,16,19. Rem. — Sometimes Of occurs as an ordinary exclamation, with ^ as a sign of the accusative ; e. g. Barh. 333, 3, 4. As a particle of exclamation sometimes also occurs ^| , properly, verily^ truly ; compare Amira p. 436. 2. Concerning the construction of particular interjections, the following may be observed : a) loi lo ! behold, is frequently pleonastic; e.g. Ephr. III. 149, B. la'^in P2 loi yZoA^O 001 ^oiJct IL^ the mortal body is thus dependent upon the soul ; or at the beginning of a period it serves to give animation to the discourse ; e. g. Ephr. III. 247,0. ^^>ol %MA\Si loi lo ! our brother (member) is separated ; in designations of time, like the Greek rj5r\^ it signifies now, already ; e. g. Matt. iii. 10. ^QukfiD |..;J (Ol (ij^f) Ir^^ ^^ the axe is already laid at the roots of the tree ; Kum. xxii. 28. ,^*mi AjxZ fOl already the third time ; As- sem. I. 369, 30 ; with > ^ following, since that ; e.g. Acts 250 PECULIAEITIES IN THE POSITION OF WORDS. X. 30. 1j1 ^ft? ^ 1^ since that I have fasted ; Col. i. 4 ; preceded by |J (|01 |J , from which comes Q^) ou^'i nonnef e.g.Matt.v.46. ^^^ IjOl *a01 IfOnV) *2i\ loi {] do not even the publicans the same? verse 47; xiii. 27 ; h) ^SQ^far he it, with ^ of the person and j before the fu- ture of the finite verb ; e.g. Matt. xvi. 22. •^;-So ^a^ tiXlM J 01 ^a^ |OOlZ> /ar 6e it from thee^ my lord, that this should hap- pen to thee; Assem 1. 341, A. 30. loÜLo iosiSJj ^ .£qI* far be it from us that we should deny God ; 375, 13. Some- times the participle follows ; e. g. Assem. I. 51, 12, 13. ij«£^j ^Jk «HLm .I.»* far he it from us that we should deny ; the verb follows in the fature,with ^ preceding (=tDJÄ com- pare § 85. 4. c) ; e. g. I Sam. xxiv. 7 ; or in the infinitive with ^ ; e. g. Gen. xliv. 7 ; c) *AQa4 /ia^7./ (= TitlJi^) with sufiix plural, and the noun following with ^, to which the preceding sufiix relates; e.g. Matt. V.3. ^^o\Ci ]inrir>V)\ ^OLuQai hail to the poor in spirit; verses 4-11 ; with a word interposed; e.g. Assem. I. 95, A. 3, 6, V. E. \si^ ^Qlkl» ^ ^V >*^Q^ hail also to thee, Simon Peter ; frequently absolute without ^ ; B. 8. v. E. ^Qjua» öy,iOina4 hail to thee Sichem ; 96, A. 17, 19. — The Hebrew jj^^ is, in the Peshito, expressed by ]-j ; e. g. I Kings xxii. 12. APPENDIX. Peculiarities in the Position of Words. In the position of words, which, as in the Hebrew, is very- easy and natural, besides the peculiarities referred to in the preceding chapters, the following deviations from the usual collocations, occur ; a)the verbs looi and '^\ are interposed PECULIAEITIES IN THE POSITION OF WOKDS. 25l between words, wliich,according to their grammatical connec- tion, cannot be separated ; e. g. Exod. vii. 7. 'r-d \mq^IsD '^^ 1 001 ^jlILdL Moses was eighty years old ; Luke v. 3 ; Exod.v.l6. Q^y\ ^ ^r^\ (1*^No and hricJcs^say they to u-s^make ye. The same is true ; h) of personal pronouns, having the signification of |00l ; e.g. John viii.83.^0l;rD(j -JLm OUjI we are Abraham's seed ; verse 37 ; Heb. vii. 28. |^i »1*^^ fCDOSoi fSaOOO ^ iOV) 1 01-1 ^ 001 2*^ is the law which makes priests of feeble men ; c) more rarely the same occurs with the noun ; e. g. Matt. xvi. 1. ^cul" ]q*jJ> ]ISüs ^ l2V OlS ^JLL]« they besought him that he ivould give them a sign from heaven ; d) more frequently it occurs with particles ; e. g. Mark i. 45. lAl^rSü^ ^QUj AaV>-^ii he shoidd go openly into the city, CJompare loi and loi J] (§ 86. 2. a). EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAE, AND A CHRESTOMATHY, rREPAKED WITH RSFEEENCE TO THE TRANSLATION OP UHLEMANN'S SYRIAC GRAMMAR, BY ENOCH HUTCHINSON. NEW YORK: 1855. Entered accordin«; to Act of Congr. ss. in the year 1855, By E. HUTCHINSON in the Clerk's Office of the District Court for the Sonthe n District of New York. INTRODUCTORY REMARKS, The following Exercises are designed for beginners, who need something simple, and at the same time, something which will lead them into a thorough knowledge of the grammar. A small portion of Syriac, perhaps a page, should be se- lected and carefully analyzed in reference to all the import- ant phenomena of the language. Every peculiarity in res- pect to each word should be critically examined. Perhaps the best course would be to trace one peculiarity throughout the page, searching the grammar and other helps ; then trace another, and so on, until every peculiarity shall have been examined. Thus the most important facts will be strongly impressed upon the memory. The great difficulty, especially with beginners, is. that they often attempt to investigate too many subjects at once and thus do not obtain clear ideas of any. There is fre- quently a great inclination to press forward and translate rapidly. Hence, many important subjects of investigation are entirely neglected, Superficial scholarship, is the un- avoidable result of such a course. That nothing may escape observation, a few general di- rections are presented to aid the learner in making his analysis. In mentioning those points, which are to be ex- amined, the exact order in which they occur in the gram- 251 INTRODUCTORY REMARKS. mar, has not been followed, but they have been so arranged, it is hoped, as best to facilitate the progress of the student ; and they are intended to embrace the most important phen- nomena necessary to be attended to by the learner. Before commencing the examination the pupil should be directed to the Introduction of the grammar, that he may become somewhat acquainted with the history and literature of the Syriac Language. The grammar should be studied rather as a book of reference than as one, which must be committed to memory. The student, at first, should consult it as an aid in analyzing. At the commencement of the an- alysis, he will feel the need of assistance, and that assistance he must find in the grammar. When he there discovers a principle of the language and perceives its application in parsing, he can easily retain it in his memory. By the time that he has carefully studied the Exercises and Chres- tomathy through, he will not only have a considerable knowledge of the language ; but will have most of the gram- mar committed to memjory^ with but very little effort, and no loss of time in learning rules and principles, whose ap- plication he does not perceive, and which consequently are apt to escape from the mind. After the pupil, in the course of his analysis, shall have become somewhat familiar with the grammar, he may recite it regularly through, and it will not be an unmeaning nor an uninteresting exercise. The general divisions, in the Exercises, are marked by the character ^f, to distinguish them from similar divisions in the grammar marked §. Smaller divisions are inserted linder Kemarks and Explanations. 2.F5 GENERAL DIRECTIONS FOR ANALYZING. I. Find the Guttural Ldters on page first of the Chrestomathy. Vid. Gram. § 1. Rem. 3, 4. Ftf J' %B^ II. " " Aspirates, or on what letters Kushoi and Rukok are found. Vid. Gram. § 1. Rem. 4 ; § 5. ?*^2^ö III. " " Diacritical Points, for which the vowels are de- signed to compensate, formerly used instead of vowels and for other purposes. Vid. §§2,3,4, , and Rem. f^^ ^ ^^ IV. " " Lmg and Short Vowels. Vid. § 3. Rem. 3. F - ^^ ^ V. " " Simple QXidi Mixed ?,y\\Bh\(iS. T. li^ VI. " " Pure and Impure, Mutable and Immutable vowels, Vid. §45. A; §48. A. ?. 0,^ VII. " " Dipthongs, Quiescent and Otiant letters. Vid. § 3. Rem. 4; § 13 ; § 14. ? . Tf2 VIII. " " Liime Marhetono, Mehagyono and Sheva. j- 2J'4 IX. " " Linea Occultans. Vid. § 8. P. TlJ X. Find on what syllables the Tmie is to be found. Vid. § 9.1^ ^7^ XL Examine the Mar^5 of P?*wc/?/^^i6m. Vid. § 10. y. %^Q XII. Find Ribui. Vid. § 6. 5! 2 ?Ö XIII. Read the Syriac. f . 1%0 XIV. Translate. f^ 2?^5 XV. Examine the Changes of Consonants — assimilated — trans- posed — dropped — added and exchanged. Vid. §12. 9ö^^^%^ 256 GENERAL DIRECTIONS FOR ANALYZING. XVI. Find the Changes of Vowds — thrown back — exchanged — transposed — dropped and added. Yid. § 15. fa^ 2oi XYII. Find the Suffixes and Prefixes, Sufformatives and JPrefor matives. Yid. § 16 ; § 36 ; § 46. f^>^ ^^^ XYIII. Parse. In respect to Verbs — ascertain whether they are ^^^ Simple or Compound — Their Conjugation — Voice — Ilegvr .... lar or Irregular — Active, Passive or Neuter — Number — Person — Gender — Mood — Tense — Conjugate and Influt them to the Case, Mood, Tense, etc., where they are found— i??^. Yid. § 19., etc.; § 59., etc. Nouns • — Signification — Suffi,x or Prefix — Adjective or Substantive — Derivation and Formation — Declension — Person — Number — Gender — State — Case . Yid . §43; §70; § 44; § n;§ 45; § t3 ; §U; §46; §47; §48; §50; §77., etc. Pronouns — What kind — Person — Number — Gen der — Case— Suffix— Rule. Yid. § 16 ; § 17 ; § 54., etc. Participles — Derivation — Active or Passive — Conjugation —Rule. Adverbs — Primitive or Derivative — ^What they qualify. Yid. § 51 ; § 82. Numerals — Cardinal or Ordinal — Gender — Decline — To what they belong. Prepositions — Suffixes — ^What they govern. Yid § 52; § 84. Conjunctions — ^What kind — Suffix or Prefix — What they connect. Yid. § 53. 1, 2 ; § 85. Inter jedions — ^Primitive or Derivative. Yid. § 53. 3; § 86. 257 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR I, EXERCISE FIRST. ViD. Gram. § 1. Kem. 3, i. IT 1. Find the Chitturals mi the first jpage of the Chrestomathy. t^H-^L. J*-^ 5 1. Select all those letters which are ever used as Gutturals; thus: loioi]loillcncnlloilloi]]oioiloi]oi lloioil loi"|loioilioill**loicnoi]oija loi]cnij^oill1 oiloiioi1oil* as well as ^, sometimes by Spiritus asper, and sometimes by 7. usually %j^ is sounded like hh with a rolling of the palate. 01 before a vowel is our h (Spiritus asper); but when uttered after a vowel, it has nearly the sound of h in Korahy perhaps a little softer, as in ah ! oh ! It is difficult to ascertain exactly the sounds of these letters ; still it is important that the learner should fix upon a definite pronunciation of each. 2. Find those letters which are here used as gutturals. 011jg»01Cn0101G10l01G101010101 01* EXPLANATIONS. l>^.f-^ 5/5 a) Verse 3. word 3., (31 is a guttural, as it would in Hebrew take a composite sheva, and it has no vowel of its own. (Some would perhaps prefer to call Ol a regular movable consonant, and consider I at the end of the word as otiant, and O as quiescing b) Verse 3. word 4., 1 is a guttural for the same reasons. c) Verse 3. word 6., ** is a guttural for the same reasons. d) Verse 4. word 6., 01 is a guttural being movable. It be- longs to the second syllable of the word, being preceded by a vowel (§ 15. 4. d). The other cases maybe similarly explained. Rem.-— It should be remarked that there are some other guttural letters on the first page of the chrestomathy, which should be con- EXELRCISE FIRST — GUTTURAL LETTERS. 259 sidered merely as movable consonants. It is true that all gutturals are sounded, and might be said to be movable consonants (com- pare Gesen. Heb. Gram., transl. by Conant, §23.2). Still we prefer to make a difference between gutturals and regular movable con- sonants. The latter, though guttural letters on page first, are the following : 3. Find those guttural letters wliicli are regular movable consonants : ]cn11oioi1oioilloioiloioiA*A*'|oi OlM.CnAj1oi|onL01j^Ol|GllOlG101|Gl EXPLANATIONS. iT^f- B/5 a) Yerse 1. word 2., ] is a regular movable consonant, and is sounded nearly like the vowel — , and does not quiesce in its vowel. In dialects kindred to the Hebrew, ] melts in- to the vowel far more readily than the sound of the Hebrew i^ melts into its vowel. Still ] retains its power as a movable consonant. It is very common in Syriac for a guttural let- ter to take a long vowel, where in Hebrew, it would have a composite Sheva. This seldom occurs in Hebrew (vid.Ges- enius' Heb. Gram, by Conant. § 23. 2. Bern. 2). b) V. 1. w. 5., 01 is movable, as it does not quiesce and is not otiant. c) Y. 1. w. 8., o (not a guttural) is movable, as the pre- ceding letter is not sounded, and the foUovang one is quiescent. d) Y. 1. w.lO., 1 should be considered as movable though its sound so melts into the vowel, we can scarcely perceive that it has the power of a consonant. 260 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. e) y. 1. w. 11., 1 is not movable, as it quiesces, though seldom, in — (§ 13. 1. Eem). /) y. 1. w. 11., Ol is movable for the same reasons as others above. — preceding it, belongs to the previous sylla- ble (comp, t 5. 1. f; § 15. 4. d). g) y. 3. w. 2., 01 is movable as it is a suffix, and = j:; of the Hebrew (§ 13. Eem.). h) y. 9. w. 9., 1 is movable as it has a vowel of its own, though it so flows into the sound of the vowel that it is scarcely perceptible (Tf 1. 1. b). Rem. — It should be remarked that two of the guttural letters | and 01 are sometimes used as quiescents and sometimes as otiant letters (§ 12. A. B. and Rem.; § 13; §14). IT. EXERCISE SECOND. Find the Aspirates or in what letters Kushoi (^aaOO a hard- ening^ and Ruhok {yDOj) a softening are found. 1. Those which are ever aspirated (§ 1. Rem. 3). • • • • 2. Find those, which are aspirated on page first (§5. and Rem. by Tr.). AAAAA2AAAqAZ,.q r Si r L rLy a dD • ■ • • * EXERCISE SECOND — ASPIRATES. 261 EXPLANATIONS, f^f^ ^'^ a) Verse 1. word 1., A is aspirated as it closes the syllable (§5. 2. Rem. c. a), b) V.l. W.2., A is aspii*ated as it follows an open or sim- ple syllable (§ 5. 2. Rem. c. c., and § 15. 4. d). c) V. 1 . W.4., A is aspirated, because a letter, which would in Hebrew, take a vocal Sheva, precedes it (§ 5. 2. Rem. c. b). d) V. 2. w. 4., Ö is aspirated as the preceding word ends with 1 (§5. 2. Rem.«). e) V.3. W.2., r is aspirated as it follows an open syllable (§ 5. 2. Rem. c. c). /) V.3. W.4., Q is aspirated because it follows a letter which would in Hebrew take a vocal Sheva, (§ 5. 2. Rem. c.b). g) V.3. W.4., r is aspirated as it is preceded by a letter which would in Ilebrew take a composite Sheva and would of course be vocal (§5. 2. Rem. c. b). h) V.3. W.5., 2) is aspirated as it follows an open syllable (§ 5. 2. Rem. c. c). i) V.4. W.7., ? is aspirated as the preceding word ends in ] (§5. 2. Rem. a). k) V.4. W.7., Q is aspirated as it closes a syllable (§ 5. 2. Rem. c. a). I) V.7. W.4., J is aspirated as it closes a syllable (§ 5. 2. Rem. c. a). m ) V.lO. w. 4., r is aspirated as it follows an open sylla- ble (§ 5. 2. Rem. c. c). 3. Find those which are not aspirated' EXPLANATIONS. *^- ^-«^3/3 a) Verse 1. word 1., o is not aspirated as it begins a word (§5. 2. Rem. a). 262 EXERCISES IN- SYRIAC GRAMMAR h) Y.4. W.I., Ö is not aspirated though it is preceded hj) (^5. 2. Kem.fl), because it begins a verse. c) Y.ß W.8., A is not aspirated as it is preceded by a let- ter, which, in Hebrew, would not take a vocal Sheva, and which has no vowel (§ 5.2. Note by Tr.). d) For the pronunciation of these aspirates see the Alph- abet, and § 1. Rem. 3, 4. Rem. — a when aspirated is sounded like v, and when not aspira- ted like ^ ; r ^^^^ ^^ ^^ '^'^^ when aspirated, but otherwise hke d ; £) when aspirated is sounded like ph or /, and otherwise like p ; L when aspirated like th in thin, in other situations like t; .• is sounded like r/ hard whether it be aspirated or not * ; a when aspirated is sounded like hh or k with a rolling of the palate ; in other situations like k. In general the aspirates are pronounced like the corresponding letters in Hebrew (vid. referenc- es above and Gesenius' Hebrew Grammar by Conant, § 6. 2. 3. and Kote by Tr.). nr. EXERCISE THIRD. 1 3. ( § 2 ; § 3 ; § 4 and Rem). Find the diacritical points for which the vowels are designed to compensate, formerly nsed instead of vowels and for other purposes : • VAI ooio VaI 001 VaI •^IL looi *2ooi looiJ IcSoi ooio looi 12] J^ 001 locn 1 2l| looi J{^ looi« * The aspiration of »t would be indicated by the rolling of the palate. ^ EXERCISE THIRD — DIACRITICAL POINTS. 263 EXPLANATIONS. Rem. 1. — Diacritical points sometimes mark particular tenses and persons of verbs (§ 4. Rem.). Rem. 2. — The vowel system of the Syrians began to be introduced in the time of Mohammed. Then and even after the system was completed by introrlucing cliaracters from the Greek vowels, the ancient diacritical points were used to some extent by many writers. They are now seen in the more ancient writings. Rem. 3. — The diacritical points here presented and others, appear in ancient Syriac writings, perhaps from the fact that they have been copied from more ancient editions, and in some cases doubt- less, directly from the oldest editions of the Peshito. The several editions have been copied with so much care, that even after the vowel system came into use, the diacritical points, which had been used long before, were copied as well as the more recent vowels. Thus appear sometimes two characters to represent one vowel sound. As later editions have appeared, however, those points have gradu- ally been omitted and vowels substituted, though, some remnants of the old system are still left (§2; §3; §4). ^'«5 a) Verse 1. word -4,, lA^» The diacritical point under \ ^according to the principles laid down byLudov. deDieii)indi- cates the vowel — ♦ We have then here the vowel and the ancient diacritical point for which the vowel compensates (§4. Rem.). b) V.l. w. 5., 0010« The point under Ol, according to Amira, indicates — (§4.Rem.). c) V.3. w. 2., wi^O» The point under «a indicates, ac- cording to Ludov. de Dieu, the vowel — (§4. Rem.). d) V.3. w. 3., looi» Diacritical points are often placed under and over the radical letters of verbs, sometimes to dis- tinguish particular persons and sometimes to indicate vowels (vid. T" 3. Rem. 1). In the imperative and infinitive it may- be wholly omitted or inserted underneath (vid. §4:.Rem.; al- so compare Hoffmann's Syriac Gram. § 14). 264 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. X\r. EXEKCISE FOURTH. 1 4 Find the Long and Short vovjels (§ 8. Rem, 8). I. Find tlie Long ones : z a: I 4« 1» 9 9 P I K ■» r P X I f I •n 9 9 > « ft * - *>. 9 » «. - «V > ^ •k p ^ * ^ 9 JL « «^ » ± f> 9 t > K » i> *. T. « *. «^ P 1» K 9 r 9 * ^ ■»> 9 » 9 9 9 •»> 9 f 9 EXPLANATIONS. fs^ 3/5 a) Yerse 1. word 1., _i _JL are both long as they are fol- lowed by ^ quiescent (§ 3. Rem. 3. b). b) Y.l. W.5., ^ is long because o quiesces in it. c) Y. 1. w. 11., _L is long as it has a quiescent (§13. 1. Rem.). The other instances need no explanation. 2. Find the Short vowels : r f ' 7 *- 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 *. 7 EXERCISE FIFTH — SIMPLE SYLLABLES. 265 EXPLANATIONS. ^313 a) Verse 1. word 2., _L is short as it is a regular short vowel. t) V. 1. w. 10., JL is short as Olaph is movable, not quiescing. c) V. 3. w. 1., JL is short as it has not O quiescing in it (§3. Rem.3). 7 Rem. — In v.l. w.2., .— and several other short vowels on page first, form dipthongs with O and «ji* These quiescent letters do not fully coalesce with their respective vowels ; but melt into them to a greater extent than they would do in Hebrew, under similar cir- cumstances. They can scarcely, therefore, be considered as mov- able consonants, as they would be in Hebrew. Still the vowels in these cases are heterogeneous and the quiescents do not suflSciently coalesce, in our estimation, to make the vowels long (vid. Gesen. Heb. Grani. by Conant, § 8. 4 ; Uhlemann § l.Rem.4). V: EXERCISE FIFTH. 1 5. Find the Simple and Mixed Sylldbles (§15. 3 and 4). I. Find the Simple Syllables : ^•b *^f oA Vooi i Ta^ ooio i VA^ ^T o^ Iboi f 'li loi 1o 1!^ loi J^ o\ looi 001 So lAL oi ]j J(o\ looi ^>o I '^ loi li loCT ^O ^ Or VW^) Ijl* LO IC) ZXl, ]boi A^oll ^1 ^L OJ 1)01 ^jj. Jl l« 0010 OJ 1)01 mO QA P mO o» 266 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. EXPLANATIONS. Rem.— A simple syllable terminates in a vowel sound, and that vowel sometimes has a vowel letter quiescing in it. A mixed syll- able terminates in one or more movable consonants. Every vowel stands in a simple syllable when the following consonant takes a vowel. z a) Yerse 1. word 1., %*;jD is a simple syllable as it ends in a vowel sound, although it has a quiescent ; m. has a vowel of its own and is of course sounded with the following syllable (vid. t 5. 1. Eem., and § 15. 4. d). b) Y.l. W.2., ^\ is simple for the same reason as last, the syllable ending with «a and not with A (vid. §15. 4.d). c) Y.l. W.2., oA is a dip thong and should be considered, we think, as a simple syllable because o coalesces in the vowel to such an extent that the syllable ends in a vowel sound, though the coalescence is not so perfect as in a regu- lar case of quiescence. Some may regard O as a movable consonant as it would be in Hebrew, under similar circum- stances, but we incline to the former opinion (vid. •J'4. 2. Rem. ; Ges^.n. Heb.Gram. by Conant, § 8.4). d) Y.l. W.4., So is simple (vid. reference above). e) Y.l.w,4., lA^ is simple, 1 quiescing in — • /) Y.l. W.5., 0010 is simple, the last O quiescing. g) Y.l. w.lO., 1 is simple as !L which follows Olaph has a vowel of its own. h) Y.l. W.U., lo is simple, Olaph quiescing in — , though it seldom quiesces in that vowel (vid §13.1 Rem. ; compare 1 1. 3. e). _ i) Y. 3. W.2., la is simple, 1 quiescing in — and «ii being otiant. EXERCISE FIFTH — MIXED SYLLABLES. 267 h) V.3. W.5., ] is simple as — is a long vowel and 2) be- longs to the next syllable (§15. 4. d). T) Y.4. W.5., «aA is a dipthong and ends in a vowel sound as %j melts into the vowel to such an extent that it can hard- ly be considered as a movable consonant as it would be in Hebrew. We choose then to place the syllable among simple ones ; «-iJi in verse 4. word 7., and wiOl in verse 7. word 8, are similar instances (vid.T"4.2.Eem. ; T^ö.l.c). *■ . . *^ . . m) V.4. W.6., QJ is simple as O quiesces in — making it a long vowel, and 01 belongs to the next syllable (§l5.4.d). ?i) V.7. W.3., £Q^ is simple as 01 belongs to the penult svllable and follows a long vowel (§15.4. d. ; compare % 1. 2. d). 2. Find the Mixed Syllables : LJm. ZqI Luk Zq^ ^ oi"r» 'Zooi }>o^ 01> Ol-£ .001 dJ Ik) JOl >| Ol Q 'rO >> ^ OlSü* ^ EQ-JJ joi \yA lo wAi ^^ oiy £Q-J? joi \y^ Ja-y. ^> J-SDJ , 7 • -Xt a t\ 7 IS 901 ^OJ^ «A-1 Olr r*^ Olu.1 ♦ EXPLANATIONS. a) Yerse 1. word 1., A^* is mixed as it ends with a con- sonant sound (vid. T 5.1. Rem.). b) Y.l. w. 9., Zq^ is mixed, ending in a consonant sound (vid. 1" 5. l.Rem.). c) Y.3. W.2., Olr is mixed as 01 -= ;p^ in Hebrew and is of course movable (§ 13. Rem.). d) Y.7. W.7., ^> is mixed as — is short when o does not quiesce in it, and the following consonant has no vowel (vid. §I5.4,and§3.Rem.3). 268 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. Vr. EXEECISE SIXTH. 1" 6. Find the Pure, Impure, Mutable and Immutable vowels (§45.^; §48. A). 1. Find tlie Pure vowels : EXPLANATIONS. Rem. a pure vowel, is one with which no consonant colesces. An impure vowel is one with which a consonant coalesces. r#^ 3/5 a) Yerse 1. word 2., — is pure* as the syllable oA is a dipthong (vid. g 3. Rem. 4 : also Palfrey's Gram. § 2), and O does not fully quiesce in _!_, though it so far coalesces that it can hardly be considered as a movable consonant. Still as the vowel is a heterogeneous one and O does not fully coalesce in it, we scarcely feel authorized to place the vowel among the impure ones, though some may prefer to do so, (vid. Tf 4. 2. Rem. ; T"5. 1. c. and 1 ; Gesenius' Heb. Gram- mar by Conant, § 8.4 ; compare §15. 4. d; also T 6.2. Rem., andT 6.1. Rem.). h) y.l. W.9., — is pure as o does not quiesce in it, being a movable consonant and -^ preceding being pronounced with a vocal sheva. * It is also mutable ( ^ 6. 4. b ). EXERCISE SIXTH — IMPURE VOWELS. 269 7 c) v.l. w. 10., — is pure as Olapli does not quiesce in that vowel. Olaph is here a movable consonant according to the analogy of the Hebrew (vid.§l. Rem.4.;also Gesenius' Heb. Gram, by Conant, §23.2). d) Y.3. W.5., — (the first one) is pure f as f being a movable consonant does not quiesce in _L (vid. last referen- ces). e) Y.3. W.7., — is pure as O is movable, cri being souud- ed as if it had Sheva, and forming a part of the syllable. f) Y.3. W.9., — is pure and immutable as 01 does not quiesce in it, being a guttural (comp. Tf I. 2. a). g) V.4. W.5., — is pure as ^A is a dipthong (vid. a above). h) Y.7. W.3., — is pure as Ol is a guttural. i) Y.7. W.9., — is pure as CTl is = ^ in Hebrew and is of course a movable consonant (vid. §13. Rem. JL is also mu- table according to the general rule (^[6. 2. Rem.). 2. Find the Impure vou^els : O'KOQ^OIO'h'y.p DTi 00 00010 EXPLANATIONS. Zih a) Yerse 1. word 1., — and — are both impure vowels as they have %a quiescing in them. f _«_ is also immutable ( ^ 6. 4 ). 270 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. h) Y.l. W.3., — is impure as 1 qniesces in it (compare T 6. 1. e). c) Y.l. W.U., ■ — is impure asOlapli quiesces m it, thougli it does not often quiesce in that vowel ( § 13. 1 and Eem.). The other cases are similarly explained. Rem.^ — As a general thing, those vowels, which are pure are mut- able and those which are impure are immutable ; hut there are as in Hebrew many exceptions (vid. ^ 6. 1. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i). 3. Find the Mutable vowels (compare % 6. 2 Rem.) : EXPLANATIONS. / ^ ^^ a) Yerse 1. word 10., — ■ is mutable (also pure, according to the general rule (vid. T 6. 1. c ) as it is in a simple sylla- ble (compare T 6. 4. d). b) Y.3. W.2., — is mutable as it has no quiescent and is long. 7 c) Y.4. W.2., • — is mutable as it is in a simple sylla- ble. 4. Find tbe Immutable vowels *. p '■\ S I y t)^ 9 i>0779^0i0i>*.'>7 EXERCISE SEVENTH — ^DIPTHONGS. 271 EXPL A.N ATIONS. Rem. — Those vowels are iramutable,as in Hebrew ; in which either a vowel letter quieeces; or from which a vowel letter has fallen away; short vowels in mixed syllables which would inHebrew takeDaghesh forte; and vowels immutable by nature. X X a) Yerse 1. word 1., are botli immutable as well as impure, having quiescents. b) V.l. W.2., — is in a simple syllable, is pure, and cannot properly be considered as immutable though O coalesces with it to some extent (vid. T4.2.Rem. ; T5.1.C; T6.1.a). c) Y.I.W.4., — over So is immutable by position as VA^ is derived from ^Siio a Ml verb, and the 1 is in reality doubled and the first would, if expressed, take Linea occultans. This is similar to Daghesh forte in Hebrew, and makes, as in that language, the preceding vowel impure and immutable (compare §48.B.Feminines). d) V.l. w.lO., — is short but in a simple syllable ( T5. 1 . g) and consequently not immutable. e) V.l. w.lO., — (the first one) is immutable by nature (48. A. Masculines) ; it is sometimes, however, like all the other vowels, mutable (vid.§ 15.1.b ; § 45.2.b) as in Ilebrew (vid. Stuarts' Heb. Gram. §127). /) V.l. w.ll, — is immutable as 1 quiescesin it ( T 6. 2. c). g) V.o. W.I., — is immutable as it is in a short mixed syllable. 272 EXERCISES IN SYRIAO GRAMMAR. EXEEOISE SEVENTH. t 7. Find the Dipihongs. Quiescents and Otiant Letlers {%^.RemA ; §13; §14). I. Find the Dipthongs (§ 3. Eem. 4 ; Palfrey's Gram. § 2) : O— . O.— O O O a Jk — A 0_ ♦ EXPLANATIONS: a) Yerse 1. word 2., o is a dipthong as o is in tlie same syllable with _l without fully quiescing in it, though O so melts into the vowel that the syllable may be consider- ed as ending in a vowel sound (vid. •[4.2.Kem.; •[[5. 1. c and 1; Gesen.Heb.Gram. by Conant, §8. 4). 7 h) V.3. W.4., o is a dipthong for the same reason as last. c) V.4. W.5., A is a dipthong as a unites with -« but does not fully quiesce in it (vid. references above). Rem. It will be observed that dipthongs in Syriac as well as in Hebrew, are quiescent letters with heterogeneous vowels ; but in Hebrew the quiescent letters are movable while the reverse is true in Syriac. 2. Find the Qidescents : -* -Hol -1 111 ..1 ou - 1- *n uinu-oQUoQiQiQnni a EXERCISE SEVENTH — OTIANTS. 278 n o lal U o 1 aUal^ 1 ^ ainiUl EXPLANATIONS: a) Verse 1. word 1., *ji is a quiescent as it unites with the sound of the preceding vowel (§13.3). b) y.l. W.2., O is a regular quiescent letter ; but does not here fully quiesce, though it forms a dipthong and so melts into the vowel that the syllable may be considered as ending with a vowel sound (vid. T"7.1.a). c) y.l. W.3., O is not quiescent as it is a movable conson- ant, 01 not being sounded. The following f however qui- esces in the preceding vowel. d) V-1. W.5., O (the first one) is movable as it would in Hebrew take a vocal Sheva ; the second O quiesces e) Y.l. W.9., Q does not quiesce in — as it is movable (vid. 16. l.b). /) V.l. w.u., 1 quiesces in — though it is rather un- usual (§13. l.Rem.). g) V.8. W.2., \ quiesces in — ♦ 3. Find the Otiant Letters a) Verse 1. word 2., »^ is otiant as it is a part of the suf- fix and is not followed by 001 (vid. § 14. 2. b). h) V.3. W.2., %A is otiant because it follows a quiescent. 974 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. EXEECISE EIGHTH. FindLineoß Marhetono (U^01;Sd), Mehogyono (1l.»...cnLo), and Sheva, where there is no accumulation of consonants. 1. Find instances of Marhetono and Mehagyono : EXPLANATIONS: a) Yerse 5. word 7., >>♦ Here is an accumulation of con- sonants,and to indicate that they could not all be sounded con- veniently, Marhetono (or a horizontal line) would regularly be placed over j ♦ In this case the > would in Hebrew take silent Sheva. > must of course be pronounced with a vocal Sheva (vid.§7). Rem. — 1. There seems to be no instance of Mehagyono on the first page. A.T.Hoffmann in his SyriacGrammar gives lA^>*j as an instance. The a» is to be sounded as though a short e followed it (vid. § 7). Rem. — 2. It appears that Marhetono indicates silent Sheva when there is an accumulation of vowelless consonants,but under no other circumstances, though silent Sheva, in reality, frequently occurs as in Hebrew. So Mehagyono represents vocal Sheva only when there is a similar accumulation of vowelless consonants,though when there is no accumulation vocal Sheva often occurs. 2. Find instances of Simple vocal Sheva : EXERCISE EIGHTH — VOCAL SHEVA. 275 EXPLANATIONS. a) Yerse 1. word 1., o would, in Ilebrew, take a vocal Sheva, and as it cannot well be pronounced without the aid of a vowel or half vowel we must use the Sheva, This can- not be considered as an instance of Mehagyöno, for there is no accumulation of consonants which are destitute of vowels (vid. § 7). According to Lud. de Dieu and Norberg, the Syrians did use the Sheva and pronounced consonants ac- cordingly, as in Hebrew (vid. §5.1). 6) Y. 1. W.4., ^ should be pronounced with a vocal She- va like s under a (vid. references above). Rem. — We find no characters to indicate Sheva and seldom any to indicate Marhetono and Mehagyouo, still we are to pronounce the consonants where those characters would regularly occur, as we should if they had actually appeared. c) Y.3. W.5., 2) is pronounced with a Sheva. The pre- ceding syllable being simple, 2) belongs to the final syll- able. d) Y.3. W.9., 01 makes a part of the first syllable of the word and should not be pronounced with vocal Sheva. e) ^ ,^, W.3., » is pronounced with a vocal Sheva as it constitutes a part of the penultimate syllable, being preceded by a long vowel (§ 15.4). /) Y.9. W.9., ^ should be pronounced with a vocal Sheva (vid. last reference). 3. Find the silent Shevas, wliere there is no ac. cumulation of consonants destitute of vowels : EXPLANATIONS. a) Verse 1. word 1., A would regularly in Hebrew take a 276 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. silent Sheva (vid. Conants' Gesen. Ileb.Gram. §10 ; also 18. 2. a. b and Kem.). h) Y.l. W.2., O would in Hebrew take a silent Slieva, be- ing a movable consonant at the end of a syllable ; but in Syriac it so melts into its vowel, that the syllable may be con- sidered as terminating in a vowel sound, and O does not take silent Sheva (vid. T 4. 2. Eem. ; comp, references above). c) Y.3. W.I., ^ takes silent Sheva as it closes a sylla- ble. d) Y.3. W.2., 01 is a movable consonant at the end of a syllable being equivalent to jrj in Hebrew and takes silent Sheva. e) Y.3. W.9., Ol is at the end of a mixed syllable with a short vowel, and takes silent Sheva though a guttural (vid. T"8.4.d; T6.1.f ; comp. Gesen. Heb. Gram, by Conant, §22. 8). 7 /) Y.4. W.5., a forms with the vowel — a dipthong. It would in Hebrew be pronounced as a movable consonant and take a silent Sheva ; but in Syriac it so melts into its vowel that it can hardly be considered as a movable con- sonant a,nd does not take a silent Sheva (vid. ^"4. 2. Rem.; 18.3.b). g) Y.9.W.5., %» takes a silent Sheva as it is preceded by a short vowel and ends the antepenultimate syllable. 4. Find instances of Oomposite Slieva : 01aj0101O1O1010101O10101010101» a) Yerse 3. word.3., 01 would in Hebrew take a compo- site Sheva and is pronounced as though it did here (vid. Gesen. Heb. Grammar by Conant, §22. 8.; •|ri.2.a). h) Yerse 3. w.6., ** takes composite sheva for similar rea- sons as in the case above. EXERCISE NINTH — LINEA OCCÜLTANS. 277 c) V.3.W.9., Ol does not take composite Sheva but silent Sheva simple as in Hebrew. The Gutturals take simple Sheva where other consonants would take silent Sheva (Gesen.Heb.Gram. by Conant,§22.8). d)YÄ. W.6., 01 takes composite Sheva (vid. a above). EXERCISE NINTH. 19. Find instances of Linea Occultans (§8) : 01010101010101G1010101* EXPLANATIONS. a) Verse 1. word 2., Ol is an instance of Linea occultans, indicating that the 01 is not sounded (vid. §8; §12.1. A. and B., also Rem.). h) Y.l. W.3., Ol is another instance of Linea occultans. The horizontal line under 01 shows that the letter is not to be pronounced. In this case o begins the syllable. The othe cases are similarly explained. 278 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. EXERCISE TENTH. t 10. Find on wliat Syllables the Tone rests (§ 9) : LkM ^X looi ^ 0010 Sd ^X looi ioL 'li 'Ik «jiV looi 001 k) 01 ^1 looi Aa.a Zq^ ^ \^ oir looi 1 1 IrM ZOOI LOr 01> OL-TD ja loOl aj ^001 QJ 1 0010 QJ Q* )OI QA IJ 01.2 looi J 9> ^ ^ OISQ» ^X 01 1 0> >0l \^ QJ u^ ^Lo oir U 001 looi QJ 1 )0i \y2k Q-J ^ looi ;am. O-J «r 901 «A.! l9 il lO loOl 10 Olr loOl 10 |J EXPLANATIONS. a) Yerse 1. word 1., Ala is the final syllable and takes the tone because it ends with a movable consonant ( §9.1 and 2). ^x b) V.l. W.2., %a1 takes the tone, as o in the final syllable ok is not movable (vid. T4. 2. Rem.; T8. 3. b ; §9.1 and 2). Ol and «^ are not sounded. c) Y.l. W.4., k) is the penultimate syllable and has the tone according to the general rule (§9.1). d) V.3. W.2., Oif is the final syllable and takes the tone because 01 is movable. EXEECISE ELEVENTH — MARKS OF PUNCTUATION. 279 e) y.3. W.5., 1 is tlie penultimate and takes tlie tone. Si belongs to the last syllable (§15. 4. d). /) Y.4. W.5., tOOi takes the tone because it ends with a movable consonant. g) Y.6. W.3., Qm is inserted above as receiving the tone according to the general rule, though it is somewhat doubt- ful whether, in such cases the tone was on the penultimate or ultimate syllable (§ 9. 1. Rem.). Euphony would seem to favor the former opinion ; there is another instance of the same kind in v.7. w.3. EXERCISE ELEVENTH. 1 11. Find the Marks of Punctuation (§10) : •.♦/♦♦♦♦♦•.♦♦♦♦ EXPLANATIONS. a) Yerse 1. word 4., ♦ is a mark of punctuation more gen- erally used to denote the end of a period, but sometimes used in the middle to denote a slight pause similar perhaps to our comma. It is used so here (§l0.d). b) V.L W.15., ♦ denotes the full close of the period. c) y.5. W.4., • indicates the end of the protasis (§10.a). d) Y.5. W.7., ♦ is supposed to indicate the longest pause of any mark of punctuation. It is sometimes written thus ♦♦ (§10.c). e) Y.6. W.5., / indicates the end of the apodosis(vid.§10.c). 280 EXERCISES IN SYHIAC GRAMMAR. EXEEOISE TWELFTH. t 12. Pmd instances of Mihui (§6) : EXPLANATIONS. a) Yerse 3. word 4., ** over the word is an instance of Bibui indicating tliat the preposition has a plural suffix (§ e.l.Eem.; §16.C). fc) Y.4. W.2., here Ribui indicates that the noun over which it is placed is in the plural number though it is ren- dered as if it were in the singular. This word occurs only in the plural form (§44.Rem.6). The same is true in respect to V.4. W.4. c) Y.4,w.7., Ribui indicates simply the plural form of the noun as above. EXERCISE THIRTEENTH. t 13. Read the Syriac : r / Yerse 1., B^rishlth aithau vo meletho v%ü m^l^ho aithau vo l^voth aloho. valoho aithau vo hü mel^'thö. EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. 281 / f ft --/^ - / - ^-- V. 2., nono aithau vo v^risliiitli l®voth aloho. .. J _, ^ ... _ V. 8., kul bidheh hli«vo v*vel«odliau oph«lo hh^dho hh^voth w _ medh^m dahhvo. / / / / m V. 4., beh hhaye lili«vo. v^liliaye aithayhun nuh'^ro dhavnaynosho. " " / -' - - - - V i ^ i V. 5., v®liu nuh«ro v^hheshuko manliar*. v^liliesliiiko lo adhr<^keh<* V. 6., lili*'vo varnosho dheshtadhar m^n aloho*» sli®m6h yulihanon. V. 7., bono etho l^-'soh^dhutlio dh^nashedh al nuli*ro, / - .. .. - .. ., d^kulnosh n*liaymen bidheh. V. 8. 5 lo hu h^vo nuh^ro. elo dh^nashedh al nuh®ro. / / / / / / V. 9., aithau vo ger nuh^ro dhashroro-.dh^manhar l^kulnosh / _ - - detho PoPmo. V. lO.jb^ol^mo h®vo. v^ol^mo vidhehh^vo. v®ol®mo lo yadheh. EXPLANATIONS. X a) Verse 1. word 1., «-»r^ is the first syllable, «Ä not mak- ing a syllable of itself. The ® answers to the Sheva in He- brew, and is pronounced like a very short e. J) V. 1. w. 2., »-if is perhaps best pronounced like a'l, 7. though the a sound is scarcely perceivable. In oA, o hav- ing a heterogeneous vowel, does not fully quiesce, still it so melts into the vowel that it can hardly be considered as a 282 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. movable consonant (vid l4.2.Rem.). 01 is not souniod as it takes Linea occiiltans (§8) and the %ji is otiant (§ 14. 2). c) y.l. W.3., looi« Ol is not sounded on account of Linea occultans, and O becomes vocal by beginning a syllable. d) y.l. w.lO., X is pronounced a, Olaph so unites with the a sound that it is scarcely "perceivable in pronun- ciation, though being at the beginning of a syllable it is a regular movable consonant. It is at the same time a gut- tural letter and must have the sound of the Spiritus lenis of the Greeks (vid. Tfl.2.Rem.). e) V.l. W.U., !©♦ _L is pronounced broad and long as it has a quiescent (§13.1. Rem.). /) Y.^. W.I., ^^ is pronounced thus : hul^ u taking the broad and short sound. The JL, is short here as it has no quiescent (vid. §3. Rem. 3). g) Y.3.W.2., Oipu'lo bidheh. 1 quiesces in -^, and •^ is otiant. 01 is a movable consonant though a guttural letter. h) V.3.W.4., vVel^othau. ^ must be sounded with a vocal Sheva (vid. T[8.2). r being preceded by a vowel is as- pirated. «^ as well as Ol Is otiant. i) y.3. W.9., (ooij dahhvo. 01 is movable and pronoun- ced with the first syllable. _L has a broad and short sound. y ) Y.4. W.5., «-*A thay. — is short and broad as it has no quiescent though «^ so melts into the vowel that it can hardly be considered as a movable consonant (vid. T 4. 2. Rem.). k) Y.6.W.L, |ooi hh®vo. 01 is pronounced with Sheva. is vocal and | quiesces in .i_ ♦ EXERCISE FOURTEENTH — TRANSLATION. 283 EXEKCISE FOURTEENTH. t 14 Translate Literally : Verse 1. In (the) beginning was (the) "Word and he (or it the) Word was with God and God was he or it (the) Word. 2. This was in (the) beginning with God. 3. Every (thing) by (the) hand of him was ; and without him also not anything was which was. 4. In him life (lit. lives) was, and life was (lit. lives were) (the) light of (the) sons of man. 5. And he (or it) light, into (the) darkness, shin- eth (lit. causing or permitting to shine §23.2.a.^), and (the) darkness did not comprehend it. 6. (There) was a son of man, who was sent from> God, whose name (lit. the name of him) (was) John. 7. This (man) came for a witness, who shall (should) bear witness concerning (the) light, that eve- ry man might believe through (the) hand of him. 8. He was not (lit. not he was) (the) light ; but (came for a witness) who might bear witness concern- ing (the) light. 284 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. 9. For (that light) was (the) light of truth, which shineth upon every man, who cometh into (the) world. 10. (He) was in (the) world (lit. in the world was) and (the) world was by his hand and (the) world did not know him. EXPLANATIONS: a) Verse 1. word 1., LJ^'fJOi* In translating this word, the IS supplied. There is no distinct character in Syriac for the definite article. It was originally expressed by the noun in the emphatic state ; but this is by no means uni- versal in laterSjriac. There are many cases, as in Uebrew, in which the definit>e and indefinite articles have no word nor character to represent them, and they must be supplied in translating (§45.1). b) V-1- W.2 and3., looi ^^oloAaf was. The substan- tive verb |ooi to be,m connection with the other substantive verb La] to be, (third person masculine %j01oAji1) forms the imperfect tense, was (§38.1,2). c) Y.l. W.5., oqio* 001 is a pronoun of the masculine gender. It is pleonastic and need not be rendered (§55). As the neuter gender in Syriac is included in the masculine and feminine ooi might be considered either as neuter or masculine and may mean he or it (§43). 001 is rendered was, and is in the imperfect without *jiOioAu1 (vid. §65.B.a). e) Y.3. W.7., Zooi is rendered was, same as last. The same is true in respect to 1ooi> (v. 3. w.9). /) Y.3. W.6., IrJs* and ioilk) (v.3. w.8) should be taken together. The first means any and the second something or EXERCISE FIFTEENTH — CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 285 thing. Taken together they should be rendered any thing, g) YA. W.2., V-'.abJa is rendered life. The noun always takes the plural form though it usually takes a singular meaning and has sometimes a singular and sometimes a plu- ral verb. Here it takes a verb singular and in v.4. w.4., a verb plural. h) Y.5. W.4., >ai2io is a participle ; but it is used instead of the present tense of the verb (§64.2. A. andKem. ; also T 18.5). i) Y.ß. W.3., >?A*1j means (lit.) is sent; but with loOl it forms the imperfect tense. EXEKCISE FIFTEENTH. t 15. Find the Changes of Consonants — Assimilated — Transposed — Dropped — Added — Exchanged (§12). 1. Find those which are changed by assimilor tion : All of those letters which take Linea occultans, are in re- ality assimilated (vid. §12. and ^"9). 2. Find tliose whicli are changed by i/ransposir tion : Lm EXPLANATIONS. a) Yerse 6. word 8., >>A»1> is in the Ethpa. conjugation 286 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAB. and M and A are transposed, the appropriate place for A be ing before* (§12.2). 3. Find tliose Consonants wliicli tave been dropped : EXPLANATIONS. a) Yerse 1. word 4., lAÜi^ is from flso, const. A^lo* ] is dropped. b) y.3. w.^.^ oip-alo* ] final is dropped to give place for tbe suffix. c) Y.3. W.7., Zocn» 1 is dropped to form the feminine (§37 Table). d) Y.4. W.7., \m\ iin?» f is dropped before the second J. e) Y.5. W.4., >C7lik)« 1 is dropped after the preforma- tive Sd* /) Y.7. W.7., and v.9. w. 7., *«iSnn ] is dropped be- fore 1^ g) Y.7. W.8., ^ V^ iou» } is dropped before So» 4. Find consonants wbicli are added : Ä 1 ^cjio lA o 1A 1 ^010 1 o 1 ] *aaio lA 1 ^oio £) 1 iD 1 Ol O »^OlO IZjOlloll ^OOU 1 3 1 O liälSDoTloiljlAloilljjlj ^OU £1) 1 01 1 ? J 1 1 •aoio l3l?2^^?^lölolo 1 Ol O 1 01 • EXPLANATIONS. a) Yerse 1. word 1., AaäJ^^* Hi is added as a prefix. EXERCISE FIFTEENTH — CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 287 b) Y.l. W.2., »jiOioA^I» 1 is prosthetic (§38.1). %jiOIo is a suffix. c) y.l. W.4., lAi^Lo» A is added from tlie construct state and 1 is added because the word is in the emphatic state. c?) y.l. w.IO., loC^» 1 is added at the end to form the emphatic state {^18. g). c) y.2. W.I., ]joi» Perhaps } should be considered as ad- ded here because \iOl seems to be a kind of emphatic state of #01, though we have omitted | above as the word usual- ly appears in the emphatic form. /) y.3.w.6 ,fyja» I is added to form the feminine. ^)y.3. W.7., Zooi» Z is added to form the feminine. h) YA. W.2., ] ' -- 1 is added to form the emphatic state (118.^). ^) y.4. W.5., ^OOuA^I» ^OOU is added in the course of inflection and | at the beginning is prosthetic (§38). k) y.4.w.6., lioiQJ» } is added to form the emphatic state (118. .V). I) y.5. tr.S.j ]oam.A*^* ] is added to form the emphatic state. m) y.5. W.4., ioulD» So is a preformative occurring in the course of inflection. n) y.5. W.7., cn-oi?!* 1 is added in the Aphel conjuga- tion. o) y.6. W.3., >>A»lj» A and 1 are added in the course of inflection (comp. T" 15.2 a). p) y.7. W.4., 101 m ,. !>♦ J is a preformative. 288 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. -» r q) Y.7. W.8., ^kliOU» uiOU is added in the course of in- flection. t) Y.8. W.6., >CTL-m-J>* J is added in the course of inflec- tion. s) V.9. W.9., ]V^ \sS» 1 is added to form the emphatic state. 5. Find Consonants exchanged for each other : There are no cases on page first. 1 is often exchanged for 1 before oi and vice versa. Other letters also exchange with each other (§12.4). EXEECISE SIXTEENTH. 1 16. Find the changes of vowels — ihrovjn hack — exchanged — tranS' posed — dropped and added (§ 15). 1. Find those which are thrown back : — — — — — — ♦ EXPLANATIONS: a) Yersel. word 2., «-»CToA*]* _f. is thrown back from - tol(§l5.2.A.b; §13,1-3). h) V.l. W.7., «iAOioAAl — same as above. EXERCISE SIXTKEXTH— CHANGES OF VOWELS. 289 c) V.l. W.U., loi-ko. _L is thrown back from ] to ©♦ d) V.3. W.2., airJ^]d* -1. is thrown back from 1 to a on account of the suffi'x. e) Y.5. W.4., jOUio« 1 the characteristic of Aphel is drop- ped and its vowel -^ falls back upon the preformative of the participle So (§23. 1). /) Y,6. W.3., »'A^l)* JL is thrown back from 1 to >♦ IS g) V.IO. W.8., ai^r^. ^ falls back from r to ^ (§36; T * . ? I 18.37), as the vowel _I_ of the original form ^r-u is dropped and a suffix appended (T16.2. e, and4.Z ; •[[18.37). 2. Find those which are exchanged : — for — , — for — , — for — • EXPLANATIONS: a) Yerse 3. word 2., Ol|-i)^ is derived from pi« — dropped and JL added in the course of inflection and _L is thrown back from 1 to O (T"16.1.c^) the word here being in the suffix state. Some would prefer to say that — is chang- ed into ^, (116.4. c and 5. d). 5) Y.4. W.7., jmijLiov is changed mto— m the con- struct plural (§45.2.a ; i'18.1). c) Y.5. W.4., iouSo» In the second syllable, — is changed iiito — , as the third radical of the verb from which ioilio is derived, is Resh (§23 1). •»»7 7 »-»» 1> d) Y.7. W.8., ^. V)iOlJ is derived from ^^|« — ischang- ed into — , and — in the last part, into — m passing from •1» Peal to Aphel. But it is better to say that — is dropped 290 EXERCISES IN SYßlAC GRAMMAR. and — added in one case, and — dropped and — added in the other (•|[16.4.h ; 5.r). e) Y.lO. W.8., GUI,—» is derived from ^j--», and — has the appearance of being changed into _L on 'account of the suffix (§36.A.Eem.) ; but J. is dropped and JL thrown back upon ^ (ll6.1.^ and 4.&; ^18.37). 3. Find those vowels, which are EXPLANATIONS. a) Yerse4. w.6., liolQJ from jOU or hoOU* — with O is transposed in the emphatic state from the last to the first part of the word (vid.TflS.^/). The other cases are all similarly explained. 4. Find those vowels which are dropped : EXPLANATIONS. a) "Verse 1. word 2., wäOIoA^I -has an additional syllable fc^qiO— ; but the original vowel — is not dropped as «a quiesces in it making it immutable (vid.§l5.3 ; §48. A). 5) Y.l W.4., 1A-^Ld is derived from |JSd, construct A^Lo* _!_ is dropped to form the construct state and JL of the con- struct state is dropped in the emphatic state because the ad- EXERCISE SIXTEENTH — CFAN-GES OF VOWELS. 291 ditional syllable I is added (vid.§15.3; compare ^16.5.6), c) V.3. W.2., GifjiU^ is derived from r*» — is dropped and from the emphatic state, — is dropped to give place to the suffix (compare % 16.5.c?). «^ • 7 7 d) Y.S. W.6., \r^ is the feminine form of ^a*« — is drop- ped (vid. 116.5.7). e) V.4. W.7., ]•! >mn — is dropped from the plural ab- solute of jjr) in passing into the construct state (vid. §15.3, and Rem.; ^16.5. ^; 4^8.1). /) V.5. W.7., cnobf is Aphel of ^j> with a suffix pro- noun. In taking the suffix, — • of the verb is dropped and — of the suffix added (vid. tl6.5.m; 118.7). g) V.7. W.3., lAojOlfloL is in the feminine emphatic state, -ftp 1« from the noun 501CO, and, in the course of inflection — is dropped (vid.li6.5.^ ; 118.17). h) V.7. W.8., ^IQaOU is a verb from ^\ and is in the Aphel conjugation. In the course of inflection, — in the first part of the word is dropped and — in the last part, and other vowels added (vid.116.5. r; 118.22). •>' P 7 J, P i) V.9. W.5., fj^j is compounded of ? and p^« The latter 7 7 is a noun in the emphatic state from \m* — falls away in taking an additional syllable (^15. 3) to form the emphatic state (vid. 1 16. 5. .9; 1 18.32). h) V.9.W.9., ]V>\s\ is compounded of 1^ and ]V)S\ em- phatic state from ^QAl* — is dropped in forming the em- phatic state (§15.3^ as an additional syllable is received (1 16.5.^; 118.36). I) V.IO. W.8., ail,-a is a verb with a suffix, derived from 292 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. ^^I« In taking tlie suffix, — is dropped and — falls back upon the first radical (§36 ; «flS. 87). 5. Find those vowels wHcli are added : f7p7tkpi\7'T>fi*^prP7''*^^Pf p 7 7 X "n ■* EXPLANATIONS. a) Verse 1. word 2., ».»oioAaV — is added in the course of inflection as a part of the sufformative of the verb. h) V.l. W.4., lA^Ji? is in the emphatic state from the con- . • y -n • y Struct state AilLo« — is dropped and — added (compare % 16.4.6 ; ^1\ d). c) V.l. w.lO., loiSL is in the emphatic state, but as it al- ways appears in this state it is perhaps better not to place — (at the end of the word) among the vowels added. * » i y 7 d) V.3. W.2., Oip^kfo is derived from ,— »♦ — is dropped and a new vowel, — , added. Then from the emphatic state Ij-^I, — IS dropped to give place to the suffix with which -i is added (vid. § 46. 1. a ; compare ^ 16. 4. c ; T 18. m). e) V. 3. w. 4., wigio,\\no is from ,s\n» — is added with the suffix. /) V.3. W.6., IrA* is the feminine form for r*** — is drop ped and _£. added. EXERCISE SIXTEENTH — CHANGES OF VOWELS. 293 * 7 r g) V.3. W.9., fooij» — is assumed over > to aid in the pronunciation (vid.TflS.^). h) V.4. W.8., l^OIQJ is derived from Sou or 5oou» — is added in the emphatic state (vid.TlS.^/)- i) V.4. W.7., f«i im>» — at the beginning of the word is assumed (vid.§ 15.4.6). The remainder of the word is com- pounded of jlIA and \m^\* The former is in the construct plural, andjin passing from the absolute to the construct plural, *■ 7 — is dopped and — added (vid. §15.3 and 4 ; Tl6. 4. e; ^ 18.1). h) Y.5. W.3., PQjlmjQ* This is from yiQan though the emphatic state is the more usual form» _L is added. I) Y.5. W.4., >aulo» This is a participle active, Aphel, from iou» The first — is assumed, forming a part of the preformative (vid.«|[l8.5). m) V.5. W.7., OlOjjl is a verb in the Aphel conjugation from y\y» — is assumed in the preformative. — is also assumed with the suffix (vid.l"l6.4./; Il8.7). n) V.B. W.2., lAX'r^ is in the emphatic state and — is ad- ded (vid.ll8.9). 6) y.6. W.3., J?Ä»1? is compounded of j and the verb >>A«|, Ethpaal from jfM* — is added as a part of the pre- formative. The first _L is assumed in the course of inflection in Ethpaal. p) Y.7. W.3., lAojOlfioL is in the feminine emphatic state from joifio» In the course of inflection — and — are added and JL is dropped (vid.Tl6.4.^ ; T"l8.l7). q) V.7. W.4., joiflUj is compounded of the relative j and 294 EXERCISES IX SYniAC GRAMMAR. the verb joiCQj, Aphel of joiflo» — is assumed in Aphel in the course of inflection (vid. §18.18). r) V.7.W.8., ^SOftOU is a verb in the Aphel conjugation from ^Lof« In the course of inflection, — in the first part of the word is dropped and — added, and in the latter part of the word, — is dropped and — added (T16.4. h; ^[18. 22). >^j is compounded of j and |i;*^ The 7 9 latter is a noun in the emphatic state from '^m or y^»* If considered as derived from the former, _!_ is dropped on ac- count of the additional syllable (§l5.3),and, in consequence, My having no vowels, j takes the new vowel _L (§15. 4. h), J. is also added to form the emphatic state (vid. % 16.4. ^ ; 118.32). V.9. W.9., ISfiVH is compounded of 1 and liüLl, em- phatic state from V>\s» — is dropped in forming the em- phatic state as a syllable is added (§15.3), and J^ is assumed (vid.l-l6.4.Ä; 118.36). EXERCISE SEYENTEBNTH. 1 17. Find the Suffixes and Prefixes^ Sufformatives and Preforma" lives (§16; §36; §46). 1. Find the Prefixes : " 7 7 ^ - y EXERCISE SEVENTEENTH — SUFFIXES AND PREFIXES. 295 1 > 1 £) O £!) O « EXPLANATIONS. a) Yerse 1. word 1., a is a prefix preposition. h) V.3. W.2., iD is a prefix preposition with the vowel thrown back upon it. c) V.3. W.9., ?• > is a relative pronoun prefixed to the verb, and, two vowelless consonants occurring together, _!_ is assumed to aid in pronunciation. The other instances need no explanation 2. Find the Siiffixes : Ol— «^010— GL. OU. Ol-— Ol— OU. 01-. • EXPLANATIONS: a) Yerse 8. word 2., OL— is a suffix pronoun with its union vowel. ** ^ h) Y.3. W.4., »-iOiO-., is a suffix pronoun added to a prepo- sition, though the same form when attached to Au] is a suf- formative. Rem. — We use the terms sufformative and preformative to indi- cate those letters which are suffixed or prefixed to words as neces- sary appendages in order to form particular conjugations, tenses, moods, persons, numbers, gender«* or states, according to the course of inflection. Such are mero formative letters and properly consti- tute a part of the word to wJiich they are attached, while suffixes and prefixes are appendages wliich have more distinct significations of themselves, and do not necessarily compose a part of the word to which they are attached. 296 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. 3. Find tlie Preformatives : So I A— 1 ^ aou ^ So * EXPLANATIONS. a) Verse 1. word 2., \ is, strictly speaking,a preformative ; but the letter seems to constitute a part of the word through all of its changes and does not so properly come under this head as it does under ''consonants added" (^15.4.6). h) Y.5. W.4., So is a preformative added in the course of inflection. c) Y.5. W.7., "j is a preformative added in the Aphel con- jugation. d) Y.Q. W.8., A y are preformative letters added in the Ethpaal conjugation. e) Y.7. W.8., jOU is a preformative added in the Aphel future. 4. Find the Sufformatives : ^010^ lA lA ^010. t^oioJ- lA «^Gio_ 1 I .oou. 1 Mil ^cno- 11111 ♦ EXPLANATIONS: a) Yerse 1. word 2., w»qio — is a sufibrmative as it forms, according to the inflection, the third person singular mascu- line preterite, though it is in reality a noun suffix attached Ix/the original noun A» hdng. h) Y.l. W.4., (A is the suffbrmative ending of the empha- tic state, or rather 1 is the ending of the emphatic state EXEECISE EIGHTEENTH — PARSE. 297 and A ot the constnict from whicli the emphatic is formed. _» c) V.3. W.6., \ is the emphatic ending. d) Y.3. W.7., L takes the place of 1 and is a formative letter in constituting the feminine gender. e) V.4. W.5., ^OOU — is a sufformative found in the course of inflection. /) V.4. W.7., I is the ending of the emphatic state. g) Y.6. W.2., I is an emphatic ending. EXEECISE EIGHTEENTH. 1 18. Po/rse : a) Yerse 1. word 1., LjuLä^a is compounded of the pre- position O m and the noun LkM^h beginning. Q is a pre- position governing LkM^j in the ablative case (§ 75.5 ; §52 ; § 84). A^jBa) is a denominative noun (§41) from the root I JLft9 principal^ chief, head (Hebrew '(jjji«^*-) Chaldee l^^'i ) — formed by adding to its root the formative letters Aj. (§39.2). I .1 The vowel — is added and aids to form the syllable La (§15.4; §13.3). Aaa.19 is of the first declension as its vowels are im- mutable (§48. A) though it is somewhat irregular in its in- flection (see its plural) — third person, singular number (§44). 298 EXERCISES m sykiac grammar. »J, plural IAjJSuj» The two points over j in the plural compose Ribui. The point belonging to h still belongs to j and at the same time is part of Ribui (§6.2.Rem.) — feminine gender as it is the same as in Hebrew and is transferred from that language (§43.2.Rem.2). It ends also in fA a feminine termination in the emphatic state, | being the regular em- phatic termination (vid. last reference and § 45.3.&). In the absolute state the form is A^m-i>, emphatic f A^jia> (§ 45j — in the ablative case after the preposition a and governed by it (§75.5). b) V.l. W.2., .-»OloA^f is an auxiliary verb from A_j] tobe (vid.Lexicon). A-^1 is formed from the noun Aa being^ vath a prosthetic ]* wiOloA^f is irregular — takes the noun suffix «-»CJIO^, as it is derived from a noun, though that suffix is here to be considered as a sufformative (T 17.4. a; •f 17.2. Rem.)— neuter (§ 66.2 ; § 1 9)— singular number (§38.1.Para- digm) — third person (§38. 1. Paradigm) — masculine gender (vid. last reference) — indicative mood(§ 65.1 ; compare (§18.4) — preterite imperfect tense,as loOl immediately follows(§18.4. Rem.; §38.2:§68.A). Inflect to the person where it is found. First person common gender ^La\ {lam), second masculine ^Aaf {thou art), second feminine > > ^ » A^i] {thou art), third masculine »^OloA^I {he is) (vid.§38.1.Inflection). It agrees with its nominative lAl^, though of a different gender (80. B.2). c) Y.l. W.3., looi is a substantive verb signifying to be (§38.1)— a U' verb (§38. 1)— irregular (§32)— neuter (§ 19)— third person — singular number. When used with another verb it has the effect of Yau conversive in Hebre . § 38. 1) EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH — PAKSING. 299 — masculine gender and used here merely as a lielping verb to the preceding, in forming the imperfect tense(§38.2). d) Y i. W.4., lAi^So ivord is a substantive noun, derived from uiLo to speah^ forming in the absolute state ]V^ (vid. § 39. 2. h. third example ), construct state A!sV), emphatic IA^Sd — first declension (§45. feminines A; §48. B. feminines; T 6. 4. c). Decline. Singular (vid.above) — plural absolute, ,!Sk), construct Z!üo, emphatic lAÜo (§ 45. 8) — third per- son singular — feminine — emphatic state — nominative case to looi w*cnoLf (§80.B.2). e) Y.l. W.5., 0010 is compounded of the conjunction i and the pronoun ooi. o is a copulative conjunction (§53. 1) — a prefix (§53. 1. Rem.). It connects the two nouns, ocn may be translated by he or i\ as the neuter gender in Syriac is included in the masculine and feminine (Tf 14. c: § 43) — a personal pronoun separate (§16) — third person sing- ular. It is pleonastic and need not be rendered in transla- ting (§55). For explanations of the next three words vid. supra. f) V.l. W.9., LcL^ wiihj a preposition governing ICTU^ (§52; §84). a) V.l. w.lO., (oi-i^ God — taken from the Hebrew nib^ and that probably derived from Jjjj^ God. nib^J^ ^^ ^ ^^" nominative noun taking the Syriac emphatic termination. 1 is the ending of a large number of Syriac nouns, some- times indicating the feminine and sometimes the emphatio state (§43.2; §45.3). Some nouns always appear in the em- phatic or suffix state (§ 45.1.Rem.). (oi}:^ has the form of 800 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. the emphatic state. It is a substantive noTin and may be declined like ^.I (Decl.l. §45. masculines A)— third person singular-masculine-emphatic state — ablative case and gov- erned by 2q1 (§75.5). h) Y.l. W.U., loiiLo» O anc?,is a prefix conjunction con- tinuing the sense. loilL Ood^ is in the nominative to ]bqi ^qio^t (§80). For further explanations vid. supra, i) V.l. w. 14., ogi is a pleonastic pronoun (vid.sw^ra). j) V.l. W.15., lA^iD word, is in the nominative after Iboi ^qioLf (§80; 118.5). k) V.2. W.I., Vol this, same. It has the form of the em- phatic state though it should be considered as one of the original forms of the word. The forms are ^01 and poi (§17) — a demonstrative pronoun — singular-masculine-nomi- oqi »aCToA^I (§80) — used as a noun. Decline it (vid.§17). I) V.3. W.I., ^ all, every, each, (§58.B.2.ö^,6) — a pronoun used as an adjective (§58.B.2.5) the noun thing to which it belongs being implied — declined according to decl. 1. of nouns — ^third person-masculine-absolute state. The im- plied noun would be in the nominative to 1 OCT; or ^i^ itself might be considered as a collective noun and in the nomi native to looi (§80. A. 1 and Kern.). m) V.3. W.2., CTh>(^ hy the hand of him or by his hand p is a prefix preposition governing hV— * The whole word is compounded of the preposition a by, the noun r-» empha- tic ]rA hand,axid the suffix CT-. of him or his. ,**]« is a de- nvative noun (§39), from fU and takes a suffix (Hebrew yi EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH — PARSING. 801 Chaldee'Tn)-2nd.declension-smgular. Absolute and constr.^, empliatic I pa f, plural absolute^ p» I, construct •^r'lj eniphatic Mr— a ( — third singular masculine (§45. masculines B) — abla- tive case and governed by ID (§75.5). Ol_ is a suffix pro- noun attached to the emphatic state and f falls away (§46.1. a)-third singular masculine (§16. Table) — genitive case (§54. B.2) and governed by p.]l (§16 ; §16. B; §74). n) Y.3.W.8., |OCn to he is here rendered was^ the imperfect being sometimes thus formed (§65). It agrees with ^^ ••7 P« * d) V.3. W.4., wi010, %Nn o and without him — compounded of the conjunction o, the preposition ,\Sn, and the suffix pronoun *uOiO-.* O and^ is a conjunction as above. |\\o without is a preposition with a suffix. It governs its suffix .. 7 •«7 ^01 0-* «-lOlO- him^ is a noun suffix - plural (§16.Table) — third singular masculine — ablative case and governed by jili (§75.5). jp) Y.3. W.5., VSi\ also not^ neither — compounded of |j not^ and 2) I aho. Si\ is a conjunction(§53.2.a) and continues the sense. P not is an adverb and qualifies 2oqi* q) Y.3. W.6., 1,-M one, any one^ a certain one, certain, any\ 7 from rA«, is a pronoun (§58.10.a and h) or a numerical adjec- tive (§50.2). Here it has the sense of an indefinite pronoun — singular feminine and belongs like an adjective to the noun y)y-k> (§58.10.a). r) Y.3.W.7., Zooi to he from looi* ] is changed into L to form the feminine (§19. Table). Imperfect and parsed like fOOl (vid. n. supra). 802 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. 5) Y.3. W.8., ^r-^ ci'^^y thing^ has a similar meaning to that of IrM above ; but has more the sense of a noun. It is sometimes used in the same manner as fr^» (§58.10.6). It is used here as a noun meaning thing^ and f,-M belongs to it, as the pause between fooi and ^r—^ is one of minor impor- tance (T ll.c; § 10)-third singular feminine-absolute state- nominative case to 2oai (§80). i) Y.3. W.9., looij which was — compounded of looi and >♦ > which is a relative pronoun (§ l7.2) — is in the third singu- lar — ^nominative to looi» u) V.4. W.I., OUiD in hirriy compounded of a in and CTL- him, Q is a preposition, governing the ablative (§75.5); Ol- is a suffix pronoun (§ l6.Table; § 52.Table)-third person singular — in the ablative case and governed by Q (§ 75.5. compare §54.B.l). v) V.4. W.2., t ■ > M life^ is a verbal noun(concrete)(§40Ta- ble A). It occurs always in the plural form(§44.ßem.6),gener- ally with a singular signification (vid.Lexicon; §80.2)-deriv- ed from |.i-m to ?we-appears in the emphatic form,like other plural forms mentioned(§44.Eem.6 and§45.Rem.)though this is its usual form. It is an anomalous noun having no regular declension-third person plural masculine (§45.Eem.)- nominative case to fooi (§80.2.6). lu) y.4. W.4., [.t^o and life — compounded of the conjunc- tion and, and |Aja life. This is parsed like the same word above, only it is in the nominative to a plural verb (§80. 2. a). EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH — PARSING. 803 x) Y.4. W.5., ^oauA^I was, literally were — third person plural masculine, and agrees with |I!aj in gender and num- ber (§80.2.a; vid.also c. and d. supra). y) V.4. W.6., IjOIQJ light, is a verbal noun from JOU to shine — an infinitive form in the emphatic state like ll^QD from ^J4^ (^ 40.Table, IT. A. a). Infinitive absolute 50U, >CJU or )00U, emphatic state ftou, IjOU, 1>01QJ» The !^ which appears in the infinitive is here dropped (compare §39.2.fe.and §40), though the emphatic form is the one in which it usually appears-declensionIY.(§45.masculines,D)- third person singular-masculine-emphatic state, and in the nominative case after ^oouA^j, but used as the construct be- fore J of the next word (§74.2.a). 1) V.4. W.7., }•! k\ny of the sons of men, a composite noun (§41.1)-compounded of j, oJili and \mS\* > o;^ is a sign of the genitive case, which follows (§74.3). .»JLO sons, is from \ti son, primitive — anomalous. Singular absolute ;ii), construct ;i2. emphatic 1;^, plural absolute ^iin, construct » »TO, emphatic (aJ^ (§49.masculines)-third person plural- masculine-construct state(in form and because the next noun is in the genitive)-genitive case, though in the construct state, as sometimes occurs in Hebrew (vid. Stuart's Hebrew Grammar, §434. 5), governed by } (§74). (aJ man, is from uul, the 1 being dropped (§12. 3. a)-derived from theHebrew word "^iji^ ^«w (Chaldee tlJn^^sjVa primitive noun-declension 1, but somewhat irregular (vid. Lexicon) — third person singular as it has not Ribui, though it has the same form which appeal's in the plural-masculine emphatic state abso- 804 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. lute and construct ,mjl, emphatic fmj], absolute plural ^ftjf or lAJf-genitive case and governed bj the preceding noun juliD (§74). 2) V.5. W.I., 0010 (vid.swj9ra e). 8) Y.5. W.2., 1jOlGüZ/,]9'Ä^,is in the nominative absolute, with the participle jOUSd(§76.1). For farther explanation of the word vid. y above. 4) V.5. W.8., pQLmij^m(?!Ae)5?arÄne55,is compounded of the preposition d in^ and pQmj^ darkness. )2Qjlm is a sub- stantive noun (the Hebrew form is "ntfrf) 3- verbal noun) — declension fourth (§ 45. masculines D) — third person singu- lar masculine-emphatic state-ablative case and governed by a (§ 75.5). 5) V.5. W.4., JOlJisOpermzV^m^ to 5A^7^e-a participle from the irregular^, active intransitive verb (§20.2) jou to shine (83) -in the Aphel conjugation (§ 19 Table; § 19.B.4; § 28.1)- an active participle (§19.B. 4; §28.1). It is used here for the third person singular of the present tense(§64.2.A.Rem.) and rendered the same as though it were a verb (vid. Trans. ^I4)third person singular. Conjugate to the place where it is found. Preter. Peal >0U, preter. Ethpeel jOuZf (§ l9.Table II, and §21.1), preterite Pael höU (§l9.Table II, and §22.1), preterite Ethpaal joiiZf (§ 19. Table II, § 22. 1 and Rem.), preterite Aphel JOijf (§19. Table II; §28.1), future Aphel joiaj (§19. Table II; §19.B.2,5; §28.1), imperative Aphel jOIjI (§ 19. Table II; § 19. B. 1; § 28.1), infinitive Aphel bjoiii (§19.Table II; §19.B.8 and 9; §28.1)pai:ticiple active EXERCisi: p:ighteenth — paksing. 805 Aphel jauSl5(§19.Tab].eII; §19.B.4; §23.1). It is found in the Aphel conjugation-active participle — masculine gen- jOiQJ (§ 64. 1. A), or is absolute with it. ' 6) Y.5. wo., PQä-ajO and *he darkness. O is a conjunc- tion as above, and PQlä->j is in the nominative case to oi_Ojj|. For fartlier explanations see 4. supra. 7) V.o. W.7., 01-0j>( comprehended it^ is an irregular ac- tive intransitive verb, composed of ^jj and OU» Irregular- active voice-intransitive (§19.Tablel)-indicative (§65.1.B.b) -Aphel preterite. The usual form is yS}\* When the suffix is appended, the final vowel of the verb is dropped (§15.3) and the last consonant forms a syllable with the suffix Ol— It is in the 3rd.person masc; Peal^^jj, Ethpeel j^JJm, Pael ^>j, Ethpaal »^»JM» Aphel »^Jjl, and agrees with its nom- inative PQä«aa» The suffix OL. is a personal pronoun — third masculine singular-accusative case (§54.B.l) and gov- erned by ^>?|» 8) V.6. W.I., |oCFi yjas^ is a Lomadh Olaph verb — Peal — active voice-3d. singular-masculine-indicative mood-present tense (32.1) and agrees with \M2\Ci (vid. T18.c). 9) V.6. W.2., ]M2'r^ son ofman^ is a composite noun (§42. 7 0^ 7 , 1) compounded of \Ci son and «ajI man \a is a primitive noun — anomalous — singular, construct (vid. paradigm §49. masculines) — third person masculine — nominative case to lopi» )aJ man, is a noun derived from ,Jkl\ man — prim- itive — declension first^third person singular masculine-em- phatic state-in the genitive case and governed by \^ (§74; 118 I). • 306 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. 10) y.6 W.8., J>A»1> who was senilis compounded of > who, and 9>Ä«1 loas sent, j is a relative pronoun-third singular mas- culine, a prefix, and m the nominative case to >>A*| (§l7. 2 ; §56). '>A«| is a verb in the Ethpaal conjugation — pas- sive voice — regular — third singular masculine — indicative mood — preterit imperfect tense (§60.4), and agrees with its nominative >♦ Peal J>#, Ethpeel >>A»1, Pael b*, Eth- paal >>A«|* In Ethpaal and the other passive conjugations • is transposed (vid.T15.2.a). ■»» 11) V.6. W.4., ^io/ro77z, of, is a preposition and governs the ablative case (§75.5). 12) Y.6.W.5., loi!^ Ood, a noun — declension first — third singular masculine — emphatic state — ablative case, and gov- erned by ^ (§75.5 ; 118.^). 13) V.6. W.6., cnUlM his name, compounded of So» name and Ol— his. SO» is a noun from ^oi — anomalous — third singular masculine. Absolute and constr. sing alar ^», em- phatic Uq» — suffix state OlSO» (vid. paradigm, § 49. mascu- lines). JL of the absolute state falls away in the emphatic state, and from the emphatic is formed the suffix state by dropping 1 and adding 01 — (§46.1.a) — nominative case to ]oC7l .-»OIoAaI was (implied). In reference to looi •-lOloA.»') (vid.T"18. b and c). (n^ his, is a suffix pronoun, third sing- ular masculine (§l6.Table)-genitive case (§54.B. 2) and gov- erned by SO» (§16 ; §16.B ; §74). 14) y.8. W.7., ^-l»MCLk John, a noun proper-anomalous- third singular masculine, absolute state-nominative case af- ter looi %a010A^|« EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH — PAKSING. 307 15) V. 7. w. 1., pOl samCj this — a demonstrative pronoun, p ''> singular, masc. nominative case to IZ] (vid. ^18. h). 16) V. 7. w. 2., 121 came — Lomatli 01ai3h (]]) — active voice-Peal conjugation-pret. imperfect-3d pers. singular, masc. indicative mood and agrees with poi (§27 Tab.; §32). 17) V. 7. w. 3., IZojOim^/or a witness — compounded of ^for, and fZojOlCO witness. iZojOlfiD is a noun derived from the verb joiflo to witness. The form JOlco appears as a noun of the 2d declension. Absolute and construct ?C5lCD, emph. IjOico (§45. masculines B). The feminine absolute has the 10 jOlCD* In many nouns Z is inserted before the final 1 in the feminine ; O with Z is also sometimes inserted (§45. 3 and Rem. 3) as in this word. It has the form here of the emph. feminine. That indeed seems to be the usual form in which the word appears — 3d pers. singular, dative case and governed by i^ (§75. 1). 18) V. 7. w. 4., ?0l .m l? who shall {should) hear wit- ness — compounded of ? who, and >oi m \ shall (should) bear witness, or cause to bear witness (§23. 2. a) y d , m . 1 IS a verb from joico to beget, to bear witness-A-ph. conjugation-active voice-regular (§26)-intransitive. 3d sing. Peal joifio, Ethpe. JOifioZ], Pa. JOiflO, Ethpa. 'CncDZ]^ Aph. pret. ?0iCDf, Aph. fut. jOlfi£U-fut. tense, masc. gender. 7 In the fut. Aph. 3d. masc. usually we find - in the last sylla- ble ; but sometimes as here we have — (§23.2, where are ex- amples, with I. in the last syllable. Compare §19, Tables I and II). The future tense is here used in the sense of the subjunctive mood imperfect tense (§61. 3. A. b) and agrees with its nominative ? ♦ ? is a relative pronoun-3d 308 EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH — PARSING. pers. singular, masculine-a prefix-nominative case to jOT_mJ(1fl8.0.., 19) V. 7. w. 5., v^ to, against, on account of, o/-pre- position governing poiOJ . 20) V. 7. w. 6., IjOIQJ %7i^-verbal noun from Sou to «Äme-declension fourth, 3d pers. singular, masculine, em- phatic state, ablative case and governed by ^\l (T[18. y). 21) y. 7. w. 7., *Alioj-compounded of j that, )^ all, every, and «aj man-} is a conjunction (§85. 3 «fc 4, c?)-prefix connecting ?CT — mj and ^ V) >OU^ -^ ever?/, a??, is a pro- noun, but here used as an adjective (§58. B. 2. b. a) and belongs to ^mi ♦ For declension, etc. vid. •[[IS. L *-*! man, IS a noun from «-aJ I — declension first, but is somewhat irregu- lar-3d pers. singular, masc. absolute state, nom. case to ^^ ■ v^i OlJ, For further explanations, vid. ^ 18. 1. IS 7 22) V. 7. w. 8., ^-ia»C7U migJit helieve-a. verb doubly irregular, ]2) and ^, and is placed among the defective verbs (§35. 2. c). In the Aph. conjugation. Pe. ^1, Aph. ^SOftGl, future Aph. ^J^^cru-active voice-intransitive- 3d pers. singular masc.-future tense and used in the sense of the subjunctive mood, imperfect tense, and agrees with its nominative —ml (comp. ^18. 18). 23) V. 7. w. 9., Ol^pD through or hy the hand of him. For parsing, vid. ^ 18.* w., where the same expression occurs. 24) V. 8. w. 1., P not, is an adverb and qualifies looi ♦ 25) V. 8. w. 2., 001 he, is a personal pronoun separate- 3d pers. singular masc. and nominative case to looi (comp. 1fl8.e). 26) V. 8. w. 3., |ooi was-Qji irregular verb agreeing with 001 for its nominative (vid. 1[18. n). EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH — PARSING. 309 27) V. 8. w. 4., |>01QJ light-Q. noun and nominative case after looi ( vid. ^18. y), 28) V. 8. w. 5., Ul hut-Q. conjunction, a contraction of f] »of, and \T -i/" ; it continues the sense. Following this and preceding the next word, there is something implied ; after Ul supply IZo^O imA 121 came for a witness, the same which is expressed in verse 7. For the remaining three words of this verse, vid.^18. 18, 19, 20. 29) V. 9. w. 1 and 2., jOCTi »jiOIoA^] was-a, verb and agrees with pOlQ-J understood, poio-j poi that light, being implied. For parsing this verb fully, vid. ^18. b. & c. 30) V. 9. w. 3., Jo-. /or, is a conjunction continuing the sense. ^ 31) V. 9. w. 4., poiQ-J Ught-a, noun-nominative case after fooi *aOloL^ (vid. •[[18. y). 32) V. 9. w. 5., 1>^»? o/" frw#A-compounded of j of, and !>;• truth, lij» is a noun derived from the verb >;* to he co^ivmced-declension first (vid. §48. A. decl. 1. Kem.)- singular. Construct and absolute, 'r» or j;*, emphatic p^ '' 7 forming the emphatic state, from 'r** - falls away on ac- count of the addition at the end (§15. 3), then -^? pre- 7 senting two vowelless consonants, ? takes the new vowel - (§15. 4. h)-3d pers. singular, masc.-genitive case after > (§74. 2. a). The expression li'r*? 1>01Q-J is an instance in which the abstract noun \y^ has the sense of an adjec- tive, and the phrase is properly rendered the true light. 7 7 33) V. 9. w. 6., jCFUlJ^J which shineth, or having shone- compounded of Soi 1 V) shineth, or having shone, and ? 7 7 7 which, SoLa-So is an Aph. participle from Sou, absolute 310 EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH — PARSmG. with > (1[18. 5). y which, is a relative pronoun, nomina tive absolute with jcLj-Si) (§76. 1 ; ^18. 3). 34) V. 9. w. 7., *Ä,-i-^ajk upon every man, compound- ed of !^ upon, ^ every and *j*1 man. 1^ is a preposition governing the accusative or dative. i3 is a pronoun used adjectively and belongs to **-i (vid. 18. I). **! is a noun in the accusative and governed by^ (1[18. 1, 9, 21). 35) V. 9. w. 8., 1^1? who comes, composed of > who, and }l\ comes. IZJ is a verb-Peal conjugation, present tense, and agrees with its nominative j (If 18. 16). 36) Y. 9. w. 9., 1V) Nn ^ into the w;or?c^-compounded of ik into, and ^Sü-^ the world. ^ is a preposition governing the accusative. (V> \\ is a noun from V)\s second declension. Absolute and construct ^\\ , emphatic ISnSs^ In SflXl the final vowel — falls away in the em- phatic state as a syllable is added (§15. 3)-3d pers. sin- gular, masc. accusative case and governed by -^ ♦ 37) V. 10. w. 8., (the seven preceding words are ex- plained above). 01.1^-« hnew Aim-compounded of Ofl- him^ 7 7* ^ and ^r» knew, ^r» is a verb with a suffix pronoun at- tached to it-derived from the Hebrew 3?!*' ^o know, doubly anomalous. *j^ and ^-Peal preterit -3d pers. singular, masc. indicative mood and agrees with l^^i^ ♦ By taking a suffix the usual form is changed. The common form of 7X1 7 the Peal preterit is ^r» ♦ - falls away and -- falls back upon the first radical when the verb takes a suffix (vid. §36). ail is a suffix pronoun with its union vowel (§16. Tab. a) -3d pers. singular, masc.-accusative, and governed by ij- (§54. B. 1). ill CHRESTOMATHY. 5'i 313 CHRESTOfflATHY. FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATINO. John i. 1 — 10. ♦ l^k) 001 looi »aOioA^t lbi!L6 ♦ loi!^ Zol Iboi ^jiD ZOOI IrA» Pal ^JiOlOpllsO ♦ focn Olri]^ \^ 3 ♦ fooij ]jd.k±0) (90103 ^OOUAa] Va^O « (001 U^ OllD 4 <» 012>>1 |J PQJLmO *• 90UiO pQa»»n |901QJ 0O10 5 « ^JLmOi Olio» I \GL^ ^ '?^l? )ÄJ*r2 (OOI 6 . »< 7 P • »> »-P *> tt ^ -«7 a^P* *. Dm »P»«f ^P P ^Icitou ,aii\n> «])Oia-j \yA >oimj> (Zo>oiml |Z] poi 7 * oi%jo «I'CJiQJ ^ joimij VV ♦ I'jCJiQJ Iboi ooi P's Y2Tj >«iSn\ ioiisbj •• Ir^j Vjoiqj -^"^ looi *^oioLf 9 fl' Ikilio ♦ Iboi 01^1-Q V-LoLio ♦ looi ] 'snSvn 10 314 CHKESTOMATHY — FIEST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING. Matthew ii. 1 — 10. 3 ^> msq»* ♦ Oil y->,mV)\ ^Z(o (i^i/>>«^ oirüOQO 9QL^| ^11 t-J| ^f> ♦ oJOfOja oZ «aOLiJoA»j.ns|9 9 loiO ♦ oLll pi^ ^ QlSüS p ^J ^QJOI* ♦ Oil ]Sd^ ^bousi'rO looi ^iV 1ili|V^o oijai odi ^riooi CHRESTOMATHY— FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING. 315 Mark xiv. 32—42. ♦•uoiOj^SßikAl -^lo ♦^SQflDjo M'roA^? IhIiAooA oZ|o*32 jdooiJAo ]£)]iiL oisiii '^jo* »pi ]]^ yi ]oicn qäZ 33 • .oailb ^to* • oniZASiQ^o O'^SooASd^ «^*»o ^1>1q^o 34 ]»>n«V) Aj jooi ]]^o »U'l ^^^-^ ^^iikjo VuSkO ^S'rOO* 35 (Zjo ^ • »A^j iJj .A*> .>i»n. (J Ul ♦ poi (mo wiJio j^ii( 31 ^ollZ jj) qI.O O'rulZZl* « O'rlZASül lAl« 1^^ Am^Oa] }J 38 o»n»l «2oZ 1Z| ^010'*' «^1 |A^lD %^oio ^a^. «i^oZ ^o ■r p p "7 ••? I 7 «» •• 7 7 «^ -R I 7 7 ♦ 1» P £>0,I>-Rl77,0 I ■» l"»» 7 laio ♦lAi« ZZlo lZ*rJ^ A^!^ *ci*x^lL]o ^^^r^ aok)) * «a1^ y)SaV>> oai .2*£) < ♦ » Luke xxiii. 18 — 27. %*'r»0 pOlii 4^01 >\on» ♦ ^;!^|0 [mid Oli^D ^J QlJD* 18 ? I7>7 I7i»'X'f* »7 7 777 7 316 CHRESTOMATHY— FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING. 20^OaiSQl >5iSD ^J ^oZ* Or*^! ^^-»^ l^^l JlOJ IJ^JOO 21 OOGI ^->AO ^) ^QJOI'^ * ^0«i\ VrAJ) ]^ • ^ ^QOQ^^o^ ^0 O ^P» t * ■" ■« «P P- 7 I •« «P P "^ t ^^ X ■^ 10 ^ "" Ik * ti p p y 23 Oil oooi ^-ä^Jäo •. ]lDj IJnQ oooi ^lOoZ ^j ^ojoi* ■^ y y •« 17 * a!i]s> ooi In^isl Zur^ looi tso) U^o .mimfc^'l ^\^> '6 \ Oil ^\noV> po* ♦ .CPU I n A ;>q1ä1 ^j ^oai\ 7 p *pi ■»»iNpppi'X -x T' r f ^aOloliL qSQ£0O *• ]Lk'rO ^ ]l]f ]i,1>>QjO ^SV^a\ 0^^! P*> '^pp .-^p ».-n *P 7■^ px 2711 QflD OIJASJ loOl Ulo* ♦^QAaJ OlJAo ^A^J? ]SL,^] 7 P y 7 'T<7'R« 7 «1».. p.. 77 7 «v«x«,»p«p -"7 P-x '^ * pOlO .Jk2)>0 .OOlXi) ^OOL^ |001 ^^O « ^OUJQ£2£)p> 2* coil ^OOlL V^O* ♦ .OOlAl^li loOl'Zj fOSi ^J .pnn^V,^^ -^yy1^x7 -nP -np« i7-n-xi« Luke xxiii. 33 — 42. P7 «vy yypy*»»«. '•5'' 33 »^Z ^OlO^Ol •. lA21D*r£) V»'r^^^? Ir^ lACJOr^ oZ] ^O* •"Pf« ■» 7 -^Iy T, y ^ . " I "7 ^ t 7 ♦> m\on ^ ^o OU-iIOji ^ ^^ *. f AiLjuO v^r^OL «QJOllo * /» *" t * *" 7 *0 7 * ». " * ■»> loOl y>p3* • ]fiQ£> CHRESTOMATHY— FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING. 31t ^ CIS 0001 ^^k.js»)rik)o* «lai^> 01 in.. (M..jjAk)3ti 7 n 17 7 -^P »P 7T>.XI7 1» X P7p7-«P'X X97'X 7* * » P AjI* ♦ yM2i2 ]^] V?OCJl^? 1"^NV) OOl AjI ^ ♦ oil ^'fSiDlo^i^ f^ xp-X 7 xp7 """"«^t ^''PP P '^P ♦Zutk)ooi jo Aajjo» •. ouSd \>a1 j2l»Adj "l^iAo ^1 ^> looi r t> -XP * '"7 -«P-X.. IP7 7P xp-* ^JJOI .0301 ^ ^> r*^^ *V>?OOU> ]n\V) QJ01 * ZuVr^^O 39 •7p^ 7 P •'«7 «7 7 • I Ti 7 P^^ I r^]o va01o\\1ooi «^ryv^ *• oiSüi 0001 ^^a ni\« >lAa i n ■»> P7 7 7 9 7 7 9 1 -x 7-« 012 1)20^ « ^ ^] r^^ yMZn \^ *. (»fciaV) 001 Aj] ^1 40 Aj] ^Ij '. Aj| \y-ia> loilL ^ U *a I ♦ oil «rSDlO (J\',£i^ Ts 7 "«P 7 Ipi77 px 7 i> "rfc-y. ^001 ^Q»> »^1 ♦ A^pt) ^IjaO* •. UayS AjI OlO 41 • oil H^il U PJ»? 5>0rSD ^J |J01 ♦^•r2)Z( .^fOlj j^lO P4v7 5%«^*^" ** 77-« ,K-n 7-n ♦ «^ZoolSOO Aj I |Z|> (k) ^'rSO «jLlAp)Zl « V&Oai\ 'rSolo* 42 Luke xxiii. 43 — 53. |00lZ >aV>SplOa>) *• «^ p| *rS0l ^'^1 • ^QA^ oil *rSbp 43 7P<\ '"*" ^ "" «■"••? 7 ■»> "7 X p 7 7 ^ PQAaa |0010 • As lis «^1 ^9 ^OOI A^l* *> tfiCUVrSUD 44 ••77X -n -n » '^ ..xp 7 7P7 P7.P4^ •j^l ^*;4^l0 ♦ j^ÄA* (aS£Iä0* ♦ ^jlI» ^A1 tOjl •. ]li1 Olio 45 5" . ■« . P P --O -X -n P 7 -«7 ■"•»•'' '' " ' .'rSDlO PsDj UQO ^QA^ jlOO* ♦ OlAl^ ^ iJlLiOlJ |l>Z46 ^> IVm P* ♦ J^llsO jSO I IjOl ♦ ^,i^0> ]j1 2>0]CD y^r^ .jlJ^ 47 PP -f 1.7 y-npp7 77 P 7 **p.X ^301 A^Vh;* ♦•rSolo loilU ^w.£i» ♦looij y)rSo ^JOJ^IO 318 CHßESTOMATHY— FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING. 48 0001 ^^i^itn? ^-Aa] IjÖd ^OOiIdO'^ OoOI "icUJ] I'r^y ^-x2)*ri p 002)01 \looi> y>^ ov^i p *]ya\ ]lu*^ 49 «jiOIQlo'jLi |001AO V^ILmO) ^ 0001 ,^iV^>nO* * .OOUpM ^P^O ^|J.kJ^. ^ OlSül^OOl ^Zl>^->Xftl]AJO «^QJiui) T» nfl'^^ -»>7 -«77 -n^pr •*9-"7 ^^|J POI* ♦lQa?10 \ni |001 rr^\ '.JOOUJ |AXjiySD |ALd> looi ]nmV)6 «.oou'^omLo ^ooilLdIIi Iboi UiS^ 52>i{so •.^CDO^^JÄ Zaik ^Q'pO V>cfi* .|oiJ^> 1Zon\Vi\ -np PP* P(77 -«7 ■« 7 «>-l> «7 53 01SÜSDO «IiAd» 1« ibM>.n OlDpO OIZUjIo^ .^QA^) Ol'ryv^ X * ^I 7 "-11^* piP9s ■I>\ loqi %o I mZil ^^^..kDr^ aul )]) 001 « Vr>.QJ ISon^ Aino »012 Acts xvii. 22—32. *..px7 *7 7^ P7 "%' 't' or 22%XäJL\ TiÄ.« ♦'rJiDl ^CDOy^a ^CDa»i{Q ^CDOAQa 5>Q£) pO* 1« ■^ «^p••'^ t\ ' T. 'KP «x * "7* * Am^osI «^qdALm) Zu^ AjiOOI 1v*^o A^ooi ^pA!^ ;ji.. 7« PX PP7 .Ti ^ 17 0» 001 »lu^t Iot^j «01^^ I001 .ruAsj •. ly>* lAli poiX oil ••oil ^AjI ^i,\»o> ^oAil ^r* U P? \^-»^C7l 24Aa|> liülDO Uö^ rJ=^? 'r^« fOLli.* ♦ ^Oal pi ;nmV) p| PP7IP7*.. 7 ovorrpo *. ^ ■» |J U'r^] ffi^y UnaOlO *. ]l' l?0 USÜJ») I'rSO OkOOlO « OIQ e -»I» 7 PP««7 .•71 1» 77 "»»P -np CHRE8T0MATHY— FIBST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING. 319 » T *"7 *_ »v ^O* «)a^J0Vi-m .alVnS .^OU 0019 ^^^4^ ♦,n 110)26 .. r J r IP«. -n pO" ?7»4.0PJ' ""7 -n xy ''""t^« *?o. * PP««77ö -x *. -^ I»? ? p-x* •»» I * -np-n I 7 1 7 X X -ft * 7 * X 7 -ft^ •• X 7 1» p ..0 p • ^OIQ^ 001 OllSO) O'rSol ^Q^^> ]^'^- ^ \mj] ^) 7 -» 7IP7 3 "'••'' '' ^ *" xpp..p ;nmV)\^i»niMtJ ♦♦ooiloijL^^oia4?^JuJDOi^l*29 7 P 7. 7 IZoiiDot) ]*^»S..> |2)]al oi ♦♦]LD]m\ ol U^oi^Xj 77P-X P -ft-«.. 7 P-X ^. ■''.'' PPP7 07 X P^ ■• -X ^ P P "7 -X t *>t ■" ^. *P P ^ P 7 7 *P 9tt7 *Aj( \yi3> •. (mj-i.is .001^01 ,nak) poi {i^v^o ♦1oiJ^ ^bjjj r-TAi oi£)j IsdqI y> > ol> ^^i!4^* ♦ ^ooLi ]66y ^^oa 31 «> X 7 77P"7P 77 p#>x •P-XP7 7 7 i>.. X -n-n i>i77 '»'*.P7 p QiScs po* «lA.»^ tjLd ^ 01 V) » ol p oiZoiiOfeOil ^j1 32 7 17 -x-ft ■«..I -»»I« pp •0001 ^ I n > V^ V) ^oouiD *«lA^lo Zu^ ^> IAIOb.o *P 7P7IP ^ 7P 7 I.p«, -ft *]yai ^ «^ ^^TiSV)» ^wl ^^ * 0001 ^'r^l tOOii!^o Romans vi. 1 — 10. y r i> 9 ♦. rpi 7«p-ft7 7ripöp '■^^ t * " «» * ^ ^^ ^ X'' P X 7 X -ft •* " ^ 320 CHRESTOMATHY— FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING. py77'»« '^r -rs^p-ryypy i>7ip 6l' ^ Xy^^AjJ ♦ CflSßl *2ID?1I (jQ-«Al ^'r^> '^y ^Xi^pi* CoLossiANs iii. 1 — 15. P 17 77 7 '"t^^''^ 7*> pipi> J lMcaJfcSo> )Z) •QIT) ^JyiJlj \U»iaV) :>OLl ^oASDD XU^Ol ^1* P7 9 77-n ""t^ " "•• ^ PI7 7 »P 2»U>ki? (JO QliZ"! ^\lL>* .loilLj |liV)» \)A ^Aj i»P0«^7^P X 7 -ft •X»«77 -ft *>t '^ 1 I .'^ 3 >toi2^]£:)|»»,i,in^>Qi,^im")^nni jmO .•hl^. ^oal^oZA^isD* «s 7 p »N.O ..77».4s ;j -ftp^i 7 ''%'^ 4 .oAj] .äI ^r>^ ♦♦^i JM OiOOlJ ]j..Ak5 |fcfcfV)> ^ASOJO* i. .. y y I .» 17 p-x -ft7 *'t»« 5.QnAk)joi \)uLDoi oA^ii:!* .|*j^QmQ oiSüi \^^\ZZ yZonoXso .l^t^lA..jo1iEl£)o fZoai^l^cujf .U't>? -B-X-ftp -ft 1«.p^^'ft -ft7 t''* ^ fi oiu.oj |Z1 •hu.. ^-Aoi ^^^4^* .IpAa AILmj *aOi »jioij CHRESTOMATHY— FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING. 321 7 •^P• p«,r>I ''* 9 ..7 7 00 7 (sen* ♦ ^oiQ ^oZuoai ^^ i n*^oiAk) p * ^oji^o ^ ^oAsl^oi ^ Uaaan «IASQaj lUtO> • ^-Aoi ^oilo ^omio a»<^j1 ^> Ö •^ 7 7 I ^ -X ^ "i ^ ' l{t 7 P P -X " 7 •>. X -x 7 0-^7007 ■*••*' 7 7 -«PPX 7P7T77*P7 ''«''10 AjlIj p* ♦ou'rOj jZolCr^ (Air^^ ZjaiASdj Uh^ oanSo* 11 •Vi'^-^o VäJOi iJo ♦IZqIjqio (Z'OUi Uo ♦V»lD'1oU?oou 7 7 T -X f ^ -K >•• X 7 P 7 P njm\* >ooi ]» i«V>.«i\noo^\o yl *.l)V*^*r^o Ir^oi ]]o 12 — • • 0*. ■« 7 1»x..7 ■» X"7 P P 7 P«« 7 7 I «P ]ajaO>o Isom) *>]ninMO l^^r^ loiiLj |>n.> >^1 ^^y-i^oi I-Ä 7 7 ^P7 71 7 *s77 «s 7 PX7P77 PP«s -"7 7 P P *> "" t *" t^ '" '' ^ ».7 p P 7 «P 77 «px 7 -^•P7 ^f*»*^ x7^PP «v'X *7 •X77 7 7 -xi -^ -ft *^i''''t* ^>qVo .oAaOCFIO **r.^ r^J^ ^oAu'r^^Z] 01-^9 ♦.QoZorA 4^«-> Revelations v. 1 — 10. pp pp 7 »P 7 -n I 7 7^X7 tDAo ••^COQJOiZ ^ .äZuj OÖIJ Olli^a ^ AJ»u*o* 1 • '.*..'' X7 p T, t\ 7 ft X7 .Im« ]iö4^ ^i-»^? Oj^^aiD ^o Q.A ^ *£i*Aoj 7X 9v7 P79P r, 7 P »aOIoA^I ailD *.^9 poo ipSo> tj^^^^'-A-*^ ]2]]SO A^i^o* 2 322 CHRESTOMATHY— FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING 3 go* ♦•oiXij P^i^ |;«V^\o ♦♦pDAal oaAsiSol 1q*> ocn ♦r'Ojj Ijm 001 :|>ooijij IAq'^« ^j ooi Ml ]di loi PP7 1» X pi 7 *P P* ■ni7*>.p OoilLj |>jdj \in* ^ouAafj ^^oi ♦M£i« U-»^o ♦\in* * op 77 0* "^•t^'^t '"7 7 1» •"" s«^ArA ommj po* ».isqjo^Z \yA jdLmj oäi> oujlIüa f *.. I7P 7 i*«^.p PO.. 7 77.. -no olsU *,]aiT) ll^Slo ^r^Cll ^010 «UOk^ ^i^j] ^01 * • • • * _ • PP7 ■n7i 1> -'".,'" ■" "t^ %" '' fZol. ^ouA^f) ^-Aoi :|V>rnn ^ ,^»\^? t^oi» *P IP7P7 P-X y 177 i*r7 '•^loJi) *^'r^l P UrM lAjaQ£l»Z ^»M>n«V)0* «lA^r^> ^ -n 1» I 1...P 7 7-n7Pp7 '''"t ''^ lA^'^ ^ ^ ♦♦)A^? pop fOillJ ^ Air^io AmajZ(> 0]^V<^ ^J loil|J ^OjI Z,£^0* •.jASOOlo flülO \1M^0 p7 7 X 7 1».. p CHRESTOMATHY— FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING. 323 Revelations xxii. 1 — 10. px 7 -x '^^P7 •X7 7'^ '^x-^p -h..7 IjAj \oo* ♦tüSüij IZoijaDlJ ♦♦(maJDj cuoioa'^o 401.:^? 3 ■""»•PO-« 7' 7 P 7 7 -x ■^-^0 '^ -I P -X 7 -x ■»> p -X 7 -n I T\ 7 loou (J ^A!io* ♦^ooiA*> p-i^ A^^ ^ oiLij Isqäo^ ?».7 PP7P-X "y, ■>. -n -x !} -x l>aiQjjo ♦♦!.;*> Ijoiqjj prucm ^ooij^ loou Do ».^oZ »onNsnio ♦^ooil jotiLd loilL Ur^? ^^>4^ /^aSosj PP17 pp " r »* t""^ t'^ ' * ^-"p *..p .U'^*r»olAlSaiOÜDlJSO^-Aoi ♦»A'rSolo* .]Vr>\v% ]VnVA 6 • cC^^y P|JSQ2^ ^AJi «uJ9r» U^u> P^oh |ai^ V>*r^O 779 1» *o * /> r "^ %'j*. "1 *^ «• '' { ♦ \)^wiQ (ooiSo-^ ^ojlj ^^01 ♦♦oi\*j f,n\\ a»Q**ia^ p P 7 P -X 17^ ■«•• 7 p -7 P P -X 7 P -^ P P ]:dAdj iZa-*-^^? Uiß-^ 'r^J? 001 MA£)a4 ♦Xy^ W U1 1010* 7 TS f 7 ^ .0 T, 7 '7 9 7 0^ -K Alios po : ^^01 ]u*o MSo») 001 ^XmOi IjI .^lo* «poi s •7 9*7 7 •• 7 1> 7 * t^ "^ r 7 P -« 001 pUiD? ^oia\..j yjjO y..m^\ Alsü ••AjVmO V^I *^>1Aio ^♦U ♦ w»Vm »jA '^fo* ♦^u.Loi^'looi IqjjJ^jq ViiAojlJSül ^'p^J? ^-Aoijo .Ui^u y^j M?o /•jZuI P *, X 7 * •"•• ♦« ""V* X7* «s 7 OP iZouQJj |JSüly)oZu*Z|J*a^ -^lo* .jCL^Ioi^l] ♦poiio 7 I 17 "" *" ^^ '^ " " P P 7 ♦ •jiOioA^I «£:Li'rO> ;a-. pjDi 001 .]joi pi^> 324 CHRESTOMATHY— FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING. Revelations xxii. 11 — 21. u#*£3ai lUt^ •lit? ocno ..^oZ VkOU •^oiSoj ooi* l^fcTI'!' ««^^oZ ^^Aj lAa^OO *^Ci0L .nSl iZoQa^T ]Q-i>10 ^1 ^>>\n\ ij-ail ♦.jlSüI *Aaj iLlo .^\li 1j1 ill p p 7 .7 7 7 P P 0^ -n X p.p 7 X 13 1^^^ 001 «oZo *si-^ Pi Pi* •oiXft> irTii ^oioZul? ^ -X '^ *••(» -X "k" '« *" 7 P I .7 »^ ' _ •' J4 .QJOl .QjI pAsai* ♦JSüI^Qä 0010 JmaS OOl *U*r»A ooio • ^OOlXi) (l^^QS |00U> Urul «Olla) PrOQ£ll ^r^^> *7 7 •k"^«'' *>-*-«yy •h..7 p 7 y rdio ^ci^Sy \oo «Ip^ « 1 »Af^O (JQ^OO *]jJ10 ]s>aO •fl^ -Xö 7 X077 -^7 •X'^P''» P'XPT 16 .onl ojoi£qSüL *.^Aji> ]ol]iül Z>j» ^QA^ p1* «Uci^. J *^1 .r*0>> |mi-. O VpOl 001 *jAj1 pi *\l^ 5»Oy£) ^-Aoi i7»^'rSo1 lA^O PaOJO* .p'rS. 001 *.pJ^^ tOOQO OOl t\ Q '7 tt I "^ 7 '7 ^ P 71 ^7 P 7 P A^ii ooio »IZIj loi t > 0010 .1^ ♦•,io|j MSü*j 0010 ,]L -»> T>.. 7P -X P '»»P P7 T>7.. p 7.. 7 * IsVSül MSü*> ^^^ 111 JOICD* ♦,;-y^ U>* l*^ «^mi " «k * «> P 7 P" I 7 P P .. 7 7 P P 7 19 ^Mj] ^|o* ♦(joi (sArir) ^^Ao> \ln^^\ »^oiqIi |oi2siv *p 7 P2«^ ''^ *^ 'l *" X7 P D 7 ^-^ ••■!* -»« 77 oiAiSül loiiL 5^£u .Ijoi IZqulTuj t)AD> Msd ^ )^nj p.. 17 PX7 .ppl -h IN ..7 P7 * ^putoj •.|Ajl*j£5 ^01 |Aia^ ^o ♦«U^) ]mjL£) ^ 7 «'' » »ik' » -'"P'n 7 .7 7" PPPP7 20 \>K^ p1 Ui ♦♦^I ♦^loi joimkjj OOl '^LdI* .]joi l^Aao 7P X «.''*7P 1N-X 7 1>>'^PPP X7 21 Un |n>i«V) ^QAji ^*,10) OiZq^i^* *^QAa 'U'r^ IZ «^-ki^l «>^.4l0| *\M^rO ^001^ CHEESTOMATHY— FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING. 325 Psalm xlv. 1—10. .■i«\ :]n\V)N ^|kii -^lo »lü^ UüyiAa onS ^ii1*i lAljari:) .^«mnSni «UonL»)!) ]2oq1do ]A»Q£3> IAIsd ]r\\n * «^Zoj^Z ^oLzij IsdSqio ^jjuiji ^'j'L. ^ :yjLjLSa>>5 Aitcno IZon^)! ASqa«)* : >^Zon\V)> 14^« l^-u^^ 14^^ 7 ^Aji lZorJ^> 1»»«V) :>^oilk loilL .^i»»«v> Ijoi!::^^ *Vqi Z'rl^* : ^a>rM «^ZqL ^0 "Uju) )]iLi01 ^ • . . . •n^K 9 : .jbOJ)! ^^rO :^v*aO ^L'^ «inV^»* «^jlE^o]) ^cn>>io Psalm li. 1—10. -'V^t^ lAjuJDO :Al4^ >^>o»»\n ^* *^^La£) .qj14 326 CHRESTOMATHY— FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING. 6^> Aj]* :^^^1 ^^Li^ Ioi^mjdo Ai^iZl ]]q\d> 7«fiDo>^ :«jljAi)o] ^ASooja) IAjuCODo «Aa2. lAsonrs : joL] lyA^ ^o ^^^^ «»IiSSm ♦ ]Dyl]o ]£iO\Ci .iSi 9: »I »A >jZo\n(ir> ^ai^o ««acfi^M ^ «^->-2)l «^ctiI* 10 : *^Q.^ LfL ]tial Vm090 »loilL ^a .-I'^o Voj t^* Psalm civ. 1 — 10. 1 IhCIO ]ail : ,Sll «TD'r» ^Gl!L V>'r^ « V»n^^ wi^£ü ^^Si\Ci* 2y^] U^Q» ^ASD : Uc^'r^ >^1 ]>01QJ .jjn2Z]0* * >M0\ 3^CTAr^'rlD]JLii^;>Qfloo t cuCTio'^r^ ] > ♦crujuAk) ^liil^Z]* : ]rCil ]>qj >^oioi ■V)tiV>o 6 ♦^ouAuXoi Uo^'r!^ >^1 toooiZ* : ^iqLA ^^jloiZ 7 j^ulSuiVj Wo ^o ♦ ^>o'rii »^Zt) ^* : IIsd qSüo ]>a4 ^o 8Ai£)Z> liZti ♦lAina oAajjo IVq^ ooSm* t^nnoi^ASo 9:1i)1]auQmajo .o;£iDi]) « ^oai!^ ASoco IsoomZ'^' :.6gi1^ xo \»n\oüD ])Ci4 Ai.ir^o «Uilir:) Uctü^ Lj^m^ CHRESTOMATHY. NOTES ON THE READING LESSONS- After having analyzed the first page of the Chrestomathy, and thus given a specimen of the manner in which the learner should proceed in reading his first lessons in Syriac, it will only be necessary, in re- spect to the remaining pages of the Chrestomathy, to explain the derivation and formation of the most difficult words which there occur. Thus the student wül be thrown upon his own resources, and be induced, it is hoped, to assiduously study his grammar. EXPLANATIONS. Matthew ii. 1 — 10. 1) Yerse 1. word 3., r-^^1 is a verb in the Ethpeel conjugation» from r^* 2) y. 1. W.7., 1 iV)Oi*^ is compounded of O a preposition and «.klOCLk a noun of the fourth decl. construct plural, from ^CLi * 7 •» j> -n 3) Y. 1. w. 10., oi] is a verb from }!] Pe. pret. 3d. masc. plural (vid. |18. 16). 4) Y. 2. w. 5., ^^il»i is a verb from \\j^* r ft It 5) Y. 2. w. 10., ryimV) is a verb in the infin. pret., from ryh^* 6) Y 3. w. 5., ^LilZZ] is a verb in Ethpeel conjugation, from ^0} or ^1 ♦ * 7 7 7) Y. 4. w. 1., «JU2 is a verb in Pa. conjugation, from ^MlD* 828 NOTES ON THE CHEESTOMATHY. 8) Y. 4. w. 2., .OOlJia-from i^O and takes the noun sufl5x-3d masc. plural. •• ^ ^. \ 9) y. 4. w. 3., w»Ä>-constr. plural from «ÄJ * 10) Y. 4. w. 1., ^IäSo-Is a part, from ^]m ♦ 11) Y. 4. w. 8 and 11., ]6ai jSjTASd^ These two words indicate the imperfect tense, the latter word being a passive parti- ciple ( vid. § 64. 2. B.a; § 65. B. a). 12) Y. 6. w. 6., *jA^001 is a verb in the second person from 1 001 ♦ 13) Y. 6. w. 12., •jDOaJ-third, masc. fut. Pe., from JDSü» 14) Y. 6. w. 15., t-iOlGU— Ip is a verb in the fut. with suffix, from 15) Y. 1. w. 8., )l-ft^ is compounded of \Lä\ and iD (vid. Lexicon), 16) Y. 7. w. 10,, ^\j^L] is a verb in Ethpe. pret. from lv>*» It) Y. 8. w. 6., q!^1 is a verb in the imperative from ^ll (vid. §28. 1 and 2). * 7 T» 7 18) Y. 8. w. 1., QQiQl, imperative from «JQQI* 19) Y. 8. w. 12., *jiOljLJOA**IUi(jiscomposedof ^OU-meaning Äm-3d. masc. suffix, j that a conjunction*-and JoA»»n»| a verb 7 in Aph. conjugation, 2d. plural, from i»» >T ♦ 20) Y. 8. w. 13., ol is a verb 2d. pi. masc. (vid. § 28. 2. Rem.)- imperative from |Z| /o coT/ie. 21) Y. 8. w. 14., t-iJOfOis* is a verb from (Om 2d. masc. plural, imperative, with a suffix pronoun (vid. § 3t. table of verbs |J with suffixes ; § 37. 3). 22) Y. 10. w. 5., CLir^^is a verb from frM« 23) Y. 10. w. 1, (Aaj is an adjective noun, fem. sing, construct, from JDh * *In connection with the preceding word H^, it fonüs a compound conjunction meaning when. (vid. • V)-Aph. fern, participle, from «»>n»» 32) Y. 35. w. 10., 'r^'Z-Pe. future, from 'J:^* 33) Y. 37. w. 5., ^.i^Soj is a participle, plural from y » V)> and that from the verb ^k^> ♦ 34) Y. 37. w. 15., O'^ZASO-infinitive, Ethpe. from jQl or 'J^* 35) Y. 38. w. 2., Q^» ^ra7/-imperative, Pa. from l^t * 36) Y. 38. w. 4., yO^i {je)shallenter-Pe. fut. 2nd. plural, from ^orV^I. 37) Y. 38. w. 8., ]n I ^(}^\ willing-act part. f. Pa. from »QQ^^ SS) Y. 40. w. 9., tOOIil iS their ei/es-kom [IjLL with a plural suflBx pronoun. p.. X 7 39) Y. 40. w. 10., t, in» heavy-an adjective in the plural, from 40) Y. 40. w. 13., ^^fjk knew-fvom ^^^ ♦ 41) Y. 41. w. 8., aK»..»jZZ1ore5^3/6-Ethpe. imperative from wmQJ or 330 NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY. 42) Y. 41. w. 14., ^OL^J^itdD being betrayed-Eth^e. participle from 43) Y. 42. w. 2., ^]ii future of ^l] to go. ■IS 7 * 44) Y. 42. w. 6., ^CUkMÜ^D bäraying- A-ph. participle from ^oN» * Luke xxiii. 18 — 27. 45) Y. 18. w. 1., OLD cried out-Sd. masc. plural, from \LO ♦ 46) Y. 18. w. 6., wiOliNon« take him away-2nd. masc. plural, imperative, with suflQx pronoun (vid. § 36. E table of suflBxes). ;mJ-future from \'r» to rekase. 48) Y. 21. w. 6., *jiCru.2)QDl cri^a/^ ^m-imperative, with a suffix r from «£L01 ♦ ^ ^ 49) Y. 22. w. 19., ^aiQujh]~I will chastise him-int. 1st. sing. Pe. from IjJ with a sufiBx pronoun. 60) Y. 22. w. 21., ^010>n,n«|-J w?z7Z /ß^ him ^ö-future, Pe. 7 1st. singular, with a suffix pronoun, from QjQs ♦ 51) Y. 23. w. 3., ^moZ with 0001 urged-Sb part, from t^^oZ* 52) Y. 23. w. 10., *.*0LiJQ2lOlJ (that) they shall crudfy him- 7 pret. Pe. fut. 3d. masc. plural, with suffix pronoun, from %Si£i\ (vid. § 36. Table). 53) Y. 24. w. 4., loofZ should Jß-future of looi ♦ 54) Y. 24. w. 5., tOOlAI^l» (according to) ^Aeir ^^ire-a feminine, sing, noun, with a plural suffix (§ 16. Table). •X f: 55) Y. 25. w. 16., tOOll «n» their will-& noun with a suffix plural from ,^i>*^ • ♦ 56) Y. 26. w. 2., ^^iNqqSd leading or causing to lead away- A^iii. part, plural from nSO* ♦ 57) Y. 26. w. 4., 0^1 laid hold of-from r^\ • NOTES ON THE CHKESTOMATHY. 33 j 58) V. 26. w. 13., A^J might carry-M\xre from -L^, p „ y ^ y 59) Y. 21. w. 8., \r^^ bewailing-Aiph. part, from -D> Luke xxiii. 33 — 42. 60) Y. 33. w. 5., tl^oASDcAZZft^-Ethpe. pass, participle, from V;r>» 61) Y. 34. w. t., JDOn* /w^it-e-imperative, from «nn» ♦ 62) Y. 34. w. 16., Oi^jK ca^^-Aph. 3d. plural from \Idj ♦ -Äff ff 63) Y. 35. w. 1., ^]d sta'ndi7ig--paiTticvp[e from ^QD* 1» ff r 64) Y. 35. w. 12., hr^Ji to o^^rjf-plural from ^jLl-with the prefix prep. Lomad. X 7 ff 65) Y. 35. w. 13., «.i-aaI saved- Aph. pret. from \jlj>** ^ -R 7 ^ff 66) Y. 35. w. 14., JwJ shall save-A^ih. ftiture, from [ao^* 17 7 61) Y. 36. w. 1., ,^ I ► »1 ^ V) Tnocking-ipnTt. from « »Q *^ ♦ 68) Y 3t. w. 8.,|l»j 5are-imperat. Aph. from |1-m# 77« 69) Y. 42. w. 3., ^AJLä'fDJL] remember we-imperat. Ethpe. with 7 Buf. from JOj ♦ Luke xxiii. 43 — 53. TO) Y. 45. w. 3., ^'^ . 1- iüa5 rew^-Ethpe. part, from lu ♦ ^ i* transposed and changed into i{% 12. 2. Rem.). 11) Y. 46. w. 3., \lo r^'ce-with a prefix preposition. .. » I 7 12) Y. 46. w. 1., «^;ato into thy haTids-from fA with a prefix preposition, and a suffix pronoun. 13) Y. 46. w. 8., ^]SD conßding-Pe. act. participle from ^QflD •» 14) Y. 48. w. 4., ^jkJuJLO- came together- A^. pret. plural from "^^^^ ' OF TfiK 332 NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY. T5) Y. 48. w. 16., tOOUrAi tJidr breasts-from ytf** with sui plural. T6) Y. 49. w. 1., ^^ t V) I n standing-]^a.Yt. Pe. plural from ^CLD • *7t) Y. 49. w. 6., «ji01Q^0,a his acquaintance-ivom y^O^ with euflfix. T8) Y. 51. w. 7., I n m V>-^;<2i^2??g--participle from \D£D * 19) Y. 53. w. 1., cyiLKä\^took dowTir-Aph. pret. from AmJ • ^9 1 7 80) Y. 53. w. 8., |;im dug out--pavt. passive, Peal from ;nj ♦ 81) Y. 53. w. 13., ULtOill'^was Zdii^-Ethpe. pret. from yio. I is doubled (vid. § 12. 2. Rem ; § 31. 2). Acts xvü. 22—32. 82) Y. 23. w. 3., j^pAi passing ij^-Ethpe. part, from y\D ♦ * -71 83) Y. 23. w. 9., AwJa«] //oi^?ii-Aph. pret. 1st. singular from 84) Y. 23. w. 14., au.Ll on it ^ with a suffix. 85) Y. 23. w. 29., ;nmV) ^ecZö^re-Pa. part, from ;Lco * 7 7 ■»» -r» 7 86) Y. 25. w. 2., »mLoAmSD wör^ÄzjTpzTz^-Ethpa. part, from *mSQ»* 81) Y. 26. w. 8., .6oC31J shall be, with ^^SOl 5Ä(wZ^ dwdl-Ye. fut. 3d. plural of the defective verb (001 ♦ 88) Y. 21 w. 2., ^iVn Äeß^m^-participle from (IS* 17 7 S9) Y. 21. w. 4., ^^ I *^n\V) ■ seeking, feding-PeLel pass, participle * 7 from «jZlOI* 7x7 r 90) Y. 28. w. 4., .lit»! our Zi/e-pl. absolute form with suf. _^ ** •• 7 from I i I »i» 91) Y. 28. w. 5., ,^1 iNqZASd oi^r 77im?2^-Ethpe. part, and ßuffixfrom^Olor^W NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY. 333 92) Y. 28. w. 6., ^A^l-ore-lst. person plural from Aj^I ♦ 93) V. 28. w. 12., fCLQ^> who with yo^^-composed of #00 you, \ with and J who. 94) V. 28. w. 16., ^100104 our offspring-fvom >OaiQ4 with suffix pronoun. 7 I i> y 7 95) y. 29. w. 8., ,^1 i*^i »i our debt, from «Hi n with a suffix. 96) V. 29. w. 9., 'rODClk) to //^iTzX'-infinitiye, Pe. from ',^£0. 9t) y. 29. w. 15., \Si^^y%^ written ov graven-]^^vi\d^\Q, Pe. from 98) y. 29. w. 16., l2aiSD0i£i by art, from VZoiiDol^ 99) y. 30. w. 15., *Q0Aj shall rejpeiit-MmQ Pe. from *QoZ or«jaZ« 100) y. 31. w. 6., tOjJj that shall jvdge-MmQ Pe. from ^ with the prefix } * 101) y. 31. w. 14., t i1*^(0 and showed, made k7ww7ir-Ai^\i. from X 7 *. 102) y. 32. w 8., ,^ I O ■ V) V) ??ioc^i7i^-partieiple, Pa. from tjOOSD* Romans vi. 1 — 10. » •« 7 * «k 103) y. 1. w. 4., (QCÜ shall remaiTir-YQ,. future from |C10 ♦ 104) y. 1. w. 8., >A^ZZ 5^/Z Je A^MTi^aw^-Ethpa. future from >Aa ♦ 105) y. 2. w. 7., tjJ Ä/kZZ fc-future Pe. from ]L*^* 7 7 106) y. 3. w. 6., ti^ül> w?Äo wen baptized--pvet. Pe. 1st. pi. 7 • 7 com. from r^^Ql with the prefix J ♦ lot) y. 4. w. 1., ^;Q£)Z] are buried-Eihipe. pret. 1st. pi. com. from 'fCiQ* •X ^7 108) y. 4. w. 14., ^^OiaOfjö/Äw/Ä^^r-a noun in the suffix state, 334 NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY. 3d. masc. siDgular, from »ä| with the prefix j ♦ 109) Y. 4. w. 20., 5A0U should walk-i\ximQ Pa. from yJ^öX ♦ •K -ft 7 110) Y. 5. w. 4.,^Q^ZfÄ(2t'6&eß7i^/a7i^ß<^-Ethpe.pret.from*a^< 111) Y. 5. w. 11., Toau shall Jß-future Pe. from looi» 112) Y. 6. w. 1., ^^1 iSf* Äwöwiw^-partieiple, with a suffix from • -Hi» F 113) Y. 6. w. 5., «ÄOjll is crwq/?ftf-Ethpe. pret. from *2L01 ♦ 114) Y. 6. w. 1., ^Jy^Ajj that should he destroyed-'Eüi^Q.. from v^4^ ^th the prefix > ♦ 115) Y. 8. w. 6., ^SOkOU JßZiere-Aph. future from ^Iso] ♦ 116) Y. 8 w. 10., "1*11 5Äfl/Z fe-future Pe. from ]lja» 11*1) Y. 9. w. 13., v^AüiD heing ^owerful-'Eih^Q.. participle from ^4-^ * 118) Y. 10. w. 9., wft-x» living-T^diii. Aph. from (aaa* CoLOSsiANs iii. 1 — 15. 119) Y. 1. w. ^., QIQ 5ee^-imperative of ^liD ♦ 7 7 -^ 120) Y. 2. w. 2., Q1>Z) /e^ your affections be pZaco^-Ethpe. im- perative, from ]1> ♦ ^ '• y y » * •• 7 121) Y. 3. w. 4., tO*^i ■ »I 2/0 w life-fvom fi i »t with a suffix pron. and the prefix O ♦ 122) Y. 4. w. 9., tO-i-iZZ (ye) shaU ^pjTear-future Ethpe. from N 123) Y. 5. w. 1., oAxSdI mortify-Aph. imperative from AaId* •X •• 7 P 7 124) Y. 5. w. 3., tnntV)>01 your memhers-SuS^xstate, 2üd. masc. 7 \ plural from pOjOl ♦ NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY. 335 125) V. 5. w. 11 and 12., «^01 «^Oli« These pronouns seem to include the substantive verb (comp. § 54. 3. a), 126) y. T. w. 8., ^-i.aaoiAk5 turning or having turned-Eth^SL from j^sacn « 12 1) Y. 8. w. 3., Q» » i. l | ^?6^ ö^i^a^-Aph. from %jaQJ or «.mJ ♦ 128) V. 9. w. 2., ^OOOlZ 3/ß 5Äfl// iß-future from looi» 129) V. 9. w. 3., ^^iS.tySP iying, decntfulr-j^SLViicipie Pa., from 130) V. 9. w. 7., %.ig1QA».\Q» put off, cast 6^w7ö^i/-imperative Pe., from %»>■>>• ♦ It takes a suffix. 131) V. 9. w. 12., %aCnQaaocn his deeds-suS. state, plural from »* ..p *, "" (02)001 • Z7 7 • •» . , pjaASO) 2/)^^ iei/i^ renewed-EÜipüL, part, pas- • 7 * sive from Zr** with the prefix > ♦ 133) y. 10. w. 6., aiä'fC^y who created him-fvom f;0 with a suf. pronoun, with the prefix > ♦ 134) y. 12. w. t., t^^jJZUiO and belaved-^lvLTU from fninn with the prefix O ♦ 135) y. 13. w. 1., ^AjiOOIO atid ye-fvom 001 with the verbal termination-2nd. pi with the prefix O * 17 r 136) y. 13. w. 2., ^^ *; *T^ a,im V) forbearing-F&, part, from ;*irf>» 137) y. 15. w. 1., OlSii^O and his peace, fi'om |SDAii with suf. pronoun, and prefix O ♦ 138) y. 15. w. 4., ^QoLq^\ your hearts, from lo^ with suf.prou. •X I ■» 139) y. 15. w. 6., ^oLä'rDL] ye are mZ/c^-Eth. 2nd. plural from f\ 7 140) y. 15. w. 10., ^-ajQuJiJ thankfulr-^Qxt active Aph. from 336 NOTES ON THE CHKESTOMATHY. Revelations v. 1 — 10. 141) Y. 1. w. 1., AjtpaO atid I saw-X^h.. pret. 1st. sing, from IVm with prefix O» 142) Y. 2. w. 10., «,mA'^V)\ to open-Pe. infinitive from oaA£} with prefix ^ • 143) Y. 3. w. 11., QUI M>,V>\ to look on it-in^n. with suffix from 1v** with the prefix L ♦ 144) Y. 4. w. 2., A^OOl it i^-formed from Aa| and OOl, ] being dropped. The phrase, including the word preceding and the one following, means literally, it is weeping much. 145) Y. 4. w. v., •^j^Z^I was found-Ethpe. from 146) Y. 5. w. 8., |asZ hterally thou shalt weep-^vadi. per. fut. masc-put for the imperative (vid, § 61. B. a). 14 1) Y. 6. w. 6 , 5»o|o3 to stand, ^\0 is a participle from ^OO (vid. § 64. 3. B. Rem.). 148) Y. 6. w. 8., ]mini 5/rtm-pass. part. Peal. fem. from .mnj* 149) Y. 6. w. 21., ^9>As|> who were sent-Z^. per. f. plural, ,77* Ethpa. from 5J*» Revelations xxii. 1 — 10. 150) Y. 2. w. 23., *^01Q2)*p4o and leaves of it-ixom. \Si\l with a suffix, and prefix O» 151) Y. 3. w. 4., loOU shall 5e-future of loOl» -X 7 152) Y. 3. w. 14,, %^OL>JQmSa«J ^MZ 5ßrt-ß Am-fut. 3d. masa plural. Pa. from «aS^Is with a suffix. 153) Y. 5. w. 16., )aillO causing to shim-Kph. part. masc. from NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY. 33t 154) V. 6. w. 15., OiOi»V)\ to show-mfmitive, Pa. from «jiCLm* 155) V. 8. w. 13., ryiffl^^^ to worship, to pratse-in&mtivef Peal from r\!e^ * 156) y. 11. w. 1., lUV ^^^^ beßthy-M. Ethpa. from ]ly 151) y. 14. w. 15., toSsi tkey shall enter z?^-fut. 3d. masc. Peal from ^\l» 158) y. 11. w. 4., 12 cöTwe-imperative of IZ]* 159) y. 19. w. 3., J^iQJ äää/Z toÄe Ä«;Äy-Peal future from >eO* 338 NOTES ON THE CHBESTOMATHY. POETRY. We present a few specimens of Syriac poetry, taken from the Peshito Bible, published by the British and Foreign Bible Society, in 1826. It wül be observed that the text does not appear in a rhythmical form, nor are there any divisions into verses. The Peshito or literal version was made near the close of the first, or beginning of the second century, while the divisions into chapters and verses were introduced in the thirteenth century. Points, in addition to Ribui^ will be noticed over and under particular letters. These are intended to mark the occurrence of Kushoi and Rukok. Psalm xlv. 1-^10. 1) Yerse 2. word 9., IjOlL^^ therefore. This is composed of the conjunction ^^^^^ ^-nd the suffix pronoun poi» Conjunctions as well as other particles often take suffixes. 2) Y. 3. w. 1., 1Sd>1 cast (gird)-Aph. unperative, from fcoj» See a similar instance in Matt. xvii. 2t. Psalm li. 1—10. 3) Y. 2. w. 1., Im^I multij>ly-imperaitiYe, Aph. from kv^D used here adverbially in the sense of very muck. 4) Y. 2. w. 2., t i 1 1 . t ■ • I wash wß-imperative, Aph. from •mQ' with a suffix pronoun. NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY. 339 5) y. 2. w. t., wklO) cleanse we-imperative, Pa. from p> with a ßüflöx pronoun. 6) Y. 3. w. 8., ,^ni\nn in all Urne, always-üom i^ all, ^\ time and the prefix preposition, a in. 1) Y. 4. W.8., »D)>lZ> that thou mightest be just-Ethpa. 2nd. sing. masc. future from *0>1^ The preformative falls away as the con- junction > precedes. 8) Y. 6. w. 1., «.iAAl90| thou makest im to know-^n^. sing. pret. 7 X Aph. from ^r^ with a suffix pronoun. 9) Y. 9. w. t., ii»»\ Uot (W^mperative Pe. from V»^* Psalm civ. 1 — 10. 10) V. 5. w. 1., ^A| preparad, laidr-Ethpe. from ]1d^ 11) Y. 5. w. 4., 01 1 1 nASo-participie with a suffix pronoun from 12) Y. T. w. t., ^aäOIjASD hastening-QXL Ethpe. participle, from ^019« 13) Y. 9. w. 6., OLJOmniO and (that) they should not arcer-M, plural, Pa. from (OlD with a suffix pronoun, and the conjunction O preceding. SYRIAC LEXICON. J^X 1^], suf. wvsl a father, pi. (OLj^l (ZoUDf parents. |0| to perish, Aph. to cause to perish, to destroy. r t> ^ijo] to be sad, to be disturbed. \> i 1 '^l Abnil (name of an idol). ^CJi;£i^ Abraham. Ijo.1 m. a reward. 1Z^.1 a letter, a writing. P>1 an ear. ol or. - »p 0| I (mark of the vocative). AaOO I namely, that is (from Of and AjlO). I'ZoiiDo'l skill, ability. lidDOJ^f. a nation. Ja£)o1 Ophir (a proper name). •u 01)0 1 Edessa in Mesopotamia (a proper name). Vm9o] a way. |A.-i>0| the law book of Moses, the Pentateuch. ^a^Sol Jerusalem. ^ll to go, to go away. \jj\ brother. ^m] to hold, to seize, to lay hold of. l^^l the last, the end. ^;jw»l, P-k>Af another; fern. VA-a-p-**l, pi. m. ^U*!, 0*^ I Vfc.4^Q.fc^| an Egyptian. Au'l^SJOyj-il Adverb, like the Egyptians. 1^1 hand-in Hebrew '^i . Ih^I who, which, fern, of M-»l« ^1 SO as, according to, as to, (secuTidum) nearly, J ^| just as, therewith. |q-^1 where? J 1^3— »1 there, where ; P— »|J whither ? ]^-a | ^Sb whence ? Q^^l where. 342 SYRIAC LEXICON. ^V f J » y ^y SO ^1, ]lSul how? > ]l2u\ that. ^^iSil pi. they. ^] truly, certainly, yes. P-a] who, what-|l-»)o at what. «jQmJCQjiI Isaac (a proper name). ^l;£CLkl Israel (a proper name). \^CUk\ honor, a mark of esteem, a solemn procession. I 7 X A—il it is, *jkLä\ 1 am, etc. Mr^l serpent (s^'^va). rM^l at the same time-together. ^\ol to eat, to consume. Uv^.^y just as, J l-SQ-of of such a quality (qualis). fa-im n| a stranger, a guest (is'vo^). Wl but, yet (aXXa), if not (=0 Ö). to lament. loiSL God. HCri-iv godly. iZoCJL^ f. divinity, the godhead. Vt> ,imn V v an Alexandrian. •auSk Olaph, the first letter of the alphabet. *2l^ to learn, Aph. to cause to learn, to teach. f^ vv a ship. » ■ vv to constrain, to compel, to urge any one, • i v^ op- pressed. t* fc-Ä. oppressed. iSo] mother. r*^\ Amida in Mesopotamia (a proper name). I 7 * 17 ^aLdI, ]i i V) l, surely, firmly. ^1 Aj)h. ^IlliOl, fut. ^JkliOU to believe. 10 17 Lk\\ iV)| Adv. constantly. ;SDf to say, to speak. I^So] a lamb. 7 1» %^A!sd1 (with > following) i£ Oif. 1» 7 ^] I, pi. ^Lm we. ^Q — sl m. ,^> .ll f., that [as Aoc) «. X 7 01 ifcjf Antinum (a proper name;. 1 Ethjpa. to sigh. ü| man, a certain man, pL ^^i«li and \M1\* SYRIAC |Zqaj1 humanity, as concrete, mankind. A-jV m. »-lA if f. thou ; pi. ^oAaVm. ^AjVf. you. |ZAj^ a woman, a wife. lioffil a healing. Xr^Xa bound, pi iVo^T Ax£) a prison. |pQ4co1 stylite (according to Assem.) «fnimfciPl sedition. \^n^] oil of cinnamon. lZQl^-r40D! a soldier. f I -n ILQa^O)! external appearance, dress, (tf^^Sjfxa). p p IT« )jAV> > nCY)! hypocrite P 9 P •äI also, iJa] neither. ^>«^1[ V— ^V face, ^^^ *jiJal over, «jLall according to, towards. |£}QQmjL2)( a bishop. •£} »1 to be anxious, uneasy. ^lQj( IHDj] four. p i-n * ]n I ^>1 heterodox. LEXICON. 343 p ' fail a lion. «JDDCLa) I Arius. " ' ' f v 1 JX)Q.^ JX)CLi>( Areopagite. PQ2>| a ruler, a chief man. |jL^)| a Syrian, a Gentile. p y '^•^ (.^n > m?l an errorist, a heretic. •TCutDjI heresy (aJ'^stfij). (l)| earth, land, country. i^O# I to find, Ethye. to be found. ■»> .. y p -n ISOQ..^ 2A»1 the six days work, the creation, p "» |Z1 to come, A^A. to lead, to bring, to conduct. y y p y >21, |>Z| a place, a region. «iD in, from, through, to. 1il\]a a possessor of a bath. t y I 2>ot>, "tol^ a pulpit {ßriiia), »> y ^Q.» p£i hence. ZoiQ to be ashamed, Apk. to make ashamed. p y * ]ZZcTLD shame, disgrace. V^Q^Q^, «-iZoikQ^ a counselor, 10 P -K So — QDQ— JD agreeableness, amiableness, |9Q£^ awkward, uneducated. 344 SYRIAC LEXICON. »pD »»QO Pa. t»il*S to deride, to mock. 9 7 p y ]L\ h* O (from V;«.^! end) finally. ^^4^ to cease, to destroy. 7 ^O to conceive. Ii4^ pregnant. 7 7 among, between. m. (Ajujd evil. ' m. an tvil person-pl. ^^■in, fZo»!*^ malice. 7 I «aQJu.2 Besoe (a monk-proper name). LäJO = t li Q between, by ; P 7 •» 3: 7 Aj — I — a ^ out ; ^iau Aa^ Mesopotamia. Aaä, lAjkO a house, lUiDO' AjJD the Roman dominion. ^ij^AÄä Bethlehem (a proper name). V^d to weep. riü vTithout. 'p'-y P"fi ..7 falO pi. m. sons. (aJ| -><*^ • •• 7 Co7wf. fat >10 men, lit. sons 7 of men. ;ä is always used in the sing, for son. ]akO to despise. Part. P. ]m!D despised. tX 17 J300>\imn Basilius (a pro- per name. |ZoV)imn f. joy, benignity. l;4^niD m. back. ^QfiQO to perfume. |V)mn odors. pÄ to seek, with ^So to entreat, to demand. |^^i Ns*^ enemy, an adversary. f Z^liD the seeking, the finding out. , 7 y ^!D to take away. ;-i^ m. small-1;^»^ feminine. y/< X o 1^0;^^ a small matter (for the Adj. small). \ — n M.n to explore, to discover, Ethpa. with %d to contemplate. JOO a gnat, a midge. •fi, IjiD son. 1i\jLi^ wiiö an inhabitant of the city. 1^ to create, ]^1;^;l^ Barabbas (a proper name). »MO 7 p;!D^ a Barbarian. P 7 7 t^>r^ Bardesanes (a proper name). I (Aa,JD houses, pi. feminine. 7 ^f O to fall down, to bend the knees, Ethpa. to receive a bene- diction, to bless one's-self. SYRIAC LEXICON. ^pD but, jet 7 7 « •i;*^ Etkpa. to become man. |«i;0 man. ]0[a the lightning, brightness. ]Z;r^, 2-^ a daughter, pi. Ais* 845 IjoAq, f A^oAo a young woman, a maiden. jAilä after, ^-OjAO afterwards. ^ » So >Aq soon, (literally), shortly thereupon. \Hy\, Iry^an arrow, dart. M^t to choose, to select. ^ f^ 7 tk 7 H^^-A« a side, a part, h^^^t |J-SüCDj the wrong side, i. e. an enemy. f.Ä.£lyt the choice. fANan.t a formation, a creature. 7 ^9^7 ^^t, l^^t a man, a person. ^SüfiO-y Gethsemane (a proper name). *7 «jS-iPä. *£)-• to blaspheme. fc»,i^ to meet with any one, to happen to any one. Qy. in the midst, CX^h^ within. ]>gL. a troop, a multitude. i2)>a.i m. blasphemy. MJCL. shame, disgrace. M)Q.t Guria (proper name of a woman). I^JOVy. circumcision. )Hk»A^ to laugh, to mock. U-o to uncover, to discover, JEthpe. to be discovered, to be made known. V^yt to rob, Ethpe. to be robbed, Aa|jL^.. public, free. M > ^ yt Galilee (a proper name). »P £> t -nVi |l iNy« a revelation. .7 x:^ «21^ .• to engrave. |Zo;iV>yt an accomphshment, perfection. •jSO^ to fulfill, to finish. Vr^^ mighty. IXy» Pass. Fart. lUiyi hidden, unknown. VkXy« to lend. ■A \i • P 1» «cniyt, JflU-i race, family {ysvog)^ offspring. •mfiOu« Aph. *£^» I to lie down. ;!.• to scold, with «2 • *P ^7 PiJD;.. the north. ^P 7 ^ |l0^« a bone, a Hmb. 346 SYEIAC LEXICON. } mark of the G^mfe; Rdcu- tive Pronoun; while, that, there- with, in order that. «mjD) to offer. Pa. the same. lAkO) an offering. jij to carry, to take, Ethjpe. to be conducted, to conduct ones- self. ^. J to lie, Pa. ^^S^?* > a falsehood. \^o\y gold. l;aoj behavior. X 7 päO> David, sometimes written '«. X 900U9 (a proper name), j^oj, poj, |Aao>, place. •X «aO), *a> to crush. ^\>jj to fear, to worship. p » •» X 7 -n lA^j fear, terror, !>)*, A^j superstition. »0 P 7 I Qui J an evil spirit, the Devil. »9P 7 pQLk> to be possessed of an evil spirit. *^-Aj a word accompanying the Possessive Pron. § 16, « i\i> who is my, or my. t7 I y^y thy, or who is thy. ^? but {ßl). *,:> 7 M-ij a Judge. r^? judgment. * This is formed from ) and V^ , Vid. reference above. Tr. ^99 ^^> Daison (the proper name of a river). 10 r ;ji> a cloister. |l;ji> a monk. ^LoA'f^y monastic life. I 171 1 > n >Aa> testament ((^laäi?«»)). » * »P 7 pj, JjbOj pure, clean. *P X 7 Pj Pa. ^AiOj to purify. 7 p> to remember. y>j, and poj the blood. (ZqSjOj a resemblance, an image, a likeness. lli>0> similar. IjlLdj CöTiÄ/r. St. ulÜjj value. ■n 5^> to sleep. I 7 .^> i V)> sleeping ; Matt. viii. 24, pi. ..X 7 ^l^j to weep. 7 ;Sdj Eth'pa. to wonder at, to be astonished. P X ^J to judge, Pass. Part. ^> judged. twJj the feast of the appearance of Christ ; Epiphany. ^P 7 pLOj the beard. yS} A-ph. Y'i{\ to comprehend. P^JJ an arm. 1 «Ajj to encounter, to speak with any one. STBIAC LEXICON. Vol« 01* loi lo ! fjOl Fa. »^jOl to lead, to guide. (301 this, she, Pron.{Chal., ^X\)- T pOjOl members. fjjOl honor, glory. 7 0*. X 001 m. «-kOI f. and 001 m. %aü\ 7 f. that, the former ; j 001 who; > wkOL»£D since. looi to be ( Verh Subst.) Fut. It, n oou* QaOOI he, she. 1 001 them. paooi customs, deeds. ^r^OI there, then. )j.^^01 a temple, a palace. yZo 1V) idi faith, belief, doc- trine, ]Akaa* LfjSL the sav- ing faith. ^QOOl in like manner. mjJDOI therefore. 7 P «P 7 ^-OOl, P—OOI so, in this manner. ^01, ^Ou^ hence, for, there. ^Ol Fa. to wander, to go forth, to walk. ^x^OI they, these. ^01, (-J01 m. IjOl f. plur. tOJOl m. ^j-JOl f. this. 347 t 7 ff »mjLQJOl pUJOl advantage, pleasure. 7 «^01 to return, Aph. to lead back, •XS) 90)01 Herod (a proper name.) P901 here, hither. •-•Ol, ^01 now, at present. O ]o the letter Vaii, and. 1* 7 1« 1» ^1 to redeem, Fut. ^P, Pa. *7 7^V 7 ^1, li^l time, pi. llOl Acts xvii. 26. 9 7 »•• 7 X 7 *•• 7 lAuDl, ^2>2> or ^-0^1 ^i)2j twice ; ^i1*^l li^L thrice ; y>Ur) ^ ^1 before. ;,»! to grow dumb, to put to silence. )2Li>l just, upright. 7 -M» w-Ojl to be just, ^£)jl it befits, it is suitable, it is becoming. 1^ i ■ 0>1 agreement, corres- pondence. lAo>l alms. Aji1;^011 Adv. careftilly. , 7 J011 Ethjpa. to beware. (aiw.*01 praise, show, splendor. «m 1*^10^ Zenobius (a proper name). IP X 7 r^m. I, 348 STRIAC LEXICON. ^01, ^i to move, to be restless. ^01 a moving, a dance. ]ä01 hyssop. (QUI honor, splendor. pi-»! a weed, ts 7 ^\ to arm. ]oi to conquer, to vanquish. (jbDl a conqueror. \r^\ a song. A species, kind. ».iJT, P»J1 m. fornication. 1Za.iJl fornication. jQll, fjQil little, jQlViä U? not small. 7 *Q11 to cry, to call. IslilDI cross. 7 *£1D1 to crucify, to torture. \y\j^ free, HIm'^jQ free. «jQja ought. ^AJiQiQAft quiet, concealed resi- dence. • ff X 7 I .. I 7 |*^«*'^>> beloved, pi. ^^■*^>*l»i* ■ o,o^> Habib (a proper name). ];n»» an associate, the other, any one. 7 «a^i» to enclose. L^ a feast, a feast day. lame. f. one, a certain one, any one ]*^iiO r** Sunday. 1,-j^, ^r»M to rejoice ; |AlD> 1 Zo rJs* to rejoice very much. IZOjj^ rejoicing. fjfX» mutual, reciprocal. Ofjv*, KOfja gladness. *? P 7 Mr** joy. ][»pM the breast, pi. sufif. Luke, xxiii. 48. >r** to surround, to flow around. yjöl honor, majesty. 7 P ^9rM around. ZpA* to renew. 7 ■*•• 7 IZ^AA new, pi. IZpM ♦ « X 7 (Om, Pa;. «aOm to show, to in- dicate. VP 7 DO» love. »P P -x ]irr>Vno>> perseverance, patience. ^p p -x Pj^DOm injury. '\] -- to see Ethpe. to be seen, to appear. loV—j^ a vision, pi. pOV^ an apparition. • V^V*^ June. •Op^ to bind. hu** \a\^ bond, union. (Zvm a view. 14^ to err, to sin. ]oi4>* m. sin, crime, pi. V*^4**> fOl^ja and ^Ol4>A* lAjL^ f. sin. |A4a* wheat, pi. ]^ ♦ H-M to live, Apk. %^.jJ\ • ->j and |i i »t life. (It always has the plural form but gen- erally a singular signification. p 7 .. I p 7 '*^» «^^ m. a debtor, pi. ^iHi »t» fZCLMa living creature, an animal, a monster. ^Jwi-M, v^-M a force, an army. ^\Lm to strengthen. .A\i»» and pA\i »I strong. I ^-i-M linen, fine linen. »J XT » l> 17 >Oin»i, |V)in»> wise, plural I.. x7 «i>.. 17 - iV>in»> and |V>tn»i« ]ASQ2lm wisdom. yja vinegar. ^O \»i a gnat, a fly. «^..JLm to mingle, Ethpa. to take part, to associate with any one. ^.iXm, 1v>i\»i sound, healthy. vLm to wash. SYRIAC LEXICON. 349 ?>o\»i to dream, Ethpe. to re- cover. ^*^^»i for, instead of. ASOm Ethpe, to be angry. lASüjs» anger, wrath. |A.|jJjs* a sigh. ^1** we, us, pi. c. from [i\» l*^!»! a heathen, an idolater. «CQlm, «fiDQja far be it. ,^irn»i vehement, strong. ^QCCLm to envy, with *0» I^Lm to cover Ethpa. to conceal one's-self. Aa]4»^»i diligently. 7 jajs* yl^Ä. to blush, to be ashamed. «» 7 (.^ the back, the loins. 9Qj^ to be white. >* to see, to look out. ^;x», y^^j^l to curse, to detest. ,77 j'fj^ Pa. to liberate. \M'r^ a magician, a sorcerer. ]l'rL f. from ]l'rJ^] finally, the end, enough. |jUM endurance, suffering. ^Q«>>, pQjBjs» darkness, pi ^ÄPOa»» Eph. iv. 18. ^Ajs* to mark, to seal. ]SoA>A a seal. 350 SYRIAC LEXICON. (o(4 a rumor, a report. «^4 J.<:^j. good. -4c?v. very. Win^ Fart. P. m. sealed. llri^ seal. »IDCl^ Pa. JQji-i to be ready, to be willing. |l2Q^ the pious, the good. pAoaiQ4, and "jioo^ kind, family, ofifspring. lAjk^Q4 vine, branch. ]o>0^ readiness. (CQSdq^ a part (tomus.) *£)Q^, *2L^ to swim over any- thing, to overflow. |>Cli a mountain. [S^jQl^ distress, misfortune. ] i •Q^ that which is con- cealed, 11»q4s secret. Q£L^, fZoni (j goodness, excel- lence, benevolence, grace. •R 7 •£00^ to order, (ratfCsiv). (cna^ an arrangement, order, state (Ta|ig). |1^, ]h\(, a young man, a youth. ^A I \ 1^ a girl, a maiden. ^^4 to carry. «n!i^ £^ÄpÄ. to be dispersed. ]Sa4 foul, detestable. ]*hl (^ unclean. 1Zq£Ii4 uncleanness. ]Li to wander, to wander around, to forget, with ^ to fall from something, to apostatize, Aph. to mislead, to deceive, to cheat. (Zcui^ error, heresy. ^oL^ to taste, to taste well. _1^ to be laden, to bear, Aph. to cause to carry, to bring. (*212l4=*25(i4) «2^ to over- run. Aph. %2l41 to overflow, to fill. «I 1» *m£I^, Ethpe. .m 1*^^21 to ac- quiesce, to obey. y y'ri^o chase away, to drive away. ^•pi to strike, Ethpe. •Si'ril] ♦ ]a;4 a leaf. 1^*, V"1L» fine, suitable, proper. «^^fji to wish very much, Ethpa. the same. ^\:i* to lead, to lead away. ■TS I to dry up. f p», Ipi] hand, ^»^ by, with help, on account of. \r-^ Aj?/i. »^>0| to thank, with %Q to believe in something, to confess, , X IC p>. m. acknowledged, known. ]Alr-> f. knowledge. 7 I ^,_^ to know, to be acquainted 'with ; Ethpe. to be known ; Aph. to make known, to in- dicate. Ppi, ^10^ an acquamtance, one known. fAlr—^ knowledge, insight, de- vice. y ^ om to give, Lnperative •—.sen ; with \MSk^ to give up one's life. » » -X I »> X ♦ ..p «^ X Va?OGrLi, >00U Juddsa,]di)0aLi9 pi. Jews. 7 1« 4^ JP01 i1*^CLfc Jovinian (a proper name). ^^ t mOi John (a proper name,) T> 7 «2ifiQQa Joseph (a proper name). JP O t No j Juhus(a proper name). %CD01 >\0i Juhan (a proper name). pLZLlQ^ a doctrine, teaching. y)Q— *, "lieu day, ]<^0-^.A by day, ^CU, U^ol to day, SYRIAC LEXICON. 35 X now ; ^O ■ So daily. UjQji a Greek, Zu]-Ja» Adverb. in the Greek manner, accord- ing to the Greeks. ^jZcli, P>Zqj use, advantage. » P X I H, ■ » I a hermit. to bring forth, Ethjpe. to be born. ]'pAi birth, l?Q — -^ a small boy, a child. ^P 0- to \2iQ — la a teacher, a learned man. «'^N ■ to learn, A'ph. to inform. |V) ■ the sea. |V) i to swear, Aph. to cause to swear, to swear to. M '^ ' the right hand, the right. (DQla a suckling, a baby. « X c21£Q.a ^^)^. to add. Jl-a to increase rapidly. «s 7 ^d CiCiS i Jacob (a proper name). J2)0 ^ one who takes care. r^-» to burn. *0 7 lyna flame, holocaust ; > n .i, t ; i n i illustrious, honored, great. * X *lD;a to be great, to increase (in respectability). 352 (1*;^ a month. «p I p »p I p Pji;^, |^^^> ä tent. ^QJLi Jesus. Li being, essence. ^loLi to remain, to dwell, to settle, to sit. -So ; >A« niore than. P -X 17 |Zo;-iAj superfluity. ,7. I 9Aji to win, to abound. IId to prevent, to rebuke. I p I .^lo, lop passion. ip I Zupt) justly. IZcüt justice, righteousness. l£)P a stone, a rock, Cephas, or Peter. IZp f. a rebuke. 7 \!S^D perhaps. fD as, during (pleonastic before the Fart). pcno a priest. IZoJOlO the priesthood. IpMQD shame. *p 7 ^-R .. 7 1^2 Q2 m. a star, pi. [i^DQO Matt. xxiv. 29. I^VOQD a priest. ^p p jSDQO^ |£QO m. a cup. |1»)C13 a cell. SYEIAC LEXICON. *p , *- \jl£QjQD a throne. , »» o j^^Ä^ä^. , »» nil to blush. ^7 I -X *. I Jj— JQ— 4®r*^ the laying on or extending of the hand (^■^si^oTovia). ^-O all, every, ,— m — N ^ each. ]n\n a dog. I P X ^^jlLd, iJiNo a crown. lio^\o every thing, any thing. VA^ a bride. |S02 how much, how much more. 7 ;lüO to be amazed, to be sad. llO to give a surname. (Aid a fellow servant. \Zi\D bosom, lap. 7 «A12 to assemble, to collect to- gether, Ethpa. to be assembled. » p * (aid an assembly. |cQO a cup. ^£02 to conceal, Pa. to cover, Ethpa. to hide one's-self. m^ .jP ■»» ^P 7 (CQ3, |ifnn, (iffln concealed, p .. 7 |l2^ famine. 7 ;£iD to deny, to refuse, to desert (with *Q)» 7 7» p where, pi^ there where. IP to feel pain, ^ A^p it pains one. lip. l^'fD sad, sorrowful, Ethpe. to pass by, to go. OUp, ')aLft;2 infirm, weak. YfO Aph. to announce (^»ifuö'ö'sjv). ]l I 5^»r^ ^ christian. 7 j^p to involve, to roll up, to pass by. lop a roll, a scroll. \1mD a collision, a shock. t «^an Ethpa., n ^ m nL\ to humbly entreat. •äAo to write, ^^A. the same. loAo a writing, a book. p.Ao flax, linen. "faAo a shoulder. >Ao to remain, to remain behind. U not, no ; 11 J lest, without. |£^ heart. >*^^ \ to arouse, to cheer. ^•Q*^\ dress, a garment. ^Zo^**^\ a decision, reliance. .^in\ to hold, to take hold. V^^ outside, without. iM*S\ to clothe, to cover. ^qL Pa. to accompany, Ethpa. to be accompanied, to be con- firmed. SYRIAC LEXICON. 353 IA^qN^ abuse, insult. ^^.riDoi^ against, towards. LQJ^ to, by, besides, with. |>j^ to blot out. rM^, >Oi.»\n only, alone. ]V)»»\ bread. IJA, 111!^, lllS night, pi. ^oN ■ \ &c. Ao^ it is not. |J_^ an insane person. ^Üi^over, up ; ^ii) ^\l^ before, besides. ifns \ to eat. ]jQOn\ opponent. ■ «N, |1^\ tongue, language.. liO that, what; J ]lD when, IjSjD]^ word, discourse, a part of speech. P]Sd a handle, a covering.. flO*^V> spring, fountaihv (Aa;nV) a blessing, a benedic- tion. U-^, ]AL..So scroll, volume, roll. ^^y^ freely. «■..V), ]*Q. Jk) a wise man, jd,. 854 8YRIAC fM>,0,V) an altar. IP y ;0^ a desert. |ZQj;^,iO redemption. IPX • ;-i^ a cloister, a chamber, ^>, V) thus, thence, therefore. ^LipSo, ]Al a,Sr) a town, a city. ^rSo something, y)rSo p nothing. tA*j>3rSQ eastern, (mJ^Lo the East. |S9rSD a song, a hymn. flV)»OlSo beliering, with 1;^;^ orthodox. |;^aiSo prompt, ready. fAsoioi a gift. •IDQId, Pa. >n>V) to deride. |9Qk) myrrh. floOii death. > ■ » ■» V ) to strike, to prick, to bite. (ZqakLo a blow, plague, pi. |J*.»», V d weak, humble. ;»i>. So on the morrow. ]j Oa» » So a tempest, pi. waves. 14^ to go, to come, to arrive, 3 /. Fret. Z^» ^infe^ from, of, over, on account of; > ^\^ while. LEXICON. \\ iSftV) a heretic, a seducer. Aaf iiif^V) secretly. (■ V) water. AjbSo to die, Aph, to cause to die, to mortify. , 7, 7 jAjlSo distinguished, excellent. pOOOSo humility, modesty. P i nV» affable, modest. ^**SV> now, immediately. |LOO>nV) lowliness, intelli- gence. 7 7 «^«*^V>, ^»io to be depressed. M— So to be full, P Sd to advise, to consult, to reign. Y^, ]n \V> a king. lZon\V> a kingdom. vA V) to speak, to converse. X^^ Abs. word. |Alk> ^wj?Ä., word;)/. USD. t l ' ^ N V n a teacher, a learned man. «jP« *> P • 7 jlQ l'^NV) learning. Jj^SüSo speech. SYRIAC LEXICON. 355 ^io who ? y ^ V> that, which, OlSf) who is this ? 7 ^LD certainly (f^sv); it often is superfluous. ^Sd of, from, on account of, since ; ZqL ^ from, of; ^--i ^ P 7 t-JI^ — d] afterwards, hereafter, 7 •* with sufif. ^iSo of us. ]s}2d what ? fu> ilSo a faithful servant. (ZplO a candlestick. ]AxSd a part. «p. *> P 7 |LQj;n>fnV) patience.. Vinmsh poor. "l'/ujOSülsb f. baptism. V;i-So, l2;S .V) a hollow, a cavern. (-J n« *^ V) an interpreter, an explainer. ) ^, *)-» ^ possible. ] J^ to be able, Ethpe. the same, to have power to do (with »iD by, through). IZoAAiD^ splendor, light. V^^^ in the midst. VAl l!iD midst. V^, V;^, U'^ Lord, Sir, ^'^ literally my Lord (title for bishop or any other ecclesias- r^u-^aVD. y V tical person), (fiD our Lord, (i. e. Christ) ; ^I'fh title for ecclesiastical ladies. »p. I P 7 (AaI-iPjö a pearl, a precious stone. >;.JLd to fall off, to cast away, to make free. |Zoj;Sd a falling off, an injury. » P P 7 |»i;V) bold, impudent, -4c?r. ]I^a4;io a garment. ^P X 7 \\^'^ bitter, sorrowful. jAoo^Si) a chariot, a throne. *P 00 7 (^;Lo that which relates to Christ. \L i \;V) a flock, an assembly, a community. ()rjdD a messenger. * 7 «»aV> to anoint. ('^N»»aV) changable, variegated. - p X I» iaV) the Anointed, the Mes- siah. ^P 7 (OlklBSo known, distinguished. iNv^aV) complete, perfect. * P 7 (TaNTV) a deacon, a minister. IZqiaSQjiSd the ofi&ce of a dea- con. ,? 7 ^^Ak) a person sick of the palsy. IAji^aIo a position, a bed. 356 l2aimjua^Ai f. obedience, wmASd to extend. Ij^ALd time, a period. ]iV).>>A1d an interpreter. lAfcl ,n> »iZASo necessity. ^ZjZAsi a catechumen. J« Tar>1 m. a prophet, Matt. i. 22. (ilOi*^l f. prophecy. LO'rM.^ drawing out, patience, suffering. r^OlJ shining, bright. J 013 to shine, Aph. to light, Ethpa. to be bright. |>01J a river. pOIOI m. light, from >01J to shine. «^QJ, «ojJ to repose, to be ap- peased, Aph. to lay aside, to put away. •X « P 7 «jaQJ, paQJ rest. P -X ^ff p «x »apQuJ, [^pa^ a stranger, VAapOJ f. also Muter. 2>0Qj, yij to sleep. ^i^QJ distribution, expending. V>aa fire. SYRIAC LEXICON. I^O^jiP abstemiousness. IJjjJ a valley. AjjJ to go down, to descend, Aph. to lay down, to take down, to bring, to deliver. |AmJ m. a garment, pi. -^AmJ, |Amj* * 7 •a^J to drop. 7 'r^ to take care of, to watch. (ZQmulJ f. lenity, meekness. f>r>> 1 Nic8ea (a proper name). ;jj, I'fjLJ a yoke, a bow. ^^im guilt, injury, crime. 7 «£QQJ to augment, to honor, to sacrifice, to slay. «V 7 >fD0V)1 law. 7 «nmi to take, to receive. »0 -x * pOirni temptation. 7 • * »^nu to pour, jE^Ape. »nmiZ% 7 *nmi to ascend. {i^aj refreshment. ^^iü to fall. «Ä2Ü to go out, ^^Ä. to take out, X 7 »Oi*^ 1 spread. (jlZü the soul, reflexive, self. (^ to fight, to attack. 7 «A ^ to plant. IjLm ^ a victory, an exploit, BYRIAC LEXICON. 357 jlSH. J Nesibis in Mesopo- tamia (a proper name). \»*^ ^ victorious, superior, clear. Xi^J Ethpa. to be avenged . ><^ni to adhere, to follow. r ;QJ to dig, to dig out. ]mJ (pi. ]ltS\) a woman. IjAj a downfall, a curse. P^dIo) silver, money. fZjflD a bushel. l^fO an old man, w4fff> to pull down, Fa. to destroy, Ethpa. to be dispersed. ^l^CD Satan (a proper name). 1;4^ a side, a page. ;n»ff) to bear, to endure, to tolerate. XLiXO the laying on (of hands). (ASitX) an assembly. f'^iro a sword (|«/. l'Zoär» the mouth, the lips. >»>;ffl Pö^. to dishonor, to violate. IP %z J tl a feast, a feast-day. 7 pOl to do, to perform, to yield, to make something (with a double Accusative). »9 7 X.. y Ir^ll m. servant, pi. ^^1,0%, JrCll Mat. xiii. 2t. .P .x' P |>on\ creator. 7 ;.^1 to pass by, to pass over; with *0, to pass around. ^l-riil Hebre\r, Ad. Hebra- ically. ^^, ^^2^ shortly. U^, l^^^^!i^ a young cow. yi until, ^^ulOjI]] not yet; ^Lo^i until, > pOA until that; *iA, PA time. , 7 jfL Pa. to support, to aid. \LfL church. ^Ql to act unjustly. ^Ql, ]jQl unjust, sinful. \ I P 7 ' pal wicked, ungodly. SYRIAC L jjSOQl a habitation, an abode. P^Ql death. PiJQ^ an answer, an alternative song. »oai, «.Ol Ethjpe. to be troubled. 1 202^901 uncircumcision. >Q1 or Jl to watch. ]^ to blot. 10 r-kl custom. ^jlI, p-fe^ eye. 7 7 }jkl to arouse, Ajph. to stir up. f;.kJL a guardian angel. vi over, to, against, on account of; J ^\l because. I^q^qn^ avarice. Jji., lA^ cause. \t^^ an altar, Acts xvii. 23. ml, ^^ to go, with «i^ to go into, with ^ijL to carry on pro- hibited intercourse with any one, Ethjpe. to go into, Ajph. to lead, to lead into. NoNs , Emph. |V)Ns world, race, generation. y ^Ql with, above. ^CLl, tül a nation, pi. ^^iV^V)\ 7 - rSOL to suffer one's self to be dipped, to suffer one's-self to be baptized. EXICON. 859 1,101 dipping, baptism. IjQißl a pillar. >0V)S an inhabitant. |jS£21 trouble, labor. •fiiil to dwell. Ill to hear, to answer, Ethpe. to converse. fZoaail piety. fr-kll one who is dead. pjJ^ a cloud. ^^■,rn\ twenty. ^211 Pfl. to inter. (l 1 ■ S aversion, opposition. ■^ 7 «*^ns Prtß/, to inquire. |;oi a root. 7 %£3;i to flee. ^Al to avail, to prevail. fjktlk prepared. Fart (put for the future). ]i:u'Zi ancient, old, f. l'AaJ\i, ^^Al, I^Alrich. 1j|2) fruit, _p/. l>]a» 7 ^^ to meet, to happen to (with l^, l^a body. 860 SYRIAC LEXICON. «^Q2)< i^oa, i^A^) to blow, to sound. «IPq\o^ Paul (a proper name). ^1m^Q£> work. VOq£), Ildq^) mouth. PjiDOa a command. JQ2) Ethjpe. to be unwilling. JflCLi )Q2) a tower {itd^yog). ]ll>Q2 a reward, a recompense. ^ P , -x |1£)>Q2) redemption, salvation. pji)Q£) separation. ^MQSi, *M£i to remain, to come to any one. (asQ2) doubt. • P P -x \Ci%QSi an explanation. ,^>N|i*^ a phial. «P -X %0 T ^QQC0O\,\*^ to work, to serve. yisi to return, Pa-, to answer, Aph. to lead back, to make known ; Ethpe. to turn one's-self. 1> 7 f I 7 7 ]imfcl<=^ an apparition, aq en- chantment. 1Aa12) a limit, an end. 7 %£3ClfiQ2), *£Q2) to free, 4P^- ^ permit, «p -ft - -«..I» ^CQ2) a lot, a portion, j)Z. |m^» |Zq\s<=^ a work, labor. »P 17 I ^, Pö^. «^ ^ to free, to deliver. 7 r02) to command. p «. »po «» ^rOQ2), PrDQ2) precept, com- mand. |ASü2) a camp, a valley. »P 7 7 tlXLi);£) paradise. ^P -X P (iD0;5) a redeemer, a deliverer. *P P -x p f^OO^a salutiferous, saving. •»> p kflOja Persia. «p p p |>CD;'=^ a Persian. 7 ^^ to recompense, jK^ÄpÄ. to be rewarded. »P «^ 7 (£>0 fiSi face, presence. *o;2i to preserve, to deliver. 7 • *» JQ to separate, to divide, Ethpe. to be divided, to appoint. L'fSi to break. *4*^ to extend, to spread. l4-^A2> just, right. ■n 7 J2MSi to interpret. ^ Aa* SYRIAC LEXICON. 361 )Sa.t As) a word, a matter. |Aa, I^Aa wide. «AiAa to open. f^A2) ;?/. m. idols, images. IpAa an idol, an image of a false god. 11^ to be filthy. fl^ vile, filthy. ti • to be willing, to wish. ]2ao. will, -^Q-^t, ]a2ü, ^^ V) of one's-self, freely. ^AÄ f willing, ready. ^1*^» will. »OP -ft fl >0 • will, purpose. I OL. to thirst. y)0 . , y>^ to fast. |k)0 • days of fasting, fast days. \Ljo . a figure, a pretence. y • to incline. Pa. to pray, with ^ib— ^ to pray for any one, to bless. ■tor |]», U^* inclined. »£^ • Ethpe. to be crucified. yio^ 9 a prayer, an entreaty. ]*SiSi» a cross. ]>rt\ • a figure, an image. 10 7 \Si • early tune, dawn. |5» Ethpe. to be separated, to burst. ^i.£iD Pa. to receive ; ^^TiO Afiol to happen, to come to pass. 7 \dO to bury. |;^0, pono a sepulchre. ^Q^rO ^iD from the beginning. ;>0^^O for, to, > !>0^^ ^^ ere, before. ^AiOrO, llLOr^ the first. M^rO holy. |QJD to remain, to stop. IJIDQO a reception, an entertain- ment. pi>QD holiness. ^QO, ^OD to stand up, to stand, Aph. to erect, to set up, to conclude, to appoint, to de- termine; with ^^ '\^\0 pre- ceding, to make war with any one. .CL»v6^ClD a church-yard, bury- ing-ground. 362 SYKIAC ]jaJQD a servant of the church, sexton. .ftftni >^i^fr>nr> Constantine (a proper name). VijQjD a town, a city. l^jlk'ClO a Cyrenean (a proper name).. VA#QD truth. |Jq4ö m. a murderer, a robber. , »^«^ cunmng, mgemous. |J4d slaughter, murder. ]<^'''o a league, ]Sr) ■ .n &UD consecrated virgins. ^ASHäjD resurrection. lAj-k-D a song. ]f^><^ a tree, bark, a book. ]jAa-0 Cithara, harp. XjOjL^ a player on the cithara. ^^LD, ]]-0 a voice. ^■So little. >ODO;iSo the clergy. VA^ a bride. |jLO to acquh-e ; Aph. to grant, to bring. \aJjD a pen, a reed. po;4^£) a centurion. U*,£Q£) Csesarea (a proper name). ]lo to call, to cry. LEXICON. \^^0j\2^ Cappadocia (a prop- er name). lifflO cassia. 1;^ to name, to call, to choose. * *^\ O to approach, to draw near. Fa. to conduct, to bring; ^ ft •• Tt }M^y to sacrifice. Jq;jD war «£DqL^O;£) a crystal. I 7 >*^i;o near. |1 i;o reading. lA^;iD a field, a country. *P 7 p;0 a horn. }tsiO'rD calvary. sP 17 (ao-aO a priest, an elder. *0> much, great, loud, chief; 2) eite&cher,Empkat.'U^y Abs. Tl.. 7 r««7 pi. \^y Const, pi. ^jjOj* ]Ciy to grow. Fa. to bring up, to educate. OlO> a myriad, pi. ^QS9« I Zoo J greatness, a multitude. 7 vyw,y5, %o,J to wish very much, to desire, Ethpa. the same. 7 , Vy.j to be angry. V'^ ^^ J foot. ^Q,» J to stone. y, *Ä^> to mark, to feel, Apk. the same, with **D to perceive, to remark. |A..> a wish, a desire. f?J to go, to chastise ; with and without ]V^ In to ship \2iOyj a persecutor. ^l> -x M^Ojj persecution. *QCJI> to hasten, to tremble.jE'^^ to be afraid, to be terrified. I P -X 7 A^PDOCTlj Roman, Adv. romai- callj, Latin. ^cn> to run, to hasten. fUi O) anger, misfortune. •X, •-^»0> m. spirit. 0> f. wind, breath, spirit. ^p op -x, f > 1 .»jO> spiritual. ^P o -x , (£Ui09 bowel love, bowels of mercies. io>*0> distance ^QjaOi ^ from a distance. iO0> yl_pÄ. 5^3L-a>1 to raise up, to elevate. UliDOJ a gift. pülOj a quarrel. »P -x, PJ30> a clothj a rag. SYRIAC LEXICON. ggg M^JO> a prince, a person of rank. Uq»0> a sign. ^ ».>j> beloved. ^Q— ^»5 to love, Ethpa. with \^— ^ to feel compassion. (SOmj ^/. compassion, benevo- lence, love. P -n |A!ku»5 love. *a^5 to lie, to float. »Q^> to be far distant. U*-»> smell. ■J' • iJ-iJ spittle. M^-»> the first named. ]A^), A^> firstling, bedn- nmg, ^/. (ZUm^j* *P p X pOirUL» the high priest. tiA->J a person of rank. *^i2j to ride. ^J Ethpa. to feel inclined, to be moved. ^';..7^' f. /^^ high, loud, p/. fcoj James iv. 6. fcibi to lie, to be placed, Aph, t^. cast, to send; with -*^Vn to admmister; with lii£ü to lose life. 564 SYRIAC LEXICON. "to J Part. P. thrown down, given up. Vi^'j hills, Luke xxiii. 30. |ZomiV)> patience, long suffer- ing. (aL09 evening. «fflrt» to sprinkle. (1> Pö^. «jlIj to obtain again, Ethfa. to be reconciled. ^^PiOQlj mournful, deeply moved. ^juLj a herdsman. ^0^9, ^la^9 sense, mind. ^ai> J^i^Ä^e. to be angry. U^li thunder. -A 7 rOj to dance, to mourn, to lament. |1juS9 sinful, a transgressor. 7 , ^a»> to make a sign. 2, J to be inflamed, to rejoice. jQj^y» Sapores (apropername). Ijl* an evil spirit. ^l» to entreat, Pa;, to ask; with ^\l to ask after some one. |A!L», IZU-» entreaty. « ■« 7 X}», ^-iJ to reconcile, to calm. ,J>j -X 9 |Z.n*^n» nearness. seven, ^^iSn» 7 7 >K»*^» to praise. |i*l» captivity, destruction. I»» iHo praise- worthy. (Aiiin» a vine. ]4^* a sceptre. \y.£iÄ to guide, to lead. 7 «0 7 seventy. 7 lOns to leave, to give up, to permit, to let go. lA^Ä a week. lixAQ-thA an uproar. Mfcjfc,w* restless, uneasy. ;.^ to kindle. *■.!• Ethjpe. to be moved, to be indignant. \fM to throw, to precipitate. 5p» Pa. to send, Eth-pa. >>A»| is sent. , 7 501Ä to awake. IP OS to. be worthy, JSM^^ß. to be considered as worthy. ^ -n «P 7 *P •• 7 (OS, [aQm equal, j^/. MQS« I J 01^ a» renown. liloa» praise, renown, glory. .Q«. to wash. «^IQs to free, to tear away. SYRIAC LEXICON. i^OM dishonor, shame. H > »*Q* change, exchange. fV).lQj consummation, end. ^Qä, ^ to despise. P4^Q* power, authority, right. ^P -x •/ o too» way, street. IjQ» a wall. P -x M)QA beginning. PP -x (9)09 confirmation. pJlO» gam, advantage. P -X £> *^ ]>q4» awkward, stupid. . ^ P X 14*^ despised, small, inferior, p ..I **j^i*p/. f. ^-ja^a* present, Aph. 7 r, ^*A^i*1 to be able, to find. ***^ to send, to put away. H*; «* ^» to cease, to rest. *— • — ^^-*, f » > .• rest, ^ lAi, ^iai^o sudden. I »» » ^» an apostle. 4^ J'a. 41a to be able, to be powerful. 5>a-^ to approach fulfillment, Fa. to fulfill, to complete; with ^ to salute, Apk. to deliver ud- ^ P -x, ^' ^— i^05 to give up the ghost, to die. I 7 365 liß^ ;>/. m. ISüÜ peace. 5»Q*, "ISß* a name. ^p ». poSo» Samona (a proper name^.. ^QSü* Simon (a proper name). mV)9 heaven. t^ «iS Qs Samosata (a proper name). ** ^^* to finish, to complete. ^iS^i» to hear. ^QlSo» Simeon, Simon (a proper name). -». 7 •Aifi* to serve. l*iüi the sun. fi» Fa. to go away, ffi ^Vr>\ qj Ol^ 2q1 to die. fl*, M* insane, foolish. llM, XAli year. ■j" " f rlA torment, pain, torture. ^, |1* tooth. ft »I» sharp. fl* £%^. *aAA*1 to relate. Ul*, lAli an hour; ]i\lio 01— Q forthwith. mA« jest, play. X 7 ;-iÄ» beautiful, good, /em. ;?/ |Z ,i*^9 also the neuter, good- ness. 386 SYRIAO l.Exrrox. ^\o» to hear, to take ; Aph. with ^Ld to go away. |;a an inhabitaur. Jj« to dwell; with ^^ to besiege, Fa. to begin. ■J^'r», [^'r* generation, bio- graphy. ih\r^ a light, wax light, a candle. |£u— .•,—.%;-* a spectre, an ap- parition. \D'fM the remainder, the rest. S;j|, ;a Ethjpa. to be convinced. Vr^'rM true, J.6?i;. A-^|^*r« truly, really. f>^ truth. NZ to make a scholar, Ethpa. to be learned, to be a scholar. f, iV^NZ a scholar. ASZ,/.1ZÖLZf7j. three. GlSsOZ to wonder, to be astonished. IOUIdZ wonderful, remarkable. y)*V>Z, |V)>V>Z honest, genume. ]iioZ/. eight. ^ioZ there, in that place. pZ to repeat, Pa. to narrate. LEXICON. 3eij I2L1.0Z great, strong. ^Q^jZ to explain, to interpret. ^^ JZ, ^^LjI two ; ^>Zi the second. l^jZ right, true, faithful. ]Ljl a door, a gate. (Aj^jZ mind, opinion. f Zu»Qn»Z a liymn,a song of praise IAaSOsZ service, attendance. ^^If. ]LMlm. nine. ■IäZ to narrate, from ]lA« |AaA»Z a narration. ^•*^ OP THE IV- a^ üt^ THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE STAMPED BELOW AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY WILL INCREASE TO 50 CENTS ON THE FOURTH DAY AND TO $1.00 ON THE SEVENTH DAY OVERDUE. sn r-i> \9A , \ RKa^m Ml '69 -8 AM Recei'.'eö in IninrliHrary \jm Äf'^9./'1984 WS SEP4-'66-5PM^rtrirc.APR2 5 1984 L OAN DEPT . OCT g3l%S72 T^ A ^ mHf m^ \S^ c^ WOV Tl 1 983 LD 21-100m-7,'40 (69368) ^^^^?^^\r>>f^'v>« t^-^ s-^ •• UNIVERSITY OF^CAWFORNIA LIBRARY